This is a modern-English version of The Mide'wiwin or "Grand Medicine Society" of the Ojibwa: Seventh Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, 1885-1886, Government Printing Office, Washington, 1891, pages 143-300, originally written by Hoffman, Walter James.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
This e-text contains a few letters with unusual diacritics:
ā ē ī ō ū (vowel with macron or
“long” mark)
ă ĕ ĭ ŏ ŭ (vowel with breve or
“short” mark)
If any of these characters do not display properly—in particular,
if the diacritic does not appear directly above the
letter—or if the quotation marks in this paragraph appear as
garbage, you may have an incompatible browser or unavailable fonts.
First, make sure that the browser’s “character set” or “file encoding”
is set to Unicode (UTF-8). You may also need to change your browser’s
default font. Note that the accent marks, as in “Midē´wiwin,” are
not meant to display on top of any letter.
Some typographical errors have been corrected. They have been
marked in the text with mouse-hover popups. The variation between “Ojibwa” and
“Ojibway” is as in the original.
Technical note on MIDI files.
This e-text contains a few letters with unusual diacritics:
ā ē ī ō ū (vowel with macron or
“long” mark)
ă ĕ ĭ ŏ ŭ (vowel with breve or
“short” mark)
If any of these characters do not display properly—in particular,
if the diacritic does not appear directly above the
letter—or if the quotation marks in this paragraph appear as
garbage, you may have an incompatible browser or unavailable fonts.
First, make sure that the browser’s “character set” or “file encoding”
is set to Unicode (UTF-8). You may also need to change your browser’s
default font. Note that the accent marks, as in “Midē´wiwin,” are
not meant to display on top of any letter.
Some typographical errors have been corrected. They have been
marked in the text with mouse-hover popups. The variation between “Ojibwa” and
“Ojibway” is as in the original.
Technical note on MIDI files.
THE MIDĒ´WIWIN OR “GRAND MEDICINE SOCIETY”
OF
THE OJIBWA.
BY
W. J. HOFFMAN.
CONTENTS.
ILLUSTRATIONS.
Illustrations have been placed as close as practicable to their
discussion in the text. Multi-part Plates have been divided. The printed
page numbers show the original location of the illustrations.
Plates and Figures were numbered continuously within each Bureau of
Ethnology volume, so there is no Plate I in this article.
Illustrations have been positioned as close as possible to their discussion in the text. Multi-part Plates have been separated. The printed page numbers indicate the original placement of the illustrations.
Plates and Figures were numbered continuously within each Bureau of Ethnology volume, so there is no Plate I in this article.
Page. | ||
Plate II. | Map showing present distribution of Ojibwa Map showing current distribution of Ojibwa |
150 |
III. | Red Lake and Leech Lake records Red Lake and Leech Lake records |
166 |
IV. | Sikas´sige’s record | 170 |
V. | Origin of Âníshinâ´bēg | 172 |
VI. | Facial decoration | 174 |
VII. | Facial decoration | 178 |
VIII. | Ojibwa’s record | 182 |
IX. | 193 | |
X. | 202 | |
XI. | Sacred objects | 220 |
XII. | Invitation sticks | 236 |
XIII. | 238 | |
XIV. | 288 | |
XV. | Sacred posts | 240 |
XVI. | 244 | |
XVII. | 266 | |
XVIII. | Jĕs´sakkīd´ removing disease | 278 |
XIX. | Birch-bark records | 286 |
XX. | Sacred bark scroll and contents Sacred bark scroll and materials |
288 |
XXI. | Midē´ relics from Leech Lake | 390 |
XXII. | 392 | |
XXIII. | Midē´ dancing garters | 298 |
Fig. 1. | Herbalist preparing medicine and treating patient Herbalist making medicine and treating patients |
159 |
2. | Sikas´sigĕ’s combined charts, showing descent of Mī´nabō´zho Sikas'sigĕ's combined charts, showing the lineage of Mī'nabō'zho |
174 |
3. | Origin of ginseng | 175 |
4. | Peep-hole post | 178 |
5. | Migration of Âníshinâ´bēg | 179 |
6. | Birch-bark record, from White Earth Birch bark record, from White Earth |
185 |
7. | Birch-bark record, from Bed Lake Birch bark record from Bed Lake |
186 |
8. | Birch-bark record, from Red Lake Birchbark record from Red Lake |
186 |
9. | Eshgibō´ga | 187 |
10. | Diagram of Midē´wigân of the first degree Diagram of Midē'wigân of the first degree |
188 |
11. | Interior of Midē´wigân | 188 |
12. | Ojibwa drums | 190 |
13. | Midē´ rattle | 191 |
14. | Midē´ rattle | 191 |
15. | Shooting the Mīgis | 192 |
16. | Wooden beads | 205 |
17. | Wooden effigy | 205 |
18. | Wooden effigy | 205 |
19. | Hawk-leg fetish | 220 |
20. | Hunter’s medicine | 222 |
21. | Hunter’s medicine | 222 |
22. | 148 Wâbĕnō´ drum | 223 |
23. | Diagram of Midē´wigân of the second degree Diagram of Midē'wigān of the second degree |
224 |
24. | Midē´ destroying an enemy | 238 |
25. | Diagram of Midē´wigân of the third degree Diagram of Midē'wigân of the third degree |
240 |
26. | Jĕs´sakkân´, or juggler’s lodge Juggler's lodge |
252 |
27. | Jĕs´sakkân´, or juggler’s lodge Juggler’s lodge |
252 |
28. | Jĕs´sakkân´, or juggler’s lodge Juggler's lodge |
252 |
29. | Jĕs´sakkân´, or juggler’s lodge Juggler's lodge |
252 |
30. | Jĕs´sakkân´, or juggler’s lodge Juggler’s lodge |
252 |
31. | Jĕs´sakkīd´ curing woman | 255 |
32. | Jĕs´sakkīd´ curing man | 255 |
33. | Diagram of Midē´wigân of the fourth degree Diagram of Midē'wigân of the fourth degree |
255 |
34. | General view of Midē´wigân | 256 |
35. | Indian diagram of ghost lodge | 279 |
36. | Leech Lake Midē´ song | 295 |
37. | Leech Lake Midē´ song | 296 |
38. | Leech Lake Midē´ song | 297 |
39. | Leech Lake Midē´ song | 297 |
![]() |
Plate II. Plate II. I Red Lake. II White Earth. III Winnibigoshish. IV Cass Lake. V Leech Lake. VI Deer Creek. VII Bois Forte. VIII Vermillion Lake. IX Fond du Lac. X Mille Lacs. XI Lac Court Oreílle. XII La Pointe. XIII Lac de Flanibeau. XIV Red Cliff. XV Grand Portage. I Red Lake. II White Earth. III Winnibigoshish. IV Cass Lake. V Leech Lake. VI Deer Creek. VII Bois Forte. VIII Vermillion Lake. IX Fond du Lac. X Mille Lacs. XI Lac Court Oreílle. XII La Pointe. XIII Lac de Flanibeau. XIV Red Cliff. XV Grand Portage. |
THE MIDĒ´WIWIN OR “GRAND MEDICINE
SOCIETY”
OF THE OJIBWAY.
By W. J. Hoffman.
INTRODUCTION.
The Ojibwa is one of the largest tribes of the United States, and it is scattered over a considerable area, from the Province of Ontario, on the east, to the Red River of the North, on the west, and from Manitoba southward through the States of Minnesota, Wisconsin, and Michigan. This tribe is, strictly speaking, a timber people, and in its westward migration or dispersion has never passed beyond the limit of the timber growth which so remarkably divides the State of Minnesota into two parts possessing distinct physical features. The western portion of this State is a gently undulating prairie which sweeps away to the Rocky Mountains, while the eastern portion is heavily timbered. The dividing line, at or near the meridian of 95° 50' west longitude, extends due north and south, and at a point about 75 miles south of the northern boundary the timber line trends toward the northwest, crossing the State line, 49° north latitude, at about 97° 10' west longitude.
The Ojibwa is one of the largest tribes in the United States, spread out over a wide area, from Ontario in the east to the Red River of the North in the west, and from Manitoba down through Minnesota, Wisconsin, and Michigan. This tribe is primarily associated with forested regions, and during its westward movement, it never went beyond the timberlands that distinctly split Minnesota into two regions with different physical characteristics. The western part of the state features gently rolling prairies that extend towards the Rocky Mountains, while the eastern part is densely forested. The dividing line, around the meridian of 95° 50' west longitude, runs directly north and south, and about 75 miles south of the northern border, the timber line curves northwest, crossing the state line at 49° north latitude, around 97° 10' west longitude.
Minnesota contains many thousand lakes of various sizes, some of which are connected by fine water courses, while others are entirely isolated. The wooded country is undulating, the elevated portions being covered chiefly with pine, fir, spruce, and other coniferous trees, and the lowest depressions being occupied by lakes, ponds, or marshes, around which occur the tamarack, willow, and other trees which thrive in moist ground, while the regions between these extremes are covered with oak, poplar, ash, birch, maple, and many other varieties of trees and shrubs.
Minnesota has thousands of lakes of different sizes, some connected by beautiful waterways, while others are completely isolated. The land is hilly, with the higher areas mostly covered in pine, fir, spruce, and other coniferous trees, while the lower areas are filled with lakes, ponds, or marshes, surrounded by tamarack, willow, and other trees that thrive in wet soil. The areas between these extremes are populated with oak, poplar, ash, birch, maple, and many other types of trees and shrubs.
Wild fowl, game, and fish are still abundant, and until recently have furnished to the Indians the chief source of subsistence.
Wild birds, game, and fish are still plentiful, and until recently have provided the main source of food for the Native Americans.
Tribal organization according to the totemic system is practically broken up, as the Indians are generally located upon or near the several reservations set apart for them by the General Government, where they have been under more or less restraint by the United States Indian agents and the missionaries. Representatives of various totems or gentes may therefore be found upon a single reservation, 150 where they continue to adhere to traditional customs and beliefs, thus presenting an interesting field for ethnologic research.
Tribal organization based on the totemic system is almost nonexistent now, as Indigenous people are mostly settled on or near the reservations designated for them by the federal government. There, they have been subject to varying degrees of oversight from U.S. Indian agents and missionaries. As a result, representatives of different totems or clans can be found on the same reservation, 150 where they still follow traditional customs and beliefs, creating an intriguing area for ethnological research.
The present distribution of the Ojibwa in Minnesota and Wisconsin is indicated upon the accompanying map, Pl. II. In the southern portion many of these people have adopted civilized pursuits, but throughout the northern and northwestern part many bands continue to adhere to their primitive methods and are commonly designated “wild Indians.” The habitations of many of the latter are rude and primitive. The bands on the northeast shore of Red Lake, as well as a few others farther east, have occupied these isolated sites for an uninterrupted period of about three centuries, as is affirmed by the chief men of the several villages and corroborated by other traditional evidence.
The current distribution of the Ojibwa in Minnesota and Wisconsin is shown on the accompanying map, Pl. II. In the southern part, many of these people have taken on modern jobs, but in the northern and northwestern regions, many groups still stick to their traditional ways and are often referred to as “wild Indians.” The homes of many of these groups are basic and primitive. The bands on the northeast shore of Red Lake, as well as a few others further east, have lived in these isolated areas for an uninterrupted period of about three centuries, as confirmed by the leaders of the various villages and supported by other traditional evidence.
Father Claude Alloüez, upon his arrival in 1666 at Shagawaumikong, or La Pointe, found the Ojibwa preparing to attack the Sioux. The settlement at this point was an extensive one, and in traditions pertaining to the “Grand Medicine Society” frequent allusion is made to the fact that at this place the rites were practiced in their greatest purity.
Father Claude Alloüez, when he arrived in 1666 at Shagawaumikong, or La Pointe, found the Ojibwa getting ready to attack the Sioux. The settlement here was quite large, and in traditions related to the “Grand Medicine Society,” there are frequent mentions that the rites were performed here in their most authentic form.
Mr. Warren, in his History of the Ojibwa Indians,1 bases his belief upon traditional evidence that the Ojibwa first had knowledge of the whites in 1612. Early in the seventeenth century the French missionaries met with various tribes of the Algonkian linguistic stock, as well as with bands or subtribes of the Ojibwa Indians. One of the latter, inhabiting the vicinity of Sault Ste. Marie, is frequently mentioned in the Jesuit Relations as the Saulteurs. This term was applied to all those people who lived at the Falls, but from other statements it is clear that the Ojibwa formed the most important body in that vicinity. La Hontan speaks of the “Outchepoues, alias Sauteurs,” as good warriors. The name Saulteur survives at this day and is applied to a division of the tribe.
Mr. Warren, in his History of the Ojibwa Indians,1 bases his belief on traditional evidence that the Ojibwa first encountered white people in 1612. Early in the seventeenth century, French missionaries met with various tribes of the Algonkian language group, as well as groups or subtribes of the Ojibwa Indians. One of these groups, living near Sault Ste. Marie, is often mentioned in the Jesuit Relations as the Saulteurs. This term was used for all the people living at the Falls, but from other accounts, it’s clear that the Ojibwa were the largest group in that area. La Hontan refers to the "Outchepoues, alias Sauteurs," as skilled warriors. The name Saulteur still exists today and is used for a division of the tribe.
According to statements made by numerous Ojibwa chiefs of importance the tribe began its westward dispersion from La Pointe and Fond du Lac at least two hundred and fifty years ago, some of the bands penetrating the swampy country of northern Minnesota, while others went westward and southwestward. According to a statement2 of the location of the tribes of Lake Superior, made at Mackinaw in 1736, the Sioux then occupied the southern and northern extremities of that lake. It is possible, however, that the northern bands of the Ojibwa may have penetrated the region adjacent to the Pigeon River and passed west to near their present location, thus avoiding their enemies who occupied the lake shore south of them.
According to reports from several important Ojibwa chiefs, the tribe began moving west from La Pointe and Fond du Lac at least 250 years ago. Some groups moved into the swampy areas of northern Minnesota, while others traveled west and southwest. Based on a report2 about the tribes of Lake Superior, made in Mackinaw in 1736, the Sioux were occupying both the southern and northern ends of that lake at the time. However, it's possible that the northern bands of the Ojibwa managed to move into the area near the Pigeon River and continued west toward their current location, avoiding conflicts with their enemies who were settled along the southern lake shore.
151 From recent investigations among a number of tribes of the Algonkian linguistic division it is found that the traditions and practices pertaining to the Midē´wiwin, Society of the Midē´ or Shamans, popularly designated as the “Grand Medicine Society,” prevailed generally, and the rites are still practiced at irregular intervals, though in slightly different forms in various localities.
151 Recent studies of several tribes within the Algonkian language group show that the traditions and practices related to the Midē´wiwin, Society of the Midē´ or Shamans, commonly known as the “Grand Medicine Society,” are widely prevalent. These rites are still performed at irregular intervals, although they vary slightly in different areas.
In the reports of early travelers and missionaries no special mention is made of the Midē´, the Jes´sakkīd´, or the Wâbĕnō´, but the term sorcerer or juggler is generally employed to designate that class of persons who professed the power of prophecy, and who practiced incantation and administered medicinal preparations. Constant reference is made to the opposition of these personages to the introduction of Christianity. In the light of recent investigation the cause of this antagonism is seen to lie in the fact that the traditions of Indian genesis and cosmogony and the ritual of initiation into the Society of the Midē´ constitute what is to them a religion, even more powerful and impressive than the Christian religion is to the average civilized man. This opposition still exists among the leading classes of a number of the Algonkian tribes, and especially among the Ojibwa, many bands of whom have been more or less isolated and beyond convenient reach of the Church. The purposes of the society are twofold; first, to preserve the traditions just mentioned, and second, to give a certain class of ambitious men and women sufficient influence through their acknowledged power of exorcism and necromancy to lead a comfortable life at the expense of the credulous. The persons admitted into the society are firmly believed to possess the power of communing with various supernatural beings—manidos—and in order that certain desires may be realized they are sought after and consulted. The purpose of the present paper is to give an account of this society and of the ceremony of initiation as studied and observed at White Earth, Minnesota, in 1889. Before proceeding to this, however, it may be of interest to consider a few statements made by early travelers respecting the “sorcerers or jugglers” and the methods of medication.
In the accounts of early travelers and missionaries, there’s no specific mention of the Midē, the Jes’sakkīd, or the Wâbĕnō. Instead, the terms "sorcerer" or "juggler" are often used to refer to those who claimed the ability to prophesy, practiced incantations, and provided medicinal remedies. These individuals were frequently noted for their opposition to the spread of Christianity. Recent investigations suggest that this opposition stems from the fact that the traditions of Native American creation stories, the understanding of the universe, and the initiation rituals associated with the Society of the Midē hold a significance that is even more powerful and compelling to them than Christianity is to the average Western person. This resistance still exists among the prominent members of several Algonkian tribes, particularly the Ojibwa, many of whom have remained somewhat isolated and out of reach of the Church. The society has two main purposes: first, to preserve the aforementioned traditions, and second, to provide certain ambitious men and women with enough influence through their recognized abilities in exorcism and necromancy to enjoy a comfortable life at the expense of the gullible. Those who are accepted into the society are believed to have the ability to communicate with various supernatural beings—manidos—and people seek them out for consultation in hopes of realizing their desires. The aim of this paper is to discuss this society and the initiation ceremony as studied and observed at White Earth, Minnesota, in 1889. However, before diving into this, it may be worthwhile to consider some statements made by early travelers regarding the “sorcerers or jugglers” and their methods of healing.
In referring to the practices of the Algonkian tribes of the Northwest, La Hontan3 says:
In discussing the customs of the Algonkian tribes of the Northwest, La Hontan3 says:
When they're sick, they mainly drink broth and eat very little. If they’re lucky enough to fall asleep, they think they’re cured. They've often told me that sleeping and sweating can heal even the toughest diseases. When they're so weak they can’t get out of bed, their family members come to dance and have fun in front of them to lift their spirits. In summary, when they're unwell, they’re always visited by a type of quacks, (Jongleurs); and I should now add a few words about them.
A Jongleur is a type of Physician, or more accurately, a Quack, who, after being cured of a serious illness, has the arrogance and foolishness to believe they are immortal and capable of curing all ailments by communicating with good and evil spirits. While everyone pokes fun at these individuals when they’re not around and sees them as fools who have lost their minds due to some intense illness, they still let them visit the sick. This may be either to entertain them with their silly stories or to have a chance to witness their antics—raving, jumping around, crying, howling, and making strange faces as if they’re possessed. Once all the commotion is done, they ask for a feast featuring a stag and some large trout for the guests, who enjoy a mix of entertainment and good food.
When the Quack visits the Patient, he examines him very carefully. If the Evil Spirit is here, he says, we’ll quickly get rid of it. After saying this, he goes to a small Tent made specifically for this purpose, where he dances and sings, howling like an Owl; (which gives the Jesuits a reason to claim, That the Devil talks to them.) Once he finishes this Quack nonsense, he comes back and rubs the Patient in a certain part of his Body, then pulls some small Bones out of his Mouth, telling the Patient, That these very Bones came from his Body; that he should stay hopeful because his illness is just a minor issue; and finally, that to speed up the Cure, it would be beneficial to send his and his Relatives' Slaves to hunt Elks, Deer, etc., so that they can all eat that type of Meat, which his Cure completely depends on.
Typically, these quacks offer people some plant extracts that act as laxatives, known as Maskikik.
Hennepin, in “A Continuation of the New Discovery,” etc.,4 speaks of the religion and sorcerers of the tribes of the St. Lawrence and those living about the Great Lakes as follows:
Hennepin, in “A Continuation of the New Discovery,” etc.,4 discusses the beliefs and shamans of the tribes around the St. Lawrence and the Great Lakes in the following way:
We have sadly come to believe that most Indigenous people have no understanding of God and cannot grasp even the simplest arguments about it; some claim to have a spirit that rules in the air. Some of them see the sky as a sort of divinity; others view it as an Otkon or Manitou, whether good or evil.
These people acknowledge a kind of genius in everything; they all believe in a Master of Life, as they call him, but they interpret this in different ways. Some of them carry a thin raven with them at all times, claiming it's the Master of their Life; others have an owl, while some carry a bone, a sea shell, or something similar;
There is no nation among them that doesn't have some type of jugglers or conjurers, which some people consider to be wizards. However, in my opinion, there is not a strong reason to believe they are such or to think that their practices have anything to do with communication with the devil.
These impostors demand to be respected as prophets who can predict the future. They want to be seen as having unlimited power. They brag about their ability to control the weather, whether it be making it wet or dry; causing calm conditions or storms; making land fertile or barren; and, in short, determining whether hunters will be lucky or unlucky. They also claim to practice medicine and administer treatments, but most of what they use has little to no effectiveness, especially for the ailments they claim to treat.
It’s hard to imagine the terrible howls and odd twists that those performers make with their bodies when they’re getting ready to conjure or cast their spells.
Marquette, who visited the Miami, Mascontin and Kickapoo Indians in 1673, after referring to the Indian herbalist, mentions also the ceremony of the “calumet dance,” as follows:
Marquette, who visited the Miami, Mascontin, and Kickapoo tribes in 1673, after mentioning the Indian herbalist, also talks about the ceremony of the “calumet dance,” as follows:
They have doctors among them, and they are very generous towards them when they are ill, believing that the effectiveness of the treatments they receive is related to the gifts they give to those who prescribed them.
153 In connection with this, reference is made by Marquette to a certain class of individuals among the Illinois and Dakota, who were compelled to wear women’s clothes, and who were debarred many privileges, but were permitted to “assist at all the Superstitions of their Juglers, and their solemn Dances in honor of the Calumet, in which they may sing, but it is not lawful for them to dance. They are call’d to their Councils, and nothing is determin’d without their Advice; for, because of their extraordinary way of Living, they are look’d upon as Manitous, or at least for great and incomparable Genius’s.”
153 In this context, Marquette mentions a specific group of people among the Illinois and Dakota who had to wear women’s clothing and were denied many privileges. However, they were allowed to “participate in all the rituals of their Juglers and their formal dances in honor of the Calumet, in which they can sing, but it is not permitted for them to dance. They are invited to their councils, and nothing is decided without their input; due to their unique way of life, they are regarded as Manitous, or at least as exceptionally talented individuals.”
That the calumet was brought into requisition upon all occasions of interest is learned from the following statement, in which the same writer declares that it is “the most mysterious thing in the World. The Sceptres of our Kings are not so much respected; for the Savages have such a Deference for this Pipe, that one may call it The God of Peace and War, and the Arbiter of Life and Death. Their Calumet of Peace is different from the Calumet of War; They make use of the former to seal their Alliances and Treaties, to travel with safety, and receive Strangers; and the other is to proclaim War.”
The calumet was used in all significant occasions, as shown in the following statement, where the same writer claims it is “the most mysterious thing in the world. The scepters of our kings are not as highly regarded; the natives have such respect for this pipe that it can be called The God of Peace and War, and the Arbiter of Life and Death. Their Calumet of Peace is different from the Calumet of War; they use the former to seal their alliances and treaties, to travel safely, and to welcome strangers; the latter is used to declare war.”
This reverence for the calumet is shown by the manner in which it is used at dances, in the ceremony of smoking, etc., indicating a religious devoutness approaching that recently observed among various Algonkian tribes in connection with the ceremonies of the Midē´wiwin. When the calumet dance was held, the Illinois appear to have resorted to the houses in the winter and to the groves in the summer. The above-named authority continues in this connection:
This respect for the calumet is evident in how it’s used during dances, in the smoking ceremony, and so on, showing a level of religious devotion similar to what was recently seen among different Algonkian tribes during the Midē´wiwin ceremonies. When the calumet dance took place, the Illinois seemed to have gone to their homes in the winter and to the groves in the summer. The aforementioned authority goes on to say:
They choose a designated spot among the trees to shield themselves from the sun’s heat, laying down a large mat in the center as a carpet for the God of the leader of the group, who is hosting the ball. Each person has their own unique God, which they call Manitoa. This God can be a stone, a bird, a serpent, or anything else they dream about while sleeping, as they believe this Manitoa will help fulfill their needs like fishing, hunting, and other endeavors. To the right of their Manitoa, they place the Calumet, their Great Deity, and surround it with a kind of trophy made from their weapons: clubs, axes, bows, quivers, and arrows. ***Everyone then sits down in a circle, greeting the Manitoa first by blowing tobacco smoke on it, which is like offering frankincense. ***Once this opening ritual is complete, the person who will start the dance steps into the center of the assembly, takes the Calumet, and offers it to the sun as if inviting it to smoke. He then moves it through countless poses, sometimes placing it close to the ground, then spreading its wings as if trying to make it fly, and finally presenting it to the spectators, who take turns smoking from it while dancing. This is the first scene of this famous ball.
The infinite number of postures assumed in offering the pipe appear as significant as the “smoke ceremonies” mentioned in connection with the preparatory instruction of the candidate previous to his initiation into the Midē´wiwin.
The countless postures taken while presenting the pipe seem just as meaningful as the "smoke ceremonies" referenced during the candidate's preparation before their initiation into the Midē'wiwin.
Regarding their views about the Earth, they refer to a being they call Micaboche, who they believe has covered the entire Earth with water and share countless mythical stories, some of which are similar to the concept of a universal flood. These people think there are Spirits in the air, between Heaven and Earth, that can predict future events, as well as others that act as healers, curing all kinds of ailments. Because of this, these Savages are very superstitious and consult their oracles with great precision. One day, a magician, considered a sorcerer by them, had a hut built with ten thick stakes, which he drove deep into the ground. Then he made a terrible racket to consult the spirits to find out if a lot of snow would fall soon so they could have good hunting for elk and beavers. Afterward, he yelled loudly from inside the hut that he saw many herds of elk, which were still quite far away, but that they were getting closer, about seven or eight leagues from their huts, bringing great joy to those poor deceived souls.
That this statement refers to one or more tribes of the Algonkian linguistic stock is evident, not only because of the reference to the sorcerers and their peculiar methods of procedure, but also that the name of Micaboche, an Algonkian divinity, appears. This Spirit, who acted as an intercessor between Ki´tshi Man´idō (Great Spirit) and the Indians, is known among the Ojibwa as Mi´nabō´zho; but to this full reference will be made further on in connection with the Myth of the origin of the Midē´wiwin. The tradition of Nokomis (the earth) and the birth of Manabush (the Mi´nabō´zho of the Menomoni) and his brother, the Wolf, that pertaining to the re-creation of the world, and fragments of other myths, are thrown together and in a mangled form presented by Hennepin in the following words:
That this statement refers to one or more tribes of the Algonkian language family is clear, not only because it mentions the sorcerers and their unusual methods, but also because it includes the name Micaboche, an Algonkian deity. This Spirit acted as a go-between for Ki´tshi Man´idō (Great Spirit) and the Indigenous people, and is known among the Ojibwa as Mi´nabō´zho; further details about this will be discussed later in relation to the Myth of the origin of the Midē´wiwin. The tradition of Nokomis (the earth) and the birth of Manabush (the Mi´nabō´zho of the Menomoni) along with his brother, the Wolf, along with stories about the re-creation of the world, and bits of other myths, are mixed together and presented in a distorted form by Hennepin in the following words:
Some Salvages living at the upper end of the River St. Lawrence share a pretty entertaining story. They believe similarly to the Iroquois that a woman came down from Heaven and spent some time hovering in the air, unable to find solid ground to stand on. The fishes, feeling sympathetic, quickly held a meeting to decide which of them would take her in. The Tortoise generously offered its back on the surface of the water. The woman settled on it and made it her place. Over time, the filth and dirt from the sea gathered around the Tortoise, gradually forming the vast land we now call America.
They add that this woman grew tired of her loneliness and wanted someone to keep her company so she could spend her time more enjoyably. Overcome by melancholy and sadness, she fell asleep, and a spirit descended from above. Finding her in this state, the spirit approached her unnoticed. From this encounter, she conceived two children, who emerged from one of her ribs. However, these two brothers could never get along. One of them was a better hunter than the other, and they argued every day; their disputes eventually escalated to the point where they couldn’t stand each other. One, in particular, had a very fiery temperament and deeply hated his brother, who was much gentler. Unable to tolerate his brother’s antics any longer, he decided to separate himself from him. He then retreated to Heaven, and as a sign of his righteous anger, he caused thunder to roar over the head of his unfortunate brother at various times.
Some time after the Spirit descended again on that Woman, she became pregnant with a Daughter, from whom (according to the Salvages) these many People were descended, who now inhabit one of the largest parts of the Universe.
It is evident that the narrator has sufficiently distorted the traditions to make them conform, as much as practicable, to the biblical story of the birth of Christ. No reference whatever is made in the Ojibwa or Menomoni myths to the conception of the Daughter of Nokomis (the earth) by a celestial visitant, but the reference is to one of the wind gods. Mi´nabō´zho became angered with the Ki´tshi Man´idō, and the latter, to appease his discontent, gave to Mi´nabō´zho the rite of the Midēwiwin. The brother of Mi´nabō´zho was destroyed by the malevolent underground spirits and now rules the abode of shadows,—the “Land of the Midnight Sun.”
It's clear that the narrator has twisted the traditions enough to align them as closely as possible with the biblical story of Christ's birth. There’s no mention in the Ojibwa or Menomoni myths about the Daughter of Nokomis (the earth) being conceived by a celestial visitor; instead, it refers to one of the wind gods. Mi´nabō´zho got angry with the Ki´tshi Man´idō, and to soothe his anger, the latter granted Mi´nabō´zho the rite of the Midēwiwin. Mi´nabō´zho's brother was killed by the evil underground spirits and now rules the realm of shadows—the “Land of the Midnight Sun.”
Upon his arrival at the “Bay of Puans” (Green Bay, Wisconsin), Marquette found a village inhabited by three nations, viz: “Miamis, Maskoutens, and Kikabeux.” He says:
Upon his arrival at the “Bay of Puans” (Green Bay, Wisconsin), Marquette found a village inhabited by three nations: the Miamis, Maskoutens, and Kikabeux. He says:
When I arrived there, I was very happy to see a large Cross set up in the middle of the Village, decorated with several white skins, red sashes, bows, and arrows that the good people had offered to the Great Manitou to thank him for looking after them during the winter and for granting them a successful hunting season. Manitou is the name they generally give to all the Spirits they believe to be above human nature.
Marquette was without doubt ignorant of the fact that the cross is the sacred post, and the symbol of the fourth degree of the Midē´wiwin, as will be fully explained in connection with that grade of the society. The erroneous conclusion that the cross was erected as an evidence of the adoption of Christianity, and possibly as a compliment to the visitor, was a natural one on the part of the priest, but this same symbol of the Midē´ Society had probably been erected and bedecked with barbaric emblems and weapons months before anything was known of him.
Marquette was definitely unaware that the cross is the sacred post and the symbol of the fourth degree of the Midē´wiwin, which will be explained in detail regarding that level of the society. The mistaken belief that the cross was put up as proof of the acceptance of Christianity, and perhaps as a gesture of respect to the visitor, was a natural assumption for the priest to make. However, this same symbol of the Midē´ Society had likely been put up and decorated with crude symbols and weapons months before anyone knew about him.
The result of personal investigations among the Ojibwa, conducted during the years 1887, 1888 and 1889, are presented in the accompanying paper. The information was obtained from a number of the chief Midē´ priests living at Red Lake and White Earth reservations, as well as from members of the society from other reservations, who visited the last named locality during the three years. Special mention of the peculiarity of the music recorded will be made at the proper place; and it may here be said that in no instance was the use of colors detected, in any birch-bark or other records or mnemonic songs, simply to heighten the artistic effect; though the reader would be led by an examination of the works of Schoolcraft to believe this to be a common practice. Col. Garrick Mallery; U.S. Army, in a paper read before the Anthropological Society of 156 Washington, District of Columbia, in 1888, says, regarding this subject:
The findings from personal research among the Ojibwa, conducted in 1887, 1888, and 1889, are detailed in the attached paper. The data was gathered from several prominent Midē´ priests living at the Red Lake and White Earth reservations, as well as from society members from other reservations who visited White Earth during these three years. A specific discussion about the unique aspects of the music recorded will come later; however, it can be noted here that there was no use of colors found in any birch-bark or other records or mnemonic songs just to enhance artistic value, even though one might conclude from Schoolcraft's work that this was a common practice. Col. Garrick Mallery from the U.S. Army mentioned this topic in a paper presented to the Anthropological Society of 156 Washington, District of Columbia, in 1888.
The overall nature of his extensive publications hasn’t given modern critics confidence in his accuracy, and the impressive detail, as well as understanding, he claimed regarding the Ojibwa hieroglyphs has recently been met with skepticism. The Bureau of Ethnology considered it an important responsibility to determine how much truth there was in these extraordinary accounts. To achieve this, its pictographic experts, including myself and Dr. W. J. Hoffman as an assistant, were instructed last summer to go to the most appropriate locations currently inhabited by the tribe, specifically the northern areas of Minnesota and Wisconsin, to see what more could be uncovered. ***The general findings from comparing Schoolcraft’s claims with what is currently known show that, in essence, he was truthful, but with considerable exaggeration and embellishment. The term “embellishment” is particularly fitting because, in his numerous illustrations, various colors were used liberally with obvious meaning, even though, in reality, the standard practice for birch-bark rolls was that they were never colored; in fact, the bark was not suitable for coloring. His metaphorical embellishments were also applied in a way that seems absurd to anyone with a deep understanding of Indian philosophy and religion. Metaphysical interpretations are linked to some of the designs, or what he refers to as symbols, which could never have been conceived by a culture like that of the Ojibwa at their level of development.
SHAMANS.
There are extant among the Ojibwa Indians three classes of mystery men, termed respectively and in order of importance the Midē´, the Jĕs´sakkīd´, and the Wâbĕnō´, but before proceeding to elaborate in detail the Society of the Midē´, known as the Midē´wiwin, a brief description of the last two is necessary.
There are currently three types of mystery men among the Ojibwa Indians, listed in order of importance as the Midē´, the Jĕs´sakkīd´, and the Wâbĕnō´. However, before diving into a detailed explanation of the Society of the Midē´, known as the Midē´wiwin, it’s important to briefly describe the last two.
The term Wâbĕnō´ has been explained by various intelligent Indians as signifying “Men of the dawn,” “Eastern men,” etc. Their profession is not thoroughly understood, and their number is so extremely limited that but little information respecting them can be obtained. Schoolcraft,5 in referring to the several classes of Shamans, says “there is a third form or rather modification of the medawin, ***the Wâbĕnō´; a term denoting a kind of midnight orgies, which is regarded as a corruption of the Meda.” This writer furthermore remarks6 that “it is stated by judicious persons among themselves to be of modern origin. They regard it as a degraded form of the mysteries of the Meda.”
The term Wâbĕnō´ has been explained by various knowledgeable Indigenous people as meaning “Men of the dawn,” “Eastern men,” and so on. Their role isn't fully understood, and their numbers are so extremely limited that there's only a little information available about them. Schoolcraft,5 in discussing the different types of Shamans, notes that “there is a third type or rather variation of the medawin,Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.the Wâbĕnō´; a term that refers to a type of midnight rituals, which is seen as a corruption of the Meda.” This author also points out6 that “it is said by wise individuals among them to be of modern origin. They view it as a low form of the mysteries of the Meda.”
From personal investigation it has been ascertained that a Wâbĕnō´ does not affiliate with others of his class so as to constitute a society, but indulges his pretensions individually. A Wâbĕnō´ is primarily prompted by dreams or visions which may occur during his youth, for which purpose he leaves his village to fast for an indefinite number of days. It is positively affirmed that evil man´idōs favor his desires, 157 and apart from his general routine of furnishing “hunting medicine,” “love powders,” etc., he pretends also to practice medical magic. When a hunter has been successful through the supposed assistance of the Wâbĕnō´, he supplies the latter with part of the game, when, in giving a feast to his tutelary daimon, the Wâbĕnō´ will invite a number of friends, but all who desire to come are welcome. This feast is given at night; singing and dancing are boisterously indulged in, and the Wâbĕnō´, to sustain his reputation, entertains his visitors with a further exhibition of his skill. By the use of plants he is alleged to be enabled to take up and handle with impunity red-hot stones and burning brands, and without evincing the slightest discomfort it is said that he will bathe his hands in boiling water, or even boiling maple sirup. On account of such performances the general impression prevails among the Indians that the Wâbĕnō´ is a “dealer in fire,” or “fire-handler.” Such exhibitions always terminate at the approach of day. The number of these pretenders who are not members of the Midē´wiwin, is very limited; for instance, there are at present but two or three at White Earth Reservation and none at Leech Lake.
From personal investigation, it has been found that a Wâbĕnō´ doesn’t associate with others of his kind to form a society but rather pursues his ambitions individually. A Wâbĕnō´ is mainly driven by dreams or visions that might occur during his youth, leading him to leave his village to fast for an indefinite number of days. It is strongly believed that evil man´idōs support his desires, 157 and besides his usual activities of providing “hunting medicine,” “love powders,” and so on, he also claims to practice medical magic. When a hunter succeeds with the supposed help of the Wâbĕnō´, he gives part of the game to the latter. During a feast for his guardian spirit, the Wâbĕnō´ will invite several friends, but anyone who wants to attend is welcome. This feast takes place at night, filled with enthusiastic singing and dancing, and to maintain his reputation, the Wâbĕnō´ entertains his guests by showcasing his skills. With the use of certain plants, he is said to be able to pick up and handle hot stones and burning logs without any trouble, and he supposedly can dip his hands in boiling water or even boiling maple syrup without showing any discomfort. Because of these acts, the general belief among the Indians is that the Wâbĕnō´ is a “dealer in fire” or “fire-handler.” These displays always come to an end at dawn. The number of these impersonators who are not part of the Midē´wiwin is very small; for example, there are currently only two or three at White Earth Reservation and none at Leech Lake.
As a general rule, however, the Wâbĕnō´ will seek entrance into the Midē´wiwin when he becomes more of a specialist in the practice of medical magic, incantations, and the exorcism of malevolent man´idōs, especially such as cause disease.
As a general rule, though, the Wâbĕnō will look to enter the Midēwiwin when he becomes more specialized in the practice of medical magic, spells, and driving away harmful manidōs, particularly those that cause illness.
The Jĕs´sakkīd´ is a seer and prophet; though commonly designated a “juggler,” the Indians define him as a “revealer of hidden truths.” There is no association whatever between the members of this profession, and each practices his art singly and alone whenever a demand is made and the fee presented. As there is no association, so there is no initiation by means of which one may become a Jĕs´sakkīd´. The gift is believed to be given by the thunder god, or Animiki´, and then only at long intervals and to a chosen few. The gift is received during youth, when the fast is undertaken and when visions appear to the individual. His renown depends upon his own audacity and the opinion of the tribe. He is said to possess the power to look into futurity; to become acquainted with the affairs and intentions of men; to prognosticate the success or misfortune of hunters and warriors, as well as other affairs of various individuals, and to call from any living human being the soul, or, more strictly speaking, the shadow, thus depriving the victim of reason, and even of life. His power consists in invoking, and causing evil, while that of the Midē´ is to avert it; he attempts at times to injure the Midē´ but the latter, by the aid of his superior man´idos, becomes aware of, and averts such premeditated injury. It sometimes happens that the demon possessing a patient is discovered, but the Midē´ alone has the power to expel him. The exorcism of demons is one of the chief pretensions of this personage, and evil spirits are sometimes removed 158 by sucking them through tubes, and startling tales are told how the Jĕs´sakkīd´ can, in the twinkling of an eye, disengage himself of the most complicated tying of cords and ropes, etc. The lodge used by this class of men consists of four poles planted in the ground, forming a square of three or four feet and upward in diameter, around which are wrapped birch bark, robes, or canvas in such a way as to form an upright cylinder. Communion is held with the turtle, who is the most powerful man´idō of the Jĕs´sakkīd´, and through him, with numerous other malevolent man´idōs, especially the Animiki´, or thunder-bird. When the prophet has seated himself within his lodge the structure begins to sway violently from side to side, loud thumping noises are heard within, denoting the arrival of man´idōs, and numerous voices and laughter are distinctly audible to those without. Questions may then be put to the prophet and, if everything be favorable, the response is not long in coming. In his notice of the Jĕs´sakkīd´, Schoolcraft affirms7 that “while he thus exercises the functions of a prophet, he is also a member of the highest class of the fraternity of the Midâwin—a society of men who exercise the medical art on the principles of magic and incantations.” The fact is that there is not the slightest connection between the practice of the Jĕs´sakkīd´ and that of the Midē´wiwin, and it is seldom, if at all, that a Midē´ becomes a Jĕs´sakkīd´, although the latter sometimes gains admission into the Midē´wiwin, chiefly with the intention of strengthening his power with his tribe.
The Jĕs'sakkīd' is a seer and prophet; although he’s often called a "juggler," the Indigenous people see him as a "revealer of hidden truths." There’s no connection among the members of this profession, and each one practices individually whenever there’s a demand and payment is made. Since there’s no association, there aren’t any initiation rites to become a Jĕs'sakkīd'. The ability is believed to be granted by the thunder god, Animiki', but only after long intervals and to a select few. The gift is received in youth, during a fasting period when visions come to the individual. His reputation is based on his own boldness and the tribe’s perception of him. He’s said to have the power to see into the future, understand people’s affairs and intentions, predict the success or failure of hunters and warriors, and even extract the soul—or more accurately, the shadow—from any living person, thereby stripping the victim of reason or even causing death. His strength lies in invoking and causing harm, while the Midē' has the ability to ward it off; at times, he tries to hurt the Midē', but the latter, with the help of his superior man'idos, becomes aware of and prevents such planned harm. Sometimes, the demon possessing a patient is identified, but only the Midē' can expel him. Exorcising demons is a key claim of this figure, and evil spirits are sometimes expelled through suction methods, with astonishing stories told of how the Jĕs'sakkīd' can untangle the most complex knots and ropes in the blink of an eye. The lodge used by these individuals consists of four poles set in the ground, forming a square of three or four feet or more in diameter, wrapped in birch bark, blankets, or canvas to create a standing cylinder. They communicate with the turtle, the most powerful man'idō of the Jĕs'sakkīd', and through him, with many other malevolent man'idos, especially Animiki', or thunder-bird. Once the prophet is seated in his lodge, the structure starts to sway wildly from side to side, loud banging sounds are heard inside, signaling the arrival of man'idos, and various voices and laughter can be clearly heard by those outside. Questions can then be asked of the prophet, and if conditions are right, the answers come quickly. In his account of the Jĕs'sakkīd', Schoolcraft states that “while he thus exercises the functions of a prophet, he is also a member of the highest class of the fraternity of the Midâwin—a society of men who practice the medical art based on magic and incantations.” In reality, there is no slight connection between the practice of the Jĕs'sakkīd' and that of the Midē'wiwin, and it is rare, if ever, that a Midē' becomes a Jĕs'sakkīd', even though the latter occasionally joins the Midē'wiwin, primarily to enhance his influence within his tribe.
The number of individuals of this class who are not members of the Midē´wiwin is limited, though greater than that of the Wâbĕnō´. An idea of the proportion of numbers of the respective classes may be formed by taking the case of Menomoni Indians, who are in this respect upon the same plane as the Ojibwa. That tribe numbers about fifteen hundred, the Midē´ Society consisting, in round numbers, of one hundred members, and among the entire population there are but two Wâbĕnō´ and five Jĕs´sakkīd´.
The number of people in this class who aren't part of the Midēwiwin is small, but it's more than the Wābēnō. You can get an idea of the ratio of these classes by looking at the Menomoni Indians, who are in a similar position as the Ojibwa. That tribe has about fifteen hundred members, with the Midē Society having roughly one hundred members, and within the whole population, there are only two Wābēnō and five Jĕs’sakkīd.
It is evident that neither the Wâbĕnō´ nor the Jĕs´sakkīd´ confine themselves to the mnemonic songs which are employed during their ceremonial performances, or even prepare them to any extent. Such bark records as have been observed or recorded, even after most careful research and examination extending over the field seasons of three years, prove to have been the property of Wâbĕnō´ and Jĕs´sakkīd´, who were also Midē´. It is probable that those who practice either of the first two forms of ceremonies and nothing else are familiar with and may employ for their own information certain mnemonic records; but they are limited to the characteristic formulæ of exorcism, as their practice varies and is subject to changes according to circumstances and the requirements and wants of the applicant when words are chanted to accord therewith.
It's clear that neither the Wâbĕnō´ nor the Jĕs´sakkīd´ stick solely to the mnemonic songs used during their ceremonies, nor do they really prepare them much. The bark records that have been found or documented, even after thorough research and examination over three years, turned out to belong to the Wâbĕnō´ and Jĕs´sakkīd´, who were also Midē´. It's likely that those practicing either of the first two types of ceremonies, and not much else, are familiar with and might use certain mnemonic records for their own knowledge; however, they are limited to the specific formulas for exorcism, as their practices vary and change depending on the situation and the needs of the person requesting help when the words are chanted accordingly.
There is still another class of persons termed Mashkī´kĭkē´winĭnĭ, or herbalists, who are generally denominated “medicine men,” as the Ojibwa word implies. Their calling is a simple one, and consists in knowing the mysterious properties of a variety of plants, herbs, roots, and berries, which are revealed upon application and for a fee. When there is an administration of a remedy for a given complaint, based upon true scientific principles, it is only in consequence of such practice having been acquired from the whites, as it has usually been the custom of the Catholic Fathers to utilize all ordinary and available remedies for the treatment of the common disorders of life. Although these herbalists are aware that certain plants or roots will produce a specified effect upon the human system, they attribute the benefit to the fact that such remedies are distasteful and injurious to the demons who are present in the system and to whom the disease is attributed. Many of these herbalists are found among women, also; and these, too, are generally members of the Midē´wiwin. In Fig. 1 is shown an herbalist preparing a mixture.
There’s another group of people known as Mashkī´kĭkĭkē´winĭ, or herbalists, often referred to as “medicine men,” as the Ojibwa term suggests. Their role is straightforward; they know the hidden properties of various plants, herbs, roots, and berries, which they reveal when asked for a fee. When a remedy is used for a particular issue based on real scientific principles, it’s typically because this knowledge has been learned from white settlers, as Catholic Fathers often employed typical remedies to treat common ailments. While these herbalists understand that certain plants or roots will have specific effects on the human body, they believe the benefits come from the fact that these remedies are unpleasant and harmful to the demons present in the body, which they think are responsible for the illness. Many herbalists are women, and they often belong to the Midē´wiwin as well. In Fig. 1 is shown an herbalist preparing a mixture.
Fig. 1.—Herbalist preparing medicine and treating patient.
Fig. 1.—Herbalist making medicine and helping a patient.
160 The origin of the Midē´wiwin or Midē´ Society, commonly, though erroneously, termed Grand Medicine Society, is buried in obscurity. In the Jesuit Relations, as early as 1642, frequent reference is made to sorcerers, jugglers, and persons whose faith, influence, and practices are dependent upon the assistance of “Manitous,” or mysterious spirits; though, as there is no discrimination made between these different professors of magic, it is difficult positively to determine which of the several classes were met with at that early day. It is probable that the Jĕs´sakkīd´, or juggler, and the Midē´, or Shaman, were referred to.
160 The origins of the Midē´wiwin or Midē´ Society, often mistakenly called the Grand Medicine Society, are unclear. In the Jesuit Relations, as early as 1642, there are frequent mentions of sorcerers, jugglers, and individuals whose beliefs, influence, and practices rely on the aid of “Manitous,” or mysterious spirits. However, since there is no distinction made between these different types of magic practitioners, it's hard to determine exactly which groups were present during that time. It's likely that the Jĕs´sakkīd´, or juggler, and the Midē´, or Shaman, were among them.
The Midē´, in the true sense of the word, is a Shaman, though he has by various authors been termed powwow, medicine man, priest, seer, prophet, etc. Among the Ojibwa the office is not hereditary; but among the Menomoni a curious custom exists, by which some one is selected to fill the vacancy one year after the death of a Shaman. Whether a similar practice prevailed among other tribes of the Algonkian linguistic stock can be ascertained only by similar research among the tribes constituting that stock.
The Midē, in the truest sense, is a Shaman, though various authors have called him a powwow, medicine man, priest, seer, prophet, and so on. Among the Ojibwa, this role is not passed down through family lines; however, among the Menomoni, there’s an interesting custom where a new Shaman is chosen to take over one year after the previous Shaman's death. It's unclear if similar practices existed among other tribes within the Algonkian language group, and finding out would require further research among those tribes.
Among the Ojibwa, however, a substitute is sometimes taken to fill the place of one who has been prepared to receive the first degree of the Midē´wiwin, or Society of the Midē´, but who is removed by death before the proper initiation has been conferred. This occurs when a young man dies, in which case his father or mother may be accepted as a substitute. This will be explained in more detail under the caption of Dzhibai´ Midē´wigân or “Ghost Lodge,” a collateral branch of the Midē´wiwin.
Among the Ojibwa, sometimes a substitute is chosen to take the place of someone who was set to receive the first degree of the Midē´wiwin, or Society of the Midē´, but who passes away before the initiation can happen. This happens when a young man dies, and in that case, his father or mother might be accepted as a substitute. This will be explained in more detail under the section titled Dzhibai´ Midē´wigân or “Ghost Lodge,” which is a related branch of the Midē´wiwin.
As I shall have occasion to refer to the work of the late Mr. W. W. Warren, a few words respecting him will not be inappropriate. Mr. Warren was an Ojibwa mixed blood, of good education, and later a member of the legislature of Minnesota. His work, entiled “History of the Ojibwa Nation,” was published in Vol. V of the Collections of the Minnesota Historical Society, St. Paul, 1885, and edited by Dr. E. D. Neill. Mr. Warren’s work is the result of the labor of a lifetime among his own people, and, had he lived, he would undoubtedly have added much to the historical material of which the printed volume chiefly consists. His manuscript was completed about the year 1852, and he died the following year. In speaking of the Society of the Midē´,8 he says:
As I will mention the work of the late Mr. W. W. Warren, it’s fitting to say a few things about him. Mr. Warren was an Ojibwa mixed blood with a solid education and later became a member of the Minnesota legislature. His work, titled “History of the Ojibwa Nation,” was published in Vol. V of the Collections of the Minnesota Historical Society, St. Paul, 1885, and edited by Dr. E. D. Neill. Mr. Warren’s work is the culmination of a lifetime of efforts among his people, and if he had lived longer, he would have certainly contributed much more to the historical material that fills the printed volume. He finished his manuscript around 1852 and passed away the following year. In discussing the Society of the Midē´,8 he states:
The important ceremony of Me-da-we-win (or as we now call it, “Grand Medicine”) and the beliefs that come with it are still not fully understood by white people. This significant tradition remains mysterious even to me, despite my efforts to learn about it. I speak their language fluently, am related to them, and have their friendship and trust, yet I honestly admit that I am still just on the doorstep of the Me-da-we lodge. However, I believe I have gathered as much, if not more, accurate general information on this topic than anyone else who has written about it, including a prominent author who, to the surprise of many familiar with the Ojibways, claims in one of his works that he has been formally initiated into the mysteries of this rite and is a member of the Me-da-we Society. This claim is certainly hard to believe in Indian country, and when the old initiators or Indian priests hear about it, they shake their heads in disbelief that a white man could ever truly become a member of their Me-da-we lodge.
An entrance into the lodge itself, while the ceremonies are taking place, has sometimes been allowed as a courtesy; however, this does not initiate a person into the secrets of the belief, nor does it make them a member of the Society.
These remarks pertaining to the pretensions of “a great and standard authority” have reference to Mr. Schoolcraft, who among numerous other assertions makes the following, in the first volume of his Information Respecting the Indian Tribes of the United States, Philadelphia, 1851, p. 361, viz:
These comments about the claims of “a great and standard authority” refer to Mr. Schoolcraft, who, among many other statements, makes the following in the first volume of his Information Regarding the Indian Tribes of the United States, Philadelphia, 1851, p. 361, namely:
I had witnessed the exhibitions of the Medawin and the precision and careful ceremony with which its rituals were conducted in 1820 around Lake Superior. In 1822, when I returned as a Government agent for the tribes, I decided to take advantage of my official position to further investigate its principles and procedures. To do this, I arranged for its ceremonies to be repeated in my office, behind closed doors, using all available means for accurate interpretation and recording the outcome. Before this, I had seen an Indian from the Odjibwa tribe holding one of those symbolic tablets of pictorial notation, which are sometimes referred to as “music boards” because the initiated members of the Meda Society sing the symbols. This became the focus of the explanations, which were ceremoniously provided in accordance with the specific requests of the society's leader and three other initiates.
This statement is followed by another,9 in which Mr. Schoolcraft, in a foot-note, affirms:
This statement is followed by another, 9 in which Mr. Schoolcraft, in a footnote, confirms:
In 1823, I was admitted to the Meda class by the Chippewas and took the initial steps of a Sagima and Jesukaid in each of the other fraternities. I studied their pictographic system thoroughly with useful resources, so I can speak with more confidence on the topic.
Mr. Schoolcraft presents a superficial outline of the initiatory ceremonies as conducted during his time, but as the description is meager, notwithstanding that there is every evidence that the ceremonies were conducted with more completeness and elaborate dramatization nearly three-quarters of a century ago than at the present day, I shall not burden this paper with useless repetition, but present the subject as conducted within the last three years.
Mr. Schoolcraft gives a brief overview of the initiation ceremonies as they took place during his time, but since the description is lacking, even though there’s clear evidence that the ceremonies were carried out with more detail and dramatic flair about seventy-five years ago than they are today, I won't overload this paper with unnecessary repetition and will instead focus on how the ceremonies have been conducted in the last three years.
Mr. Warren truly says:
Mr. Warren really says:
In the Me-da-we rite, much of what is ancient is included—songs and traditions that have been passed down not orally, but in hieroglyphs, for many generations. This rite also preserves the purest and most ancient forms of their language, which is somewhat different from the common everyday use.
In referring to the rapid changes occurring among many of the Western tribes of Indians, and the gradual discontinuance of aboriginal ceremonies and customs, Mr. Warren remarks10 in reference to the Ojibwa:
In discussing the fast changes happening among many Western Native American tribes and the slow fading of traditional ceremonies and customs, Mr. Warren notes10 regarding the Ojibwa:
Even among these, a change is happening so quickly due to close contact with the white race that in ten years, it will be too late to save their ancestors' traditions from complete disappearance. Even now, it is very difficult to find authentic information about them. Their elder men are quickly passing away, taking with them the records of their people's past; they are the ones who carry out the important rituals of their religious beliefs, which they think the Great Spirit has given to his red children to ensure long life on earth and in the afterlife. The original secrets of this ancient belief are locked in the hearts of these old men. ***
They truly believe, and it is part of their faith, that the world was once engulfed by a flood, and that we are currently living on what they call the “new earth.” This belief is explained by their ambiguous traditions; and in their Me-da-we-win or religion, hieroglyphs are used to represent this second earth.
Furthermore,
Furthermore,
They truly believe that the red man made the Great Spirit very angry, which led to the flood. At the start of the new earth, it was only through the medium and intercession of a powerful being they call Manab-o-sho that they were allowed to survive, and they were provided with ways to support life. More recently, a set of religious guidelines was given to them so they could communicate with the offended Great Spirit and protect themselves from death and its destruction.
It may be appropriate in this connection to present the description given by Rev. Peter Jones of the Midē´ priests and priestesses. Mr. Jones was an educated Ojibwa Episcopal clergyman, and a member of the Missasauga—i.e., the Eagle totemic division of that tribe of Indians living in Canada. In his work11 he states:
It might be fitting here to share the description provided by Rev. Peter Jones of the Midḗ priests and priestesses. Mr. Jones was an educated Ojibwa Episcopal clergyman and a member of the Missasauga, which is the Eagle totemic division of that tribe of Indigenous people living in Canada. In his work11 he states:
Every tribe has its healers—people who are consulted and relied upon during times of illness. These powwows are believed to have performed remarkable cures, either by using roots and herbs or through chants. When someone wants to become a powwow, they first pay a significant fee to the mentors. Then, they are taken into the woods, where they learn the names and benefits of various helpful plants. Next, they are taught how to chant the medicine song and how to pray, which is often a repetitive invocation made to the Master of Life or to some spirit that the person believes they have upset.
The powwows are highly regarded by their misled followers, not so much for their medical knowledge as for the magical powers they are believed to have. It benefits them to make these gullible people think they can easily communicate with the munedoos, who are always willing to provide whatever information they need.
163 The Ojibwa believe in a multiplicity of spirits, or man´idōs, which inhabit all space and every conspicuous object in nature. These man´idōs, in turn, are subservient to superior ones, either of a charitable and benevolent character or those which are malignant and aggressive. The chief or superior man´idō is termed Ki´tshi Man´idō—Great Spirit—approaching to a great extent the idea of the God of the Christian religion; the second in their estimation is Dzhe Man´idō, a benign being upon whom they look as the guardian spirit of the Midē´wiwin and through whose divine provision the sacred rites of the Midē´wiwin were granted to man. The Ani´miki or Thunder God is, if not the supreme, at least one of the greatest of the malignant man´idōs, and it is from him that the Jĕs´sakkīd´ are believed to obtain their powers of evil doing. There is one other, to whom special reference will be made, who abides in and rules the “place of shadows,” the hereafter; he is known as Dzhibai´ Man´idō—Shadow Spirit, or more commonly Ghost Spirit. The name of Ki´tshi Man´idō is never mentioned but with reverence, and thus only in connection with the rite of Midē´wiwin, or a sacred feast, and always after making an offering of tobacco.
163 The Ojibwa believe in many spirits, or man'idōs, that inhabit all spaces and every noticeable object in nature. These man'idōs are subordinate to higher spirits, which can either be kind and benevolent, or harmful and aggressive. The main or superior man'idō is called Ki'tshi Man'idō—Great Spirit—closely resembling the idea of God in Christianity. The second most important is Dzhe Man'idō, a gentle being who they regard as the guardian spirit of the Midē'wiwin and through whom the sacred rites of the Midē'wiwin were granted to humanity. The Ani'miki or Thunder God is considered one of the most powerful malignant man'idōs, and it's believed that the Jĕs'sakkīd' draw their evil powers from him. There is one other spirit, who will be specifically mentioned, that resides in and rules the "place of shadows," the afterlife; he is known as Dzhibai' Man'idō—Shadow Spirit, or more commonly, Ghost Spirit. The name of Ki'tshi Man'idō is never spoken without reverence, and is mentioned only in connection with the Midē'wiwin rite, or a sacred feast, and always after making a tobacco offering.
The first important event in the life of an Ojibwa youth is his first fast. For this purpose he will leave his home for some secluded spot in the forest where he will continue to fast for an indefinite number of days; when reduced by abstinence from food he enters a hysterical or ecstatic state in which he may have visions and hallucinations. The spirits which the Ojibwa most desire to see in these dreams are those of mammals and birds, though any object, whether animate or inanimate, is considered a good omen. The object which first appears is adopted as the personal mystery, guardian spirit, or tutelary daimon of the entranced, and is never mentioned by him without first making a sacrifice. A small effigy of this man´idō is made, or its outline drawn upon a small piece of birch bark, which is carried suspended by a string around the neck, or if the wearer be a Midē´ he carries it in his “medicine bag” or pinji´gosân. The future course of life of the faster is governed by his dream; and it sometimes occurs that because of giving an imaginary importance to the occurrence, such as beholding, during the trance some powerful man´idō or other object held in great reverence by the members of the Midē´ Society, the faster first becomes impressed with the idea of becoming a Midē´. Thereupon he makes application to a prominent Midē´ priest, and seeks his advice as to the necessary course to be pursued to attain his desire. If the Midē´ priest considers with favor the application, he consults with his confrères and action is taken, and the questions of the requisite preliminary instructions, fees, and presents, etc., are formally discussed. If the Midē´ priests are in accord with the desires of the applicant an instructor or preceptor is designated, to whom he must present himself 164 and make an agreement as to the amount of preparatory information to be acquired and the fees and other presents to be given in return. These fees have nothing whatever to do with the presents which must be presented to the Midē´ priests previous to his initiation as a member of the society, the latter being collected during the time that is devoted to preliminary instruction, which period usually extends over several years. Thus ample time is found for hunting, as skins and peltries, of which those not required as presents may be exchanged for blankets, tobacco, kettles, guns, etc., obtainable from the trader. Sometimes a number of years are spent in preparation for the first degree of the Midē´wiwin, and there are many who have impoverished themselves in the payment of fees and the preparation for the feast to which all visiting priests are also invited.
The first major milestone in the life of an Ojibwa youth is his first fast. To prepare for this, he leaves his home for a quiet place in the forest where he will fast for an unspecified number of days. As he goes without food, he enters a trance or ecstatic state that may bring visions and hallucinations. The spirits that the Ojibwa most want to see in these dreams are those of mammals and birds, but any object, whether alive or not, is seen as a good sign. The first thing he sees is taken as his personal mystery, guardian spirit, or protective spirit, and he never mentions it without first making a sacrifice. He creates a small figure of this manidō or draws its shape on a piece of birch bark, which he wears around his neck on a string, or if he is a Midē´, he keeps it in his “medicine bag” or pinji´gosân. The direction of the faster’s life is determined by his dream, and sometimes he feels inspired to become a Midē´ after experiencing something significant during his trance, like seeing a powerful manidō or an object revered by the Midē´ Society. He then approaches a well-respected Midē´ priest for advice on how to achieve his goal. If the Midē´ priest approves of the application, he discusses it with his colleagues and they take action, formally talking about the necessary preliminary instructions, fees, and gifts. If the Midē´ priests agree with the applicant’s wishes, a teacher is assigned, and he must meet with them to agree on the amount of preparatory knowledge he needs to acquire and the corresponding fees and gifts. These fees are separate from the gifts that must be given to the Midē´ priests before he is initiated into the society; those gifts are collected during the time spent on preliminary training, which usually lasts several years. This allows enough time for hunting, as the skins and pelts that are not needed as gifts can be traded for blankets, tobacco, pots, guns, and other items from the trader. Sometimes, individuals spend many years preparing for the first degree of the Midē´wiwin, and many have depleted their resources in paying fees and preparing for the feast to which all visiting priests are invited.
Should an Indian who is not prompted by a dream wish to join the society he expresses to the four chief officiating priests a desire to purchase a mī´gis, which is the sacred symbol of the society and consists of a small white shell, to which reference will be made further on. His application follows the same course as in the preceding instance, and the same course is pursued also when a Jĕs´sakkīd´ or a Wâbĕnō´ wishes to become a Midē´.
Should an Indian, who is not motivated by a dream, want to join the society, he expresses his desire to purchase a mī´gis, which is the sacred symbol of the society and consists of a small white shell, to the four main officiating priests. His application follows the same process as in the previous case, and the same steps are taken when a Jĕs´sakkīd´ or a Wâbĕnō´ wishes to become a Midē´.
MIDĒ´WIWIN.
The Midē´wiwin—Society of the Midē´ or Shamans—consists of an indefinite number of Midē´ of both sexes. The society is graded into four separate and distinct degrees, although there is a general impression prevailing even among certain members that any degree beyond the first is practically a mere repetition. The greater power attained by one in making advancement depends upon the fact of his having submitted to “being shot at with the medicine sacks” in the hands of the officiating priests. This may be the case at this late day in certain localities, but from personal experience it has been learned that there is considerable variation in the dramatization of the ritual. One circumstance presents itself forcibly to the careful observer, and that is that the greater number of repetitions of the phrases chanted by the Midē´ the greater is felt to be the amount of inspiration and power of the performance. This is true also of some of the lectures in which reiteration and prolongation in time of delivery aids very much in forcibly impressing the candidate and other observers with the importance and sacredness of the ceremony.
The Midē´wiwin—Society of the Midē´ or Shamans—consists of an indefinite number of Midē´ of both genders. The society is divided into four separate and distinct degrees, although many members feel that any degree beyond the first is pretty much the same. The greater power achieved by someone advancing in the society depends on their submission to being “shot at with the medicine sacks” held by the officiating priests. This may be the case in some areas even today, but from personal experience, it's clear that there’s a lot of variation in how the ritual is performed. One thing stands out to careful observers: the more times the Midē´ repeat the phrases they chant, the more inspiration and power is felt in the performance. This is also true for some lectures, where repetition and a slower delivery help strongly impress the candidate and other observers with the ceremony's significance and sacredness.
It has always been customary for the Midē´ priests to preserve birch-bark records, bearing delicate incised lines to represent pictorially the ground plan of the number of degrees to which the owner is entitled. Such records or charts are sacred and are never exposed to the public view, being brought forward for inspection only when 165 an accepted candidate has paid his fee, and then only after necessary preparation by fasting and offerings of tobacco.
It's always been a tradition for the Midē´ priests to maintain birch-bark records that feature delicate carvings representing the layout of the various degrees to which the holder is entitled. These records or charts are sacred and are never shown to the public, only being presented for review when an accepted candidate has paid their fee, and only after going through the required preparations, including fasting and making tobacco offerings. 165
Plate III. Red Lake And Leech Lake Records (key).
Plate III. Red Lake and Leech Lake Records (key).
During the year 1887, while at Red Lake, Minnesota, I had the good fortune to discover the existence of an old birch-bark chart, which, according to the assurances of the chief and assistant Midē´ priests, had never before been exhibited to a white man, nor even to an Indian unless he had become a regular candidate. This chart measures 7 feet 1½ inches in length and 18 inches in width, and is made of five pieces of birch bark neatly and securely stitched together by means of thin, flat strands of bass wood. At each end are two thin strips of wood, secured transversely by wrapping and stitching with thin strands of bark, so as to prevent splitting and fraying of the ends of the record. Pl. III A, is a reproduction of the design referred to.
During the year 1887, while I was in Red Lake, Minnesota, I was lucky enough to find an old birch-bark map that, according to the chief and assistant Midē´ priests, had never been shown to a white person or even to an Indian unless they had been a regular candidate. This map is 7 feet 1½ inches long and 18 inches wide, made of five pieces of birch bark neatly stitched together with thin, flat strands of basswood. At each end are two thin strips of wood, secured across the ends by wrapping and stitching with thin strands of bark to prevent splitting and fraying. Pl. III A, is a reproduction of the design referred to.
It had been in the keeping of Skwēkŏ´mĭk, to whom it was intrusted at the death of his father-in-law, the latter, in turn, having received it in 1825 from Badâ´san, the Grand Shaman and chief of the Winnibē´goshish Ojibwa.
It had been in the care of Skwēkŏ´mĭk, who received it at the death of his father-in-law, the latter having gotten it in 1825 from Badâ´san, the Grand Shaman and leader of the Winnibē´goshish Ojibwa.
It is affirmed that Badâ´san had received the original from the Grand Midē´ priest at La Pointe, Wisconsin, where, it is said, the Midē´wiwin was at that time held annually and the ceremonies conducted in strict accordance with ancient and traditional usage.
It is confirmed that Badâ´san received the original from the Grand Midē´ priest at La Pointe, Wisconsin, where it is said the Midē´wiwin was held annually at that time, and the ceremonies were carried out in strict adherence to ancient and traditional practices.
The present owner of this record has for many years used it in the preliminary instruction of candidates. Its value in this respect is very great, as it presents to the Indian a pictorial résumé of the traditional history of the origin of the Midē´wiwin, the positions occupied by the various guardian man´idos in the several degrees, and the order of procedure in study and progress of the candidate. On account of the isolation of the Red Lake Indians and their long continued, independent ceremonial observances, changes have gradually occurred so that there is considerable variation, both in the pictorial representation and the initiation, as compared with the records and ceremonials preserved at other reservations. The reason of this has already been given.
The current owner of this record has used it for many years to teach candidates. Its value in this regard is significant, as it provides the Indian audience with a visual summary of the traditional history of the origins of the Midē´wiwin, the roles of various guardian man´idos in different degrees, and the order in which candidates study and progress. Due to the isolation of the Red Lake Indians and their long-standing, independent ceremonial practices, gradual changes have occurred, resulting in notable differences in both the visual representations and the initiation process compared to the records and ceremonies maintained at other reservations. The reason for this has already been explained.
A detailed description of the above mentioned record, will be presented further on in connection with two interesting variants which were subsequently obtained at White Earth, Minnesota. On account of the widely separated location of many of the different bands of the Ojibwa, and the establishment of independent Midē´ societies, portions of the ritual which have been forgotten by one set may be found to survive at some other locality, though at the expense of some other fragments of tradition or ceremonial. No satisfactory account of the tradition of the origin of the Indians has been obtained, but such information as it was possible to procure will be submitted.
A detailed description of the record mentioned above will be provided later, along with two interesting versions that were later found in White Earth, Minnesota. Because many of the different Ojibwa bands are spread out and have established independent Midē' societies, parts of the rituals that have been forgotten by one group may still exist in another area, although this might come at the cost of losing other parts of the tradition or ceremony. A satisfactory account of the tradition regarding the origin of the Indians has not been obtained, but any information that was possible to gather will be presented.
166 In all of their traditions pertaining to the early history of the tribe these people are termed A-nish´-in-â´-bēg—original people—a term surviving also among the Ottawa, Patawatomi, and Menomoni, indicating that the tradition of their westward migration was extant prior to the final separation of these tribes, which is supposed to have occurred at Sault Ste. Marie.
166 In all their traditions about the early history of the tribe, these people are called A-nish´-in-â´-bēg—original people—a term that is also used by the Ottawa, Patawatomi, and Menomoni. This indicates that the tradition of their westward migration existed before these tribes finally separated, which is believed to have happened at Sault Ste. Marie.
Mi´nabō´zho (Great Rabbit), whose name occurs in connection with most of the sacred rites, was the servant of Dzhe Man´idō, the Good Spirit, and acted in the capacity of intercessor and mediator. It is generally supposed that it was to his good offices that the Indian owes life and the good things necessary to his health and subsistence.
Mi’nabō’zho (Great Rabbit), whose name is linked to most of the sacred rituals, was the servant of Dzhe Man’idō, the Good Spirit, and served as an intercessor and mediator. It's commonly believed that it was thanks to his efforts that the Indian has life and the essential things needed for health and survival.
The tradition of Mi´nabō´zho and the origin of the Midē´wiwin, as given in connection with the birch-bark record obtained at Red Lake (Pl. III A), is as follows:
The tradition of Mi'nabō'zho and the origin of the Midē'wiwin, as provided in relation to the birch-bark record obtained at Red Lake (Pl. III A), is as follows:
When Mi´nabō´zho, the servant of Dzhe Man´idō, looked down upon the earth he beheld human beings, the Ani´shinâ´bēg, the ancestors of the Ojibwa. They occupied the four quarters of the earth—the northeast, the southeast, the southwest, and the northwest. He saw how helpless they were, and desiring to give them the means of warding off the diseases with which they were constantly afflicted, and to provide them with animals and plants to serve as food and with other comforts, Mi´nabō´zho remained thoughtfully hovering over the center of the earth, endeavoring to devise some means of communicating with them, when he heard something laugh, and perceived a dark object appear upon the surface of the water to the west (No. 2). He could not recognize its form, and while watching it closely it slowly disappeared from view. It next appeared in the north (No. 3), and after a short lapse of time again disappeared. Mi´nabō´zho hoped it would again show itself upon the surface of the water, which it did in the east (No. 4). Then Mi´nabō´zho wished that it might approach him, so as to permit him to communicate with it. When it disappeared from view in the east and made its reappearance in the south (No. 1), Mi´nabō´zho asked it to come to the center of the earth that he might behold it. Again it disappeared from view, and after reappearing in the west Mi´nabō´zho observed it slowly approaching the center of the earth (i.e., the centre of the circle), when he descended and saw it was the Otter, now one of the sacred man´idōs of the Midē´wiwin. Then Mi´nabō´zho instructed the Otter in the mysteries of the Midē´wiwin, and gave him at the same time the sacred rattle to be used at the side of the sick; the sacred Midē´ drum to be used during the ceremonial of initiation and at sacred feasts, and tobacco, to be employed in invocations and in making peace.
When Mi’nabozho, the servant of Dzhe Manido, looked down at the earth, he saw human beings, the Anishinabeg, who are the ancestors of the Ojibwa. They inhabited all four corners of the earth—the northeast, southeast, southwest, and northwest. He noticed how vulnerable they were and wanted to provide them with ways to fend off the diseases they constantly faced, as well as with animals and plants for food and other comforts. Mi’nabozho stayed thoughtfully hovering over the center of the earth, trying to figure out how to communicate with them, when he heard something laugh and saw a dark shape appear on the water’s surface to the west (No. 2). He couldn’t make out its form, and as he focused on it, it slowly vanished from view. It next appeared in the north (No. 3) and, after a brief moment, disappeared once more. Mi’nabozho hoped it would show itself again on the water, which it did in the east (No. 4). He then wished for it to come closer so he could communicate with it. When it disappeared from view in the east and re-emerged in the south (No. 1), Mi’nabozho asked it to come to the center of the earth so he could see it. It vanished again, and after reappearing in the west, Mi’nabozho noticed it slowly moving toward the center of the earth (i.e., the center of the circle). He descended and saw that it was the Otter, now one of the sacred manidos of the Midewiwin. Mi’nabozho then taught the Otter the secrets of the Midewiwin and gave him the sacred rattle to be used at the side of the sick, the sacred Mide drum for ceremonies and sacred feasts, and tobacco for invocations and making peace.
The place where Mi´nabō´zho descended was an island in the middle of a large body of water, and the Midē´ who is feared by all the others is called Mini´sino´shkwe (He-who-lives-on-the-island). Then 167 Mi´nabō´zho built a Midē´wigân (sacred Midē´ lodge), and taking his drum he beat upon it and sang a Midē´ song, telling the Otter that Dzhe Man´idō had decided to help the Aníshinâ´bōg, that they might always have life and an abundance of food and other things necessary for their comfort. Mi´nabō´zho then took the Otter into the Midē´wigân and conferred upon him the secrets of the Midē´wiwin, and with his Midē´ bag shot the sacred mī´gis into his body that he might have immortality and be able to confer these secrets to his kinsmen, the Aníshinâ´bēg.
The place where Mi'nabozho landed was an island in the middle of a large body of water, and the Midē who is feared by everyone else is called Minisinoshkwe (He-who-lives-on-the-island). Then 167 Mi'nabozho built a Midēwigân (sacred Midē lodge), and taking his drum, he beat on it and sang a Midē song, telling the Otter that Dzhe Manidō had chosen to help the Anishinabōg so that they could always have life and plenty of food and other essentials for their comfort. Mi'nabozho then brought the Otter into the Midēwigân and shared with him the secrets of the Midēwiwin, and with his Midē bag, he shot the sacred mīgis into his body so that he could attain immortality and share these secrets with his relatives, the Anishinabēg.
The mī´gis is considered the sacred symbol of the Midē´wigân, and may consist of any small white shell, though the one believed to be similar to the one mentioned in the above tradition resembles the cowrie, and the ceremonies of initiation as carried out in the Midē´wiwin at this day are believed to be similar to those enacted by Mi´nabō´zho and the Otter. It is admitted by all the Midē´ priests whom I have consulted that much of the information has been lost through the death of their aged predecessors, and they feel convinced that ultimately all of the sacred character of the work will be forgotten or lost through the adoption of new religions by the young people and the death of the Midē´ priests, who, by the way, decline to accept Christian teachings, and are in consequence termed “pagans.”
The mī´gis is seen as the sacred symbol of the Midē´wigân and can be any small white shell, although the one thought to be similar to the one mentioned earlier resembles a cowrie. The initiation ceremonies practiced in the Midē´wiwin today are believed to be similar to those performed by Mi´nabō´zho and the Otter. All the Midē´ priests I've talked to agree that much of the knowledge has been lost with the passing of their older predecessors. They are convinced that eventually, all of the sacred aspects of this practice will be forgotten or lost due to the younger generation adopting new religions and the death of the Midē´ priests, who, by the way, refuse to accept Christian teachings and are therefore labeled as “pagans.”
My instructor and interpreter of the Red Lake chart added other information in explanation of the various characters represented thereon, which I present herewith. The large circle at the right side of the chart denotes the earth as beheld by Mi´nabō´zho, while the Otter appeared at the square projections at Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4; the semicircular appendages between these are the four quarters of the earth, which are inhabited by the Ani´shinâ´bēg, Nos. 5, 6, 7, and 8. Nos. 9 and 10 represent two of the numerous malignant man´idōs, who endeavor to prevent entrance into the sacred structure and mysteries of the Midē´wiwin. The oblong squares, Nos. 11 and 12, represent the outline of the first degree of the society, the inner corresponding lines being the course traversed during initiation. The entrance to the lodge is directed toward the east, the western exit indicating the course toward the next higher degree. The four human forms at Nos. 13, 14, 15, and 16 are the four officiating Midē´ priests whose services are always demanded at an initiation. Each is represented as having a rattle. Nos. 17, 18, and 19 indicate the cedar trees, one of each of this species being planted near the outer angles of a Midē´ lodge. No. 20 represents the ground. The outline of the bear at No. 21 represents the Makwa´ Man´idō, or Bear Spirit, one of the sacred Midē´ man´idōs, to which the candidate must pray and make offerings of tobacco, that he may compel the malevolent spirits to draw away from the entrance to the Midē´wigân, which is shown in No. 28. Nos 23 and 24 represent the sacred drum which 168 the candidate must use when chanting the prayers, and two offerings must be made, as indicated by the number two.
My teacher and interpreter of the Red Lake chart provided additional details to clarify the various symbols represented on it, which I now present. The large circle on the right side of the chart represents the earth as seen by Mi´nabō´zho, while the Otter appears at the square projections labeled Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4. The semicircular extensions between these squares represent the four quarters of the earth, each being home to the Ani´shinâ´bēg at Nos. 5, 6, 7, and 8. Nos. 9 and 10 depict two of the many harmful man´idōs, who try to block entry to the sacred structure and mysteries of the Midē´wiwin. The oblong squares at Nos. 11 and 12 outline the first degree of the society, with the inner lines showing the path taken during initiation. The entry to the lodge faces the east, while the exit to the west indicates the way to the next higher degree. The four human figures at Nos. 13, 14, 15, and 16 are the four officiating Midē´ priests who are always required at an initiation. Each is depicted holding a rattle. Nos. 17, 18, and 19 represent the cedar trees, with one planted near each outer corner of a Midē´ lodge. No. 20 represents the ground. The outline of the bear at No. 21 signifies the Makwa´ Man´idō, or Bear Spirit, one of the sacred Midē´ man´idōs, to whom the candidate must pray and offer tobacco to ensure that the malevolent spirits are kept away from the entrance to the Midē´wigân, shown at No. 28. Nos. 23 and 24 represent the sacred drum that the candidate must use when chanting prayers, and two offerings must be made, as indicated by the number two.
After the candidate has been admitted to one degree, and is prepared to advance to the second, he offers three feasts, and chants three prayers to the Makwa´ Man´idō, or Bear Spirit (No. 22), that the entrance (No. 29) to that degree may be opened to him. The feasts and chants are indicated by the three drums shown at Nos. 25, 26, and 27.
After the candidate has been accepted into one degree and is ready to move on to the second, he hosts three feasts and sings three prayers to the Makwa´ Man´idō, or Bear Spirit (No. 22), asking for the entrance (No. 29) to that degree to be opened for him. The feasts and chants are represented by the three drums shown at Nos. 25, 26, and 27.
Nos. 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34 are five Serpent Spirits, evil man´idōs who oppose a Midē´’s progress, though after the feasting and prayers directed to the Makwa´ Man´idō have by him been deemed sufficient the four smaller Serpent Spirits move to either side of the path between the two degrees, while the larger serpent (No. 32) raises its body in the middle so as to form an arch, beneath which passes the candidate on his way to the second degree.
Nos. 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34 are five Serpent Spirits, evil manidōs who stand in the way of a Midē’s journey. However, after the feasting and prayers offered to the Makwa Manidō are considered enough by him, the four smaller Serpent Spirits shift to either side of the path between the two degrees. Meanwhile, the larger serpent (No. 32) lifts its body in the middle to create an arch, under which the candidate passes as they move toward the second degree.
Nos. 35, 36, 46, and 47 are four malignant Bear Spirits, who guard the entrance and exit to the second degree, the doors of which are at Nos. 37 and 49. The form of this lodge (No. 38) is like the preceding; but while the seven Midē´ priests at Nos. 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, and 45 simply indicate that the number of Midē´ assisting at this second initiation are of a higher and more sacred class of personages than in the first degree, the number designated having reference to quality and intensity rather than to the actual number of assistants, as specifically shown at the top of the first degree structure.
Nos. 35, 36, 46, and 47 are four evil Bear Spirits that guard the entrance and exit to the second degree, with the doors located at Nos. 37 and 49. The structure of this lodge (No. 38) is similar to the previous one; however, while the seven Midē´ priests at Nos. 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, and 45 indicate that the Midē´ participating in this second initiation belong to a higher and more sacred category of individuals than those in the first degree, the number mentioned refers to their quality and intensity rather than the actual count of assistants, as specifically detailed at the top of the first degree structure.
When the Midē´ is of the second degree, he receives from Dzhe Man´idō supernatural powers as shown in No. 48. The lines extending upward from the eyes signify that he can look into futurity; from the ears, that he can hear what is transpiring at a great distance; from the hands, that he can touch for good or for evil friends and enemies at a distance, however remote; while the lines extending from the feet denote his ability to traverse all space in the accomplishment of his desires or duties. The small disk upon the breast of the figure denotes that a Midē´ of this degree has several times had the mī´gis—life—“shot into his body,” the increased size of the spot signifying amount or quantity of influence obtained thereby.
When a Midē´ reaches the second degree, he receives supernatural powers from Dzhe Man´idō, as shown in No. 48. The lines extending upward from his eyes indicate that he can see into the future; from his ears, that he can hear what’s happening from far away; from his hands, that he can connect with friends and enemies for good or evil, no matter how distant they are; and the lines extending from his feet signify his ability to travel anywhere to fulfill his desires or responsibilities. The small disk on the chest of the figure indicates that a Midē´ at this degree has multiple times had the mī´gis—life—“shot into his body,” with the increased size of the spot representing the amount of influence gained.
No. 50 represents a Mi´tsha Midē´ or Bad Midē´, one who employs his powers for evil purposes. He has the power of assuming the form of any animal, in which guise he may destroy the life of his victim, immediately after which he resumes his human form and appears innocent of any crime. His services are sought by people who wish to encompass the destruction of enemies or rivals, at however remote a locality the intended victim may be at the time. An illustration representing the modus operandi of his performance is reproduced and explained in Fig. 24, page 238.
No. 50 represents a Mi'tsha Midē or Bad Midē, someone who uses his powers for evil. He can take the form of any animal, allowing him to kill his victim, right after which he returns to his human form and looks innocent of any wrongdoing. People seek his services when they want to destroy enemies or rivals, no matter how far away the intended victim might be at that moment. An illustration showing how he operates is reproduced and explained in Fig. 24, page 238.
Persons possessed of this power are sometimes termed witches, special reference to whom is made elsewhere. The illustration, No. 169 50, represents such an individual in his disguise of a bear, the characters at Nos. 51 and 52 denoting footprints of a bear made by him, impressions of which are sometimes found in the vicinity of lodges occupied by his intended victims. The trees shown upon either side of No. 50 signify a forest, the location usually sought by bad Midē´ and witches.
People who have this power are sometimes called witches, which is discussed in more detail elsewhere. The illustration, No. 169 50, shows such an individual disguised as a bear, while the characters at Nos. 51 and 52 represent bear footprints left by him, traces of which are sometimes found near the lodges of his intended victims. The trees depicted on either side of No. 50 indicate a forest, the typical location chosen by bad Midē´ and witches.
If a second degree Midē´ succeeds in his desire to become a member of the third degree, he proceeds in a manner similar to that before described; he gives feasts to the instructing and four officiating Midē´, and offers prayers to Dzhe Man´idō for favor and success. No. 53 denotes that the candidate now personates the bear—not one of the malignant man´idōs, but one of the sacred man´idōs who are believed to be present during the ceremonials of initiation of the second degree. He is seated before his sacred drum, and when the proper time arrives the Serpent Man´idō (No. 54)—who has until this opposed his advancement—now arches its body, and beneath it he crawls and advances toward the door (No. 55) of the third degree (No. 56) of the Midē´wiwin, where he encounters two (Nos. 57 and 58) of the four Panther Spirits, the guardians of this degree.
If a second degree Midē´ achieves his goal of becoming a member of the third degree, he goes through a similar process as described before; he hosts feasts for the instructing Midē´ and the four officiating Midē´, and he offers prayers to Dzhe Man´idō for favor and success. No. 53 indicates that the candidate now takes on the role of the bear—not one of the evil man´idōs, but one of the sacred man´idōs believed to be present during the initiation ceremonies of the second degree. He sits before his sacred drum, and when the right moment arrives, the Serpent Man´idō (No. 54)—which has previously opposed his advancement—now arches its body, and he crawls beneath it, moving toward the door (No. 55) of the third degree (No. 56) of the Midē´wiwin, where he meets two (Nos. 57 and 58) of the four Panther Spirits, the guardians of this degree.
Nos. 61 to 76 indicate midē´ spirits who inhabit the structure of this degree, and the number of human forms in excess of those shown in connection with the second degree indicates a correspondingly higher and more sacred character. When an Indian has passed this, initiation he becomes very skillful in his profession of a Midē´. The powers which he possessed in the second degree may become augmented. He is represented in No. 77 with arms extended, and with lines crossing his body and arms denoting darkness and obscurity, which signifies his ability to grasp from the invisible world the knowledge and means to accomplish extraordinary deeds. He feels more confident of prompt response and assistance from the sacred man´idōs and his knowledge of them becomes more widely extended.
Nos. 61 to 76 show the midē´ spirits that inhabit this level, and the extra human forms compared to those in the second degree indicate a higher and more sacred nature. Once an Indian completes this initiation, he becomes very skilled in his role as a Midē´. The powers he had in the second degree may increase. In No. 77, he is depicted with arms outstretched and lines crossing his body and arms representing darkness and obscurity, symbolizing his ability to draw knowledge and resources from the invisible world to perform extraordinary acts. He feels more confident in receiving quick support and aid from the sacred man´idōs, and his understanding of them expands greatly.
Nos. 59 and 60 are two of the four Panther Spirits who are the special guardians of the third degree lodge.
Nos. 59 and 60 are two of the four Panther Spirits who serve as the special guardians of the third-degree lodge.
To enter the fourth and highest degree of the society requires a greater number of feasts than before, and the candidate, who continues to personate the Bear Spirit, again uses his sacred drum, as he is shown sitting before it in No. 78, and chants more prayers to Dzhe Man´idō for his favor. This degree is guarded by the greatest number and the most powerful of malevolent spirits, who make a last effort to prevent a candidate’s entrance at the door (No. 79) of the fourth degree structure (No. 80). The chief opponents to be overcome, through the assistance of Dzhe Man´idō, are two Panther Spirits (Nos. 81 and 82) at the eastern entrance, and two Bear Spirits (Nos. 83 and 84) at the western exit. Other bad spirits are about the structure, who frequently gain possession and are then enabled to make strong and prolonged resistance to the candidate’s entrance. 170 The chiefs of this group of malevolent beings are Bears (Nos. 88 and 96), the Panther (No. 91), the Lynx (No. 97), and many others whose names they have forgotten, their positions being indicated at Nos. 85, 86, 87, 89, 90, 92, 93, 94, and 95, all but the last resembling characters ordinarily employed to designate serpents.
To reach the fourth and highest level of the society requires more celebrations than before, and the candidate, who still represents the Bear Spirit, once again uses his sacred drum, as depicted in No. 78, and recites additional prayers to Dzhe Man´idō for his blessing. This degree is protected by the largest number and the most powerful malevolent spirits, who make a final attempt to stop a candidate from entering at the door (No. 79) of the fourth degree structure (No. 80). The main adversaries to overcome, with the help of Dzhe Man´idō, are two Panther Spirits (Nos. 81 and 82) at the eastern entrance and two Bear Spirits (Nos. 83 and 84) at the western exit. Other malevolent spirits surround the structure, who often take control and can create strong and lasting resistance to the candidate’s entry. 170 The leaders of this group of evil beings are Bears (Nos. 88 and 96), the Panther (No. 91), the Lynx (No. 97), and many others whose names have been forgotten, with their locations marked at Nos. 85, 86, 87, 89, 90, 92, 93, 94, and 95, all but the last resembling characters typically used to represent serpents.
The power with which it is possible to become endowed after passing through the fourth degree is expressed by the outline of a human figure (No. 98), upon which are a number of spots indicating that the body is covered with the mī´gis or sacred shells, symbolical of the Midē´wiwin. These spots designate the places where the Midē´ priests, during the initiation, shot into his body the mī´gis and the lines connecting them in order that all the functions of the several corresponding parts or organs of the body may be exercised.
The ability to gain power after completing the fourth degree is shown by the outline of a human figure (No. 98), on which there are several spots indicating that the body is covered with the mī'gis or sacred shells, symbolizing the Midē'wiwin. These spots mark the areas where the Midē' priests, during initiation, inserted the mī'gis into his body, and the lines connecting them ensure that all functions of the various corresponding body parts or organs can be activated.
The ideal fourth degree Midē´ is presumed to be in a position to accomplish the greatest feats in necromancy and magic. He is not only endowed with the power of reading the thoughts and intentions of others, as is pictorially indicated by the mī´gis spot upon the top of the head, but to call forth the shadow (soul) and retain it within his grasp at pleasure. At this stage of his pretensions, he is encroaching upon the prerogatives of the Jĕs´sakkīd´, and is then recognized as one, as he usually performs within the Jĕs´sakkân or Jĕs´sakkīd´ lodge, commonly designated “the Jugglery.”
The ideal fourth-degree Midē’ is believed to be in a position to achieve the greatest accomplishments in necromancy and magic. He has not only the ability to read the thoughts and intentions of others, as shown by the mī’gis spot on the top of the head, but can also summon the shadow (soul) and hold onto it at will. At this point in his journey, he starts to step into the domain of the Jĕs’sakkīd’, and is then recognized as one, as he typically operates within the Jĕs’sakkân or Jĕs’sakkīd’ lodge, commonly referred to as “the Jugglery.”
The ten small circular objects upon the upper part of the record may have been some personal marks of the original owner; their import was not known to my informants and they do not refer to any portion of the history or ceremonies or the Midē´wiwin.
The ten small circular objects on the upper part of the record might have been personal marks made by the original owner; my informants didn’t know what they meant, and they don't relate to any part of the history or ceremonies of the Midē´wiwin.
Extending toward the left from the end of the fourth degree inclosure is an angular pathway (No. 99), which represents the course to be followed by the Midē´ after he has attained this high distinction. On account of his position his path is often beset with dangers, as indicated by the right angles, and temptations which may lead him astray; the points at which he may possibly deviate from the true course of propriety are designated by projections branching off obliquely toward the right and left (No. 100). The ovoid figure (No. 101) at the end of this path is termed Wai-ĕk´-ma-yŏk´—End of the road—and is alluded to in the ritual, as will be observed hereafter, as the end of the world, i.e., the end of the individual’s existence. The number of vertical strokes (No. 102) within the ovoid figure signify the original owner to have been a fourth degree Midē´ for a period of 14 years.
Extending to the left from the end of the fourth degree enclosure is an angular pathway (No. 99), representing the route the Midē´ should take after achieving this high honor. Because of his position, his path is often filled with dangers, shown by the right angles, and temptations that could mislead him; the points where he might stray from the proper course are marked by projections slanting off to the right and left (No. 100). The oval shape (No. 101) at the end of this path is called Wai-ĕk´-ma-yŏk´—End of the road—and is referenced in the ritual, as will be shown later, as the end of the world, meaning the end of the individual’s existence. The number of vertical lines (No. 102) within the oval indicates that the original owner was a fourth degree Midē´ for 14 years.
The outline of the Midē´wigân (No. 103) not only denotes that the same individual was a member of the Midē´wiwin, but the thirteen vertical strokes shown in Nos. 104 and 105 indicate that he was chief Midē´ priest of the society for that number of years.
The outline of the Midē'wigân (No. 103) not only shows that the same person was a member of the Midē'wiwin, but the thirteen vertical lines in Nos. 104 and 105 indicate that he was the chief Midē' priest of the society for that many years.
The outline of a Midē´wigân as shown at No. 106, with the place upon the interior designating the location of the sacred post (No. 171 107) and the stone (No. 108) against which the sick are placed during the time of treatment, signifies the owner to have practiced his calling of the exorcism of demons. But that he also visited the sick beyond the acknowledged jurisdiction of the society in which he resided, is indicated by the path (No. 109) leading around the sacred inclosure.
The outline of a Midē’wigân as shown at No. 106, with the spot on the inside marking the location of the sacred post (No. 171 107) and the stone (No. 108) where the sick are placed during treatment, indicates that the owner has practiced the calling of exorcising demons. However, the path (No. 109) leading around the sacred enclosure suggests that he also visited the sick beyond the recognized jurisdiction of the society he belonged to.
Upon that portion of the chart immediately above the fourth degree lodge is shown the outline of a Midē´wiwin (No. 110), with a path (No. 114), leading toward the west to a circle (No. 111), within which is another similar structure (No. 112) whose longest diameter is at right angles to the path, signifying that it is built so that its entrance is at the north. This is the Dzhibai´ Midē´wigân or Ghost Lodge.
Upon that part of the chart just above the fourth degree lodge, the outline of a Midē´wiwin (No. 110) is shown, with a path (No. 114) leading west toward a circle (No. 111). Inside that circle is another similar structure (No. 112), whose longest diameter is perpendicular to the path, indicating that its entrance is facing north. This is the Dzhibai´ Midē´wigân or Ghost Lodge.
Around the interior of the circle are small V-shaped characters denoting the places occupied by the spirits of the departed, who are presided over by the Dzhibai´ Midē´, literally Shadow Midē´.
Around the inside of the circle are small V-shaped symbols marking the spots occupied by the spirits of the deceased, who are overseen by the Dzhibai´ Midē´, literally Shadow Midē´.
No. 113 represents the Kŏ´-kó-kŏ-ō´ (Owl) passing from the Midē´wigân to the Land of the Setting Sun, the place of the dead, upon the road of the dead, indicated by the pathway at No. 114. This man´idō is personated by a candidate for the first degree of the Midē´wiwin when giving a feast to the dead in honor of the shadow of him who had been dedicated to the Midē´wiwin and whose place is now to be taken by the giver of the feast.
No. 113 represents the Kŏ´-kó-kŏ-ō´ (Owl) moving from the Midē´wigân to the Land of the Setting Sun, the realm of the dead, along the road of the dead, which is shown by the pathway at No. 114. This man´idō is represented by a candidate for the first degree of the Midē´wiwin during a feast for the dead, honoring the spirit of someone who was dedicated to the Midē´wiwin and whose role is now to be fulfilled by the host of the feast.
Upon the back of the Midē´ record, above described, is the personal record of the original owner, as shown in Pl. III B. Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 represent the four degrees of the society into which he has been initiated, or, to use the phraseology of an Ojibwa, “through which he has gone.” This “passing through” is further illustrated by the bear tracks, he having personated the Makwa´ Man´idō or Bear Spirit, considered to be the highest and most powerful of the guardian spirits of the fourth degree wigwam.
Upon the back of the Midē´ record described earlier, there's a personal record of the original owner, as shown in Pl. III B. Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 represent the four levels of the society he has been initiated into, or, in the words of an Ojibwa, “through which he has gone.” This “passing through” is further illustrated by the bear tracks, as he has taken on the role of the Makwa´ Man´idō or Bear Spirit, which is considered the highest and most powerful of the guardian spirits of the fourth-degree wigwam.
The illustration presented in Pl. III C represents the outlines of a birch-bark record (reduced to one-third) found among the effects of a lately deceased Midē´ from Leech Lake, Minnesota. This record, together with a number of other curious articles, composed the outfit of the Midē´, but the Rev. James A. Gilfillan of White Earth, through whose courtesy I was permitted to examine the objects, could give me no information concerning their use. Since that time, however, I have had an opportunity of consulting with one of the chief priests of the Leech Lake Society, through whom I have obtained some interesting data concerning them.
The illustration shown in Pl. III C displays the outlines of a birch-bark record (scaled down to one-third) found among the belongings of a recently deceased Midē´ from Leech Lake, Minnesota. This record, along with several other intriguing items, made up the Midē´'s collection. However, the Rev. James A. Gilfillan of White Earth, who kindly allowed me to examine the objects, couldn't provide any information about their use. Since then, though, I've had the chance to talk with one of the chief priests of the Leech Lake Society, who has shared some interesting details about them.
The chart represents the owner to have been a Midē´ of the second degree, as indicated by the two outlines of the respective structures at Nos. 1 and 2, the place of the sacred posts being marked at Nos. 3 and 4. Nos. 5, 6, 7, and 8 are Midē´ priests holding their Midē´ bags as in the ceremony of initiation. The disks represented at Nos. 172 9, 10, 11, 12, and 13 denote the sacred drum, which may be used by him during his initiation, while Nos. 14, 15, 16, and 17 denote that he was one of the four officiating priests of the Midē´wigân at his place of residence. Each of these figures is represented as holding their sacred bags as during the ceremonies. No. 18 denotes the path he has been pursuing since he became a Midē´, while at Nos. 19 and 20 diverging lines signify that his course is beset with temptations and enemies, as referred to in the description of the Red Lake chart, Pl. III A.
The chart shows that the owner was a Midē´ of the second degree, as shown by the two outlines of the structures at Nos. 1 and 2, with the locations of the sacred posts marked at Nos. 3 and 4. Nos. 5, 6, 7, and 8 are Midē´ priests holding their Midē´ bags as part of the initiation ceremony. The disks shown at Nos. 172 9, 10, 11, 12, and 13 represent the sacred drum, which he may use during his initiation, while Nos. 14, 15, 16, and 17 indicate that he was one of the four officiating priests of the Midē´wigân at his home. Each of these figures is depicted holding their sacred bags as they do during the ceremonies. No. 18 represents the path he has followed since becoming a Midē´, while Nos. 19 and 20 show diverging lines that indicate his journey is filled with temptations and enemies, as described in the explanation of the Red Lake chart, Pl. III A.
The remaining objects found among the effects of the Midē´ referred to will be described and figured hereafter.
The other items found among the belongings of the Midē´ mentioned will be described and illustrated later.
Plate IV. Sikas´sige’s Record.
Plate IV. Sikas'sige's Record.
The diagram represented on Pl. IV is a reduced copy of a record made by Sikas´sigĕ, a Mille Lacs Ojibwa Midē´ of the second degree, now resident at White Earth.
The diagram shown on Pl. IV is a smaller version of a record created by Sikas´sigĕ, a Mille Lacs Ojibwa Midē´ of the second degree, who now lives at White Earth.
The chart illustrating pictorially the general plan of the several degrees is a copy of a record in the possession of the chief Midē´ at Mille Lacs in 1830, at which time Sikas´sigĕ, at the age of 10 years, received his first degree. For a number of years thereafter Sikas´sigĕ received continued instruction from his father Baiē´dzhĕk, and although he never publicly received advancement beyond the second degree of the society, his wife became a fourth degree priestess, at whose initiation he was permitted to be present.
The chart showing the overall plan of the various degrees is a copy of a record held by the chief Midē´ at Mille Lacs in 1830. At that time, Sikas´sigĕ, who was 10 years old, received his first degree. For several years after that, Sikas´sigĕ continued to learn from his father, Baiē´dzhĕk. Even though he never publicly advanced beyond the second degree of the society, his wife became a fourth-degree priestess, and he was allowed to be present at her initiation.
Plate V. Origin of Âni´shinâ´bēg.
Plate V. Origin of Anishinabeg.
Since his residence at White Earth Sikas´sigĕ has become one of the officiating priests of the society at that place. One version given by him of the origin of the Indians is presented in the following tradition, a pictorial representation having also been prepared of which Pl. V is a reduced copy:
Since moving to White Earth, Sikas' sigĕ has become one of the officiating priests of the society there. One version he provides about the origin of the Indians is shared in the following tradition, and a pictorial representation has also been created, of which Pl. V is a reduced copy:
In the beginning, Dzhe Man´idō (No. 1) created the Midē´ Man´idōs. He first made two men (Nos. 2 and 3) and two women (Nos. 4 and 5), but they lacked the ability to think or reason. Then Dzhe Man´idō (No. 1) made them rational beings. He held them in his hands so they could multiply; he paired them up, and from this, the Indians were born. Once there were people, he placed them on the earth, but he soon noticed that they were vulnerable to sickness, suffering, and death, and that without the Sacred Medicine, they would quickly become extinct.
Between the position held by Dzhe Man´idō and the earth were four lesser spirits (Nos. 6, 7, 8, and 9) that Dzhe Man´idō decided to communicate with and share the mysteries that could benefit the Indians. He first spoke to the spirit at No. 6 and conveyed everything he needed to say. This spirit then passed the information on to No. 7, who relayed it to No. 8, who also communicated with No. 9. They all gathered for a council and decided to invite the four wind gods at Nos. 10, 11, 12, and 13. After discussing what would be best for the comfort and well-being of the Indians, these spirits agreed to ask Dzhe Man´idō to share the Mystery of the Sacred Medicine with the people.
Dzhe Man'idō then went to the Sun Spirit (No. 14) and asked him to go to earth and teach the people as the council had decided. The Sun Spirit, appearing as a little boy, went to earth and lived with a woman (No. 15) who had a little boy of her own.
This family went away in the autumn to hunt, and during the winter, this woman’s 173 son passed away. The parents were so distressed that they decided to return to the village and bury him there; so they prepared to leave, and each evening as they traveled, they would set up several poles to keep the body off the ground and protect it from wild animals. While the dead boy was hanging on the poles, the adopted child—who was the Sun Spirit—would play around the camp and entertain himself. He eventually told his adoptive father that he felt sorry for him and his mother because of their sadness. The adopted son said he could bring his deceased brother back to life, which surprised the parents greatly, and they wanted to know how it could happen.
The adopted boy then asked the group to hurry to the village, where he said, “Have the women make a wig´iwam out of bark (No. 16), wrap the dead boy in birch bark, and place the body on the ground in the center of the wig´iwam.” The next morning, after this was done, family and friends entered the lodge and sat around the body.
After sitting quietly for a while, they saw a bear (No. 17) approach through the doorway. It slowly moved towards the wigwam, went inside, and positioned itself in front of the dead body. The bear let out a series of sounds, "hŭ, hŭ, hŭ, hŭ," as it circled around the body to the left. As the bear moved, the body started to tremble, and the trembling grew stronger with each round the bear made. After it had circled four times, the body came back to life and stood up. Then, the bear called out to the father, who was sitting in the far right corner of the wigwam, and said the following words:
Nōs | ka-wī´-na | ni´-shi-na´-bi | wis-sī´ | a´-ya-wī´-an | man´-i-dō | nin-gī´-sis. |
My father | is not | an Indian | not | you are | a spirit | son. |
Be-mai´-a-mī´-nik | ni´-dzhĭ | man´-i-dō | mī-a-zhĭ´-gwa | tshí-gĭ-a´-we-ân´. |
Insomuch | my fellow | spirit | now | as you are. |
Nōs | a-zhĭ´-gwa | a-sē´-ma | tshi´-a-tō´-yēk. | A´-mĭ-kŭn´-dem |
My father | now | tobacco | you shall put. | He speaks of |
mi-ē´-ta | â´-wi-dink´ | dzhi-gŏsh´-kwi-tōt´ | wen´-dzhi-bi-mâ´-di-zid´-o-ma´ |
only | once | to be able to do it | why he shall live here |
a-gâ´-wa | bi-mâ-dĭ-zĭd´-mi-o-ma´; | ni-dzhĭ | man´-i-dō |
now | that he scarcely lives; | my fellow | spirit |
mí-a-zhĭ´-gwa | tshí-gĭ-wĕ´-ân. |
now I shall go | home. |
The little bear boy (No. 17) was the one who did this. He then stayed with the Indians (No. 18) and taught them the secrets of the Grand Medicine (No. 19). Once he finished, he told his adopted father that since his mission was complete, he would return to his kindred spirits. The Indians no longer had to fear sickness, as they now had the Grand Medicine that would allow them to live. He also mentioned that his spirit could bring a body to life only once, and now he would go back to the sun, from which they would feel his influence.
This is called Kwí-wĭ-sĕns´ wĕ-dī´-shĭ-tshī gē-wī-nĭp—“Little-boy-his-work.”
This is called Kwí-wĭ-sĕns´ wĕ-dī´-shĭ-tshī gē-wī-nĭp—“Little-boy-his-work.”
From subsequent information it was learned that the line No. 22 denotes the earth, and that, being considered as one step in the course of initiation into the Midē´wiwin, three others must be taken before a candidate can be admitted. These steps, or rests, as they are denominated (Nos. 23, 24, and 25), are typified by four distinct gifts of goods, which must be remitted to the Midē´ priests before the ceremony can take place.
From further information, it was discovered that line No. 22 represents the earth, and that, as one part of the initiation process into the Midē´wiwin, three additional steps must be completed before a candidate can be accepted. These steps, or rests, as they are called (Nos. 23, 24, and 25), are symbolized by four different gifts of goods that must be given to the Midē´ priests before the ceremony can proceed.
Nos. 18 and 19 are repetitions of the figures alluded to in the tradition (Nos. 16 and 17) to signify that the candidate must personate the Makwa´ Man´idō—Bear Spirit—when entering the Midē´wiwin (No. 19). No. 20 is the Midē´ Man´idō as Ki´tshi Man´idō is termed 174 by the Midē´ priests. The presence of horns attached to the head is a common symbol of superior power found in connection with the figures of human and divine forms in many Midē´ songs and other mnemonic records. No. 21 represents the earth’s surface, similar to that designated at No. 22.
Nos. 18 and 19 repeat the figures mentioned in the tradition (Nos. 16 and 17) to indicate that the candidate must embody the Makwa´ Man´idō—Bear Spirit—when joining the Midē´wiwin (No. 19). No. 20 is the Midē´ Man´idō, as Ki´tshi Man´idō is referred to by the Midē´ priests. The presence of horns on the head commonly symbolizes superior power and is associated with both human and divine figures in many Midē´ songs and other mnemonic records. No. 21 depicts the earth's surface, similar to what's shown in No. 22.
Upon comparing the preceding tradition of the creation of the Indians with the following, which pertains to the descent to earth of Mi´nabō´zho, there appears to be some discrepancy, which could not be explained by Sikas´sigĕ, because he had forgotten the exact sequence of events; but from information derived from other Midē´ it is evident that there have been joined together two myths, the intervening circumstances being part of the tradition given below in connection with the narrative relating to the chart on Pl. III A.
Upon comparing the earlier tradition about the creation of the Indians with the next one that involves the descent of Mi´nabō´zho, there seems to be some inconsistency, which Sikas´sigĕ couldn't clarify because he had forgotten the exact order of events. However, information from other Midē´ indicates that two myths have been combined, with the intervening details being part of the tradition described below in relation to the chart on Pl. III A.
This chart, which was in possession of the Mille Lacs chief Baiē´dzhĕk, was copied by him from that belonging to his preceptor at La Pointe about the year 1800, and although the traditions given by Sikas´sigĕ is similar to the one surviving at Red Lake, the diagram is an interesting variant for the reason that there is a greater amount of detail in the delineation of objects mentioned in the tradition.
This chart, which belonged to the Mille Lacs chief Baiē´dzhĕk, was copied by him from his mentor's chart at La Pointe around the year 1800. Although the traditions shared by Sikas´sigĕ are similar to the one that exists at Red Lake, this diagram is an interesting variation because it includes more details in the depiction of the objects mentioned in the tradition.
By referring to Pl. IV it will be noted that the circle, No. 1, resembles the corresponding circle at the beginning of the record on Pl. III, A, with this difference, that the four quarters of the globe inhabited by the Ani´shinâ´bēg are not designated between the cardinal points at which the Otter appeared, and also that the central island, only alluded to there (Pl. III A), is here inserted.
By looking at Pl. IV, you’ll notice that circle No. 1 looks like the corresponding circle at the start of the record on Pl. III, A. The difference is that the four quarters of the globe where the Ani´shinâ´bēg live aren’t marked between the cardinal points where the Otter appeared, and also that the central island, which was only mentioned there (Pl. III A), is included here.
The correct manner of arranging the two pictorial records, Pls. III A and IV, is by placing the outline of the earth’s surface (Pl. V, No. 21) upon the island indicated in Pl. IV, No. 6, so that the former stands vertically and at right angles to the latter; for the reason that the first half of the tradition pertains to the consultation held between Ki´tshi Man´idō and the four lesser spirits which is believed to have occurred above the earth’s surface. According to Sikas´sigĕ the two charts should be joined as suggested in the accompanying illustration, Fig. 2.
The proper way to arrange the two pictorial records, Pls. III A and IV, is to place the outline of the earth’s surface (Pl. V, No. 21) on the island shown in Pl. IV, No. 6, so that the former is vertical and at a right angle to the latter. This is because the first half of the tradition relates to the discussion held between Ki´tshi Man´idō and the four lesser spirits, which is thought to have taken place above the earth’s surface. According to Sikas´sigĕ, the two charts should be aligned as shown in the accompanying illustration, Fig. 2.
Fig.
2.—Sikas´sigĕ’s combined charts, showing descent of
Min´abō´zho.
complete figure
Fig. 2.—Sikaśsigĕ’s combined charts, illustrating the lineage of Mińabṓzho.
complete figure
175 Sikas´sigĕ’s explanation of the Mille Lacs chart (Pl. IV) is substantially as follows:
175 Sikas´sigĕ’s explanation of the Mille Lacs chart (Pl. IV) goes something like this:
When Mi´nabō´zho came down to earth to give the Ani´shinâ´bēg the Midē´wiwin, he left them this chart, Midē´wigwas´. Ki´tshi Man´idō saw that his people on earth lacked the means to protect themselves from disease and death, so he sent Mi´nabō´zho to share the sacred gift with them. Mi´nabō´zho appeared over the waters, and while he was thinking about how to communicate with the people, he heard a laugh, like the call of an otter. He saw something black appear on the waters to the west (No. 2) before it quickly disappeared beneath the surface. Then it emerged at the northern horizon (No. 3), which made Mi´nabō´zho happy because he thought he now had someone through whom he could convey the message given to him by Ki´tshi Man´idō. When the black object went underwater at the north and reappeared in the east (No. 4), Mi´nabō´zho wished it would come to him in the middle of the waters, but it instead disappeared and came back in the south (No. 5), where it sank out of sight again, only to reappear in the west (No. 2). Mi´nabō´zho then asked it to approach the center where there was an island (No. 6), and it did. This was Ni´gĭk, the Otter, and for this reason, he is given responsibility for the first degree of the Midē´wiwin (Nos. 35 and 36), where his spirit always resides during initiation and when healing the sick.
Then Ni'gĭk asked Mi'nabō'zho, “Why are you here?” Mi'nabō'zho replied, “I feel sorry for the Ani'shinâ'bēg and want to help them live. Ki'tshi Man'idō gave me the ability to help them protect themselves from illness and death, and through you, I will share the Midē'wiwin with them and teach them the sacred rites.”
Then Mi'nabō'zho built a Midē'wigân where he taught the Otter all the secrets of the Midē'wiwin. The Otter sat in front of the Midē'wigân for four days (Nos. 7, 8, 9, and 10), soaking up the sun. After that, he approached the entrance (No. 14), but his progress was stopped (No. 11) when he saw two bad spirits (Nos. 12 and 13) guarding it. Thanks to the powers of Mi'nabō'zho, he was able to get past them. When he entered the sacred lodge (No. 15), the first thing he saw was the sacred stone (No. 16) where sick people were to sit or lie down during the ceremony to restore their health. He then saw a post (No. 17) that was painted red with a green band at the top. A sick person would also need to pray to the stone and the post while they were in the Midē'wigân because the Midē' spirits, whose help he sought, were within them. The Otter was then taken to the center of the Midē'wigân, where he picked up the mī'gis (No. 18) from a pile of sacred objects that were part of the gifts given by Ki'tshi Man'idō. The eight man'idōs surrounding the Midē'wigân (Nos. 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, and 26) were also sent by Ki'tshi Man'idō to protect the lodge from the entrance of bad spirits.
A life is represented by the line No. 27, the signification of the short lines (Nos. 28, 29, 30, and 31) denoting that the course of human progress is beset by temptations and trials which may be the cause of one’s departure from such course of conduct as is deemed proper, and the beliefs taught by the Midē´. When one arrives at middle age (No. 32) his course for the remaining period of life is usually without any special events, as indicated by the plain line No. 27, extending from middle age (No. 32) to the end of one’s existence (No. 33). The short lines at Nos. 28, 29, 30, and 31, indicating departure from the path of propriety, terminate in rounded spots and signify, literally, “lecture places,” because when a Midē´ feels himself failing in duty or vacillating in faith he must renew professions by giving a feast and lecturing to his confreres, thus regaining his strength to resist evil doing—such as making use of his powers in harming his kinsmen, teaching that which was not given him by Ki´tshi Man´idō through Mi´nabō´zho, etc. His heart must be cleansed and his tongue guarded.
A life is represented by line No. 27, with the shorter lines (Nos. 28, 29, 30, and 31) showing that the journey of human progress is filled with temptations and challenges that can lead one off the proper path and away from the teachings of the Midḗ. When a person reaches middle age (No. 32), their remaining years usually pass without any significant events, as shown by the straight line No. 27 stretching from middle age (No. 32) to the end of life (No. 33). The shorter lines at Nos. 28, 29, 30, and 31, which indicate straying from the path of righteousness, end in rounded spots and literally mean "lecture places." This is because when a Midḗ feels he's failing in his duties or wavering in his faith, he must reaffirm his commitments by hosting a feast and giving a talk to his peers, regaining his strength to resist wrongdoing—such as using his powers to harm his relatives or teaching what was not given to him by Ki'tshi Manidō through Mi'nabō'zho, etc. He must cleanse his heart and guard his tongue.
To resume the tradition of the course pursued by the Otter, Sikas´sigĕ said:
To continue the tradition of the path taken by the Otter, Sikas´sigĕ said:
The Otter then walked around the inside of the Midē'wigân (No. 34) and eventually sat down in the west, where Mi'nabō'zho shot the sacred mī'gis from his Midē' bag into his body. Mi'nabō'zho then said, “This is your lodge, and you will own it forever (Nos. 35 and 36), and eight Midē' Man'idōs (Nos. 19-26) shall protect it at night.”
The Otter was brought to the entrance (No. 37) of the second-degree structure (No. 38), which he noticed was guarded by two evil man'idōs (Nos. 39 and 40) who blocked his way, but Mi'nabō'zho chased them off. When the Otter walked through the door, he saw the sacred stone (No. 41) and two posts (Nos. 42, 43). The first post, closest to him, was painted red with a green band around the top, and another in the middle, topped with a bunch of little feathers. The other post (No. 43) was also painted red, but only had a green band at the top, similar to the first-degree post. Nos. 44 and 45 are the spots where sacred objects and gifts are placed. This degree of the Midē'wiwin is protected at night by twelve Midē Man'idōs (Nos. 46 to 57) assigned there by Ki'tshi Man'idō, and this degree is overseen by the Thunder Bird as indicated in Nos. 58, 59.
The circles (Nos. 60, 61, and 62) at either end of the outline of the structure denoting the degree and beneath it are connected by a line (No. 63) as in the preceding degree, and are a mere repetition to denote the course of conduct to be pursued by the Midē´. The points (Nos. 64, 65, 66, and 67), at the termini of the shorter lines, also refer to the feasts and lectures to be given in case of need.
The circles (Nos. 60, 61, and 62) at each end of the structure outline mark the degree, and below that, they are linked by a line (No. 63), similar to the previous degree, and simply repeat to indicate the conduct that should be followed by the Midē´. The points (Nos. 64, 65, 66, and 67) at the ends of the shorter lines also relate to the feasts and lectures that will be held if necessary.
After the Otter went around the inside of the Midē´wigân four times, he sat down in the west and faced the degree post. That's when Mi´nabō´zho shot the mī´gis into his body again, giving him new life. Then, the Otter was instructed to take a “sweat bath” once a day for four days in a row to get ready for the next degree. (This number is indicated at the rounded spots at Nos. 68, 69, 70, and 71.)
The third level of the Midē´wiwin (No. 72) is protected during the day by two Midē´ spirits (Nos. 73, 74) near the eastern entrance and by the Makwa´ Man´idō inside the enclosure (Nos. 75 and 76). At night, eighteen Midē´ Man´idōs (Nos. 77 to 94) guard it, placed there by Ki´tshi Man´idō. When the Otter approached the entrance (No. 95), he was once again stopped by two evil man´idōs (Nos. 96 and 97) who tried to block his entry. However, Mi´nibō´zho defeated them, allowing the Otter to enter. Just inside the door, on each side, the Otter saw a post (Nos. 98 and 99), and at the western door or exit, there were two matching posts (Nos. 100 and 101). These represented the four legs of the Makwa´ Man´idō, or Bear Spirit, who serves as the daytime guardian and the owner of the third level. The Otter then noticed the sacred stone (No. 102) and two piles of sacred objects (Nos. 103 and 104) that Mi´nabō´zho had placed there, along with three degree posts (Nos. 105, 106, and 107). The first post (No. 105) was a plain cedar post with the bark still on it but sharpened at the top; the second post (No. 106) was red with a green band around the top and one around the middle, similar to the second degree; and the third (No. 107) was a cross painted red, with the tips painted green. [The vertical line No. 108 was noted to have no connection to anything related to the tradition.] After the Otter examined the inside of the Midē´wigân, he made four circuits and then took his place in the west, where he sat facing the sacred degree posts. Mi´nabō´zho then, for the third time, shot the mī´gis into his body, enhancing the powers he already had, and prepared for the fourth degree of the Midē´wiwin.
Other objects appearing upon the chart were subsequently explained as follows:
Other items shown on the chart were later explained like this:
The four trees (Nos. 109, 110, 111, and 112), with one planted at each of the four corners of the Midē´wigân, are typically cedar; however, pine can be used as a substitute when cedar is unavailable. The repeated circles Nos. 113, 114, and 115, along with connecting line No. 116 and the short lines at Nos. 117, 118, 119, and 120, have the same meanings as in the previous two degrees.
After the Otter had been thoroughly interrogated, he got ready for the fourth and highest level by taking a steam bath every day for four straight days (Nos. 121, 122, 123, and 124). Then, as he made his way to the Midē´wigân, he stumbled upon a wig´iwam made of brush (No. 179), which was the home of Makwa´ Man´idō, the Bear Spirit, who protected the four doors of the sacred building.
The four rows of spots have reference to the four entrances of the Midē´wigân of the fourth degree. The signification of the spots near the larger circle, just beneath the “Bear’s nest” could not be explained by Sikas´sigĕ, but the row of spots (No. 117) along the horizontal line leading to the entrance of the inclosure were denominated steps, or stages of progress, equal to as many days—one spot denoting one day—which must elapse before the Otter was permitted to view the entrance.
The four rows of spots refer to the four entrances of the Midē'wigân of the fourth degree. The meaning of the spots near the larger circle, just below the "Bear’s nest," couldn't be explained by Sikas´sigĕ, but the row of spots (No. 117) along the horizontal line leading to the entrance of the enclosure was called steps, or stages of progress, equivalent to as many days—one spot indicating one day—that needed to pass before the Otter could see the entrance.
![]() |
Fig. 4.—Peep-hole post. |
When the Otter reached the fourth degree (No. 118), he came across a short post 178 (No. 119) that had a small opening. The post was painted green on the side he approached and red on the side facing the Midē´wigân [see __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]. Before he could look through it, he paused and asked for the favor of Ki´tshi Man´idō, so that the evil man´idōs would be driven away from his path. When the Otter finally looked through the post, he saw that the inside of the enclosure was filled with Midē´ Man´idos, ready to welcome him and assist with his initiation. The two Midē´ Man´idos at the eastern entrance (Nos. 120 and 121) forced the evil man´idōs (Nos. 122 and 123) to leave and allowed the Otter to enter through the door (No. 124). Then the Otter saw the sacred stone (No. 125) and the five piles of sacred objects that Minabō´zho had placed (Nos. 126, 127, 128, 129, and 130) near the four degree posts (Nos. 131, 132, 133, and 134). In order of their significance, the first was painted red, with a green band around the top; the second was red with two green bands, one at the top and another in the middle; the third had a red cross, with the tips of the arms and the top of the post painted green; and the fourth was a square post, with the side facing east painted white, the side facing south green, the side facing west red, and the side facing north black.
The two sets of sticks (Nos. 135 and 136) near the eastern and western doors represent the legs of Makwa´ Man´idō, the Bear Spirit. After the Otter observed all of this, he circled the interior of the Midē´wigân four times, then sat in the west, facing the degree posts. Mi´nabō´zho then approached him and for the fourth time injected the sacred mī´gis into his body, giving him life that will last forever. Mi´nabō´zho then said to the Otter, “This degree belongs to Ki´tshi Man´ido, the Great Spirit (Nos. 137 and 138), who will always be present when you perform the sacred rite for any of your people.” At night, the Midē´ Man´idōs (Nos. 139 to 162) will protect the Midē´wigân, as they are sent by Ki´tshi Man´ido to do so. The Bear’s nest (Nos. 163 and 164) just beyond the northern and southern doors (Nos. 165 and 166) of the Midē´wigân are the spots where Makwa´ Man´idō stands guard at the doors.
Then the Otter built a wigwam and offered four prayers (Nos. 167, 168, 169, and 170) for the ceremonies of the Midē´wiwin, which Ki´tshi Man´idō had given him.
The following supplemental explanations were added by Sikas´sigĕ, viz: The four vertical lines at the outer angles of the lodge structure (Nos. 171, 172, 173, and 174), and four similar ones on the inner corners (Nos. 175, 176, 177, and 178), represent eight cedar trees planted there by the Midē´ at the time of preparing the Midē´wigân for the reception of candidates. The circles Nos. 179, 180, and 181, and the connecting line, are a reproduction of similar ones shown in the three preceding degrees, and signify the course of a Midē’s life—that it should be without fault and in strict accordance with the teachings of the Midē´wiwin. The short lines, terminating in circles Nos. 182, 183, 184, and 185, allude to temptations which beset the Midē’s path, and he shall, when so tempted, offer at these points feasts and lectures, or, in other words, “professions of faith.” The three lines Nos. 186, 187, and 188, consisting of four 179 spots each, which radiate from the larger circle at No. 179 and that before mentioned at No. 116, symbolize the four bear nests and their respective approaches, which are supposed to be placed opposite the four doors of the fourth degree; and it is obligatory, therefore, for a candidate to enter these four doors on hands and knees when appearing for his initiation and before he finally waits to receive the concluding portion of the ceremony.
The following additional explanations were added by Sikas´sigĕ: The four vertical lines at the outer corners of the lodge structure (Nos. 171, 172, 173, and 174), and four similar ones at the inner corners (Nos. 175, 176, 177, and 178), represent eight cedar trees planted there by the Midē´ when preparing the Midē´wigân for new candidates. The circles Nos. 179, 180, and 181, along with the connecting line, reproduce similar ones shown in the previous three degrees and signify the path of a Midē’s life—that it should be flawless and fully aligned with the teachings of the Midē´wiwin. The short lines ending in circles Nos. 182, 183, 184, and 185 refer to the temptations that challenge the Midē’s journey, and when faced with such temptations, he is expected to offer feasts and lectures at these points, or, in other words, “professions of faith.” The three lines Nos. 186, 187, and 188, each made up of four spots radiating from the larger circle at No. 179 and the previously mentioned one at No. 116, symbolize the four bear nests and their respective access points, which are believed to be located opposite the four doors of the fourth degree; thus, it is required for a candidate to enter these four doors on hands and knees when showing up for initiation and before receiving the concluding part of the ceremony.
![]() |
Fig. 5.— Migration of Âníshinâ´beg. |
The illustration presented in Fig. 5 is a reduced copy of a drawing made by Sikas´sigĕ to represent the migration of the Otter toward the west after he had received the rite of the Midē´wiwin. No. 1 refers to the circle upon the large chart on Pl. III in A, No. 1, and signifies the earth’s surface as before described. No. 2 in Fig. 5 is a line separating the history of the Midē´wiwin from that of the migration as follows: When the Otter had offered four prayers, as above mentioned, which fact is referred to by the spot No. 3, he disappeared beneath the surface of the water and went toward the west, whither the Ani´shinâ´bēg followed him, and located at Ottawa Island (No. 4). Here they erected the Midē´wigân and lived for many years. Then the Otter again disappeared beneath the water, and in a short time reappeared at A´wiat´ang (No. 5), when the Midē´wigân was again erected and the sacred rites conducted in accordance with the teachings of Mi´nabō´zho. Thus was an interrupted migration continued, the several resting places being given below in their proper order, at each of which the rites of the Midē´wiwin were conducted in all their purity. The next place to locate at was Mi´shenama´kinagung—Mackinaw 180 (No. 6); then Ne´mikung (No. 7); Kiwe´winang´ (No. 8); Bâwating—Sault Ste. Marie (No. 9); Tshiwi´towi´ (No. 10); Nega´wadzhĕ´ŭ—Sand Mountain (No. 11), northern shore of Lake Superior; Mi´nisa´wĭk [Mi´nisa´bikkăng]—Island of rocks (No. 12); Kawa´sitshĭŭwongk—Foaming rapids (No. 13); Mush´kisi´wi [Mash´kisi´bi]—Bad River (No. 14); Shagawâmikongk—Long-sand-bar-beneath-the-surface (No. 15); Wikwe´dânwonggân—Sandy Bay (No. 16); Neâ´shiwikongk—Cliff Point (No. 17); Netân´wayan´sink—Little point-of-sand-bar (No. 18); An´nibins—Little elm tree (No. 19); Wikup´binminsh-literally, Little-island-basswood (No. 20); Makubin´minsh—Bear Island (No. 21); Sha´geski´ke´dawan´ga (No. 22); Ni´wigwas´sikongk—The place where bark is peeled (No. 23); Ta´pakwe´ĭkak [Sa´apakwe´shkwaokongk]—The-place-where-lodge-bark-is-obtained (No. 24); Ne´uwesak´kudeze´bi [Ne´wisaku´desi´bin]—Point-deadwood-timber river (No. 25); Annibi´kanzi´bi [modern name, Âsh´kiba´gisi´bi], given respectively as Fish spawn River and Green leaf River (No. 26).
The illustration shown in Fig. 5 is a reduced version of a drawing made by Sikas´sigĕ to depict the Otter's migration westward after he underwent the Midē´wiwin ceremony. No. 1 refers to the circle on the large chart in Pl. III in A, No. 1, which represents the earth’s surface as previously described. No. 2 in Fig. 5 is a line that distinguishes the history of the Midē´wiwin from that of the migration as follows: After the Otter had offered four prayers, as mentioned earlier (indicated by spot No. 3), he vanished beneath the water's surface and moved westward, with the Ani´shinâ´bēg following him, eventually settling at Ottawa Island (No. 4). Here, they built the Midē´wigân and lived for many years. The Otter then disappeared again under the water and shortly reappeared at A´wiat´ang (No. 5), at which point the Midē´wigân was reestablished and sacred rites were performed according to Mi´nabō´zho's teachings. Thus, the interrupted migration continued, with several stopping points listed below in their correct order, where the Midē´wiwin rites were performed in their purest form. The next stop was Mi´shenama´kinagung—Mackinaw 180 (No. 6); then Ne´mikung (No. 7); Kiwe´winang´ (No. 8); Bâwating—Sault Ste. Marie (No. 9); Tshiwi´towi´ (No. 10); Nega´wadzhĕ´ŭ—Sand Mountain (No. 11), on the northern shore of Lake Superior; Mi´nisa´wĭk [Mi´nisa´bikkăng]—Island of Rocks (No. 12); Kawa´sitshĭŭwongk—Foaming Rapids (No. 13); Mush´kisi´wi [Mash´kisi´bi]—Bad River (No. 14); Shagawâmikongk—Long Sand Bar Beneath the Surface (No. 15); Wikwe´dânwonggân—Sandy Bay (No. 16); Neâ´shiwikongk—Cliff Point (No. 17); Netân´wayan´sink—Little Sand Bar Point (No. 18); An´nibins—Little Elm Tree (No. 19); Wikup´binminsh—Literally, Little Island Basswood (No. 20); Makubin´minsh—Bear Island (No. 21); Sha´geski´ke´dawan´ga (No. 22); Ni´wigwas´sikongk—The Place Where Bark is Peeled (No. 23); Ta´pakwe´ĭkak [Sa´apakwe´shkwaokongk]—The Place Where Lodge Bark is Obtained (No. 24); Ne´uwesak´kudeze´bi [Ne´wisaku´desi´bin]—Deadwood Timber River Point (No. 25); Annibi´kanzi´bi [modern name, Âsh´kiba´gisi´bi], respectively known as Fish Spawn River and Green Leaf River (No. 26).
This last-named locality is said to be Sandy Lake, Minnesota, where the Otter appeared for the last time, and where the Midē´wigân was finally located. From La Pointe, as well as from Sandy Lake, the Ojibwa claim to have dispersed in bands over various portions of the territory, as well as into Wisconsin, which final separation into distinct bodies has been the chief cause of the gradual changes found to exist in the ceremonies of the Midē´wiwin.
This area is known as Sandy Lake, Minnesota, where the Otter showed up for the last time and where the Midē'wigân was finally established. From both La Pointe and Sandy Lake, the Ojibwa say they spread out in groups over different parts of the territory, including Wisconsin. This final split into separate groups has been the main reason for the gradual changes seen in the ceremonies of the Midē'wiwin.
Plate VI. Ojibwa Facial Decoration.
Plate VI. Ojibwa Face Art.
According to Sikas´sigĕ, the above account of the initiation of the Otter, by Mi´nabo´zho, was adopted as the course of initiation by the Midē´ priests of the Mille Lacs Society, when he himself received the first degree, 1830. At that time a specific method of facial decoration was pursued by the priests of the respective degrees (Pl. VI), each adopting that pertaining to the highest degree to which he was entitled, viz:
According to Sikas´sigĕ, the initiation story of the Otter by Mi´nabo´zho became the initiation method used by the Midē´ priests of the Mille Lacs Society when he received his first degree in 1830. At that time, each degree had its own specific method of facial decoration (Pl. VI), with each priest adopting the style associated with the highest degree he qualified for, namely:
First degree.—A broad band of green across the forehead and a narrow stripe of vermilion across the face, just below the eyes.
First degree.—A wide green band across the forehead and a narrow red stripe across the face, just below the eyes.
Second degree.—A narrow stripe of vermilion across the temples, the eyelids, and the root of the nose, a short distance above which is a similar stripe of green, then another of vermilion, and above this again one of green.
Second degree.—A narrow band of bright red across the temples, eyelids, and the bridge of the nose, with a short distance above that a similar band of green, then another band of red, and above that one more band of green.
Third degree.—Red and white spots are daubed all over the face, the spots being as large as can be made by the finger tips in applying the colors.
Third degree.—Red and white spots are smudged all over the face, the spots being as large as can be made by the fingertips when applying the colors.
Fourth degree.—Two forms of decoration were admissible; for the first, the face was painted with vermilion, with a stripe of green extending diagonally across it from the upper part of the left temporal region to the lower part of the right cheek; for the second, the face was painted red with two short, horizontal parallel bars of 181 green across the forehead. Either of these was also employed as a sign of mourning by one whose son has been intended for the priesthood of the Midē´wiwin, but special reference to this will be given in connection with the ceremony of the Dzhibai´ Midē´wigân, or Ghost Society.
Fourth degree.—Two types of decoration were allowed; for the first, the face was painted with bright red, featuring a green stripe that slanted diagonally from the upper left side of the forehead to the lower right cheek; for the second, the face was painted red with two short, horizontal green bars across the forehead. Either of these was also used as a sign of mourning by someone whose son was meant for the priesthood of the Midē´wiwin, but more details will be provided in relation to the ceremony of the Dzhibai´ Midē´wigân, or Ghost Society.
Plate VIII. Ojibwa’s Record.
Plate VIII. Ojibwa's Record.
On Pl. VIII is presented a reduced copy of the Midē´ chart made by Ojibwa, a Midē´ priest of the fourth degree and formerly a member of the society of the Sandy Lake band of the Mississippi Ojibwa. The illustration is copied from his own chart which he received in 1833 in imitation of that owned by his father, Me´toshi´kōnsh; and this last had been received from Lake Superior, presumably La Pointe, many years before.
On Pl. VIII is shown a smaller version of the Midē´ chart created by Ojibwa, a fourth-degree Midē´ priest and a former member of the society from the Sandy Lake band of the Mississippi Ojibwa. The illustration is copied from his own chart, which he got in 1833 as a replica of the one his father, Me´toshi´kōnsh, owned; this last chart had been received from Lake Superior, likely La Pointe, many years before.
The illustration of the four degrees are here represented in profile, and shows higher artistic skill than the preceding copies from Red Lake, and Mille Lacs.
The illustration of the four degrees is shown here in profile and demonstrates greater artistic skill than the earlier copies from Red Lake and Mille Lacs.
The information given by Ojibwa, regarding the characters is as follows:
The information provided by Ojibwa about the characters is as follows:
When Ki´tshi Man´idō decided to grant the Ani´shinâ´bēg the rites of the Midē´wiwin, he took his Midē´ drum and sang, calling upon the other Man´idōs to join him and to hear what he was about to do. No. 1 represents Ki´tshi Man´idō's dwelling in the sky, No. 2 shows the god sitting and drumming, No. 3 indicates the small spots around the drum that symbolize the mī´gis covering everything around him. The Midē´ Man´idōs came to him in his Midē´wigân (No. 4), with eleven depicted inside the structure, while the ten—excluding himself—on the outside (Nos. 5 to 14) are shown descending to earth, tasked with bestowing the sacred rite on the Ani´shinâbē´g. The Midē´wigân (No. 4) also features the sacred post (No. 15) where Kŏ-ko´kŏ-ō—the Owl (No. 16)—is perched. The line that runs across the structure, from side to side, represents the path through it, while the two rings (Nos. 17 and 18) on the right side of the post mark the locations for where gifts are placed and the sacred stone—according to modern practices.
When a Native American is ready to undergo the initiation rights, he sets up a wigwam (No. 19) where he takes a steam bath once a day for four consecutive days. The four baths and four days are represented by the number of spots on the floor of the lodge, symbolizing stones. The instructors he hires and the officiating priests of the society are present; one of them (No. 20) can be seen on the left side of the wigwam performing a smoke offering, while the one on the right (No. 21) is drumming and singing. The four officiating priests are visible on either side of the candidate inside the structure. The wigwams (Nos. 22, 23, 24, and 25) represent the village homes.
On the evening before the initiation, the candidate (No. 26) visits his instructor (No. 27) to get final instructions for the role he will play the next day. The candidate is seen carrying his pipe, as offering tobacco is the most appreciated gift. His relatives follow him, bringing goods and other gifts, some of which are hung from the branches of the Midē´ tree (No. 28) at the entrance of the first degree structure. The instructor’s wig´iwam is depicted at No. 29, with two dark circular spots on the floor showing the two seats taken by the instructor and the pupil. The figure at No. 27 has his left arm raised, indicating that his conversation is about Ki´tshi Man´idō, while in his right hand he holds his Midē´ drum. The next morning, the Midē´ priests, with the candidate leading (No. 30), approach and enter the Midē´wigân to begin the initiation. No. 31 marks the spot for the sacred drum and those responsible for using the drum and rattles, while No. 32 indicates the officiating priests. No. 33 is the degree post, topped with Kŏ-ko´-kŏ-ō´, the Owl (No. 34). The post is painted in vermilion and covered in small white spots, symbolizing the mī´gis shell. The line (No. 35) running along the top of the enclosure represents the pole from which the robes, blankets, kettles, and other items, which are the fee for entry into the society, are hung.
This degree is overseen and protected by the Panther Man'idō.
When the candidate has gathered enough gifts to present to the society for the second degree, he takes his drum and offers chants (No. 35) to Ki´tshi Man´idō for success. Ki´tshi Man´idō is the guardian of the second degree, and his footprints are shown in No. 36. No. 37 depicts the second degree enclosure, which contains two sacred posts (Nos. 38 and 39). The first post is the same as that of the first degree, while the second is painted with white clay and has two bands of vermilion—one at the top and one near the middle. A small branch near the top is used to hang the tobacco pouch once the ceremony is over. No. 40 shows the musicians and attendants; No. 41 shows the candidate on his knees, while Nos. 42, 43, 44, and 45 depict the officiating priests surrounding him. The horizontal pole (No. 46) has gifts of robes, blankets, and kettles hanging from it.
When a candidate is ready to move on to the third degree (No. 47), they take on the role of Makwa´ Man´idō, who is the guardian of this degree, and whose tracks (No. 48) can be seen. The helpers are present inside, drumming and dancing. There are three sacred posts: the first (No. 49) is black, topped with Kŏ-ko´-kŏ-ō´—the Owl; the second (No. 50) is covered in white clay with an owl figure on top; and the third (No. 51) is painted in vermilion, featuring an Indian figure at the summit. Small wooden figures representing humans are used by the Midē´ in their tests to prove the authenticity and sacredness of their religion, which will be mentioned under a different heading. The horizontal rod (No. 52) that spans across the structure holds blankets and other gifts suspended from it.
The guardian of the fourth degree is Maka´no—the Turtle—who is depicted (No. 53) facing the entrance of the fourth degree (No. 54). Four sacred posts stand in the fourth degree; the first (No. 55) is painted white on the upper half and green on the lower half; the second (No. 56) is similar; the third (No. 57) is painted red, with a black spiral line running from top to bottom, and on it rests Kŏ-ko´-kŏ-ō´—the Owl; and the fourth (No. 58) is a cross, with the arms and part of the trunk painted white, featuring red spots—to represent the sacred mī´gis—the lower half of the trunk is squared off, with the face toward the east painted red, south green, west white, and north black. The spot (No. 59) at the base of the cross indicates the location of the sacred stone, while the human figures (No. 60) represent the participants, some of whom are seated near the wall of the enclosure, while others are shown beating the drum. The horizontal pole (No. 61) displays the blankets that serve as gifts to the society.
Plate VII. Ojibwa Facial Decoration.
Plate VII. Ojibwa Face Art.
The several specific methods of facial decoration employed (Pl. VII), according to Ojibwa’s statement, are as follows:
The different specific ways of decorating the face used (Pl. VII), according to Ojibwa’s statement, are as follows:
First degree.—One stripe of vermilion across the face, from near the ears across the tip of the nose.
First degree.—A single stripe of red across the face, stretching from near the ears to the tip of the nose.
Second degree.—One stripe as above, and another across the eyelids, temples, and the root of the nose.
Second degree.—One stripe as mentioned above, and another across the eyelids, temples, and the bridge of the nose.
Fourth degree.—The forehead and left side of the face, from the outer canthus of the eye downward, is painted green; four spots of vermilion are made with the tip of the finger upon the forehead and four upon the green surface of the left cheek. In addition to this, the plumes of the golden eagle, painted red, are worn upon the head and down the back. This form of decoration is not absolutely necessary, as the expense of the “war bonnet” places it beyond the reach of the greater number of persons.
Fourth degree.—The forehead and left side of the face, from the outer corner of the eye downward, are painted green; four spots of red are made with the tip of a finger on the forehead and four on the green area of the left cheek. Additionally, red plumes of the golden eagle are worn on the head and down the back. This type of decoration isn't absolutely necessary, as the cost of the “war bonnet” makes it unaffordable for most people.
Before proceeding further with the explanation of the Mide´ records it may be of interest to quote the traditions relative to the migration of the Ani´shinâ´bēg, as obtained by Mr. Warren previous to 1853. In his reference to observing the rites of initiation he heard one of the officiating priests deliver “a loud and spirited harangue,” of which the following words12 caught his attention:
Before going any further with the explanation of the Mide´ records, it might be interesting to share the traditions about the migration of the Ani´shinâ´bēg, as collected by Mr. Warren before 1853. When he mentioned observing the initiation rites, he heard one of the officiating priests give “a loud and spirited speech,” and these words12 stood out to him:
“Our ancestors lived by the vast ocean facing the sunrise. The great Megis (seashell) emerged above the water's surface, with the sun's rays reflecting off its shiny back for a long time. It provided warmth and light to the An-ish-in-aub-ag (red race). Suddenly, it sank into the depths, and for a while, our ancestors were without its light. It later resurfaced on the great river that drains the waters of the Great Lakes, providing life to our ancestors once again as it reflected the sun’s rays. It vanished again and did not appear until it was seen by the An-ish-in-aub-ag on the shores of the first great lake. It sank from view once more, and death visited our ancestors' wigiwams daily until it revealed its back and reflected the sun's rays again at Bow-e-ting (Sault Ste. Marie). It stayed there for a long time, but finally disappeared for the last time, leaving the An-ish-in-aub-ag in darkness and despair until it floated back and showed its bright back at Mo-ning-wun-a-kaun-ing (La Pointe Island), where it has since reflected the sun's rays and blessed our ancestors with life, light, and wisdom. Its rays reach the farthest village of the widespread Ojibways.” As the old man shared this story, he continued to display the shell, which he described as a symbol of the great megis he was talking about.
A few days later, eager to understand the real meaning of this allegory, ***I asked him to explain the significance of his Me-da-we speech to me.
After filling his pipe and smoking the tobacco I had given him, he began to provide me with the information I wanted, as follows:
“My grandson,” he said, “the megis I mentioned refers to the Me-da-we religion. Our ancestors, many lives ago, lived along the shores of the vast saltwater in the east. While they were enduring the hardships of illness and death, the Great Spirit, through the intercession of Man-a-bo-sho, the great common uncle of the An-ish-in-aub-ag, granted them this rite, which restores and extends life. Our ancestors later moved from the shores of the great water and headed westward.
“The Me-da-we lodge was torn down, and it wasn't rebuilt until our ancestors returned to the shores of the great river where Mo-ne-aung (Montreal) is located now.
“Over time, this town was abandoned again, and our ancestors, continuing westward, didn't start their fires until they arrived at the shores of Lake Huron, where the Me-da-we ceremonies were performed once more.
“Once again, these rituals were forgotten, and the Me-da-we lodge wasn’t built until the Ojibways gathered at Bow-e-ting (the outlet of Lake Superior), where it stayed for many winters. Still, the Ojibways journeyed westward, and for the last time, the Me-da-we lodge was set up on the island of La Pointe. Here, long before any white settlers arrived, it was practiced in its purest and most original form. Many of our ancestors lived the full lifespan granted to people by the Great Spirit, and the presence of many elders blended with each rising generation. This, my grandson, is what the words you didn’t understand mean; they have been passed down to us by our ancestors for many generations.”
In the explanation of the chart obtained at Red Lake, together with the tradition, reference to the otter, as being the most sacred emblem of society, is also verified in a brief notice of a tradition by Mr. Warren,13 as follows:
In explaining the chart collected at Red Lake, along with the tradition, the reference to the otter as the most sacred symbol of society is also confirmed in a short note about a tradition by Mr. Warren,13 as follows:
There's another story shared by the elders of the Ojibway village of Fond du Lac, Lake Superior, about their past settlement along the shores of the ocean. However, this story is so similar to the one I’ve already shared that including it here would just take up unnecessary space. The only difference between the two tales is that the otter, which symbolizes one of the four Medicine Spirits overseeing the Midawe rites, is used figuratively in one story as the seashell is in the other. The otter first appears to the ancient An-ish-in-aub-ag from the depths of the ocean, then on the St. Lawrence River, again at Lake Huron near Sault Ste. Marie, once more at La Pointe, and finally at Fond du Lac, or the end of Lake Superior, where it’s said to have pushed through the sandbank at the mouth of the St. Louis River. The spot is still pointed out by the Indians as the place where they believe the great otter broke through.
It is affirmed by the Indians that at Sault Ste. Marie some of the Ojibwa separated from the main body of that tribe and traversed the country along the northern shore of Lake Superior toward the west. These have since been known of as the “Bois Forts” (hardwood people or timber people), other bands being located at Pigeon River, Rainy Lake, etc. Another separation occurred at La Pointe, one party going toward Fond du Lac and westward to Red Lake, where they claim to have resided for more than three hundred years, while the remainder scattered from La Pointe westward and southwestward, locating at favorable places throughout the timbered country. This early dismemberment and long-continued separation of the Ojibwa nation accounts, to a considerable extent, for the several versions of the migration and the sacred emblems connected with the Midē´wiwin, the northern bands generally maintaining their faith in favor of the Otter as the guide, while the southern bodies are almost entirely supporters of the belief in the great mī´gis.
The Indians say that at Sault Ste. Marie, some of the Ojibwa broke away from the main group of their tribe and traveled along the northern shore of Lake Superior towards the west. These groups are now known as the "Bois Forts" (hardwood people or timber people), with other bands located at Pigeon River, Rainy Lake, and so on. Another split happened at La Pointe, with one group heading toward Fond du Lac and westward to Red Lake, where they claim to have lived for over three hundred years, while the rest moved from La Pointe westward and southwestward, settling at good locations throughout the wooded areas. This early division and prolonged separation of the Ojibwa nation largely explain the various versions of the migration and the sacred symbols associated with the Midē´wiwin. The northern bands usually believe in the Otter as their guide, while the southern groups primarily support the belief in the great mī´gis.
On account of the independent operations of the Midē´ priests in the various settlements of the Ojibwa, and especially because of the slight intercourse between those of the northern and southern divisions of the nation, there has arisen a difference in the pictographic 185 representation of the same general ideas, variants which are frequently not recognized by Midē´ priests who are not members of the Midē´wiwin in which these mnemonic charts had their origin. As there are variants in the pictographic delineation of originally similar ideas, there are also corresponding variations in the traditions pertaining to them.
Due to the independent activities of the Midē´ priests in different Ojibwa communities, and especially because of the limited interaction between those in the northern and southern parts of the nation, a difference has developed in the pictographic representation of the same general ideas. These variations are often not recognized by Midē´ priests who aren't part of the Midē´wiwin where these mnemonic charts originated. Just as there are differences in the pictorial representation of originally similar ideas, there are also corresponding variations in the traditions related to them. 185
Fig. 6.—Birch-bark record, from White Earth.
Fig. 6.—Birch-bark record from White Earth.
The tradition relating to Mi´nabō´zho and the sacred objects received from Ki´tshi Man´idō for the Ani´shinâ´bēg is illustrated in Fig. 6, which is a reproduction of a chart preserved at White Earth. The record is read from left to right. No. 1 represents Mi´nabō´zho, who says of the adjoining characters representing the members of the Midē´wiwin: “They are the ones, they are the ones, who put into my heart the life.” Mi´nabō´zho holds in his left hand the sacred Midē´ sack, or pin-ji´-gu-sân´. Nos. 2 and 3 represent the drummers. At the sound of the drum all the Midē´ rise and become inspired, because Ki´tshi Man´idō is then present in the wig´iwam. No. 4 denotes that women also have the privilege of becoming members of the Midē´wiwin. The figure holds in the left hand the Midē´ sack, made of a snake skin. No. 5 represents the Tortoise, the guardian spirit who was the giver of some of the sacred objects used in the rite. No. 6, the Bear, also a benevolent Man´idō, but not held in so great veneration as the Tortoise. His tracks are visible in the Midē´wiwin. No. 7, the sacred Midē´ sack or pin-ji´-gu-sân´, which contains life, and can be used by the Midē´ to prolong the life of a sick person. No. 8 represents a Dog, given by the Midē´ Man´idōs to Mi´nabō´zho as a companion.
The tradition about Mi´nabō´zho and the sacred objects given by Ki´tshi Man´idō to the Ani´shinâ´bēg is shown in Fig. 6, which is a reproduction of a chart kept at White Earth. The record is read from left to right. No. 1 represents Mi´nabō´zho, who says about the nearby characters that represent the members of the Midē´wiwin: “They are the ones, they are the ones, who put life into my heart.” Mi´nabō´zho holds the sacred Midē´ sack, or pin-ji´-gu-sân´, in his left hand. Nos. 2 and 3 represent the drummers. When the drum sounds, all the Midē´ rise and feel inspired because Ki´tshi Man´idō is then present in the wig´iwam. No. 4 indicates that women also have the right to become members of the Midē´wiwin. The figure holds the Midē´ sack made from snake skin in his left hand. No. 5 represents the Tortoise, the guardian spirit who provided some of the sacred objects used in the ritual. No. 6 is the Bear, also a benevolent Man´idō, but not as highly regarded as the Tortoise. His tracks can be seen in the Midē´wiwin. No. 7 shows the sacred Midē´ sack or pin-ji´-gu-sân´, which contains life and can be used by the Midē´ to extend the life of a sick person. No. 8 depicts a Dog, given to Mi´nabō´zho by the Midē´ Man´idōs as a companion.
Such was the interpretation given by the owner of the chart, but the informant was unconsciously in error, as has been ascertained not only from other Midē´ priests consulted with regard to the true meaning, but also in the light of later information and research in the exemplification of the ritual of the Midē´wiwin.
Such was the interpretation provided by the owner of the chart, but the informant was unknowingly mistaken, as has been confirmed not only by other Midē´ priests consulted about the true meaning, but also based on later information and research into the practice of the Midē´wiwin ritual.
Mi´nabō´zho did not receive the rite from any Midē´ priests (Nos. 2 and 5), but from Ki´tshi Man´idō. Women are not mentioned in any of the earlier traditions of the origin of the society, neither was the dog given to Mi´nabō´zho, but Mi´nabō´zho gave it to the Ani´shinâ´bēg.
Mi'nabozho didn't get the rite from any Midé priests (Nos. 2 and 5), but from Kitchi Manido. Women aren't mentioned in any of the earlier traditions about the origin of the society, and the dog wasn't given to Mi'nabozho; instead, Mi'nabozho gave it to the Anishinabeg.
The chart, therefore, turns out to be a mnemonic song similar to others to be noted hereafter, and the owner probably copied it from 186 a chart in the possession of a stranger Midē´, and failed to learn its true signification, simply desiring it to add to his collection of sacred objects and to gain additional respect from his confrères and admirers.
The chart ends up being a memory aid song like others that will be mentioned later, and the owner likely copied it from a chart owned by a stranger Midē´, not fully understanding its true meaning, but just wanting to add it to his collection of sacred items to earn more respect from his peers and fans.
Fig. 7.—Birch-bark record, from Red Lake.
Fig. 7.—Birch-bark record, from Red Lake.
Fig. 8.—Birch-bark record, from Red Lake.
Fig. 8.—Record made from birch bark, from Red Lake.
Two similar and extremely old birch-bark mnemonic songs were found in the possession of a Midē´ at Red Lake. The characters upon these are almost identical, one appearing to be a copy of the other. These are reproduced in Figs. 7 and 8. By some of the Midē´ Esh´gibō´ga takes the place of Mi´nabō´zho as having originally received the Midē´wiwin from Ki´tshi Man´idō, but it is believed that the word is a synonym or a substitute based upon some reason to them inexplicable. These figures were obtained in 1887, and a brief explanation of them given in the American Anthropologist.14 At that time I could obtain but little direct information from the owners of the records, but it has since been ascertained that both are mnemonic songs pertaining to Mi´nabō´zho, or rather Eshgibō´ga, and do not form a part of the sacred records of the Midē´wiwin, but simply the pictographic representation of the possibilities and powers of the alleged religion. The following explanation of Figs. 7 and 8 is reproduced from the work just cited. A few annotations and corrections are added. The numbers apply equally to both illustrations:
Two similar and very old birch-bark mnemonic songs were discovered in the possession of a Midē at Red Lake. The characters on these songs are almost identical, with one appearing to be a copy of the other. They are displayed in Figs. 7 and 8. According to some of the Midē, Esh'gibō'ga replaces Mi'nabō'zho as the one who originally received the Midēwiwin from Ki'tshi Man'idō, but it's believed that the term is a synonym or substitute based on some inexplicable reason to them. These figures were collected in 1887, and a brief explanation of them was provided in the American Anthropologist.14 At that time, I could gather very little direct information from the record owners, but it has since been determined that both are mnemonic songs related to Mi'nabō'zho, or rather Eshgibō'ga, and do not belong to the sacred records of the Midēwiwin; they merely depict the possibilities and powers of the supposed religion. The following explanation of Figs. 7 and 8 is taken from the previously mentioned work, with a few annotations and corrections added. The numbers correspond to both illustrations:
No. 1, represents Esh´gibō´ga, the great uncle of the Ani´shinâ´bēg, and receiver of the Midē´wiwin.
No. 1 represents Esh'gibō'ga, the great uncle of the Ani'shinâ'bēg, and receiver of the Midē'wiwin.
No. 2, the drum and drumsticks used by Esh´gibō´ga.
No. 2, the drum and drumsticks used by Esh'gibō'ga.
No. 3, a bar or rest, denoting an interval of time before the song is resumed.
No. 3, a pause or break, indicating a period of time before the song starts again.
No. 4, the pin-ji´-gu-sân´ or sacred Midē´ sack. It consists of an otter skin, and is the mī´gis or sacred symbol of the Midē´wigân.
No. 4, the pin-ji´-gu-sân´ or sacred Midē´ sack. It consists of an otter skin and is the mī´gis or sacred symbol of the Midē´wigân.
No. 5. a Midē´ priest, the one who holds the mī´gis while chanting the Midē´ song in the Midē´wigân. He is inspired, as indicated by the line extending from the heart to the mouth.
No. 5. a Midē´ priest, the one who holds the mī´gis while singing the Midē´ song in the Midē´wigân. He is inspired, as shown by the line extending from the heart to the mouth.
No. 7, is a woman, and signifies that women may also be admitted to the Midē´wiwin.
No. 7 is a woman and indicates that women can also be included in the Midē´wiwin.
No. 8, a pause or rest.
No. 8, a break or rest.
No. 9, a snake-skin pin-ji´-gu-sân´ possessing the power of giving life. This power is indicated by the lines radiating from the head, and the back of the skin.
No. 9, a snake-skin pin-ji´-gu-sân´ that has the ability to give life. This ability is shown by the lines extending from the head and the back of the skin.
No. 10, represents a woman.
No. 10 represents a woman.
No. 11, is another illustration of the mī´gis, or otter.
No. 11 is another example of the mī´gis, or otter.
No. 13, in Fig. 7, although representing a Midē´ priest, no explanation was given.
No. 13, in Fig. 7, while showing a Midē´ priest, no explanation was provided.
![]() |
Fig. 9.— Esh´gibō´ga. |
Fig. 9 is presented as a variant of the characters shown in No. 1 of Figs. 7 and 8. The fact that this denotes the power of curing by the use of magic plants would appear to indicate an older and more appropriate form than the delineation of the bow and arrows, as well as being more in keeping with the general rendering of the tradition.
Fig. 9 is shown as a variation of the characters seen in No. 1 of Figs. 7 and 8. The fact that this represents the ability to heal using magical plants suggests that it is an older and more fitting version than the depiction of the bow and arrows, and it aligns better with the overall portrayal of the tradition.
MIDĒ´WIGÂN.
Initiation into the Midē´wiwin or Midē´ Society is, at this time, performed during the latter part of summer. The ceremonies are performed in public, as the structure in which they are conducted is often loosely constructed of poles with intertwined branches and leaves, leaving the top almost entirely exposed, so that there is no difficulty in observing what may transpire within. Furthermore, the ritual is unintelligible to the uninitiated, and the important part of the necessary information is given to the candidate in a preceptor’s wig´iwam.
Initiation into the Midē´wiwin or Midē´ Society currently takes place in late summer. The ceremonies are held in public because the structure used for them is usually just made of poles with woven branches and leaves, leaving the top mostly open, so it's easy to see everything happening inside. Additionally, the ritual is confusing to those who haven't been initiated, and the crucial details are provided to the candidate in a preceptor’s wig´iwam.
To present intelligibly a description of the ceremonial of initiation as it occurred at White Earth, Minnesota, it will be necessary to first describe the structure in which it occurs, as well as the sweat lodge with which the candidate has also to do.
To clearly describe the initiation ceremony that took place at White Earth, Minnesota, it’s essential to first explain the structure where it happens, as well as the sweat lodge that the candidate will also interact with.
![]() |
Fig. 10.— Diagram of Midē´wigân of the first degree. |
The Midē´wigân, i.e., Midē´wig´iwam, or, as it is generally designated “Grand Medicine Lodge,” is usually built in an open grove or clearing; it is a structure measuring about 80 feet in length by 20 in width, extending east and west with the main entrance toward that point of the compass at which the sun rises. The walls consist of poles and saplings from 8 to 10 feet high, firmly planted in the ground, wattled with short branches and twigs with leaves. In the east and west walls are left open spaces, each about 4 feet wide, 188 used as entrances to the inclosure. From each side of the opening the wall-like structure extends at right angles to the end wall, appearing like a short hallway leading to the inclosure, and resembles double doors opened outward. Fig. 10 represents a ground plan of the Midē´wigân, while Fig. 11 shows an interior view. Saplings thrown across the top of the structure serve as rafters, upon which are laid branches with leaves, and pieces of bark, to sufficiently shade the occupants from the rays of the sun. Several saplings extend across the inclosure near the top, while a few are attached to these so as to extend longitudinally, from either side of which presents of blankets, etc., may be suspended. About 10 feet from the main entrance a large flattened stone, measuring more than a foot in diameter, is placed upon the ground. This is used when subjecting to treatment a patient; and at a corresponding distance from the western door is planted the sacred Midē´ post of cedar, that for the first degree being about 7 feet in height and 6 or 8 inches in diameter. It is painted red, with a band of green 4 inches wide around the top. Upon the post is fixed the stuffed body of an owl. Upon that part of the floor midway between the stone and the Midē´ post is spread a blanket, upon which the gifts and presents to the society are afterward deposited. A short distance from each of the outer angles of the structure are planted cedar or pine trees, each about 10 feet in height.
The Midē´wigân, also known as Midē´wig´iwam or more commonly called the “Grand Medicine Lodge,” is typically built in an open grove or clearing. It measures around 80 feet long and 20 feet wide, extending east and west, with the main entrance facing the direction where the sun rises. The walls are made of poles and saplings that are 8 to 10 feet high, firmly set in the ground, and interwoven with short branches and twigs with leaves. The east and west walls have openings about 4 feet wide, serving as entrances to the enclosure. From each side of the opening, the wall structure extends at right angles to the end wall, resembling a short hallway leading to the enclosure and looking like double doors opened outward. Fig. 10 shows a ground plan of the Midē´wigân, while Fig. 11 displays an interior view. Saplings are laid across the top of the structure as rafters, covered with branches, leaves, and pieces of bark to provide shade from the sun. Several saplings run across the enclosure near the top, with a few attached to extend longitudinally, allowing blankets and other items to be hung from either side. About 10 feet from the main entrance, there is a large flattened stone, over a foot in diameter, placed on the ground. This stone is used when treating a patient. Correspondingly, from the western door, the sacred Midē´ post of cedar is planted, standing about 7 feet tall and 6 to 8 inches in diameter. It is painted red with a 4-inch wide green band around the top, and a stuffed owl is fixed to the post. Between the stone and the Midē´ post, a blanket is spread on the floor where gifts and presents to the society are later placed. Cedar or pine trees, each about 10 feet tall, are planted a short distance from each outer corner of the structure.
Fig. 11.—Interior of Midē´wigân.
Fig. 11.—Inside Midē´wigân.
This wig´iwam is dome-shaped measures about 10 feet in diameter and 6 feet high in the middle, with an opening at the top which can be readily covered with a piece of bark. The framework of the structure consists of saplings stuck into the ground, the tops being bent over to meet others from the opposite side. Other thin saplings are then lashed horizontally to the upright ones so as to appear like hoops, decreasing in size as the summit is reached. They are secured by using strands of basswood bark. The whole is then covered with pieces of birchbark—frequently the bark of the pine is used—leaving a narrow opening on the side facing the Midē´wigân, which may be closed with an adjustable flap of bark or blankets.
This wigwam is dome-shaped and measures about 10 feet in diameter and 6 feet high in the middle, with an opening at the top that can easily be covered with a piece of bark. The structure's framework consists of saplings stuck into the ground, with the tops bent over to connect with others from the opposite side. Thin saplings are then tied horizontally to the upright ones, forming hoops that get smaller as they reach the top. They are secured using strips of basswood bark. The entire wigwam is then covered with pieces of birch bark—sometimes pine bark is used—leaving a narrow opening on the side facing the Midēwigân, which can be closed off with an adjustable flap of bark or blankets.
The space between the Midē´wigân and the sweat lodge must be kept clear of other temporary shelters, which might be placed there by some of the numerous visitors attending the ceremonies.
The area between the Midē´wigân and the sweat lodge needs to be kept free of any other temporary shelters that might be set up by the many visitors coming to the ceremonies.
FIRST DEGREE.
PREPARATORY INSTRUCTION.
When the candidate’s application for reception into the Midē´wiwin has been received by one of the officiating priests, he calls upon the three assisting Midē´, inviting them to visit him at his own wig´iwam at a specified time. When the conference takes place, tobacco, which has been previously furnished by the candidate, is distributed and a smoke offering made to Ki´tshi Man´idō, to propitiate his favor in the deliberations about to be undertaken. The host then explains the object of the meeting, and presents to his auditors an account of the candidate’s previous life; he recounts the circumstances of his fast and dreams, and if the candidate is to take the place of a lately deceased son who had been prepared to receive the degree, the fact is mentioned, as under such circumstances the forms would be different from the ordinary method of reception into the society. The subject of presents and gifts to the individual members of the society, as well as those intended to be given as a fee to the officiating priests, is also discussed; and lastly, if all things are favorable to the applicant, the selection of an instructor or preceptor is made, this person being usually appointed from among these four priests.
When the candidate’s application to join the Midē´wiwin is received by one of the officiating priests, he invites the three assisting Midē´ to come to his wig´iwam at a scheduled time. During the meeting, tobacco, provided beforehand by the candidate, is shared and a smoke offering is made to Ki´tshi Man´idō to seek his favor in the discussions about to take place. The host then explains the purpose of the meeting and gives an account of the candidate’s life; he shares details about the candidate’s fasting and dreams, and if the candidate is stepping in for a recently deceased son who was prepared to receive the degree, this is noted, as the process would be different under those circumstances. They also talk about gifts for the individual members of the society, as well as those meant as a fee for the officiating priests, and finally, if everything looks good for the applicant, they choose an instructor or mentor, typically selected from the four priests present.
When the conference is ended the favorable decision is announced to the applicant, who acknowledges his pleasure by remitting to each of the four priests gifts of tobacco. He is told what instructor would be most acceptable to them, when he repairs to the wig´iwam of the person designated and informs him of his wish and the decision of the Midē´ council.
When the conference is over, the positive decision is announced to the applicant, who shows his gratitude by giving gifts of tobacco to each of the four priests. He is informed which instructor would be most suitable for them, and then he goes to the wigwam of the chosen person to share his desire and the decision of the Midē council.
The designated preceptor arranges with his pupil to have certain days upon which the latter is to call and receive instruction and acquire 190 information. The question of remuneration being settled, tobacco is furnished at each sitting, as the Midē´ never begins his lecture until after having made a smoke-offering, which is done by taking a whiff and pointing the stem to the east; then a whiff, directing the stem to the south; another whiff, directing the stem to the west; then a whiff and a similar gesture with the stem to the north; another whiff is taken slowly and with an expression of reverence, when the stem is pointed forward and upward as an offering to Ki´tshi Man´idō; and finally, after taking a similar whiff, the stem is pointed forward and downward toward the earth as an offering to Nokō´mis, the grandmother of the universe, and to those who have passed before. After these preliminaries, the candidate receives at each meeting only a small amount of information, because the longer the instruction is continued daring the season before the meeting at which it is hoped the candidate may be admitted the greater will be the fees; and also, in order that the instruction may be looked upon with awe and reverence, most of the information imparted is frequently a mere repetition, the ideas being clothed in ambiguous phraseology. The Midē´ drum (Fig. 12 a) differs from the drum commonly used in dances (Fig. 12 b) in the fact that it is cylindrical, consisting of an elongated kettle or wooden vessel, or perhaps a section of the hollow trunk of a tree about 10 inches in diameter and from 18 to 20 inches in length, over both ends of which rawhide is stretched while wet, so that upon drying the membrane becomes hard and tense, producing, when beaten, a very hard, loud tone, which may be heard at a great distance.
The designated instructor arranges specific days for his student to come in for lessons and gather information. Once payment is settled, tobacco is provided at each session, as the Midē´ doesn’t start his lecture until after making a smoke offering. This is done by taking a puff and pointing the stem to the east, then to the south for another puff, then west, followed by north. The instructor takes a slow puff with a respectful gesture, pointing the stem forward and upward as an offering to Ki´tshi Man´idō. Finally, after another puff, he points the stem forward and downward toward the earth, offering it to Nokō´mis, the grandmother of the universe, and to those who have passed before. After these preliminaries, the candidate receives only a small amount of information at each meeting. The longer the instruction continues before the meeting where the candidate hopes to be admitted, the higher the fees will be. Additionally, to ensure that the instruction is viewed with awe and respect, most of what is shared is often just a repetition, with ideas expressed in vague language. The Midē´ drum (Fig. 12 a) is different from the drums used in dances (Fig. 12 b) in that it is cylindrical, made from an elongated kettle or wooden vessel, or possibly a section of a hollow tree trunk about 10 inches in diameter and between 18 to 20 inches long, with rawhide stretched over both ends while wet. As it dries, the membrane becomes hard and tight, producing a loud, sharp tone when struck, which can be heard from a great distance.
Fig. 12.—Ojibwa drums.
Fig. 12.—Ojibwa drums.
Frequently, however, water is put into the bottom of the drum and the drum-head stretched across the top in a wet state, which appears to intensify the sound very considerably.
Frequently, though, water is added to the bottom of the drum, and the drumhead is stretched across the top while it’s wet, which seems to greatly enhance the sound.
The peculiar and special properties of the drum are described to the applicant; that it was at first the gift of Ki´tshi Man´idō, who gave it through the intercession of Mi´nabō´zho; that it is used to invoke the presence of the Midē´ Man´idōs, or sacred spirits, when seeking 191 direction as to information desired, success, etc.; that it is to be employed at the side of the sick to assist in the expulsion or exorcism of evil man´idōs who may possess the body of the sufferer; and that it is to be used in the. Midē´wigân during the initiation of new members or the advancement of a Midē´ from a degree to a higher one.
The unique and important qualities of the drum are explained to the applicant: it was originally a gift from Ki´tshi Man´idō, given through the intercession of Mi´nabō´zho; it is used to call upon the presence of the Midē´ Man´idōs, or sacred spirits, when looking for guidance on desired information, success, and so on; it is meant to be used by the side of the sick to help drive away or exorcise evil man´idōs that may possess the person's body; and it is to be used in the Midē´wigân during the initiation of new members or when promoting a Midē´ to a higher degree.
![]() |
![]() |
Fig. 13.— Midē´ rattle. |
Fig. 14.— Midē´ rattle. |
The properties of the rattle are next enumerated and recounted, its origin is related, and its uses explained. It is used at the side of a patient and has even more power in the expulsion of evil demons than the drum. The rattle is also employed in some of the sacred songs as an accompaniment, to accentuate certain notes and words. There are two forms used, one consisting of a cylindrical tin box filled with grains of corn or other seeds (Fig. 13), the other being a hollow gourd also filled with seed (Fig. 14). In both of these the handle passes entirely through the rattle case.
The rattle's features are listed and described, its origins are explained, and its uses are outlined. It's used next to a patient and is even more effective at driving away evil spirits than a drum. The rattle is also used in some sacred songs as an accompaniment to emphasize certain notes and lyrics. There are two types used: one is a cylindrical tin box filled with grains of corn or other seeds (Fig. 13), and the other is a hollow gourd also filled with seeds (Fig. 14). In both types, the handle goes all the way through the rattle.
In a similar manner the remaining gifts of Mi´nabō´zho are instanced and their properties extolled.
In a similar way, the other gifts of Mi´nabō´zho are highlighted, and their qualities are praised.
The mī´gis, a small white shell (Cypræa moneta L.) is next extracted from the Midē´ sack, or pinji´gusân´. This is explained as being the sacred emblem of the Midē´wiwin, the reason therefor being given in the account of the several traditions presented in connection with Pls. III, IV, and VIII. This information is submitted in parts, so that the narrative of the history connected with either of the records is extended over a period of time to suit the preceptor’s plans and purposes. The ceremony of shooting the mī´gis (see Fig. 15) is explained on page 215.
The mī´gis, a small white shell (Cypræa moneta L.), is next taken from the Midē´ sack, or pinji´gusân´. This is described as the sacred symbol of the Midē´wiwin, with the reasons explained in the various traditions associated with Pls. III, IV, and VIII. This information is presented in sections, allowing the narrative of the history related to each record to unfold over time, aligning with the preceptor’s plans and goals. The ceremony of shooting the mī´gis (see Fig. 15) is detailed on page 215.
Fig. 15.—Shooting the mī´gis.
Fig. 15.—Shooting the mī´gis.
As time progresses the preceptor instructs his pupil in Midē´ songs, i.e., he sings to him songs which form a part of his stock in trade, and which are alleged to be of service on special occasions, as when searching for medicinal plants, hunting, etc. The pupil thus acquires a comprehension of the method of preparing and reciting songs, which information is by him subsequently put to practical use in the composition and preparation of his own songs, the mnemonic characters employed being often rude copies of those observed upon the charts of his preceptor, but the arrangement thereof being original.
As time goes on, the teacher guides his student in Midē´ songs, meaning he sings songs that are part of his repertoire and are said to be useful for specific situations, like looking for medicinal plants or hunting. The student learns how to prepare and recite these songs, and later uses this knowledge to create and prepare his own songs. The memory aids he uses are often rough duplicates of those seen on his teacher's charts, but the way he arranges them is original.
It is for this reason that a Midē´ is seldom, if ever, able to recite correctly any songs but his own, although he may be fully aware of the character of the record and the particular class of service in which it may be employed. In support of this assertion several songs obtained at Red Lake and imperfectly explained by “Little Frenchman” and “Leading Feather,” are reproduced in Pl. XXII, A B, page 292.
It’s for this reason that a Midē´ is rarely, if ever, able to correctly recite any songs except his own, even though he might fully understand the nature of the record and the specific type of service it could be used for. To back up this claim, several songs that were collected at Red Lake and not fully explained by “Little Frenchman” and “Leading Feather” are included in Pl. XXII, A B, page 292.
192 From among the various songs given by my preceptor are selected and presented herewith those recognized by him as being part of the ritual. The greater number of songs are mere repetitions of short phrases, and frequently but single words, to which are added meaningless sounds or syllables to aid in prolonging the musical tones, and repeated ad libitum in direct proportion to the degree of inspiration in which the singer imagines himself to have attained. These frequent outbursts of singing are not based upon connected mnemonic songs preserved upon birch bark, but they consist of fragments or selections of songs which have been memorized, the selections relating to the subject upon which the preceptor has been discoursing, and which undoubtedly prompts a rythmic vocal equivalent. These songs are reproduced on Pl. IX, A, B, C. The initial mnemonic characters pertaining to each word or phrase of the original text are repeated below in regular order with translations in English, together with supplemental notes explanatory of the characters employed. The musical notation is not presented, as the singing consists of a monotonous repetition of four or five notes in a minor key; furthermore, a sufficiently clear idea of this may be formed by comparing some of the Midē´ songs presented in connection with the ritual of initiation and preparation of medicines. The first of the songs given herewith (Pl. IX, A) pertains to a request to Ki´tshi Man´idō that clear weather may be had for the 193 day of ceremonial, and also an affirmation to the candidate that the singer’s words are a faithful rendering of his creed.
192 From the various songs provided by my teacher, I've selected and presented here those he recognized as part of the ritual. Most of the songs are just repetitions of short phrases, often just single words, accompanied by meaningless sounds or syllables that help extend the musical tones, and they are repeated as often as the singer feels inspired. These frequent bursts of song aren’t based on connected mnemonic songs preserved on birch bark; rather, they consist of fragments or selections of songs that have been memorized, relating to the subject the teacher has been discussing, which definitely inspires a rhythmic vocal expression. These songs are shown on Pl. IX, A, B, C. The initial mnemonic characters for each word or phrase from the original text are repeated below in order with English translations, along with additional notes explaining the characters used. Musical notation isn’t included, as the singing is simply a monotonous repetition of four or five notes in a minor key; you can get a clear idea by comparing some of the Midē´ songs included with the initiation and medicine preparation ritual. The first of the songs presented here (Pl. IX, A) is a request to Ki´tshi Man´idō for clear weather on the day of the ceremony, and it also assures the candidate that the singer's words faithfully reflect his beliefs. 193
Each of the phrases is repeated before advancing to the next, as often as the singer desires and in proportion to the amount of reverence and awe with which he wishes to impress his hearer. There is usually a brief interval between each of the phrases, and a longer one at the appearance of a vertical line, denoting a rest, or pause. One song may occupy, therefore, from fifteen minutes to half an hour.
Each phrase is repeated before moving on to the next, as often as the singer wants and depending on how much reverence and awe he wants to convey to his listener. There’s usually a short pause between each phrase, and a longer pause when a vertical line appears, indicating a rest. A single song can last anywhere from fifteen minutes to half an hour.
Plate IX.a. Mnemonic Song.
Mnemonic Song.
In the following song (Pl. IX, B), the singer relates to the candidate the gratitude which he experiences for the favors derived from the Good Spirit; he has been blessed with knowledge of plants and other sacred objects taken from the ground, which knowledge has been derived by his having himself become a member of the Midē´wiwin, and hence urges upon the candidate the great need of his also continuing in the course which he has thus far pursued.
In the following song (Pl. IX, B), the singer expresses to the candidate his appreciation for the blessings received from the Good Spirit. He has been granted knowledge of plants and other sacred items from the earth, knowledge he gained by becoming a member of the Midē´wiwin. He strongly encourages the candidate to keep following the path he has been on so far.
Plate IX.b. Mnemonic Song.
Mnemonic Song.
In the following song (Pl. IX, C), the preceptor appears to feel satisfied that the candidate is prepared to receive the initiation, and therefore tells him that the Midē´ Man´idō announces to him the assurance. The preceptor therefore encourages his pupil with promises of the fulfillment of his highest desires.
In the following song (Pl. IX, C), the teacher seems pleased that the student is ready for initiation, so he tells him that the Midē´ Man´idō is giving him assurance. The teacher encourages his student with promises that his greatest desires will be fulfilled.
Plate IX.c. Mnemonic Song.
Mnemonic Song.
MIDĒ´ THERAPEUTICS.
During the period of time in which the candidate is instructed in the foregoing traditions, myths, and songs the subject of Midē´ plants is also discussed. The information pertaining to the identification and preparation of the various vegetable substances is not imparted in regular order, only one plant or preparation, or perhaps two, being enlarged upon at a specified consultation. It may be that the candidate is taken into the woods where it is known that a specified plant or tree may be found, when a smoke offering is made before the object is pulled out of the soil, and a small pinch of tobacco put into the hole in the ground from which it was taken. This is an offering to Noko´mis—the earth, the grandmother of mankind—for the benefits which are derived from her body where they were placed by Ki´tshi Man´idō.
During the time the candidate learns about the traditions, myths, and songs mentioned earlier, the topic of Midē´ plants is also covered. The details about identifying and preparing different plant materials are not taught in a set order; often, only one or two plants or preparations are discussed during a specific meeting. The candidate might be taken into the woods where a certain plant or tree is known to grow. Before pulling the plant from the ground, a smoke offering is made, and a small pinch of tobacco is placed in the hole left behind. This is a tribute to Noko´mis—the earth, the grandmother of humanity—for the gifts received from her, which were placed there by Ki´tshi Man´idō.
In the following list are presented, as far as practicable, the botanical and common names of these, there being a few instances in which the plants were not to be had, as they were foreign to that portion of Minnesota in which the investigations were made; a few of them, also, were not identified by the preceptors, as they were out of season.
In the following list, you'll find the botanical and common names of these plants as much as possible. There are a few cases where the plants weren't available because they were not native to that part of Minnesota where the research was conducted. Additionally, some of them couldn't be identified by the instructors because they were out of season.
It is interesting to note in this list the number of infusions and decoctions which are, from a medical and scientific standpoint, specific remedies for the complaints for which they are recommended. It is probable that the long continued intercourse between the Ojibwa and the Catholic Fathers, who were tolerably well versed in the ruder forms of medication, had much to do with improving an older and purely aboriginal form of practicing medical magic. In some of the remedies mentioned below there may appear to be philosophic reasons for their administration, but upon closer investigation it has been learned that the cure is not attributed to a regulation or restoration of functional derangement, but to the removal or even expulsion of malevolent beings—commonly designated as bad Man´idōs—supposed to have taken possession of that part of the body in which such derangement appears most conspicuous. Further reference to the mythic properties of some of the plants employed will be made at the proper time.
It's interesting to see in this list the number of infusions and decoctions that are specific remedies for the problems they’re meant to treat, from a medical and scientific perspective. It’s likely that the prolonged interaction between the Ojibwa and the Catholic Fathers, who had a decent understanding of more basic forms of medicine, contributed to the evolution of an older, purely Indigenous way of practicing medical magic. Some of the remedies mentioned below may seem to have philosophical reasons for being used, but a closer look reveals that the cure isn’t linked to fixing or restoring normal function; rather, it involves the removal or even expulsion of malevolent beings—often referred to as bad Man´idōs—believed to have taken control of the part of the body where such dysfunction is most noticeable. Further discussion about the mythic properties of some of the plants used will occur at the appropriate time.
Although the word Mashki kiwa´bun—medicine broth—signifies liquid medical preparations, the term is usually employed in a general sense to pertain to the entire materia medica; and in addition to the alleged medicinal virtues extolled by the preceptors, certain parts of the trees and plants enumerated are eaten on account of some mythic reason, or employed in the construction or manufacture of habitations, utensils, and weapons, because of some supposed supernatural origin or property, an explanation of which they have forgotten.
Although the term Mashki kiwa´bun—medicine broth—refers to liquid medical preparations, it is generally used to indicate the entire range of medicinal substances. Besides the supposed healing qualities praised by their teachers, some parts of the trees and plants mentioned are consumed for mythical reasons, or used in building houses, creating tools, and making weapons, due to some believed supernatural origin or quality, the explanation of which has been forgotten.
Pinus strobus, L. White Pine. Zhingwâk´.
Pinus strobus, L. White Pine. Zhingwâk´.
1. The leaves are crushed and applied to relieve headache; also boiled; after which they are put into a small hole in the ground and hot stones placed therein to cause a vapor to ascend, which is inhaled to cure backache.
1. The leaves are crushed and used to relieve headaches; they are also boiled. After that, they are placed in a small hole in the ground, and hot stones are put in to create steam, which is inhaled to treat back pain.
The fumes of the leaves heated upon a stone or a hot iron pan are inhaled to cure headache.
The smoke from leaves heated on a stone or a hot iron pan is breathed in to relieve headaches.
2. Gum; chiefly used to cover seams of birch-bark canoes. The gum is obtained by cutting a circular band of bark from the trunk, upon which it is then scraped and boiled down to proper consistence. The boiling was formerly done in clay vessels.
2. Gum; mainly used to cover the seams of birch-bark canoes. The gum is obtained by cutting a circular strip of bark from the trunk, which is then scraped and boiled down to the right consistency. The boiling was previously done in clay pots.
Pinus resinosa, Ait. Red Pine; usually, though erroneously, termed Norway Pine. Pŏkgwĕ´nagē´mŏk.
Pinus resinosa, Ait. Red Pine; often, but incorrectly, called Norway Pine. Pŏkgwĕ´nagē´mŏk.
Used as the preceding.
Used as the previous.
Abies balsamea, Marshall. Balsam Fir. Ini´nandŏk.
Abies balsamea, Marshall. Balsam Fir. Ini´nandŏk.
1. The bark is scraped from the trunk and a decoction thereof is used to induce diaphoresis.
1. The bark is removed from the trunk and a brew made from it is used to induce sweating.
2. The gum, which is obtained from the vesicles upon the bark, and also by skimming it from the surface of the water in which the crushed bark is boiled, is carried in small vessels and taken internally as a remedy for gonorrhoea and for soreness of the chest resulting from colds.
2. The gum, which comes from the sacs in the bark, and also by skimming it off the surface of the water where the crushed bark is boiled, is transported in small containers and taken internally as a treatment for gonorrhea and chest soreness caused by colds.
3. Applied externally to sores and cuts.
3. Used externally on wounds and cuts.
Abies alba, Michx. White Spruce. Sĕ´ssēgân´dŏk. The split roots—wadŏb´-are used for sewing; the wood for the inside timbers of canoes.
Abies alba, Michx. White Spruce. Sĕ'ssēgân'dŏk. The split roots—wadŏb—are used for stitching; the wood is used for the interior timbers of canoes.
Abies nigra, Poir. Black Spruce. A´mikwan´dŏk.
Abies nigra, Poir. Black Spruce. A'mikwan'dok.
1. The leaves and crushed bark are used to make a decoction, and sometimes taken as a substitute in the absence of pines.
1. The leaves and crushed bark are used to make a brew, and sometimes taken as an alternative when pines aren't available.
2. Wood used in manufacture of spear handles.
2. Wood used for making spear handles.
Abies Canadensis, Michx. Hemlock. Saga´īnwunsh—“Raven Tree.”
Abies Canadensis, Michx. Hemlock. Saga´īnwunsh—“Raven Tree.”
Outer bark powdered and crushed and taken internally for the cure of diarrhea. Usually mixed with other plants not named.
Outer bark is powdered and crushed, then taken internally to treat diarrhea. It's usually mixed with unnamed other plants.
Larix Americana, Michx. Tamarack. Mŏsh´kīkiwa´dik.
Larix americana, Michx. Tamarack. Mŏsh´kīkiwa´dik.
1. Crushed leaves and bark used as Pinus strobus.
1. Crushed leaves and bark were used from the Eastern White Pine (Pinus strobus).
2. Gum used in mending boats.
2. Gum used for repairing boats.
3. Bark used for covering wig´iwams.
3. Bark used for covering wigwams.
Cupressus thyoides, L. White Cedar. Gi´zhĭk—“Day.”
Cupressus thyoides, L. White Cedar. Gi'zhĭk—“Day.”
1. Leaves crushed and used as Pinus strobus. The greater the variety of leaves of coniferæ the better. The spines of the leaves exert their prickly influence through the vapor upon the demons possessing the patient’s body.
1. Leaves crushed and used as Pinus strobus. The greater the variety of conifer leaves, the better. The spines of the leaves exert their prickly influence through the vapor on the demons possessing the patient's body.
2. The timber in various forms is used in the construction of canoe and lodge frames, the bark being frequently employed in roofing habitations.
2. Wood in different forms is used to build canoes and lodge frames, with the bark often used for roofing homes.
Juniperus Virginiana, L. Red Cedar. Muskwa´wâ´ak.
Juniperus Virginiana, L. Red Cedar. Muskwa´wâ´ak.
Bruised leaves and berries are used internally to remove headache.
Bruised leaves and berries are used internally to relieve headaches.
Quercus alba, L. White Oak. Mītig´ōmish´.
Quercus alba, L. White Oak. Mītigōmish.
1. The bark of the root and the inner bark scraped from the trunk is boiled and the decoction used internally for diarrhea.
1. The bark from the root and the inner bark scraped from the trunk are boiled, and the resulting decoction is used internally for diarrhea.
2. Acorns eaten raw by children, and boiled or dried by adults.
2. Kids eat acorns raw, while adults boil or dry them.
Quercus rubra, L. Red Oak. Wisug´emītig´omish´—“Bitter Acorn Tree.”
Quercus rubra, L. Red Oak. Wisug´emītig´omish´—“Bitter Acorn Tree.”
Has been used as a substitute for Q. alba.
Has been used as a replacement for Q. alba.
Acer saccharinum, Wang. Sugar Maple. Innīnâ´tik.
Acer saccharinum, Wang. Sugar Maple. Innīnâ´tik.
1. Decoction of the inner bark is used for diarrhea.
1. A brew made from the inner bark is used for diarrhea.
2. The sap boiled in making sirup and sugar.
2. The sap was boiled to make syrup and sugar.
3. The wood valued for making arrow shafts.
3. The wood that's prized for making arrow shafts.
Acer nigrum, Michx. Black Sugar Maple. Ishig´omeaush´— “Sap-flows-fast.”
Acer nigrum, Michx. Black Sugar Maple. Ishig´omeaush´— “Sap flows fast.”
Arbor liquore abundans, ex quo liquor tanquam urina vehementer projicitur.
Arbor abundantly produces a liquid, which is ejected forcefully like urine.
Sometimes used as the preceding.
Sometimes used as the prior.
Betula excelsa, Ait. Yellow Birch. Wi´umis´sik.
Betula excelsa, Ait. Yellow Birch. Wi´umis´sik.
The inner bark is scraped off, mixed with that of the Acer saccharinum, and the decoction taken as a diuretic.
The inner bark is scraped off, mixed with that of the silver maple, and the brew is taken as a diuretic.
Betula papyracea, Ait. White Birch. Mīgwas´.
Betula papyracea, Ait. White Birch. Mīgwas.
Highly esteemed, and employed for making records, canoes, syrup-pans, mōkoks´—or sugar boxes—etc. The record of the Midē´wiwin, given by Minabō´zho, was drawn upon this kind of bark.
Highly valued and used for making records, canoes, syrup pans, mōkoks—or sugar boxes—etc. The record of the Midēwiwin, given by Minabōzho, was written on this type of bark.
Populus monilifera, Ait. Cottonwood. Mâ´nâsâ´ti.
Populus monilifera, Ait. Cottonwood. Mâ´nâsâ´ti.
The cotton down is applied to open sores as an absorbent.
The cotton is used on open wounds as a way to soak up fluids.
Populus balsamifera, L. Balsam Poplar. Asa´dĭ.
Populus balsamifera, L. Balsam Poplar. Asa'di.
1. The bark is peeled from the branches and the gum collected and eaten.
1. The bark is stripped from the branches and the gum is gathered and chewed.
2. Poles are used in building ordinary shelter lodges, and particularly for the Midē´wigân.
2. Poles are used to construct regular shelter lodges, especially for the Midē´wigân.
Juglans nigra, L. Black Walnut. Paga´nŏk—“Nut wood.”
Juglans nigra, L. Black Walnut. Paga´nŏk—“Nut wood.”
Walnuts are highly prized; the green rind of the unripe fruit is sometimes employed in staining or dyeing.
Walnuts are highly valued; the green skin of the unripe fruit is sometimes used for staining or dyeing.
Smilacina racemosa, Desf. False Spikenard. Kinē´wigwŏshk—“Snake weed or Snake Vine.”
Smilacina racemosa, Desf. False Spikenard. Kinē´wigwŏshk—“Snake weed or Snake Vine.”
1. Warm decoction of leaves used by lying-in women.
1. Warm tea made from leaves used by women after giving birth.
2. The roots are placed upon a red-hot stone, the patient, with a blanket thrown over his head, inhaling the fumes, to relieve headache.
2. The roots are placed on a red-hot stone, and the patient, with a blanket thrown over their head, breathes in the fumes to relieve a headache.
3. Fresh leaves are crushed and applied to cuts to stop bleeding.
3. Fresh leaves are crushed and put on cuts to stop bleeding.
Helianthus occidentalis, Riddell. Sunflower. Pŭkite´wŭkbŏkuns´.
Helianthus occidentalis, Riddell. Sunflower. Pŭkite´wŭkbŏkuns´.
The crushed root is applied to bruises and contusions.
The crushed root is used on bruises and contusions.
Polygala senega, L. Seneca Snakeroot. Winis´sikēns´.
Polygala senega, L. Seneca Snakeroot. Winis´sikēns´.
1. A decoction of the roots is used for colds and cough.
1. A brew made from the roots is used for colds and coughs.
2. An infusion of the leaves is given for sore throat; also to destroy water-bugs that have been swallowed.
2. A tea made from the leaves is used for a sore throat; it's also for getting rid of water bugs that have been swallowed.
Rubus occidentalis, L. Black Raspberry. Makadē´wĭskwi´minŏk—“Black Blood Berry.”
Rubus occidentalis, L. Black Raspberry. Makadē'wĭskwi'minŏk—“Black Blood Berry.”
A decoction made of the crushed roots is taken to relieve pains in the stomach.
A tea made from crushed roots is taken to ease stomach pains.
Rubus strigosus, Michx. Wild Red Raspberry. Miskwi´minŏk´—“Blood Berry.”
Rubus strigosus, Michx. Wild Red Raspberry. Miskwi´minŏk´—“Blood Berry.”
The roots are sometimes used as a substitute for the preceding.
The roots are sometimes used as a replacement for the ones mentioned before.
Gaylussacia resinosa, Torr. and Gr. Huckleberry. Mī´nŭn.
Gaylussacia resinosa, Torr. and Gr. Huckleberry. Mī´nŭn.
Forms one of the chief articles of trade during the summer. The berry occupies a conspicuous place in the myth of the “Road of the Dead,” referred to in connection with the “Ghost Society.”
Forms one of the main items of trade during the summer. The berry holds a prominent position in the myth of the “Road of the Dead,” mentioned alongside the “Ghost Society.”
Prunus Virginiana, L. Choke Cherry. Sisan´wewi´nakânsh´.
Prunus Virginiana, L. Choke Cherry. Sisan´wewi´nakânsh´.
1. The branchlets are used for making an ordinary drink; used also during gestation.
1. The small branches are used to make a regular drink; they are also used during pregnancy.
2. The fruit is eaten.
The fruit is consumed.
Prunus serotina, Ehrhart. Wild Black Cherry. Okwē´wĭsh—“Scabby Bark.”
Prunus serotina, Ehrhart. Wild Black Cherry. Okwē'wĭsh—“Scabby Bark.”
1. The inner bark is applied to external sores, either by first boiling, bruising, or chewing it.
1. The inner bark is put on external wounds, either by first boiling, bruising, or chewing it.
2. An infusion of the inner bark is sometimes given to relieve pains and soreness of the chest.
2. An infusion of the inner bark is sometimes used to ease chest pain and soreness.
Prunus Pennsylvanica, L. Wild Red Cherry. Kusigwa´kumi´nŏk.
Prunus Pennsylvanica, L. Wild Red Cherry. Kusigwa´kumi´nŏk.
1. A decoction of the crushed root is given for pains and other stomach disorders.
1. A brew made from the crushed root is used for pain and other stomach issues.
2. Fruit is eaten and highly prized.
2. People eat fruit and value it a lot.
3. This, believed to be synonymous with the June Cherry of Minnesota, is referred to in the myths and ceremonies of the “Ghost Society.”
3. This, thought to be the same as the June Cherry of Minnesota, is mentioned in the myths and ceremonies of the “Ghost Society.”
Prunus Americana, Marsh. Wild Plum. Bogē´sanŏk.
Prunus Americana, Marsh. Wild Plum. Bogē´sanŏk.
The small rootlets, and the bark of the larger ones, are crushed and boiled together with the roots of the following named plants, as a remedy for diarrhea. The remaining plants were not in bloom at the time during which the investigations were made, and therefore were not identified by the preceptors, they being enabled to furnish only the names and an imperfect description. They are as follows, viz: Minēn´sŏk, two species, one with red berries, the other with yellow ones; Wabō´saminī´sŏk—“Rabbit berries”; Shi´gwanau´isŏk, having small red berries; and Cratægus coccinea, L. Scarlet-fruited Thorn. O´ginīk.
The small rootlets and the bark of the larger ones are crushed and boiled together with the roots of the following plants as a remedy for diarrhea. The other plants were not in bloom during the time of the investigations, so the preceptors couldn't identify them. They could only provide the names and an incomplete description. They are as follows: Minēn´sŏk, two species—one with red berries and the other with yellow berries; Wabō´saminī´sŏk—"Rabbit berries"; Shi´gwanau´isŏk, which has small red berries; and Cratægus coccinea, L. Scarlet-fruited Thorn. O´ginīk.
Typha latifolia, L. Common Cat-tail. Napŏgŭshk—“Flat grass.”
Typha latifolia, L. Common Cat-tail. Napŏgŭshk—“Flat grass.”
The roots are crushed by pounding or chewing, and applied as a poultice to sores.
The roots are smashed by pounding or chewing, then used as a poultice on sores.
Sporobolus heterolepis Gr. Napŏ´gŭshkūns´—“Little Flat Grass.”
Sporobolus heterolepis Gr. Napŏ´gŭshkūns´—“Little Flat Grass.”
1. Used sometimes as a substitute for the preceding.
1. Sometimes used as an alternative to the previous one.
2. Roots are boiled and the decoction taken to induce emesis, “to remove bile.”
2. Roots are boiled and the liquid is consumed to induce vomiting, “to get rid of bile.”
Fragaria vesca, L. Wild Strawberry. Odē īmĭn´nĕ—Heart Berry.
Fragaria vesca, L. Wild Strawberry. Odē īmĭn´nĕ—Heart Berry.
Referred to in the ceremony of the “Ghost Society.”
Referred to in the ceremony of the “Ghost Society.”
The fruit is highly valued as a luxury.
The fruit is considered a luxury.
Acer Pennsylvanicum, L. Striped Maple. Mōn´zomĭsh´—“Moose Wood.” The inner bark scraped from four sticks or branches, each two feet long, is put into a cloth and boiled, the liquid which can subsequently be pressed out of the bag is swallowed, to act as an emetic.
Acer Pennsylvanicum, L. Striped Maple. Mōn´zomĭsh´—“Moose Wood.” The inner bark scraped from four branches, each two feet long, is placed in a cloth and boiled. The resulting liquid, which can be pressed out of the bag, is swallowed to serve as an emetic.
Fraxinus sambucifolia, Lam. Black or Water Ash. A´gimak´.
Fraxinus sambucifolia, Lam. Black or Water Ash. A'gimak'.
1. The inner bark is soaked in warm water, and the liquid applied to sore eyes.
1. The inner bark is soaked in warm water, and the liquid is applied to sore eyes.
2. The wood is employed in making the rims for frames of snow-shoes.
2. The wood is used to make the rims for snowshoe frames.
Veronica Virginica, L. Culver’s Root. Wi´sŏgedzhi´wik—“Bitter Root.”
Veronica Virginica, L. Culver’s Root. Wi´sŏgedzhi´wik—"Bitter Root."
A decoction of the crushed root is taken as a purgative.
A brewed extract of the crushed root is used as a laxative.
Salix Candida, Willd. Hoary Willow. Sisi´gewe´mĭsh.
Salix Candida, Willd. Hoary Willow. Sisi´gewe´mĭsh.
The thick inner bark of the roots is scraped off, boiled, and the decoction taken for cough.
The thick inner bark of the roots is scraped off, boiled, and the extract is taken for coughs.
Symphoricarpus vulgaris, Michx. Indian Currant. Gus´sigwaka´mĭsh.
Symphoricarpus vulgaris, Michx. Indian Currant. Gus´sigwaka´mĭsh.
The inner bark of the root boiled and the decoction, when cold, applied to sore eyes.
The inner bark of the root is boiled, and the cooled liquid is applied to sore eyes.
Geum strictum, Ait. Aven. Ne´bone´ankwe´âk—“ Hair on one side.”
Geum strictum, Ait. Aven. Ne´bone´ankwe´âk—“Hair on one side.”
The roots are boiled and a weak decoction taken internally for soreness in the chest, and cough.
The roots are boiled, and a mild infusion is consumed for chest pain and coughing.
Rumex crispus, L. Curled Dock. O´zabetshi´wĭk.
Rumex crispus, L. Curled Dock. O'zabetshi'wĭk.
The roots are bruised or crushed and applied to abrasions, sores, etc.
The roots are bruised or crushed and used on cuts, wounds, etc.
Amorpha canescens, Nutt. Lead Plant. We´abŏnag´kak—“That which turns white.”
Amorpha canescens, Nutt. Lead Plant. We´abŏnag´kak—“That which turns white.”
A decoction, made of the roots, is used for pains in the stomach. Rosa blanda, Ait. Early Wild Rose. O´ginīk.
A tea made from the roots is used for stomach aches. Rosa blanda, Ait. Early Wild Rose. O´ginīk.
A piece of root placed in lukewarm water, after which the liquid is applied to inflamed eyes.
A piece of root placed in warm water, then the liquid is applied to irritated eyes.
Anemone (sp.?) Anemone. Wisŏg´ibŏk´; also called Hartshorn plant by the mixed-bloods of Minnesota.
Anemone (sp.?) Anemone. Wisŏg´ibŏk´; also known as Hartshorn plant by the mixed-bloods of Minnesota.
The dry leaves are powdered and used as an errhine, for the cure of headache.
The dried leaves are ground into a powder and used as a nasal treatment for headaches.
(Gen. et sp. ?) Termed Kine´bĭk wansh´kons and “Snake weed.”
(Gen. et sp. ?) Called Kine´bĭk wansh´kons and “Snake weed.”
This plant was unfortunately so injured in transportation that identification was impossible. Ball-players and hunters use it to give them endurance and speed; the root is chewed when necessary to possess these qualities. The root is likened to a snake, which is supposed to be swift in motion and possessed of extraordinary muscular strength.
This plant was unfortunately so damaged in transit that identification was impossible. Athletes and hunters use it to boost their endurance and speed; they chew the root when they need these benefits. The root is compared to a snake, which is believed to be fast and incredibly strong.
Rhus (aromatica, Ait. ?) “White Sumac.” Bŏkkwan´ībŏk.
Rhus (aromatica, Ait. ?) “White Sumac.” Bŏkkwan´ībŏk.
Roots are boiled, with those of the following named plant, and the decoction taken to cure diarrhea.
Roots are boiled along with those of the plants listed below, and the mixture is consumed to treat diarrhea.
(Gen. et sp. ?) Ki´tshiodēiminibŏk—“Big Heart Leaf.”
(Gen. et sp. ?) Ki´tshiodēiminibŏk—“Big Heart Leaf.”
Roots boiled, with preceding, and decoction taken for diarrhea.
Roots boiled, strained, and the liquid taken for diarrhea.
Monarda fistulosa, L. Wild Bergamot. Moshkōs´wanowins´—“Little Elk’s Tail.”
Monarda fistulosa, L. Wild Bergamot. Moshkōs´wanowins´—“Little Elk’s Tail.”
The root is used by making a decoction and drinking several swallows, at intervals, for pain in the stomach and intestines.
The root is used by brewing a decoction and taking a few sips at intervals for stomach and intestinal pain.
Hydrophyllum Virginicum, L. Waterleaf. Hunkite´wagūŭs´.
Hydrophyllum Virginicum, L. Waterleaf. Hunkite´wagūŭs´.
The roots are boiled, the liquor then taken for pains in the chest, back, etc.
The roots are boiled, and the liquid is then consumed for relief from chest pain, back pain, and so on.
Anemone Pennsylvanicum, L. Pennsylvania Anemone. Pesī´kwadzhi´bwiko´kŏk.
Anemone Pennsylvanicum, L. Pennsylvania Anemone. Pesī´kwadzhi´bwiko´kŏk.
A decoction of the roots is used for pains in the lumbar region.
A herbal tea made from the roots is used for lower back pain.
Viola (Canadensis, L.?). Canada Violet. Maskwī´widzhī´wiko´kŏk.
Viola (Canadensis, L.?). Canada Violet. Maskwī´widzhī´wiko´kŏk.
The decoction made of the roots is used for pains in the region of the bladder.
The tea made from the roots is used for pain in the bladder area.
Phryma leptostachya, L. Lopseed. Waia´bishkĕno´kŏk.
Phryma leptostachya, L. Lopseed. Waia'bishkĕno'kŏk.
The roots are boiled and the decoction taken for rheumatic pains in the legs.
The roots are boiled and the liquid is taken for pain from rheumatism in the legs.
Viola pubescens, Ait. Downy Yellow Violet, Ogitē´waguns.
Viola pubescens, Ait. Downy Yellow Violet, Ogitē´waguns.
A decoction is made of the roots, of which small doses are taken at intervals for sore throat.
A decoction is made from the roots, and small doses are taken at intervals for a sore throat.
Rosa (lucida, Ehrhart?). Dwarf Wild Rose. Oginī´minagan´mŏs.
Rosa (lucida, Ehrhart?). Dwarf Wild Rose. Oginī´minagan´mŏs.
The roots of young plants are steeped in hot water and the liquid applied to sore eyes.
The roots of young plants are soaked in hot water, and the liquid is used for sore eyes.
(Gen. et sp. ?) Mŏ´zânâ´tĭk.
(Gen. et sp. ?) Mŏ'zâna'tĭk.
This plant could not be identified at the locality and time at which investigations were conducted. The root is boiled and the decoction taken as a diuretic for difficult micturition.
This plant couldn't be recognized at the location and time when the research was done. The root is boiled, and the liquid is consumed as a diuretic for trouble urinating.
Actæa rubra, Michx. Red Baneberry. Odzī´bĭkĕns´—“Little Root.”
Actæa rubra, Michx. Red Baneberry. Odzī´bĭkĕns´—“Little Root.”
A decoction of the root, which has a sweet taste, is used for stomachic pains caused by having swallowed hair (mythic). Used also in conjunction with Ginseng.
A tea made from the root, which tastes sweet, is used for stomach pains from swallowing hair (mythical). It’s also used together with Ginseng.
This plant, according to some peculiarities, is considered the male plant at certain seasons of the year, and is given only to men and boys, while the same plant at other seasons, because of size, color of fruit, or something else, is termed the female, and is prepared for women and girls in the following manner, viz: The roots are rolled in basswood leaves and baked, when they become black; an infusion is then prepared, and used in a similar manner as above.
This plant, based on some unique characteristics, is seen as the male plant during certain times of the year and is given only to men and boys. Conversely, at other times, due to its size, fruit color, or other factors, it is referred to as the female plant and is prepared for women and girls in the following way: The roots are wrapped in basswood leaves and baked until they turn black; then an infusion is made and used similarly as described above.
The latter is called Wash´kubĭdzhi´bikakŏk´.
The latter is called Wash'kubidzhikabikak.
Botrychium Virginicum, Swartz. Moonwort. Ozaga´tigŭm.
Botrychium Virginicum, Swartz. Moonwort. Ozaga´tigŭm.
The root is bruised and applied to cuts.
The root is crushed and used on cuts.
Aralia trifolia, Gr. Dwarf Ginseng. Nesō´wakŏk—“Three Leafed.”
Aralia trifolia, Gr. Dwarf Ginseng. Nesō'wakŏk—“Three Leafed.”
The roots are chewed and the mass applied to cuts to arrest hemorrhage.
The roots are chewed, and the paste is applied to cuts to stop bleeding.
Echinospermum lappula, Lehm. Stickweed. Ozaga´tĭgomĕns—“Burr Bush.”
Echinospermum lappula, Lehm. Stickweed. Ozaga´tĭgomĕns—“Burr Bush.”
The roots are placed in a hole in the ground upon hot stones, to cause the fumes to rise, when the patient puts down his face and has a cloth or blanket thrown over his head. The fumes are inhaled for headache. The raw roots are also sniffed at for the same purpose.
The roots are put in a hole in the ground over hot stones to make the fumes rise, while the patient leans down and has a cloth or blanket draped over their head. The fumes are inhaled for headaches. The raw roots are also sniffed for the same reason.
It is affirmed by various members of the Midē´ Society that in former times much of the information relating to some of these plants was not imparted to a candidate for initiation into the first degree, but was reserved for succeeding degrees, to induce a Midē´ of the first degree to endeavor to attain higher distinction and further advancement in the mysteries of the order. As much knowledge 202 is believed to have been lost through the reticence and obstinacy of former chief priests, the so-called higher secrets are now imparted at the first and second degree preparatory instructions. The third and fourth degrees are very rarely conferred, chiefly because the necessary presents and fees are beyond the reach of those who so desire advancement, and partly also because the missionaries, and in many instances the Indian agents, have done their utmost to suppress the ceremonies, because they were a direct opposition and hindrance to progress in Christianizing influences.
Members of the Midē´ Society say that in the past, much of the information about some of these plants wasn’t shared with candidates being initiated into the first degree. Instead, this knowledge was held back for higher degrees to encourage first-degree Midē´s to strive for greater recognition and further growth in the order's mysteries. A lot of knowledge is believed to have been lost due to the reluctance and stubbornness of past chief priests, so the so-called higher secrets are now taught during the first and second degree preparatory instructions. The third and fourth degrees are rarely given out, mainly because the required gifts and fees are too expensive for those seeking advancement, and partly because missionaries, and in many cases Indian agents, have done everything they can to suppress the ceremonies, as they directly opposed and hindered efforts to promote Christian influences.
When the preparatory instruction has come to an end and the day of the ceremony of initiation is at hand, the preceptor sings to his pupil a song, expatiating upon his own efforts and the high virtue of the knowledge imparted. The pipe is brought forward and an offering of tobacco smoke made by both preceptor and pupil, after which the former sings a song (Pl. X, A.), the time of its utterance being tediously prolonged. The mnemonic characters were drawn by Sikas´sigĕ, and are a copy of an old birch-bark scroll which has for many years been in his possession, and which was made in imitation of one in the possession of his father, Baiē´dzĭk, one of the leading Midē´ at Mille Lacs, Minnesota.
When the preparatory training is over and the day of the initiation ceremony arrives, the instructor sings a song to his student, praising his own efforts and the great value of the knowledge being shared. They both offer tobacco smoke, and then the instructor sings a song (Pl. X, A.), stretching out the timing of his words. The mnemonic symbols were created by Sikas´sigĕ and are based on an old birch-bark scroll that he has owned for many years, which was made as a replica of one belonging to his father, Baiē´dzĭk, a prominent Midē´ at Mille Lacs, Minnesota.
Plate X.a. Mnemonic Song.
Plate X.a. Memory Song.
From ten days to two weeks before the day of initiation, the chief Midē´ priest sends out to all the members invitations, which consist of sticks one-fourth of an inch thick and 6 or 7 inches long. The courier is charged with giving to the person invited explicit information as to the day of the ceremony and the locality where it is to 204 be held. Sometimes these sticks have bands of color painted around one end, usually green, sometimes red, though both colors may be employed, the two ends being thus tinted. The person invited is obliged to bring with him his invitation stick, and upon entering the Midē´wigân he lays it upon the ground near the sacred stone, on the side toward the degree post. In case a Midē´ is unable to attend he sends his invitation with a statement of the reason of his inability to come. The number of sticks upon the floor are counted, on the morning of the day of initiation, and the number of those present to attend the ceremonies is known before the initiation begins.
From ten days to two weeks before the initiation day, the chief Midē' priest sends out invitations to all members, which are sticks about a quarter-inch thick and 6 or 7 inches long. The courier is responsible for providing the invited person with clear details about the date of the ceremony and the location where it will take place. Sometimes these sticks have colored bands painted around one end, usually green or sometimes red, with both colors possibly used, tinting both ends. The invited person is required to bring their invitation stick and, upon entering the Midē'wigân, places it on the ground near the sacred stone, toward the degree post. If a Midē' cannot attend, they send their invitation along with an explanation of why they can't come. The number of sticks on the floor is counted on the morning of the initiation, and the total number of attendees for the ceremonies is known before the initiation starts.
About five or six days preceding the day set for the ceremony of initiation, the candidate removes to the neighborhood of the locality of the Midē´wigân. On the evening of the fifth day he repairs to the sudatory or sweat-lodge, which has, in the meantime, been built east of the sacred inclosure, and when seated within he is supplied with water which he keeps for making vapor by pouring it upon heated stones introduced for the purpose by assistants upon the outside. This act of purification is absolutely necessary and must be performed once each day for four days, though the process may be shortened by taking two vapor baths in one day, thus limiting the process to two days. This, however, is permitted, or desired only under extraordinary circumstances. During the process of purgation, the candidates thoughts must dwell upon the seriousness of the course he is pursuing and the sacred character of the new life he is about to assume.
About five or six days before the day set for the initiation ceremony, the candidate moves to the area near the Midē´wigân. On the evening of the fifth day, he goes to the sweat lodge, which has been built to the east of the sacred enclosure. Once seated inside, he is given water to create steam by pouring it over heated stones placed outside by helpers. This purification ritual is essential and must be done once a day for four days, although it can be shortened to two days if the candidate takes two steam baths in one day. However, this is only allowed or preferred in extraordinary situations. During this purification process, the candidate must focus on the seriousness of the journey he is undertaking and the sacred nature of the new life he is about to embrace.
When the fumigation has ceased he is visited by the preceptor and the other officiating Midē´ priests, when the conversation is confined chiefly to the candidate’s progress. He then gives to each of them presents of tobacco, and after an offering to Ki´tshi Man´idō, with the pipe, they expose the articles contained in their Midē´ sacks and explain and expatiate upon the merits and properties of each of the magic objects. The candidate for the first time learns of the manner of preparing effigies, etc., with which to present to the incredulous ocular demonstration of the genuineness and divine origin of the Midē´wiwin, or, as it is in this connection termed, religion.
When the fumigation is over, the candidate is visited by the teacher and the other officiating Midē priests, and the conversation mainly focuses on the candidate's progress. He then gives each of them gifts of tobacco, and after making an offering to Ki´tshi Man´idō with the pipe, they show the items in their Midē sacks and explain the qualities and benefits of each magic object. For the first time, the candidate learns how to prepare effigies and other items to provide the skeptical with a visual demonstration of the authenticity and divine origin of the Midēwiwin, or, as it's called in this context, religion.
Several methods are employed for the purpose, and the greater the power of the Midē´ the greater will appear the mystery connected with the exhibition. This may be performed whenever circumstances demand such proof, but the tests are made before the candidate with a twofold purpose: first, to impress him with the supernatural powers of the Midē´ themselves; and second, in an oracular manner, to ascertain if Ki´tshi Ma´nidō is pleased with the contemplated ceremony and the initiation of the candidate.
Several methods are used for this purpose, and the stronger the Midē´'s power, the more mysterious the exhibition seems. This can be done whenever the situation calls for such proof, but the tests are presented to the candidate for two main reasons: first, to impress him with the supernatural abilities of the Midē´ themselves; and second, to determine in an oracle-like way if Ki´tshi Ma´nidō is pleased with the planned ceremony and the initiation of the candidate.
![]() |
Fig. 16. |
The first test is made by laying upon the floor of the wig´iwam a string of four wooden beads each measuring about 1 inch in diameter. See Fig. 16. After the owner of this object has chanted for a few moments in an almost inaudible manner the beads begin to roll from side to side as if animated. The string is then quickly restored to its place in the Midē´ sack. Another Midē´ produces a small wooden effigy of a man (Fig. 17), measuring about 5 inches in height. The body has a small orifice running through it from between the shoulders to the buttocks, the head and neck forming a separate piece which may be attached to the body like a glass stopper to a bottle.
The first test involves placing a string of four wooden beads, each about 1 inch in diameter, on the floor of the wigwam. See Fig. 16. After the owner of this object chants softly for a moment, the beads start to roll from side to side as if they were alive. The string is then quickly returned to its spot in the Midē' sack. Another Midē' presents a small wooden figure of a man (Fig. 17), approximately 5 inches tall. The body has a small hole running through it from just below the shoulders to the buttocks, while the head and neck form a separate piece that can be attached to the body like a stopper on a bottle.
A hole is made in the ground deep enough to reach to the hips of the effigy, when the latter is put into it and the loose earth loosely restored so as to hold it in an upright position. Some magic powder of herbs is sprinkled around the body, and into the vertical orifice in 206 it, when the head is put in place. A series of inarticulate utterances are chanted, when, if everything be favorable, the figure will perceptibly move up and down as if possessed of life. Fig. 18 represents another figure used in a similar manner. It consists of one piece, however, and is decorated with narrow bands of dark blue flannel about the ankles and knees, a patch of red cloth upon the breast and bands about the wrists, each of the eyes being indicated by three white porcelain beads.
A hole is dug in the ground deep enough to reach the hips of the effigy when it's placed inside, and the loose earth is casually replaced to keep it upright. Some magical herbal powder is sprinkled around the body and into the vertical opening in 206 it, once the head is put on. A series of indistinct chants are recited, and if all goes well, the figure will noticeably move up and down as if it's alive. Fig. 18 represents another figure used in a similar way. This one is made from a single piece and is adorned with narrow bands of dark blue flannel around the ankles and knees, a patch of red cloth on the chest, and bands around the wrists, with each eye marked by three white porcelain beads.
![]() |
![]() |
Fig. 17. | Fig. 18. |
One of the most astonishing tests, however, and one that can be produced only by Midē´ of the highest power, consists in causing a Midē´ sack to move upon the ground as if it were alive. This, it is confidently alleged, has been done repeatedly, though it is evident that the deception is more easily produced than in the above-mentioned instances, as the temporary retention within a bag of a small mammal could readily be made to account for the movements.
One of the most amazing tests, however, and one that can only be performed by the most powerful Midē´, involves making a Midē´ sack move across the ground as if it were alive. It is confidently claimed that this has happened many times, although it's clear that the trick is easier to pull off than the previously mentioned examples, since having a small animal temporarily inside the bag could easily explain the movements.
In most of these private exhibitions the light is so obscured as to prevent the deception being observed and exposed; and when public demonstrations of skill are made the auditors invariably consist of the most credulous of the uninitiated, or the confréres of the performer, from whom no antagonism or doubt would be expected.
In most of these private exhibitions, the lighting is so dim that it hides any trickery from being seen and revealed; and when public displays of skill happen, the audience usually consists of the most gullible outsiders or fellow practitioners, from whom no skepticism or challenge would be anticipated.
The preceptor then consults with the Midē´ priests respecting the presents to be delivered by the candidate, and repeats the following words, viz:
The instructor then talks to the Midē´ priests about the gifts the candidate will present and repeats the following words:
Mis-shai´-ĕ-gwa | tshi-dĕ-bŏg-in-de-mung´. | gi´-she-gŏ-dung´ |
Now is the time | that we shall fix the price | of everything pertaining to the sky, |
ka-mi´-nĕ- | nŏngk | gi´-she-goy-dŭng´ | di´-bi-ga-dōnk´ gai-yé´. | |
that has been | given to us | from the day | [and] | the night also. |
A-pē´-gĕ-dá´wŭnk | i´-wa-pī | ge-bin´-de-ga-yŏngk´, |
When it shall come to pass | and at the time | that we shall enter, |
ă-au´-wa-mi-dē´-wĭd. |
he who wishes to become a Midē´. |
When the four vapor baths have been taken by the candidate, and the eve of the ceremony has arrived, he remains in the sudatory longer than usual so as not to come in contact with the large crowd of visitors who have arrived upon the scene. The woods resound with the noises incident to a large camp, while in various directions may be heard the monotonous beating of the drum indicating the presence of a number of dancers, or the hard, sharp taps of the midē´ drum, caused by a priest propitiating and invoking the presence and favor of Ki´tshi Ma´nidō in the service now so near at hand.
When the candidate has completed the four vapor baths and the night before the ceremony arrives, he stays in the sudatory longer than usual to avoid the large crowd of visitors who have gathered. The woods echo with the sounds typical of a big camp, while in different directions, the steady beat of the drum can be heard, signaling the presence of dancers, or the rapid, sharp knocks of the midē´ drum, created by a priest who is honoring and calling on the presence and favor of Ki´tshi Ma´nidō for the ceremony that is about to take place.
When the night is far advanced and all becomes hushed, the candidate, with only the preceptor accompanying, retires to his own wig´iwam, while the assistant Midē´ priests and intimate friends or members of his family collect the numerous presents and suspend them from the transverse and longitudinal poles in the upper part of the Midē´wigân. Watchers remain to see that nothing is removed during the night.
When the night is late and everything is quiet, the candidate, accompanied only by the teacher, goes to his own wigwam, while the assistant Mide priests and close friends or family gather the many gifts and hang them from the cross and long poles in the upper part of the Midewigwam. Some people stay to make sure nothing is taken away during the night.
At the approach of day, the candidate breakfasts and again returns to the sweat-lodge to await the coming of his preceptor, and, later, of the officiating priests. The candidate puts on his best clothing 207 and such articles of beaded ornaments as he may possess. The preceptor and Midē´ priests are also clad in their finest apparel, each wearing one or two beaded dancing bags at his side, secured by a band of beaded cloth crossing the opposite shoulder. The members of the Midē´wiwin who are not directly concerned in the preliminaries resort to the Midē´wigân and take seats around the interior, near the wall, where they may continue to smoke, or may occasionally drum and sing. The drummer, with his assistants, takes a place near upon the floor of the sacred inclosure to the left of the eastern entrance, i.e., the southeast corner.
As dawn approaches, the candidate has breakfast and returns to the sweat lodge to wait for his mentor and later, the officiating priests. He puts on his best clothes 207 and any beaded ornaments he has. The mentor and Midē´ priests are also dressed in their finest outfits, each wearing one or two beaded dance bags at their side, secured by a band of beaded cloth crossing the opposite shoulder. The members of the Midē´wiwin who aren’t directly involved in the preparations head to the Midē´wigân and take seats around the interior, near the wall, where they can continue smoking or occasionally drum and sing. The drummer, along with his assistants, sits near the floor of the sacred area to the left of the eastern entrance, which is the southeast corner.
IMPLORATION FOR CLEAR WEATHER.
Should the day open up with a threatening sky, one of the Midē´ priests accompanying the candidate sings the following song (Pl. X, B) to dispel the clouds. Each of the lines is repeated an indefinite number of times, and after being repeated once or twice is sung also by the others as an accompaniment.
Should the day start with a threatening sky, one of the Midē´ priests with the candidate sings the following song (Pl. X, B) to clear away the clouds. Each line is repeated an unlimited number of times, and after being sung once or twice, the others join in as an accompaniment.
It will be observed that the words as spoken vary to some extent when chanted or sung.
It can be noticed that the words, when spoken, change somewhat when they are chanted or sung.
Plate X.b. Mnemonic Song.
Plate X.b. Memory Song.
![]() |
Hi-na-nē´, hē´, ki´-ne-na-wē´ man´-i-dō. Hi-na-nē´, hē´, ki´-ne-na-wē´ man´-i-dō. I swing the spirit like a child. I swing the spirit like a kid. The Midē´ Spirit, showing magic lines radiating from his body. The Midē´ claims to be able to receive special favor. The Midē´ Spirit displays magical lines extending from his body. The Midē´ claims to have the ability to receive special favor. |
Ki´nana´wein, Ki´nana´wein, Ki´nana´wein, Man´ido´weēg;
Ki'nana'wein, Ki'nana'wein, Ki'nana'wein, Man'ido'weēg;
Ki´nana´wein, Ki´nana´wein, Ki´nana´wein, Man´ido´weēg´;
Ki'nana'wein, Ki'nana'wein, Ki'nana'wein, Man'ido'weēg';
Ki´nana´wein, Man´ido´weēg´.
Ki’nana’wein, Manido’weeg.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
![]() |
Gi-zhik´-ē´ ka-hwē´ da-mū´-nĕ. Gi-zhik´-ē´ ka-hwē´ da-mū´-nĕ. The sky is what I am telling you about. The sky is what I'm talking about. The sky and the earth united by a pathway of possible rain. The sky and the earth connected by a path of potential rain. |
Ki´zhiga´widâ´ mu´nedē´, Ki´zhiga´widâ´ mu´nedē´,
Ki'zhiga'widâ' mu'nedē', Ki'zhiga'widâ' mu'nedē',
Ki´zhiga´widâ´ Ki´zhi-ga´wi-dâ´,
Ki'zhiga'wida Ki'zhi-gawi-da,
Ki´zhi-ga´wi-dâ mu´nedē´, Ki´zhiga´widâ mu´nedē´.
Ki'zhi-ga'wi-dâ mu'nedē, Ki'zhiga'widâ mu'nedē.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
![]() |
Wa-ne-o-ho ne´-ge-shi´-go-ni Wa-ne-o-ho ne´-ge-shi´-go-ni We have lost the sky [it becomes dark]. We’ve lost the sky [it’s getting dark]. [Clouds obscure the sky, and the arm of the Midē´ is reaching up into it for its favor of clear weather.] [Clouds cover the sky, and the arm of the Midē´ is reaching up into it for a blessing of clear weather.] |
Waneo-ho hē ne´-ge-shi-go-ni, Wane-o-ho-hē ne´-ge-shi-go-ni,
Waneo-ho he' ne-ge-shi-go-ni, Wane-o-ho-hē ne' ge-shi-go-ni,
Ko´sawe ne hē wa´nishi-na-ha, waneo-ho-hē ne´-ge-shi-go-ni.
Ko'sawe ne hē wa'nishi-na-ha, waneo-ho-hē ne'-ge-shi-go-ni.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
![]() |
Wi-tshi´-hi-na´-ne-he, nē´, kō´, hō. Wi-tshi´-hi-na´-ne-he, nē´, kō´, hō. I am helping you. I'm here to help you. [The Otter-skin Midē´ sack is held up to influence the Otter Spirit to aid them.] [The Otter-skin Midē´ sack is lifted to invoke the Otter Spirit for assistance.] |
Wi´tshihinanehe nē´ kō hō´, ne´niwi´tshinan, wi´tshihinanehe
Wi’tshihinanehe nē’ kō hō’, ne’niwi’tshinan, wi’tshihinanehe
nē´ kō´ hō´. U-a-ni-ma wē u-a-ni-ma wē henigwish.
nē´ kō´ hō´. U-a-ni-ma wē u-a-ni-ma wē henigwish.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
![]() |
U-a´-ni-ma´, wē´, he´-ni-gwĭsh. U-a´-ni-ma´, wē´, he´-ni-gwĭsh. I have made an error [in sending]. I made a mistake [in sending]. The Otter-skin Midē´ sack has failed to produce the desired effect. The otter-skin Midē´ sack hasn't achieved the desired results. |
![]() |
Rest. Take a break. |
The Midē´ women who have gathered without the lodge now begin to dance as the song is renewed.
The Midē´ women who have gathered outside the lodge now start to dance as the song begins again.
In case the appearance of the sky becomes sufficiently favorable the initiation begins, but if it should continue to be more unfavorable or to rain, then the song termed the “Rain Song” is resorted to and sung within the inclosure of the Midē´wigân, to which they all march in solemn procession. Those Midē´ priests who have with them their Midē´ drums use them as an accompaniment to the singing and to propitiate the good will of Ki´tshi Man´idō. Each line of the entire song appears as an independent song, the intervals of rest varying in time according to the feelings of the officiating priest.
If the sky looks good enough, the ceremony starts, but if it stays unfavorable or rains, they sing the “Rain Song” inside the Midē'wigân, where they all walk in a solemn procession. The Midē' priests who have their Midē' drums use them to accompany the singing and appeal to the goodwill of Ki'tshi Man'idō. Each line of the whole song acts as a standalone piece, with pauses that change in length based on the officiating priest's feelings.
The words of the song are known to most of the Midē´ priests; but, as there is no method of retaining a set form of musicial notation, the result is entirely individual and may vary with each singer, if sung independently and out of hearing of others; so that, under 210 ordinary circumstances, the priest who leads off sings through one stanza of the song, after which the others will readily catch the notes and accompany him. It will be observed, also, that the words as spoken vary to some extent when chanted or sung.
The lyrics of the song are familiar to most of the Midē´ priests, but since there’s no way to keep a consistent musical notation, the performance is entirely individual and can change with each singer, especially if sung alone and not in earshot of others. So, under normal circumstances, the leading priest sings a stanza of the song, after which the others quickly pick up the melody and join in. It’s also noticeable that the words can differ somewhat when they are chanted or sung. 210
If this song does not appear to bring about a favorable change the priests return to their respective wig´iwams and the crowd of visitors disperses to return upon the first clear day.
If this song doesn't seem to create a positive change, the priests go back to their respective wigwams and the group of visitors breaks up to return on the first clear day.
INITIATION OF CANDIDATE.
If, however, the day be clear and promising the candidate goes early to the sweat-lodge, where he is joined by his preceptor, and later by the officiating priest. After all preliminaries have been arranged and the proper time for regular proceedings has arrived, the preceptor sings the following song (Pl. X, C), the musical notation of which varies according to his feelings, clearly showing that there is no recognized method of vocal delivery, as is the case with the music of dancing songs:
If the day is clear and promising, the candidate goes early to the sweat lodge, where he is joined by his mentor and later by the officiating priest. Once all preliminary arrangements are made and it’s time for the main events to begin, the mentor sings the following song (Pl. X, C), with the musical notation changing based on his feelings, clearly indicating that there’s no established method of vocal delivery, unlike the music of dance songs:
Plate X.c. Mnemonic Song.
Plate X.c. Memory Song.
This is addressed to the Midē´ priests (Nika´ni) present, and is an inquiry as to their willingness to proceed. The Midē´wigân is shown, the line running horizontally through it the path of the candidate (or one who has gone through), the two spots within the place of the sacred stone and the post, while the spot to the right of the outside of the inclosure denotes the beginning, or the sweat-lodge, symbolizing the circle of the earth upon the Midē´ chart (Pl. III), those upon the left denoting the three possible degrees of advancement in the future.
This is directed to the Midē´ priests (Nika´ni) present and asks about their willingness to proceed. The Midē´wigân is displayed, with the horizontal line through it representing the path of the candidate (or one who has completed it). The two spots inside the area of the sacred stone and the post are marked, while the spot to the right outside the enclosure indicates the starting point, or the sweat-lodge, symbolizing the circle of the earth on the Midē´ chart (Pl. III), and those on the left represent the three possible levels of advancement in the future.
Upon the conclusion of the song there is a brief interval, during which all partake of a smoke in perfect silence, making the usual offerings to the four points of the compass, to Ki´tshi Man´idō´, and toward the earth.
At the end of the song, there’s a short pause where everyone quietly has a smoke, making the usual offerings to the four directions, to Ki´tshi Man´idō´, and to the earth.
The preceptor then says:
The mentor then says:
Mĭs-sa´i´-a-shi-gwa, | mĭs-sa´-a-shĭ-gwa- | nŏn´-do-nŭng; | ka-kĭ-nâ |
Now is the time, | now is the time he | hears us; | all of us |
ka-kĭn´-nâ-gi-nŏn´-do-da´g-u-nan´ | ga-o´-shī-dōt | mi-dē´-wĭ´-win. |
he hears us all the one | who made the | midē´wiwin. |
After this monologue he continues, and addresses to the candidate the midē´ gagĭ´kwewĭn´, or Midē´ sermon, in the following language, viz:
After this monologue, he goes on to deliver the midē´ gagĭ´kwewĭn´, or Midē´ sermon, using the following words:
An-be´-bi-sĭn´-di-wi´-shĭn, | wa´-i-ni´-nan; |
now listen to me | what I am about to say to you; |
kēsh´-pin-pe´-sin-da´-nin-wĭn | da-ma´-dzhi shka´ | ke´-bi-mâ´-di-si-wĭn´. |
If you take heed of that which I say to you | shall continue | always your life. |
Un, nun´-gūm, | ke-za´-ki-gi-zi-ton mŏn | ki´-tshi man´-i-dō | ō´-dik-kid´-do-wĭn´; |
Now, to-day | I make known to you | the great spirit | That which he says; |
o´-wi-dŏsh kid´-di-nĭn´ | ki-ī´-kid-dō´kī´-tshi | man´-i-dō | gi´-sa-gi-ĭg´. |
and now this I say to you. | This is what says | the great spirit | that he loves you. |
to-wa´-bish-ga´ | gi-shtig-wa | a-pī-we- | sa´-gi-sit´-to-wad |
It shall be white | the sacred object | at the time | When they shall let it be known |
o-sa´-in-di-kid´-do-wīn | ĕ´-kid-dōdt ki´-tshi | man´-i-dō |
and this is what I say | That which he says | the great spirit |
ŏ´-gi-din´-nĭn | mis-sâ´-wa | ke´-a-ked´-de-wó |
now this I impart to you | even if | they say |
wa´-ba-ma-tshin´ni-bŭdt | mi´-â-ma´ tshī´-ō- | nish-gâd´, |
That they saw him dead | in this place he shall be | Raised again |
ini-â-má | a-pe´-ni-nut´ | nin-dē´ | kid´-do-wĭn |
in this place | he puts his trust | In my heart | in this “saying” |
min-nik´ kid-da´- | kĭ-o-wink´. | Ka-wī´-ka-da-an´-na-we´-was-si-nan, |
the time of the duration | Of the world. | It shall never fail. |
me-ē´-kid-dodt´ man´-i-dō. | Nin´-ne-dzha´-nis |
That is what he says, the spirit. | My child, |
ke-un´-dzhi be-mâ´-dis | si´-an. |
this shall give | you life. |
The Midē´ priests then leave the sweat-lodge and stand upon the outside, while the candidate gathers up in his arms a number of small presents, such as tobacco, handkerchiefs, etc., and goes out of the wig´iwam to join the Midē´ priests. The order of marching to the main entrance of the Midē´wigân is then taken up in the following order: First the candidate, next the preceptor, who in turn is followed by the officiating priests, and such others, and members of his family and relatives as desire. At the door of the Midē´wigân all but one of the priests continue forward and take their stations within the inclosure, the preceptor remaining on one side of the candidate, the Midē´ priest upon the other, then all march four times around the outside of the inclosure, toward the left or south, during which time drumming is continued within. Upon the completion of the fourth circuit the candidate is placed so as to face the main entrance of the Midē´wigân. When he is prompted to say:
The Midē´ priests then leave the sweat lodge and stand outside while the candidate gathers a few small gifts, like tobacco and handkerchiefs, and walks out of the wig´iwam to join the Midē´ priests. They start moving to the main entrance of the Midē´wigân in this order: first the candidate, then the preceptor, followed by the officiating priests, as well as anyone else, including family and relatives who want to join. At the door of the Midē´wigân, all but one of the priests continue forward and take their places inside the enclosure, with the preceptor on one side of the candidate and the Midē´ priest on the other. They then march around the outside of the enclosure four times, moving to the left or south, while drumming continues inside. Once they complete the fourth round, the candidate is positioned to face the main entrance of the Midē´wigân. When prompted, he is to say:
“Man- un´-ga-bīn´-di-gĕ | o-bŏg´-ga-dĭ-nan´, | o-dai´-ye-din´.” |
Let me come in | and these I put down | my things [gifts]. |
The presents are then laid upon the ground. The preceptor goes inside, taking with him the gifts deposited by the candidate, and remains standing just within the door and faces the degree post toward the west. Then the chief officiating priest, who has remained at the side of the candidate, turns toward the latter and in a clear, distinct, and exceedingly impressive manner sings the following chant, addressed to Ki´tshi Man´idō whose invisible form is supposed to abide within the Midē´wigan during such ceremonies, stating that the candidate is presented to receive life (the mī´gis) for which he is suffering, and invoking the divine favor.
The gifts are then placed on the ground. The teacher goes inside, bringing with him the offerings from the candidate, and stands just inside the door facing the degree post to the west. The chief officiating priest, who has stayed by the candidate's side, turns to the candidate and, in a clear, distinct, and very impactful way, sings the following chant addressed to Ki´tshi Man´idō, whose invisible spirit is believed to be present in the Midē´wigan during these ceremonies. He states that the candidate is here to receive life (the mī´gis) they are seeking and calls upon divine favor.
Hai ya ha man´-i-dō, | hō´, | ti-bish´-ko-gish´-i-gŭng, | hē´, | we-zá-ba-mid´-mi |
There is a spirit | ho, | just as the one above, | he, | now sits with me |
nin-dzhá-nis, | esh-ĭ-gan´-do-we, | hē´, hwē´, | mé-a-tshi-bin´-de-gan´-ni-nan, |
my child | and now I proclaim, | he, hwe, | that I enter you here |
nōs, | dzhi-man´-i-dō, | hō´, | hwō´, | sha-wé-nĭ-mi-shin´, | hē´, hwē´, |
my father | good spirit, | ho, | hwo, | have pity on me, | he, hwe |
a-shig´-wa-bin´-de-gan-nŏk | gé-gwa-da-gí-sid | wi-bĭ-mâ´-di-sĭd, |
now that I enter him here, | he that is suffering | for life, |
dé-bwe-daú-wi-shĭn | dzhí-bi-mâ´-di-sĭd´, | nōs, |
believe me | that he shall live, | my father, |
wē´-o-sĭm´-in-nan´, | hē´, hē´. |
whose child I am, | he, he. |
The following is the musical notation:
The following is the sheet music:
he-he-he-he yo.
he-he-he hey.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
The candidate is then led within the inclosure when all the members of the society arise while he is slowly led around toward the southern side to the extreme end in the west, thence toward the right and back along the western side to the point of beginning. This is done four times. As he starts upon his march, the member nearest the door falls in the line of procession, each member continuing to drop in, at the rear, until the entire assembly is in motion. During this movement there is a monotonous drumming upon the Midē´ drums and the chief officiating priest sings:
The candidate is then brought inside the enclosure while all the society members stand up. He is slowly guided around to the south side, all the way to the far west end, then towards the right and back along the west side to where he started. This happens four times. As he begins his march, the member closest to the door joins the procession, and each member continues to line up behind until the entire group is moving. During this, there is a steady drumming on the Midē´ drums, and the chief officiating priest sings:
Ni´-sha-bōn´-da shkan | wig´-i-wam | ke-nōn´-dēg, |
I go through | [the] “house” | the long, i.e., through the Midē´wigân. |
At the fourth circuit, members begin to stop at the places previously occupied by them, the candidate going and remaining with his preceptor to a point just inside the eastern entrance, while the four officiating priests continue around toward the opposite end of the inclosure and station themselves in a semicircle just beyond the degree post, and facing the western door. Upon the ground before them are spread blankets and similar goods, which have been removed from the beams above, and upon which the candidate is to kneel. He is then led to the western extremity of the inclosure where he 214 stands upon the blankets spread upon the ground and faces the four Midē´ priests. The preceptor takes his position behind and a little to one side of the candidate, another assistant being called upon by the preceptor to occupy a corresponding position upon the other side. During this procedure there is gentle drumming which ceases after all have been properly stationed, when the preceptor steps to a point to the side and front of the candidate and nearer the officiating priests, and says:
At the fourth circuit, the members start to stop at the spots they previously occupied. The candidate stays with his mentor until they reach a spot just inside the eastern entrance, while the four officiating priests continue moving around to the opposite end of the area and position themselves in a semicircle just beyond the degree post, facing the western door. Blankets and other items, which have been taken down from above, are spread out on the ground in front of them, and the candidate is to kneel on these. He is then led to the western end of the area where he stands on the blankets laid out on the ground, facing the four Midē´ priests. The mentor stands behind and slightly to one side of the candidate, while another assistant is called by the mentor to take a similar position on the other side. During this process, there is soft drumming that stops once everyone is properly positioned. The mentor then steps to a point in front and slightly to the side of the candidate, closer to the officiating priests, and says:
Mĭ-i´-shi-gwa´ | bŏ´-gi-ta-mon´-nan, |
The time has arrived | that I yield it to you. |
mi´-na-nan´-kĕ-ân-dzhi | bi-mâ´-dĭ-si´-an. |
[the midē´migis] that will give you | life. |
The preceptor then returns to his position back of and a little to one side of the candidate, when the chief officiating priest sings the following song, accompanying himself upon a small cylindrical midē´drum. The words are: Kit´-ta-non´-do-wē man´-i-do´-wid—you shall hear me, spirit that you are—, and the music is rendered as follows:
The teacher then goes back to his spot behind and slightly to the side of the candidate, as the main officiating priest sings the following song, playing a small cylindrical drum. The words are: Kit´-ta-non´-do-wē man´-i-do´-wid—you shall hear me, spirit that you are—, and the music is played like this:
Kit´ta-no´do-we man´i-dō´wid-hō dō, wē, hē,
Kitta now do we, he,
Kit´ta-no´do-we man´i-dō-wid-hō, hē, hwē, hē,
Kitta-nodewe manidōwidho, hey, who, hey,
Kit´-ta-no´-do-we man´-i-dō´-wid, kit´ta-no´do-wē,
Kit’ta-no’do-we man’i-dō’wid, kit’ta-no’do-wē,
kit´ta-no´do-wid, man´i-do´-wid, man´i-do´wid-hō, wē, hwē, hē,
kit´ta-no´do-wid, man´i-do´-wid, man´i-do´wid-hō, wē, hwē, hē,
Kit´ta-no´dowē´ man´idō´wid, hō, hē, hwē, hē, hē, hwē, hē.
Kitta-now-do-we manido-wid, ho, he, hue, he, he, hue, he.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
Mĭs-sa´-a-shi´-gwa | ki-bo´-gĭs-sē-na-min | tshi´-ma-mâd |
Now is the time | that I hope of you | that you shall |
bi-mâ´-di-sĭ-wĭn, | mĭ-nē´-sĭd. |
take life | the bead [mi´gis shell.] |
This priest then grasps his Midē´ sack as if holding a gun, and, clutching it near the top with the left hand extended, while with the right he clutches it below the middle or near the base, he aims it toward the candidate’s left breast and makes a thrust forward toward that target uttering the syllables “yâ, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´,” rapidly, rising to a higher key. He recovers his first position and repeats this movement three times, becoming more and more animated, the last time making a vigorous gesture toward the kneeling man’s breast as if shooting him. (See Fig. 15, page 192.) While this is going on, the preceptor and his assistants place their hands upon the candidate’s shoulders and cause his body to tremble.
This priest then grabs his Midē´ sack like he's holding a gun, and, gripping it near the top with his left hand, while with his right hand he holds it below the middle or near the base, he aims it at the candidate’s left chest and thrusts forward, saying the syllables “yâ, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´” rapidly, rising to a higher pitch. He returns to his original position and repeats this action three times, becoming more animated each time, and on the last attempt, he makes a strong gesture towards the kneeling man’s chest as if he's shooting him. (See Fig. 15, page 192.) While this is happening, the instructor and his assistants place their hands on the candidate’s shoulders and make his body shake.
Then the next Midē´, the third of the quartette, goes through a similar series of forward movements and thrusts with his Midē´ sack, uttering similar sounds and shooting the sacred mī´gis—life—into the right breast of the candidate, who is agitated still more strongly than before. When the third Midē´, the second in order of precedence, goes through similar gestures and pretends to shoot the mī´gis into the candidate’s heart, the preceptors assist him to be violently agitated.
Then the next Midē, the third in the group, performs a series of forward movements and thrusts with his Midē sack, making similar noises and directing the sacred mīs into the right side of the candidate's chest, who becomes even more agitated than before. When the third Midē, the second in rank, makes similar gestures and acts as if he is shooting the mīs into the candidate's heart, the instructors help him become intensely agitated.
The leading priest now places himself in a threatening attitude and says to the Midē´; “Mī´-dzhi-de´-a-mi-shĭk´”—“put your helping heart with me”—, when he imitates his predecessors by saying, “yâ, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´,” at the fourth time aiming the Midē´ sack at the candidate’s head, and as the mī´gis is supposed to be shot into it, he falls forward upon the ground, apparently lifeless.
The chief priest takes a threatening stance and says to the Midḗ, “Mī́-dzhi-dé-a-mi-shĭḱ”—“put your helping heart with me”—as he mimics his predecessors, chanting, “yâ, hŏ́, hŏ́, hŏ́, hŏ́, hŏ́, hŏ́.” On the fourth repetition, he aims the Midḗ sack at the candidate's head, and as the mī́gis is supposed to be shot into it, the candidate collapses forward onto the ground, appearing lifeless.
Then the four Midē´ priests, the preceptor and the assistant, lay their Midē´ sacks upon his back and after a few moments a mī´gis shell drops from his mouth—where he had been instructed to retain it. The chief Midē´ picks up the mī´gis and, holding it between the thumb and index finger of the right hand, extending his arm toward the candidate’s mouth says “wâ! wâ! hĕ hĕ hĕ hĕ,” the last syllable being uttered in a high key and rapidly dropped to a low note; then the same words are uttered while the mī´gis is held toward the east, and in regular succession to the south, to the west, to the north, then toward the sky. During this time the candidate has begun to partially revive and endeavor to get upon his knees, but when the Midē´ finally places the mī´gis into his mouth again, he instantly falls upon the ground, as before. The Midē´ then take up the sacks, each grasping his own as before, and as they pass around the inanimate body they touch it at various points, which causes the 216 candidate to “return to life.” The chief priest then says to him, “Ō´mishga‘n”A—“get up”—which he does; then indicating to the holder of the Midē´ drum to bring that to him, he begins tapping and presently sings the following song:
Then the four Midē´ priests, the teacher and the assistant, place their Midē´ sacks on his back and after a few moments, a mī´gis shell falls from his mouth—where he had been instructed to keep it. The chief Midē´ picks up the mī´gis and, holding it between the thumb and index finger of his right hand, reaches out toward the candidate’s mouth and says “wâ! wâ! hĕ hĕ hĕ hĕ,” with the last syllable said in a high pitch and quickly dropped to a low note; then he repeats the same words while pointing the mī´gis toward the east, and in regular order to the south, west, north, and then up to the sky. Meanwhile, the candidate starts to regain consciousness and tries to get on his knees, but when the Midē´ finally places the mī´gis back in his mouth, he immediately falls to the ground again, just like before. The Midē´ then pick up the sacks, each grabbing his own, and as they circle around the motionless body, they touch it at various spots, which causes the candidate to “come back to life.” The chief priest then tells him, “Ō´mishga‘n”A—“get up”—and he does; then signaling to the holder of the Midē´ drum to bring it to him, he starts tapping it and soon sings the following song:
Mi´-si-ni-en´-di-an Mi´si-ni-en´-di-an Mi´-si-ni-en´-dian,
Mi'si-ni-en'di-an Mi'si-ni-en'di-an Mi'-si-ni-en'dian,
Mi´-si-ni-en´-di-an, Mi´-si-ni-en´-di-an Mi´-si-ni-en´-di-an,
Mi'si-ni-en'di-an, Mi'si-ni-en'di-an Mi'si-ni-en'di-an,
Mi´-si-ni-en´-di-an, Mi´-si-ni-en´-di-an Mi´-si-ni-en´-di-an,
MiSiNiEnDiAn, MiSiNiEnDiAn MiSiNiEnDiAn,
Ni-kan. Hĭū, Hĭū, Hĭu.
Ni-kan. Hĭū, Hĭū, Hĭu.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
The words of the text signify, “This is what I am, my fellow Midē´; I fear all my fellow Midē´.” The last syllables, hĭū´, are meaningless.
The words of the text mean, “This is who I am, my fellow Midē´; I fear all my fellow Midē´.” The last syllables, hĭū´, have no meaning.
At the conclusion of the song the preceptor prompts the candidate to ask the chief Midē´:
At the end of the song, the teacher encourages the candidate to ask the chief Midē´:
Ni-kan´ | k´kĕ´-nō´-mo´, | man-dzhi´-an | na´-ka-mō´-in. |
Colleague | instruct me, | give me | a song. |
In response to which the Midē´ teaches him the following, which is uttered as a monotonous chant, viz:
In response to this, the Midē´ teaches him the following, which is said in a monotone chant:
We´-go-nĕn´ | ge-gwed´-dzhi-me-an´, | mi-dē´-wi-wĭn | ke-kwed´-dzhi-me-an´? |
What | are you asking, | grand medicine | are you asking? |
Ki´-ka-mi´-nin | en-da-wĕn´-da | ma-wi´-nĕn | mi-dē´-wi-wĭn |
I will give you | you want me to | give you | “grand medicine” |
tshi-da-si-nē´-ga´-na-win´-da-mōn; | ki-ĭn´-tshun-di´-nĕ-ma´-so-wĭn, |
always take care of; | you have received it yourself, |
tsho´-a-wa´-nin | di´-sĕ-wan. |
never | forget. |
To this the candidate, who is now a member, replies, ēn, yes, i.e., assent, fully agreeing with the statement made by the Midē´, and adds:
To this, the candidate, who is now a member, replies, ēn, yes, meaning they fully agree with the statement made by the Midē´, and adds:
Mi-gwĕtsh´ | a-shi´-wa-ka-kish´-da-win | be-mâ´-di-si´-an. |
Thanks | for giving to me | life. |
Then the priests begin to look around in search of spaces in which to seat themselves, saying:
Then the priests start looking around for places to sit, saying:
Mi´-a-shi´-gwa ki´-tshi-an´-wâ-bin-da-man | tshi-ō´-we-na´-bi-an. |
Now is the time I look around | where we shall be [sit]. |
and all go to such places as are made, or reserved, for them.
and everyone goes to places that are created or set aside for them.
The new member then goes to the pile of blankets, robes, and other gifts and divides them among the four officiating priests, reserving some of less value for the preceptor and his assistant; whereas tobacco is carried around to each person present. All then make an offering of smoke, to the east, south, west, north, toward the center and top of the Midē´wigân—where Ki´tshi Man´idō presides—and to the earth. Then each person blows smoke upon his or her Midē´ sack as an offering to the sacred mī´gis within.
The new member goes to the pile of blankets, robes, and other gifts and divides them among the four officiating priests, setting aside some of less value for the teacher and their assistant; meanwhile, tobacco is passed around to everyone present. Then, everyone makes an offering of smoke to the east, south, west, north, toward the center and top of the Midē´wigân—where Ki´tshi Man´idō presides—and to the earth. After that, each person blows smoke onto their Midē´ sack as an offering to the sacred mī´gis within.
The chief Midē´ advances to the new member and presents him with a new Midē´ sack, made of an otter skin, or possibly of the skin of the mink or weasel, after which he returns to his place. The new member rises, approaches the chief Midē´, who inclines his head to the front, and, while passing both flat hands down over either side,
The chief Midē´ steps up to the new member and hands him a new Midē´ sack, crafted from otter skin, or maybe from mink or weasel skin, and then goes back to his spot. The new member stands up, walks over to the chief Midē´, who nods forward, and, while sliding both flat hands down over each side,
Mi-gwĕtsh´, | ni-ka´-ni, ni-ka´-ni, ni-ka´-ni, na-ka´. |
Thanks, | my colleagues, my colleagues, my colleagues. |
Then, approaching the next in rank, he repeats the ceremony and continues to do so until he has made the entire circuit of the Midē´wigân.
Then, he goes up to the next person in rank, repeats the ceremony, and keeps doing this until he has completed the whole circuit of the Midē´wigân.
At the conclusion of this ceremony of rendering thanks to the members of the society for their presence, the newly elected Midē´ returns to his place and, after placing within his Midē´ sack his mī´gis, starts out anew to test his own powers. He approaches the person seated nearest the eastern entrance, on the south side, and, grasping his sack in a manner similar to that of the officiating priests, makes threatening motions toward the Midē´ as if to shoot him, saying, “yâ, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´,” gradually raising his voice to a higher key. At the fourth movement he makes a quick thrust toward his victim, whereupon the latter falls forward upon the ground. He then proceeds to the next, who is menaced in a similar manner and who likewise becomes apparently unconscious from the powerful effects of the mī´gis. This is continued until all persons present have been subjected to the influence of the mī´gis in the possession of the new member. At the third or fourth experiment the first subject revives and sits up, the others recovering in regular order a short time after having been “shot at,” as this procedure is termed.
At the end of this thank-you ceremony for the society members' attendance, the newly elected Midē´ returns to his spot and, after putting his mī´gis in his Midē´ sack, sets out again to test his abilities. He approaches the person sitting closest to the eastern entrance on the south side, grips his sack like the officiating priests, and makes aggressive gestures toward the Midē´ as if to aim at him, saying, “yâ, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´,” gradually increasing his voice. On the fourth gesture, he makes a sudden move toward his target, causing that person to fall forward onto the ground. He then moves to the next individual, threatening them similarly, and they also seem to lose consciousness from the strong effects of the mī´gis. This continues until everyone present has felt the influence of the mī´gis held by the new member. After the third or fourth attempt, the first person revives and sits up, and the others recover in order shortly after being “shot at,” as this act is called.
When all of the Midē´ have recovered a very curious ceremony takes place. Each one places his mī´gis shell upon the right palm and, grasping the Midē´ sack with the left hand, moves around the inclosure and exhibits his mī´gis to everyone present, constantly uttering the word “hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´,” in a quick, low tone. During this period there is a mingling of all the persons present, each endeavoring to attract the attention of the others. Each Midē´ then 218 pretends to swallow his mī´gis, when suddenly there are sounds of violent coughing, as if the actors were strangling, and soon thereafter they gag and spit out upon the ground the mī´gis, upon which each one falls apparently dead. In a few moments, however, they recover, take up the little shells again and pretend to swallow them. As the Midē´ return to their respective places the mī´gis is restored to its receptacle in the Midē´ sack.
When all of the Midē' have recovered, a very interesting ceremony takes place. Each person puts their mī'gis shell on their right palm and, holding the Midē' sack with their left hand, walks around the area showing their mī'gis to everyone present while repeatedly saying “hŏ', hŏ', hŏ', hŏ'” in a quick, quiet voice. During this time, everyone mingles, trying to catch each other's attention. Each Midē' then pretends to swallow their mī'gis, when suddenly, there are loud coughing sounds, as if they're choking, and shortly after, they gag and spit out the mī'gis onto the ground, collapsing as if they’re dead. In just a few moments, though, they recover, pick up the little shells again, and pretend to swallow them. As the Midē' return to their spots, the mī'gis is returned to its place in the Midē' sack.
Food is then brought into the Midē´wigân and all partake of it at the expense of the new member.
Food is then brought into the Midē'wigân, and everyone shares it at the expense of the new member.
After the feast, the older Midē´ of high order, and possibly the officiating priests, recount the tradition of the Ani´shinâ´bēg and the origin of the Midē´wiwin, together with speeches relating to the benefits to be derived through a knowledge thereof, and sometimes, tales of individual success and exploits. When the inspired ones have given utterance to their thoughts and feelings, their memories and their boastings, and the time of adjournment has almost arrived, the new member gives an evidence of his skill as a singer and a Midē´. Having acted upon the suggestion of his preceptor, he has prepared some songs and learned them, and now for the first time the opportunity presents itself for him to gain admirers and influential friends, a sufficient number of whom he will require to speak well of him, and to counteract the evil which will be spoken of him by enemies—for enemies are numerous and may be found chiefly among those who are not fitted for the society of the Midē´, or who have failed to attain the desired distinction.
After the feast, the senior Midē´ of high rank, along with the officiating priests, share the tradition of the Ani´shinâ´bēg and the origins of the Midē´wiwin. They also deliver speeches about the benefits that come from understanding these teachings, and sometimes share stories of individual successes and achievements. When the inspired individuals have expressed their thoughts and feelings, their memories and their boasts, and as the time to wrap up approaches, the new member showcases his skills as a singer and a Midē´. Following the advice of his mentor, he has prepared some songs and learned them, and now for the first time he has the chance to win admirers and influential supporters—enough of whom he will need to speak positively about him and to counter any negativity from his enemies, as enemies abound, particularly among those who aren't suited for the Midē´ society or who have not achieved the desired recognition.
The new member, in the absence of a Midē´ drum of his own, borrows one from a fellow Midē´ and begins to beat it gently, increasing the strokes in intensity as he feels more and more inspired, then sings a song (Pl. X, D), of which the following are the words, each line being repeated ad libitum, viz:
The new member, without a Midē´ drum of his own, borrows one from another Midē´ and starts to play it softly, gradually increasing the beat as he feels more inspired, then sings a song (Pl. X, D), with the following words, each line being repeated as needed, namely:
Plate X.d. Mnemonic Song.
Plate X.d. Memory Song.
As the sun approaches the western horizon, the Midē´ priests emerge from the western door of the Midē´wigân and go to their respective wig´iwams, where they partake of their regular evening repast, after which the remainder of the evening is spent in paying calls upon other members of the society, smoking, etc.
As the sun gets closer to the western horizon, the Midē´ priests come out from the western door of the Midē´wigân and head to their individual wig´iwams, where they have their usual dinner. After that, they spend the rest of the evening visiting other society members, smoking, and so on.
The preceptor and his assistant return to the Midē´wigân at nightfall, remove the degree post and plant it at the head of the wig´iwam—that part directly opposite the entrance—occupied by the new member. Two stones are placed at the base of the post, to represent the two forefeet of the bear Man´idō through whom life was also given to the Ani´shinâ´bēg.
The teacher and his assistant come back to the Midē´wigân at dusk, take down the degree post, and put it at the head of the wig´iwam—the spot directly across from the entrance—where the new member is located. Two stones are set at the bottom of the post to symbolize the two forefeet of the bear Man´idō, through whom life was also given to the Ani´shinâ´bēg.
If there should be more than one candidate to receive a degree the entire number, if not too great, is taken into the Midē´wigân for initiation at the same time; and if one day suffices to transact the 220 business for which the meeting was called the Indians return to their respective homes upon the following morning. If, however, arrangements have been made to advance a member to a higher degree, the necessary changes and appropriate arrangement of the interior of the Midē´wigân are begun immediately after the society has adjourned.
If there’s more than one candidate for a degree, and the number isn’t too large, they all go into the Midē´wigân for initiation at the same time. If one day is enough to handle the purpose of the meeting, the members return home the next morning. However, if plans are in place to promote a member to a higher degree, the required changes and arrangements inside the Midē´wigân start immediately after the society wraps up.
DESCRIPTIVE NOTES.
The mī´gis referred to in this description of the initiation consists of a small white shell, of almost any species, but the one believed to resemble the form of the mythical mī´gis is similar to the cowrie, Cypræa moneta, L., and is figured at No. 1 on Pl. XI. Nearly all of the shells employed for this purpose are foreign species, and have no doubt been obtained from the traders. The shells found in the country of the Ojibwa are of rather delicate structure, and it is probable that the salt water shells are employed as a substitute chiefly because of their less frangible character. The mī´gis of the other degrees are presented on the same plate, but special reference to them will be made. No. 2 represents the mī´gis in the possession of the chief Midē priest of the society at Leech Lake, Minnesota, and consists of a pearl-white Helix (sp?).
The mī´gis mentioned in this initiation description is a small white shell from almost any species, but the one that looks most like the mythical mī´gis is similar to the cowrie, Cypræa moneta, L., which is shown as No. 1 on Pl. XI. Most of the shells used for this purpose are foreign species, likely obtained from traders. The shells found in the Ojibwa region are quite delicate, and it’s likely that the saltwater shells are used as a substitute mainly due to their sturdier nature. The mī´gis from other degrees are shown on the same plate, but we will refer to them specifically later. No. 2 shows the mī´gis owned by the chief Midē priest of the society at Leech Lake, Minnesota, and it consists of a pearl-white Helix (sp?).
Plate XI. Sacred Objects.
Plate XI. Sacred Items.
The Midē´ sack represented in No. 7 (Pl. XI.) is made of the skin of a mink—Putorius vison, Gapp. White, downy feathers are secured to the nose, as an additional ornament. In this sack are carried the sacred objects belonging to its owner, such as colors for facial ornamentation, and the magic red powder employed in the preparation of hunters´ songs; effigies and other contrivances to prove to the incredulous the genuineness of the Midē´ pretensions, sacred songs, amulets, and other small man´idōs—abnormal productions to which they attach supernatural properties—invitation sticks, etc.
The Midē' sack shown in No. 7 (Pl. XI.) is made from mink skin—Putorius vison, Gapp. Soft, white feathers are attached to the nose as an extra decoration. Inside this sack are the sacred items belonging to its owner, like facial decoration colors and the magical red powder used for preparing hunters' songs; figures and other items meant to prove to skeptics the authenticity of the Midē' claims, sacred songs, amulets, and other small man'idōs—unusual items that are believed to have supernatural powers—invitation sticks, and so on.
![]() |
Fig. 19.—Hawk-leg fetish. |
221 In Fig. 19 is reproduced a curious abnormal growth which was in the possession of a Midē´ near Red Lake, Minnesota. It consists of the leg of a Goshawk—Astur atricapillus, Wilson—from the outer inferior condyle of the right tibia of which had projected a supernumerary leg that terminated in two toes, the whole abnormality being about one-half the size and length of the natural leg and toes.
221 In Fig. 19 is shown an unusual abnormal growth that was owned by a Midē´ near Red Lake, Minnesota. It consists of a leg from a Goshawk—Astur atricapillus, Wilson—from which a supernumerary leg projected from the outer lower condyle of the right tibia, ending in two toes. The entire abnormality is about half the size and length of the natural leg and toes.
This fetish was highly prized by its former owner, and was believed to be a medium whereby the favor of the Great Thunderer, or Thunder God, might be invoked and his anger appeased. This deity is represented in pictography by the eagle, or frequently by one of the Falconidæ; hence it is but natural that the superstitious should look with awe and reverence upon such an abnormality on one of the terrestrial representatives of this deity.
This fetish was greatly valued by its previous owner and was thought to be a way to invoke the favor of the Great Thunderer, or Thunder God, and to calm his anger. This deity is depicted in imagery by the eagle or often by one of the falcons; therefore, it's understandable that the superstitious would regard such an unusual feature on one of the earthly representations of this deity with awe and respect.
A Midē´ of the first degree, who may not be enabled to advance further in the mysteries of the Midē´wiwin, owing to his inability to procure the necessary quantity of presents and gifts which he is required to pay to new preceptors and to the officiating priests—the latter demanding goods of double the value of those given as an entrance to the first degree—may, however, accomplish the acquisition of additional knowledge by purchasing it from individual Midē´. It is customary with Midē´ priests to exact payment for every individual remedy or secret that may be imparted to another who may desire such information. This practice is not entirely based upon mercenary motives, but it is firmly believed that when a secret or remedy has been paid, for it can not be imparted for nothing, as then its virtue would be impaired, if not entirely destroyed, by the man´idō or guardian spirit under whose special protection it may be supposed to be held or controlled.
A Midē´ of the first degree, who might not be able to progress further in the mysteries of the Midē´wiwin due to his inability to gather the necessary amount of gifts and offerings required to pay new teachers and the officiating priests—who charge for items worth twice the value of those given for entrance to the first degree—can still gain more knowledge by purchasing it from individual Midē´. It's common practice among Midē´ priests to require payment for each specific remedy or secret shared with someone who wants that information. This practice isn't entirely driven by greed; it's widely believed that once a secret or remedy is paid for, it can't be given away for free, as doing so would diminish its effectiveness, if not completely ruin it, according to the man´idō or guardian spirit believed to oversee it.
Under such circumstances certain first degree Midē´ may become possessed of alleged magic powers which are in reality part of the accomplishments of the Midē´ of the higher degrees; but, for the mutual protection of the members of the society, they generally hesitate to impart anything that may be considered of high value. The usual kind of knowledge sought consists of the magic properties and use of plants, to the chief varieties of which reference will be made in connection with the next degree.
Under these circumstances, some first-degree Midē´ may claim to have magical powers that are actually part of the skills of higher-degree Midē´. However, to protect their members, they usually avoid sharing anything that might be seen as highly valuable. The typical knowledge sought focuses on the magical properties and uses of plants, which will be referenced in relation to the next degree.
There is one subject, however, which first-degree Midē´ seek enlightment upon, and that is the preparation of the “hunter’s medicine” and the pictographic drawings employed in connection therewith. The compound is made of several plants, the leaves and roots of which are ground into powder. A little of this is put into the gun barrel, with the bullet, and sometimes a small pinch is dropped upon the track of the animal to compel it to halt at whatever place it may be when the powder is so sprinkled upon the ground.
There is one topic, however, that first-degree Midē´ seek knowledge about, and that is the making of the “hunter’s medicine” and the pictographic drawings used with it. The mixture is made from several plants, whose leaves and roots are ground into powder. A small amount of this is placed in the gun barrel along with the bullet, and sometimes a tiny pinch is sprinkled on the animal's trail to make it stop wherever the powder is scattered on the ground.
The method generally employed to give to the hunter success is as follows: When anyone contemplates making a hunting trip, he first visits the Midē´, giving him a present of tobacco before announcing 222 the object of his visit and afterwards promising to give him such and such portions of the animal which he may procure. The Midē´, if satisfied with the gift, produces his pipe and after making an offering to Ki´tshi Man´idō for aid in the preparation of his “medicine,” and to appease the anger of the man´idō who controls the class of animals desired, sings a song, one of his own composition, after which he will draw with a sharp-pointed bone or nail, upon a small piece of birch bark, the outline of the animal desired by the applicant. The place of the heart of the animal is indicated by a puncture upon which a small quantity of vermilion is carefully rubbed, this color being very efficacious toward effecting the capture of the animal and the punctured heart insuring its death.
The method usually used to ensure a hunter's success is as follows: When someone plans a hunting trip, they first visit the Midē´, offering him a gift of tobacco before stating the purpose of their visit and then promising to share portions of the animal they may catch. If the Midē´ is pleased with the gift, he takes out his pipe and makes an offering to Ki´tshi Man´idō for help in preparing his “medicine,” and to calm the man´idō that governs the animals they want. He then sings a song that he created himself, after which he draws the outline of the desired animal on a small piece of birch bark using a sharp bone or nail. He marks the location of the animal's heart with a puncture, on which he rubs a small amount of vermilion, as this color is believed to be very effective in capturing the animal, and the punctured heart guarantees its death.
![]() |
Fig. 20.—Hunter’s medicine. |
Frequently the heart is indicated by a round or triangular figure, from which a line extends toward the mouth, generally designated the life line, i.e., that magic power may reach its heart and influence the life of the subject designated. Fig. 20 is a reproduction of the character drawn upon a small oval piece of birch bark, which had been made by a Midē´ to insure the death of two bears. Another example is presented in Fig. 21, a variety of animals being figured and a small quantity of vermilion being rubbed upon the heart of each. In some instances the representation of animal forms is drawn by the Midē´ not upon birch bark, but directly upon sandy earth or a bed of ashes, either of which affords a smooth surface. For this purpose he uses a sharply pointed piece of wood, thrusts it into the region of the heart, and afterwards sprinkles upon this a small quantity of powder consisting of magic plants and vermilion. These performances are not conducted in public, but after the regular mystic ceremony has been conducted by the Midē´ the information is delivered with certain injunctions as to the course of procedure, direction, 223 etc. In the latter method of drawing the outline upon the sand or upon ashes, the result is made known with such directions as may be deemed necessary to insure success.
Often, the heart is represented by a round or triangular shape, from which a line extends toward the mouth, typically called the life line. This signifies that a magical power can reach its heart and influence the life of the individual indicated. Fig. 20 is a reproduction of a character drawn on a small oval piece of birch bark, created by a Midē´ to ensure the death of two bears. Another example can be found in Fig. 21, featuring various animals with a small amount of vermilion rubbed onto the heart of each. In some cases, the Midē´ draws animal forms not on birch bark, but directly on sandy earth or ashes, which provide a smooth surface. For this, he uses a sharp piece of wood, presses it into the area of the heart, and then sprinkles a small amount of powder made from magical plants and vermilion over it. These rituals are not performed publicly; after the standard mystic ceremony conducted by the Midē´, the information is shared with specific instructions regarding the procedure and direction. In the latter method of outlining on sand or ashes, the results are communicated along with necessary directions to ensure success.
Fig. 21.—Hunter’s medicine.
Fig. 21.—Hunter’s Med.
For the purpose of gaining instruction and success in the disposition of his alleged medicines, the Midē´ familiarizes himself with the topography and characteristics of the country extending over a wide area, to ascertain the best feeding grounds of the various animals and their haunts at various seasons. He keeps himself informed by also skillfully conducting inquiries of returning hunters, and thus becomes possessed of a large amount of valuable information respecting the natural history of the surrounding country, by which means he can, with a tolerable amount of certainty, direct a hunter to the best localities for such varieties of game as may be particularly desired by him.
To gain knowledge and success in managing his supposed medicines, the Midē familiarizes himself with the landscape and features of the area, covering a large region, to find the best feeding grounds for different animals and their habitats throughout the seasons. He stays informed by skillfully asking questions of returning hunters, which allows him to gather a wealth of valuable information about the local wildlife. This way, he can reliably guide a hunter to the best spots for the specific types of game they are looking for.
![]() |
Fig. 22.—Wâbĕnō´ drum. |
In his incantations a Wâbĕnō´ uses a drum resembling a tambourine. A hoop made of ash wood is covered with a piece of rawhide, tightly stretched while wet. Upon the upper surface is painted a mythic figure, usually that of his tutelaly daimon. An example of this kind is from Red Lake, Minnesota, presented in Fig. 22. The human figure is painted red, while the outline of the head is black, as are also the waving lines extending from the head. These lines denote superior power. When drumming upon this figure, the Wâbĕnō´ chants and is thus more easily enabled to invoke the assistance of his man´idō.
In his rituals, a Wâbĕnō´ uses a drum similar to a tambourine. A hoop made of ash wood is covered with a piece of rawhide, which is tightly stretched while wet. On the top surface, a mythic figure is painted, usually representing his guardian spirit. An example of this kind is from Red Lake, Minnesota, presented in Fig. 22. The human figure is painted red, while the outline of the head is black, as well as the wavy lines extending from the head. These lines signify superior power. While drumming on this figure, the Wâbĕnō´ chants, which helps him invoke the assistance of his man´idō.
Women, as before remarked, may take the degrees of the Midē´wiwin, but, so far as could be ascertained, their professions pertain chiefly to the treatment of women and children and to tattooing for the cure of headache and chronic neuralgia.
Women, as mentioned earlier, can earn the degrees of the Midē´wiwin, but based on what has been discovered, their roles mainly involve treating women and children, as well as tattooing to relieve headaches and chronic neuralgia.
Tattooing is accomplished by the use of finely powdered charcoal, soot or gunpowder, the pricking instrument being made by tying together a small number of needles; though formerly, it is said, fish spines or sharp splinters of bone were used for the purpose. The marks consist of round spots of one-half to three-fourths of an inch in diameter immediately over the afflicted part, the intention being to drive out the demon. Such spots are usually found upon the temples, though an occasional one may be found on the forehead or over the nasal eminence.
Tattooing is done using finely ground charcoal, soot, or gunpowder, with the pricking tool made by bundling a few needles together; it’s said that in the past, fish spines or sharp bone fragments were used for this purpose. The marks are round spots ranging from half an inch to three-quarters of an inch in diameter, placed directly over the affected area, with the goal of driving out the demon. These spots are usually found on the temples, although you might occasionally see one on the forehead or over the nose.
When the pain extends over considerable space the tattoo marks are smaller, and are arranged in rows or continuous lines. Such marks may be found upon some individuals to run outward over either or both cheeks from the alæ of the nose to a point near the 224 lobe of the ear, clearly indicating that the tattooing was done for toothache or neuralgia.
When the pain spreads over a large area, the tattoo marks are smaller and arranged in rows or continuous lines. These marks can be seen on some people, extending outward from the sides of the nose to a point near the 224 lobe of the ear, clearly showing that the tattooing was done for toothache or neuralgia.
The female Midē´ is usually present at the initiation of new members, but her duties are mainly to assist in the singing and to make herself generally useful in connection with the preparation of the medicine feast.
The female Midē´ is typically present at the initiation of new members, but her main responsibilities are to help with the singing and to be generally helpful in preparing the medicine feast.
SECOND DEGREE.
The inclosure within which the second degree of the Midē´wiwin is conferred, resembles in almost every respect that of the first, the only important difference being that there are two degree posts instead of one. A diagram is presented in Fig. 23. The first post is planted a short distance beyond the middle of the floor—toward the western door—and is similar to the post of the first degree, i.e., red, with a band of green around the top, upon which is perched the stuffed body of an owl; the kŏ-ko´-kŏ-ō´. The second post, of similar size, is painted red, and over the entire surface of it are spots of white made by applying clay with the finger tips. (Pl. XV, No. 2.) These spots are symbolical of the sacred mī´gis, the great number of them denoting increased power of the magic influence which fills the Midē´wigân. A small cedar tree is also planted at each of the outer angles of the inclosure.
The area where the second degree of the Midē´wiwin is given looks almost identical to that of the first degree, with the main difference being that there are two degree posts instead of one. A diagram is presented in Fig. 23. The first post is placed a short distance beyond the middle of the floor—toward the western door—and is similar to the first degree post, meaning it’s red, with a green band around the top, where the stuffed body of an owl is perched; the kŏ-ko´-kŏ-ō´. The second post, also similar in size, is painted red, covered with white spots made by applying clay with fingertips. (Pl. XV, No. 2.) These spots symbolize the sacred mī´gis, with their abundance signifying enhanced magical power filling the Midē´wigân. A small cedar tree is also planted at each of the outer corners of the area.
Fig. 23.—Diagram of Midē´wigân of the second degree.
Fig. 23.—Diagram of Midē'wigân of the second degree.
The sweat-lodge, as before, is erected at some distance east of the main entrance of the Midē´wigân, but a larger structure is arranged upon a similar plan; more ample accommodations must be provided to permit a larger gathering of Midē´ priests during the period of preparation and instruction of the candidate.
The sweat lodge, as usual, is set up at a distance east of the main entrance of the Midē´wigân, but a bigger structure is designed in a similar way; more space needs to be provided to allow for a larger group of Midē´ priests during the preparation and instruction of the candidate.
PREPARATION OF CANDIDATE.
A Midē´ of the first degree is aware of the course to be pursued by him when he contemplates advancement into the next higher grade. Before making known to the other members his determination, he is compelled to procure, either by purchase or otherwise, such a quantity of blankets, robes, peltries, and other articles of apparel or ornament as will amount in value to twice the sum at which were estimated the gifts presented at his first initiation. A year or more usually elapses before this can be accomplished, as but one hunting season intervenes before the next annual meeting of the society, when furs are in their prime; and fruits and maple sugar can be gathered but once during the season, and these may be converted into money with which to purchase presents not always found 225 at the Indian traders´ stores. Friends may be called upon to advance goods to effect the accomplishment of his desire, but such loans must be returned in kind later on, unless otherwise agreed. When a candidate feels convinced that he has gathered sufficient material to pay for his advancement, he announces to those members of the society who are of a higher grade than the first degree that he wishes to present himself at the proper time for initiation. This communication is made to eight of the highest or officiating priests, in his own wig´iwam, to which they have been specially invited. A feast is prepared and partaken of, after which he presents to each some tobacco, and smoking is indulged in for the purpose of making proper offerings, as already described. The candidate then informs his auditors of his desire and enumerates the various goods and presents which he has procured to offer at the proper time. The Midē´ priests sit in silence and meditate; but as they have already been informally aware of the applicant’s wish, they are prepared as to the answer they will give, and are governed according to the estimated value of the gifts. Should the decision of the Midē´ priests be favorable, the candidate procures the services of one of those present to assume the office of instructor or preceptor, to whom, as well as to the officiating priests, he displays his ability in his adopted specialties in medical magic, etc. He seeks, furthermore, to acquire additional information upon the preparation of certain secret remedies, and to this end he selects a preceptor who has the reputation of possessing it.
A Mide of the first degree knows what steps he needs to take when he considers moving up to the next higher level. Before sharing his decision with the other members, he has to gather enough blankets, robes, furs, and other clothing or decorative items worth twice the value of the gifts he received when he was first initiated. This usually takes a year or more to accomplish since there's only one hunting season before the society's next annual meeting, when the furs are at their best; fruits and maple sugar can only be collected once a season, and those can be turned into cash to buy gifts that might not always be available at the Indian traders' stores. He might ask friends to lend him goods to help him reach his goal, but he must return these in kind later unless they agree otherwise. When he believes he has gathered enough items for his advancement, he informs those in the society who are at a higher level that he wants to be initiated at the right time. He communicates this to eight of the highest officiating priests in his own wigwam, which they have been specially invited to. A feast is prepared and enjoyed, after which he gives each of them some tobacco, and they smoke as a way to make proper offerings, as previously described. The candidate then shares his intentions and lists the various items he has collected to offer when the time comes. The Mide priests sit in silence and reflect; since they've already informally heard about the candidate’s wish, they are ready with their response, which will depend on the estimated value of the gifts. If the Mide priests decide in his favor, the candidate will get one of the attendees to act as his instructor or mentor, to whom he shows his skills in his chosen specialties like medical magic, etc. He also seeks to learn more about certain secret remedies and picks a mentor who is known to have this knowledge.
For acting in the capacity of instructor, a Midē´ priest receives blankets, horses, and whatever may be mutually agreed upon between himself and his pupil. The meetings take place at the instructor’s wig´iwam at intervals of a week or two; and sometimes during the autumn months, preceding the summer in which the initiation is to be conferred, the candidate is compelled to resort to a sudatory and take a vapor bath, as a means of purgation preparatory to his serious consideration of the sacred rites and teachings with which his mind “and heart” must henceforth be occupied, to the exclusion of everything that might tend to divert his thoughts.
For serving as an instructor, a Midē´ priest receives blankets, horses, and whatever else they agree on together. The meetings happen at the instructor's wig´iwam about every week or two; and sometimes in the autumn before the summer when the initiation is supposed to happen, the candidate has to go to a steam bath for purification. This is meant to prepare him for seriously engaging with the sacred rites and teachings that he will need to focus on, shutting out anything that might distract him.
What the special peculiarities and ceremonials of initiation into the second degree may have been in former times, it is impossible to ascertain at this late day. The only special claims for benefits to be derived through this advancement, as well as into the third and fourth degrees, are, that a Midē´ upon his admission into a new degree receives the protection of that Man´idō alleged and believed to be the special guardian of such degree, and that the repetition of initiation adds to the magic powers previously received by the initiate. In the first degree the sacred mīgis was “shot” into the two sides, the heart, and head of the candidate, whereas in the second degree this sacred, or magic, influence, is directed by the priests 226 toward the candidate’s joints, in accordance with a belief entertained by some priests and referred to in connection with the Red Lake chart presented on Pl. III. The second, third, and fourth degrees are practically mere repetitions of the first, and the slight differences between them are noted under their respective captions.
What the unique traditions and rituals of initiation into the second degree were in the past is impossible to determine at this point. The only notable benefits that come with this advancement, as well as with the third and fourth degrees, are that a Midē´, upon entering a new degree, receives the protection of the Man´idō believed to be the special guardian of that degree, and that the repeated initiation enhances the magic powers already granted to the initiate. In the first degree, the sacred mīgis was “shot” into the two sides, the heart, and the head of the candidate, while in the second degree, this sacred or magical influence is directed by the priests toward the candidate’s joints, based on a belief held by some priests and mentioned in relation to the Red Lake chart presented on Pl. III. The second, third, and fourth degrees are essentially just repetitions of the first, with the minor differences noted in their respective sections. 226
In addition to a recapitulation of the secrets pertaining to the therapeutics of the Midē´, a few additional magic remedies are taught the candidate in his preparatory instruction. The chief of these are described below.
In addition to a recap of the secrets related to the therapy of the Midē´, a few extra magical remedies are provided to the candidate during their preparatory training. The main ones are detailed below.
Ma-kwa´ wī´-i-sŏp, “Bear’s Gall,” and Pi´-zhi-ki wī´-i-sŏp, “Ox Gall,” are both taken from the freshly killed animal and hung up to dry. It is powdered as required, and a small pinch of it is dissolved in water, a few drops of which are dropped into the ear of a patient suffering from earache.
Ma-kwa' wī'-i-sŏp, "Bear's Gall," and Pi'-zhi-ki wī'-i-sŏp, "Ox Gall," are both collected from freshly killed animals and hung up to dry. It's powdered as needed, and a small pinch is mixed with water, then a few drops of it are placed into the ear of a patient dealing with an earache.
Gō´-gi-mish (gen. et sp.?).—A plant, described by the preceptor as being about 2 feet in height, having black bark and clusters of small red flowers.
Gō´-gi-mish (gen. et sp.?).—A plant, described by the teacher as being around 2 feet tall, with black bark and groups of small red flowers.
1. The bark is scraped from the stalk, crushed and dried. When it is to be used the powder is put into a small bag of cloth and soaked in hot water to extract the virtue. It is used to expel evil man´idōs which cause obstinate coughs, and is also administered to consumptives. The quantity of bark derived from eight stems, each 10 inches long, makes a large dose. When a Midē´ gives this medicine to a patient, he fills his pipe and smokes, and before the tobacco is all consumed the patient vomits.
1. The bark is removed from the stalk, crushed, and dried. When it's ready to be used, the powder is placed in a small cloth bag and soaked in hot water to draw out its properties. It’s used to get rid of harmful man'idōs that cause stubborn coughs, and it's also given to people with tuberculosis. The amount of bark obtained from eight stems, each 10 inches long, creates a large dose. When a Midē gives this medicine to a patient, he fills his pipe and smokes, and before the tobacco is finished, the patient throws up.
2. The root of this plant mixed with the following is used to produce paralysis of the mouth. In consequence of the power it possesses it is believed to be under the special protection of the Midē´ Man´idō, i.e., Ki´tshi Man´idō.
2. The root of this plant combined with the following is used to cause paralysis of the mouth. Because of the power it has, people believe it is especially protected by the Midē' Manidō, or Ki'tshi Manidō.
The compound is employed also to counteract the evil intentions, conjurations, or other charms of so-called bad Midē´, Wâbĕnō´, and Jĕs´sakkīd´.
The compound is also used to counteract the harmful intentions, spells, or other charms of so-called bad Midē´, Wâbĕnō´, and Jĕs´sakkīd´.
Tzhi-bē´-gŏp—“Ghost Leaf.”
Tzhi-bē´-gŏp—“Ghost Leaf.”
After the cuticle is removed from the roots the thick under-bark is crushed into a powder. It is mixed with Gō´gimish.
After the cuticle is removed from the roots, the thick under-bark is crushed into a powder. It is mixed with Gō´gimish.
Dzhi-bai´-ĕ-mŏk´-ke-zĭn´—“Ghost Moccasin;” “Puff-ball.”
Ghost Moccasin; Puff-ball.
The spore-dust of the ball is carefully reserved to add to the above mixture.
The spore dust from the ball is carefully set aside to add to the mixture mentioned above.
O-kwē´-mish—“Bitter Black Cherry.”
O-kwē´-mish—“Bitter Black Cherry.”
The inner bark of branches dried and crushed is also added.
The dried and crushed inner bark of branches is also added.
Nē´-wĕ—“Rattlesnake” (Crotalus durissus, L.).
Nē´-wĕ—“Rattlesnake” (Crotalus durissus, L.).
The reptile is crushed and the blood collected, dried, and used in a pulverulent form. After partially crushing the body it is hung up and the drippings collected and dried. Other snakes may be employed as a substitute.
The reptile is crushed, and the blood is collected, dried, and turned into a powder. After partially crushing the body, it is hung up, and the drippings are collected and dried. Other snakes can be used as a substitute.
It is impossible to state the nature of the plants mentioned in the above compound, as they are not indigenous to the vicinity of White Earth, Minnesota, but are procured from Indians living in the eastern extremity of the State and in Wisconsin. Poisonous plants are of rare occurrence in this latitude, and if any actual poisonous properties exist in the mixture they may be introduced by the Indian himself, as strychnia is frequently to be purchased at almost any of the stores, to be used in the extermination of noxious animals. Admitting that crotalus venom may be present, the introduction into the human circulation of this substance would without doubt produce death and not paralysis of the facial muscles, and if taken into the stomach it quickly undergoes chemical change when brought in contact with the gastric juice, as is well known 227 from experiments made by several well known physiologists, and particularly by Dr. Coxe (Dispensatory, 1839), who employed the contents of the venom sack, mixed with bread, for the cure of rheumatism.
It's impossible to define the types of plants mentioned in the compound above, as they aren't native to the area around White Earth, Minnesota, but are obtained from Indigenous people living in the eastern part of the state and in Wisconsin. Poisonous plants are rarely found in this region, and if there are any genuinely poisonous properties in the mixture, they may have been introduced by the Indian himself, since strychnine can often be bought at almost any store for the purpose of getting rid of pests. Even if crotalus venom is present, introducing it into the human bloodstream would definitely cause death, not paralysis of the facial muscles. If ingested, it quickly chemically transforms when it comes into contact with gastric juice, as well documented by various well-known physiologists, especially Dr. Coxe (Dispensatory, 1839), who used the contents of the venom sac mixed with bread to treat rheumatism. 227
I mention this because of my personal knowledge of six cases at White Earth, in which paralysis of one side of the face occurred soon after the Midē´ administered this compound. In nearly all of them the distortion disappeared after a lapse of from six weeks to three months, though one is known to have continued for several years with no signs of recovery. The Catholic missionary at White Earth, with whom conversation was held upon this subject, feels impressed that some of the so-called “bad Midē´” have a knowledge of some substance, possibly procured from the whites, which they attempt to employ in the destruction of enemies, rivals, or others. It may be possible that the instances above referred to were cases in which the dose was not sufficient to kill the victim, but was enough to disable him temporarily. Strychnia is the only substance attainable by them that could produce such symptoms, and then only when given in an exceedingly small dose. It is also alleged by almost every one acquainted with the Ojibwa that they do possess poisons, and that they employ them when occasion demands in the removal of personal enemies or the enemies of those who amply reward the Midē´ for such service.
I bring this up because I know about six cases at White Earth where people experienced paralysis on one side of their face shortly after the Midē´ used this compound. In almost all of these cases, the distortion went away after six weeks to three months, although one case is known to have lasted for several years without any signs of recovery. The Catholic missionary at White Earth, with whom I discussed this topic, believes that some of the so-called “bad Midē´” have knowledge of a substance, possibly obtained from white people, which they try to use to harm enemies, rivals, or others. It's possible that the cases mentioned above involved a dose that wasn’t strong enough to kill the person but was enough to temporarily disable them. Strychnine is the only substance they can access that could cause such symptoms, and only when given in extremely small doses. It’s also claimed by almost everyone familiar with the Ojibwa that they do have poisons and use them when necessary to eliminate personal enemies or the enemies of those who generously pay the Midē´ for such services.
Plate XII. Invitation Sticks.
Plate XII. Invitation Sticks.
When the time of ceremony of initiation approaches, the chief Midē´ priest sends out a courier to deliver to each member an invitation to attend (Pl. XII), while the candidate removes his wig´iwam to the vicinity of the place where the Midē´wigân has been erected. On the fifth day before the celebration he visits the sweat-lodge, where he takes his first vapor bath, followed on the next by another; on the following day he takes the third bath, after which his preceptor visits him. After making an offering to Ki´tshi Man´iō the priest sings a song, of which the characters are reproduced in Pl. XIII, A. The Ojibwa words employed in singing are given in the first lines, and are said to be the ancient phraseology as taught for many generations. They are archaic, to a great extent, and have additional meaningless syllables inserted, and used as suffixes which are intoned to prolong notes. The second line of the Ojibwa text consists of the words as they are spoken at the present time, to each of which is added the interpretation. The radical similarity between the two is readily perceived.
When the time for the initiation ceremony approaches, the chief Midē priest sends out a messenger to deliver an invitation to each member to attend (Pl. XII), while the candidate takes his wig´iwam to the area where the Midē´wigân has been set up. Five days before the celebration, he visits the sweat lodge for his first vapor bath, followed by another the next day; on the following day, he takes the third bath, after which his mentor visits him. After making an offering to Ki´tshi Man´iō, the priest sings a song, the lyrics of which are included in Pl. XIII, A. The Ojibwa words used in the song are provided in the first lines and are said to be the ancient phrases taught for many generations. They are largely archaic and contain additional meaningless syllables added as suffixes, which are sung to extend the notes. The second line of the Ojibwa text consists of the words as they are spoken today, with each word accompanied by its interpretation. The fundamental similarities between the two are easily noticeable.
Plate XIII.a. Mnemonic Song.
Plate XIII.a. Memory Song.
During this interval another smoke offering is made, in which the Midē´ priest is joined by the candidate.
During this time, another smoke offering is made, with the Midē' priest joined by the candidate.
![]() |
Hĭu´-a-me´-da-ma´ ki´-a-wēn´-da-mag man´-i-dō´-wĭt hĭu´-a-wen´-da-mag.
(As sung.) Hĭu´-a-me´-da-ma´ ki´-a-wēn´-da-mag man´-i-dō´-wĭt hĭu´-a-wen´-da-mag. He tells us he is [one] of the man´idōs. He tells us he is one of the manidōs. [This ma´nidō is the same as that referred to in the above-named phrase. This form is different, the four spots denoting the four sacred mī´gis points upon his body, the short radiating lines referring to the abundance of magic powers with which it is filled.] [This mánidō is the same as the one mentioned in the phrase above. This form is different, with the four spots representing the four sacred mī́gis points on his body, and the short radiating lines indicating the abundance of magical powers it contains.] |
![]() |
Wa´-sa-wa´-dī, hē´, wen´-da-na-ma´, mĭ-tē´-win. (As
sung.) Wa'-sa-wa'-dī, hē', wen'-da-na-ma', mĭ-tē'-win. (As sung.) I get it from afar I understand it from afar mi-dē´-wi-wĭn´. mi-dē´-wi-wĭn´. The “grand medicine.” The "ultimate cure." [The character represents a leg, with a magic line drawn across the middle, to signify that the distance is accomplished only through the medium of supernatural powers. The place “from afar” refers to the abode of Ki´tshi Man´idō.] [The character represents a leg, with a magical line drawn across the middle, to signify that the distance is achieved only through supernatural powers. The place “from afar” refers to the home of Ki´tshi Man´idō.] |
![]() |
Ki-go´-na-bi-hin ē´-ni-na mi-tē´. (As sung.) Ki-go´-na-bi-hin ē´-ni-na mi-tē´. (As sung.) I place you there “in the grand medicine” (among the “Midē´ people”) I put you there "in the grand medicine" (among the "Midē' people") a-bit´-da-win´. a bit da win. Half way (in the Midē´wigân). Halfway (in the Midē´wigân). [The Midē´ priest informs the candidate that the second initiation will advance the candidate half way into the secrets of the Midē´wigân. The candidate is then placed so that his body will have more magic influence and power as indicated by the zigzag lines radiating from it toward the sky.] [The Midē´ priest tells the candidate that the second initiation will take them halfway into the secrets of the Midē´wigân. The candidate is then positioned to enhance their body’s magical influence and power, as shown by the zigzag lines radiating from it towards the sky.] |
229
![]() |
Hi´-sha-we-ne´-me-go´, hē´, nē´. Hi'sha-we-ne'me-go, hey, nay. They have pity on me those who are sitting here. They feel sorry for me, those who are sitting here. [This request is made to the invisible man´idōs who congregate in the Mide´wigân during the ceremonies, and the statement implies that they approve of the candidate’s advancement.] [This request is made to the invisible man's spirits who gather in the ceremonial lodge during the events, and the statement suggests that they support the candidate’s progress.] |
Another smoke offering is made upon the completion of this song, after which both individuals retire to their respective habitations. Upon the following day, that being the one immediately preceding the day of ceremony, the candidate again repairs to the sudatory to take a last vapor bath, after the completion of which he awaits the coming of his preceptor for final conversation and communion with man´idōs respecting the step he is prepared to take upon the morrow.
Another smoke offering is made once this song is finished, after which both people go back to their homes. The next day, which is the day before the ceremony, the candidate goes to the steam room for one last vapor bath. After that, he waits for his mentor to arrive for a final chat and connection with the spirits about the step he is ready to take the next day.
The preceptor’s visit is merely for the purpose of singing to the candidate, and impressing him with the importance of the rites of the Midē´wigân. After making the usual offering of tobacco smoke the preceptor becomes inspired and sings a song, the following being a reproduction of the one employed by him at this stage of the preparatory instruction. (See Pl. XIII, B.)
The preceptor’s visit is simply to sing to the candidate and emphasize the significance of the Midē´wigân rites. After making the usual offering of tobacco smoke, the preceptor becomes inspired and sings a song, which is a version of what he uses at this stage of the preparatory instruction. (See Pl. XIII, B.)
Plate XIII.b. Mnemonic Song.
Plate XIII.b. Memory Song.
![]() |
[The zigzag lines extending downward and outward from the mouth indicate singing. He has reached the power of a man´idō, and is therefore empowered to sit within the sacred inclosure of the Midē´wigân, to which he alludes.] [The zigzag lines going down and out from the mouth show singing. He has achieved the strength of a man'idō, and is therefore allowed to sit within the sacred area of the Midē'wigân, which he refers to.] |
||||||||
![]() |
Da´-bī-wā-ni´, ha´, hē´, An´-nĭn, e-kō´-wē-an´. Da'bī-wā-ni, ha, hē, A'n-nĭn, e-kō-wē-an. Drifting snow, why do I sing. Drifting snow, why do I sing? [The first line is sung, but no interpretation of the words could be obtained, and it was alleged that the second line contained the idea to be expressed. The horizontal curve denotes the sky, the vertical zigzag lines indicating falling snow—though being exactly like the lines employed to denote rain. The drifting snow is likened to a shower of delicate mī´gis shells or spots, and inquiry is made of it to account for the feeling of inspiration experienced by the singer, as this shower of mī´gis descends from the abode of Ki´tshi Man´idō and is therefore, in this instance, looked upon as sacred.] [The first line is sung, but no meaning could be deciphered from the words, and it was claimed that the second line held the idea to be conveyed. The horizontal curve represents the sky, while the vertical zigzag lines symbolize falling snow—though they look exactly like the lines used to represent rain. The drifting snow is compared to a shower of delicate mī´gis shells or spots, and there's a question about it to explain the feeling of inspiration the singer experiences, as this shower of mī´gis comes from the home of Ki´tshi Man´idō and is therefore regarded as sacred in this context.] |
||||||||
![]() |
Rest, or pause. Take a break. |
||||||||
230
![]() |
Gi-man´-i-dō´-wē, ni´-me-ne´-ki-nan´ wan-da. Gi-man' -i-dō' -wē, ni' -me-ne' -ki-nan' wan-da. Your body, I believe it is a spirit. Your body, I believe it is a soul. Gi-a-wĭngk. Gi-a-wĭngk. your body. your body. [The first line is sung, but the last word could not be satisfactorily explained. The first word, as now pronounced, is Ki´tshi Man´idō, and the song is addressed to him. The curved line, from which the arm protrudes, is the Midē´wigân and the arm itself is that of the speaker in the attitude of adoration: reaching upward in worship and supplication.] [The first line is sung, but the last word couldn’t be explained clearly. The first word, as it’s pronounced now, is Ki´tshi Man´idō, and the song is directed to him. The curved line, from which the arm extends, is the Midē´wigân, and the arm itself belongs to the speaker in a position of reverence: reaching upward in worship and prayer.] |
||||||||
![]() |
[The second word is of archaic form and no agreement concerning its correct signification could be reached by the Midē´. The meaning of the phrase appears to be that Ki´tshi Man´idō promised to create the Thunder-bird, one of the man´idōs. The falcon is here taken as a representative of that deity, the entire group of Thunderers being termed a-ni´-mi-ki´.] [The second word is old-fashioned, and the Midē´ couldn't agree on its true meaning. The phrase seems to indicate that Ki´tshi Man´idō promised to create the Thunder-bird, one of the man´idōs. The falcon is used here as a symbol of that deity, and the whole group of Thunderers is called a-ni´-mi-ki´.] |
||||||||
![]() |
[The character of the bear represents the great bear spirit of the malevolent type, a band about his body indicating his spirit form. By means of his power and influence the singer has become endowed with the ability of changing his form into that of the bear, and in this guise accomplishing good or evil. The reference to flame (fire) denotes the class of conjurers or Shamans to which this power is granted, i.e., the Wâbĕnō´, and in the second degree this power is reached as will be referred to further on.] [The bear symbolizes the malevolent great bear spirit, with a band around its body representing its spiritual form. Through his power and influence, the singer has gained the ability to change into a bear, allowing him to do both good and evil. The mention of flame (fire) signifies the group of conjurers or Shamans who possess this ability, specifically the Wâbĕnō´, and this power is attained in a second degree, which will be discussed further on.] |
||||||||
![]() |
Ni´-a-wen´-din-da-sa´, ha´, sa´, man´-i-dō´-wid. Ni'a-wen'din-da-sa', ha', sa', man'i-dō'wid.
[The first line is sung, and is not of the modern style of spoken language. The second line signifies that the arm of Ki´tshi Man´idō, through the intermediary of the Midē´ priest, will put the spirit, i.e., the mī´gis, into the body of the candidate.] [The first line is sung and doesn't use today's spoken language. The second line indicates that the arm of Ki´tshi Man´idō, through the Midē´ priest, will place the spirit, or mī´gis, into the candidate's body.] |
The singer accompanies his song either by using a short baton of wood, termed “singing stick” or the Midē´ drum. After the song is completed another present of tobacco is given to the preceptor, and after making an offering of smoke both persons return to their respective wig´iwams. Later in the evening the preceptor calls upon the candidate, when both, with the assistance of friends, carry the presents to the Midē´wigân, where they are suspended from the rafters, 231 to be ready for distribution after the initiation on the following day. Several friends of the candidate, who are Midē´, are stationed at the doors of the Midē´wigân to guard against the intrusion of the uninitiated, or the possible abstraction of the gifts by strangers.
The singer performs his song with a short wooden stick, known as a “singing stick,” or using the Midē´ drum. Once the song is finished, another gift of tobacco is given to the teacher, and after sharing some smoke, both individuals head back to their own wig´iwams. Later in the evening, the teacher visits the candidate, and together, with the help of friends, they bring the gifts to the Midē´wigân, where they are hung from the rafters, 231 to be ready for distribution after the initiation the next day. Several friends of the candidate, who are Midē´, stand at the doors of the Midē´wigân to prevent the uninitiated from entering or to stop any strangers from taking the gifts.
INITIATION OF CANDIDATE.
The candidate proceeds early on the morning of the day of initiation to take possession of the sweat-lodge, where he awaits the coming of his preceptor and the eight officiating priests. He has an abundance of tobacco with which to supply all the active participants, so that they may appease any feeling of opposition of the man´idōs toward the admission of a new candidate, and to make offerings of tobacco to the guardian spirit of the second degree of the Midē´wiwin. After the usual ceremony of smoking individual songs are indulged in by the Midē´ priests until such time as they may deem it necessary to proceed to the Midē´wigân, where the members of the society have long since gathered and around which is scattered the usual crowd of spectators. The candidate leads the procession from the sweat-lodge to the eastern entrance of the Midē´wigân, carrying an ample supply of tobacco and followed by the priests who chant. When the head of the procession arrives at the door of the sacred inclosure a halt is made, the priests going forward and entering. The drummer, stationed within, begins to drum and sing, while the preceptor and chief officiating priest continue their line of march around the inclosure, going by way of the south or left hand. Eight circuits are made, the last terminating at the main or eastern entrance. The drumming then ceases and the candidate is taken to the inner side of the door, when all the members rise and stand in their places. The officiating priests approach and stand near the middle of the inclosure, facing the candidate, when one of them says to the Midē´ priest beside the latter: O-da´-pin a-sē´-ma—“Take it, the tobacco,” whereupon the Midē´ spoken to relieves the candidate of the tobacco and carries it to the middle of the inclosure, where it is laid upon a blanket spread upon the ground. The preceptor then takes from the cross-poles some of the blankets or robes and gives them to the candidate to hold. One of the malevolent spirits which oppose the entrance of a stranger is still supposed to remain with the Midē´wigân, its body being that of a serpent, like flames of fire, reaching from the earth to the sky. He is called I´-shi-ga-nē´-bĭ-gŏg—“Big-Snake.” To appease his anger the candidate must make a present; so the preceptor says for the candidate:
The candidate wakes up early on the morning of the initiation day to take his place in the sweat lodge, where he waits for his teacher and the eight officiating priests to arrive. He has plenty of tobacco to share with all the participants, helping to calm any negative feelings from the spirits about letting in a new candidate, and to make offerings to the guardian spirit of the second degree of the Midēwiwin. After the usual smoking ceremony, the Midē priests enjoy individual songs until they decide it's time to head to the Midēwigân, where the society members have already gathered, along with a crowd of onlookers. The candidate leads the procession from the sweat lodge to the eastern entrance of the Midēwigân, carrying a large amount of tobacco, followed by the chanting priests. When they reach the entrance of the sacred area, they stop, allowing the priests to go ahead and enter. The drummer inside begins to drum and sing while the teacher and chief officiating priest continue walking around the area, taking the southern route. They make eight laps, finishing at the main or eastern entrance. The drumming then stops, and the candidate is brought to the inner side of the door, where all the members stand in their places. The officiating priests approach and stand near the center of the area, facing the candidate. One of them says to the Midē priest next to the candidate: O-da´-pin a-sē´-ma—“Take it, the tobacco,” prompting the Midē priest to take the tobacco from the candidate and place it in the center of the area on a blanket laid out on the ground. The teacher then takes some blankets or robes from the cross-poles and hands them to the candidate to hold. It’s believed that a malevolent spirit, which doesn’t want a stranger to enter, remains with the Midēwigân, taking the form of a large serpent, flaming like fire, stretching from the ground to the sky. This spirit is called I´-shi-ga-nē´-bĭ-gŏg—“Big-Snake.” To calm its anger, the candidate must offer a gift, so the teacher speaks on behalf of the candidate:
Ka-wī´n-nĭ-na-ga´ | wa´-ba-ma´-si-ba´-shĭ-gi´-ne-gēt´? |
Do you not see | how he carries the goods? |
This being assented to by the Midē´ priests the preceptor takes the blankets and deposits them near the tobacco upon the ground. Slight taps upon the Midē´ drum are heard and the candidate is led 232 toward the left on his march round the interior of the Midē´wigân, the officiating priests following and being followed in succession by all others present. The march continues until the eighth passage round, when the members begin to step back into their respective places, while the officiating Midē´ finally station themselves with their backs toward the westernmost degree post, and face the door at the end of the structure. The candidate continues round to the western end, faces the Midē´ priests, and all sit down. The following song is then sung, which may be the individual production of the candidate (Pl. XIII, C). A song is part of the ritual, though it is not necessary that the candidate should sing it, as the preceptor may do so for him. In the instance under my observation the song was an old one (which had been taught the candidate), as the archaic form of pronunciation indicates. Each of the lines is repeated as often as the singer may desire, the prolongation of the song being governed by his inspired condition. The same peculiarity governs the insertion, between words and at the end of lines, of apparently meaningless vowel sounds, to reproduce and prolong the last notes sounded. This may be done ad libitum, rythmical accentuation being maintained by gently tapping upon the Midē´ drum.
This was agreed upon by the Midē´ priests, and the teacher takes the blankets and places them near the tobacco on the ground. Light taps on the Midē´ drum are heard, and the candidate is led 232 to the left as he marches around the inside of the Midē´wigân, with the officiating priests following, followed in turn by everyone else present. The march continues until the eighth round, when the members start stepping back to their respective places, while the officiating Midē´ finally position themselves with their backs to the westernmost degree post and face the door at the end of the structure. The candidate continues to the western end, faces the Midē´ priests, and everyone sits down. The following song is then sung, which may be created by the candidate (Pl. XIII, C). A song is part of the ritual, although it's not required for the candidate to sing it, as the teacher can do it for him. In my observation, the song was an old one (which had been taught to the candidate), as indicated by the archaic pronunciation. Each line is repeated as many times as the singer wishes, with the duration of the song determined by his inspiration. The same feature applies to the insertion of seemingly meaningless vowel sounds between words and at the end of lines, which serve to reproduce and extend the last notes sung. This can be done freely, with the rhythmic emphasis maintained by gently tapping on the Midē´ drum.
Plate XIII.c. Mnemonic Song.
Plate XIII.c. Memory Aid Song.
![]() |
Hĭa´-ni-de hĕn´-da man´-i-dō, hō´, Hĭa´-ni-de hĕn´-da man´-i-dō, hō´, Where is the spirit lodge? I go through it. Where is the spirit lodge? I walk through it. [The oblong structure represents the Midē´wigân, the arm upon the left indicating the course of the path leading through it, the latter being shown by a zigzag line.] [The elongated shape represents the Midē´wigân, with the arm on the left showing the direction of the path leading through it, which is indicated by a zigzag line.] |
![]() |
Nin-gō´-sa mĭ-dē´-kwe ni-ka´ na´-ska-wa´. Nin-gō´-sa mĭ-dē´-kwe ni-ka´ na´-ska-wa´. I am afraid of the “grand medicine” woman; I go to her. I’m scared of the “grand medicine” woman, but I go to her. A leg is shown to signify locomotion. The singer fears the opposition of a Midē´ priestess and will conciliate her. A leg is shown to represent movement. The singer is worried about facing a Midē´ priestess and will try to make peace with her. |
![]() |
Ka-ni-sa´ hi´-a-tshi´-mĭn-dē´ man´-ski-kī´, dē´, hē´, hē´. Ka-ni-sa´ hi´-a-tshi´-mĭn-dē´ man´-ski-kī´, dē´, hē´, hē´. Kinsmen who speak of me, they see the striped sky. Kinsmen who talk about me, they see the striped sky. A person of superior power, as designated by the horns attached to the head. The lines from the mouth signify voice or speech, while the horizontal lines denote the stratus clouds, the height above the earth of which illustrates the direction of the abode of the spirit whose conversation, referring to the singer, is observed crossing them as short vertical zigzag lines; i.e., voice lines. A person with great power, indicated by the horns on their head. The lines coming from the mouth represent voice or speech, while the horizontal lines symbolize stratus clouds, with their height above the ground showing the direction of the spirit's home. The spirit's conversation, referring to the singer, is represented by short vertical zigzag lines; in other words, voice lines. |
![]() |
Ke´-na-nan´-do-mē´ ko-nō´-ne-nak Ke´-na-nan´-do-mē´ ko-nō´-ne-nak The cloud looks to me for medicine. The cloud looks to me for healing. [The speaker has become so endowed with the power of magic influence that he has preference with the superior Man´idōs. The magic influence is shown descending to the hand which reaches beyond the cloud indicated by the oblong square upon the forearm.] [The speaker has gained such powerful magical influence that he is favored by the superior Man'idōs. This magical influence is evident as it extends to the hand that reaches beyond the cloud marked by the rectangular shape on the forearm.] |
233
![]() |
Rest, after which dancing begins. Rest, then dancing starts. |
![]() |
Wa-tshu´-a-nē´ ke´-ba-bing´-e-on´, wa-dzhū. Wa-tshu´-a-nē´ ke´-ba-bing´-e-on´, wa-dzhū. Going into the mountains. Heading to the mountains. The singer’s thoughts go to the summit to commune with Ki´tshi Man´idō. He is shown upon the summit. The singer's thoughts rise to the peak to connect with Ki´tshi Man´idō. He is revealed at the summit. |
![]() |
Hi´-mĕ-de´-wa hen´-dĕ-a he´-na. Hi-mĕ-de-wa hen-dĕ-a he-na. The grand medicine affects me. The powerful medicine affects me. In his condition he appeals to Ki´tshi Man´idō for aid. The arms represent the act of supplication. In his situation, he calls on Ki´tshi Man´idō for help. The arms symbolize the act of pleading. |
![]() |
Hai´-an-go ho´-ya o´-gĕ-ma, ha´. Hai'an-go ho-ya o-gĕ-ma, ha. The chief goes out. The boss steps out. The arms grasp a bear—the Bear Man´idō—and the singer intimates that he desires the aid of that powerful spirit, who is one of the guardians of the Midē´wigân. The arms hold a bear—the Bear Manidō—and the singer suggests that he seeks the help of that strong spirit, who is one of the protectors of the Midēwigân. |
![]() |
Nish´-o-wē´ ni-mē´-hi-gō´, hē´, ni-gō´-tshi-mi´-go-we, hē´. Nish'o-we ni-me-hi-go, hé, ni-go-tshi-mi-go-we, hé. Have pity on me wherever I have medicine. Have pity on me wherever I have medicine. The speaker is filled with magic influence, upon the strength of which he asks the Bear to pity and to aid him. The speaker is filled with a magical power, which is why he asks the Bear to have compassion and help him. |
![]() |
Wi´-so-mi´-ko-wē´ hĕ-a-za-we´-ne-ne-gō´, hō´. Wi-so-mi-ko-we he-a-za-we-ne-ne-go, ho. I am the beaver; have pity on me. I am the beaver; feel sorry for me. This is said to indicate that the original maker of the mnemonic song was of the Beaver totem or gens. This is thought to suggest that the original creator of the mnemonic song belonged to the Beaver totem or clan. |
![]() |
Hēn´-ta-no-wik´-ko-we´ de-wĕn´-da ĕn-da-â´-dân. Hēn´-ta-no-wik´-ko-we´ de-wĕn´-da ĕn-da-â´-dân. I wish to know what is the matter with me. I want to know what's wrong with me. The singer feels peculiarly impressed by his surroundings in the Midē´wigân, because the sacred man´idōs have filled his body with magic powers. These are shown by the zigzag or waving lines descending to the earth. The singer feels uniquely struck by his surroundings in the Midē´wigân because the sacred man´idōs have filled him with magical powers. These powers are represented by the zigzag or wavy lines coming down to the earth. |
As each of the preceding lines or verses is sung in such a protracted manner as to appear like a distinct song, the dancers, during the intervals of rest, always retire to their places and sit down. 234 The dancing is not so energetic as many of those commonly indulged in for amusement only. The steps consist of two treading movements made by each foot in succession. Keeping time with the drum-beats, at the same time there is a shuffling movement made by the dancer forward, around and among his companions, but getting back toward his place before the verse is ended. The attitude during these movements consists in bending the body forward, while the knees are bent, giving one the appearance of searching for a lost object. Those who do not sing give utterance to short, deep grunts, in accordance with the alternate heavier strokes upon the drum.
As each of the previous lines or verses is sung in such a drawn-out way that it sounds like a separate song, the dancers always return to their spots and sit during the breaks. 234 The dancing isn’t as vigorous as many of the types typically done just for fun. The steps consist of two foot movements made one after the other. Keeping in time with the drumbeats, the dancer also shuffles forward, around, and among their partners, but gets back to their spot before the verse ends. The posture during these movements involves leaning forward with bent knees, making it look like they are searching for something they lost. Those who aren’t singing make short, deep grunts that match the heavier beats on the drum.
As the dancing ceases, and all are in their proper seats, the preceptor, acting for the candidate, approaches the pile of tobacco and distributes a small quantity to each one present, when smoking is indulged in, preceded by the usual offering to the east, the south, the west, the north, the sky and the earth.
As the dancing stops and everyone takes their seats, the instructor, on behalf of the candidate, goes over to the pile of tobacco and hands out a small amount to each person present. They then begin to smoke, starting with the usual offerings to the east, south, west, north, the sky, and the earth.
After the completion of this ceremonial an attendant carries the Midē´ drum to the southeast angle of the inclosure, where it is delivered to the drummer; then the officiating priests rise and approach within two or three paces of the candidate as he gets upon his knees. The preceptor and the assistant who is called upon by him take their places immediately behind and to either side of the candidate, and the Midē´ priest lowest in order of precedence begins to utter quick, deep tones, resembling the sound hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, at the same time grasping his midē´ sack with both hands, as if it were a gun, and moving it in a serpentine and interrupted manner toward one of the large joints of the candidate’s arms or legs. At the last utterance of this sound he produces a quick puff with the breath and thrusts the bag forward as if shooting, which he pretends to do, the missile being supposed to be the invisible sacred mī´gis. The other priests follow in order from the lowest to the highest, each selecting a different joint, during which ordeal the candidate trembles more and more violently until at last he is overcome with the magic influence and falls forward upon the ground unconscious. The Midē´ priests then lay their sacks upon his back, when the candidate begins to recover and spit out the mī´gis shell which he had previously hidden within his mouth. Then the chief Midē´ takes it up between the tips of the forefinger and thumb and goes through the ceremony described in connection with the initiation into the first degree, of holding it toward the east, south, west, north, and the sky, and finally to the mouth of the candidate, when the latter, who has partly recovered from his apparently insensible condition, again relapses into that state. The eight priests then place their sacks to the respective joints at which they previously directed them, which fully infuses the body with the magic influence as desired. Upon this the candidate recovers, takes up the mī´gis shell and, placing it upon his left palm, holds it forward and swings it from side to side, saying he! 235 he! he! he! he! and pretends to swallow it, this time only reeling from its effects. He is now restored to a new life for the second time; and as the priests go to seek seats he is left on the southern side and seats himself. After all those who have been occupied with the initiation have hung up their midē´ sacks on available projections against the wall or branches, the new member goes forward to the pile of tobacco, blankets, and other gifts and divides them among those present, giving the larger portions to the officiating priests. He then passes around once more, stopping before each one to pass his hands over the sides of the priests´ heads, and says:
After the ceremony is done, an attendant carries the Midē´ drum to the southeast corner of the area, where it's handed to the drummer. The officiating priests then stand up and move within a couple of steps of the candidate, who kneels down. The instructor and the assistant, called upon by him, position themselves right behind and on either side of the candidate. The Midē´ priest with the lowest rank starts making quick, deep sounds that resemble "hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´," while holding onto his midē´ sack with both hands, moving it in a wavy, interrupted way toward one of the candidate's larger arm or leg joints. At the last utterance, he quickly blows out air and thrusts the bag forward as if shooting, pretending the missile is the invisible sacred mī´gis. The other priests follow in order from lowest to highest, each targeting a different joint. During this process, the candidate shakes more and more violently until he eventually passes out from the magical influence and falls to the ground. The Midē´ priests then lay their sacks on his back, and the candidate begins to recover and spits out the mī´gis shell he had hidden in his mouth. The chief Midē´ picks it up between his forefinger and thumb and performs the initiation ceremony described earlier for the first degree, holding it toward the east, south, west, north, and sky, finally presenting it to the candidate's mouth. The candidate, who has partially come to from his earlier state, again loses consciousness. The eight priests then position their sacks at the same joints as before, fully infusing the candidate's body with the desired magical influence. The candidate then recovers, picks up the mī´gis shell, places it on his left palm, holds it out, swings it side to side, and says "he!" he! he! he! he!, pretending to swallow it, this time only swaying from its effects. He has now been restored to a new life for a second time. As the priests go to find seats, he remains on the southern side and takes a seat himself. After everyone involved in the initiation has hung their midē´ sacks on any available places against the wall or branches, the new member goes to the pile of tobacco, blankets, and other gifts, sharing them among the people present, giving the larger portions to the officiating priests. He then circles around again, stopping in front of each priest to pass his hands over the sides of their heads, and says:
Mi-gwĕtsh´ | ga-shi-tō´-win | bi-mâ´-dĭ-si-wĭn, |
Thanks | for giving to me | life, |
after which he retreats a step, and clasping his hands and bowing toward the priest, says:
after which he steps back, clasps his hands, and bows to the priest, saying:
Ni-ka´-ni | ni-ka´ni | ni-ka´-ni ka-nia´, |
fellow midē´ | fellow midē´ | fellow midē´, |
to which each responds hau´, ēn. The word hau´ is a term of approbation, ēn signifying yes, or affirmation, the two thus used together serving to intensify the expression. Those of the Midē´ present who are of the second, or even some higher degree, then indulge in the ceremony of passing around to the eastern part of the inclosure, where they feign coughing and gagging, so as to produce from the mouth the mī´gis shell, as already narrated in connection with the first degree, p. 192.
to which each responds hau’, ēn. The word hau’ is a term of approval, while ēn means yes or affirmation, and together they intensify the expression. Those of the Midē’ present who are of the second or even higher degree then participate in a ceremony where they move to the eastern part of the enclosure, pretending to cough and gag to produce the mī’gis shell from their mouths, as previously described in relation to the first degree, p. 192.
This manner of thanking the officiating Midē´ for their services in initiating the candidate into a higher degree is extended also to those members of the Midē´wiwin who are of the first degree only, in acknowledgment of the favor of their presence at the ceremony, they being eligible to attend ceremonial rites of any degree higher than the class to which they belong, because such men are neither benefited nor influenced in any way by merely witnessing such initiation, but they must themselves take the principal part in it to receive the favor of a renewed life and to become possessed of higher power and increased magic influence.
This way of thanking the officiating Midē´ for their role in initiating the candidate into a higher degree also applies to members of the Midē´wiwin who are only at the first degree. This is in recognition of their presence at the ceremony, as they are allowed to attend ceremonial rites of any degree higher than their own. However, simply witnessing an initiation does not benefit or influence them; they must actively participate to gain the favor of renewed life and acquire greater power and enhanced magical influence.
Various members of the society indulge in short harangues, recounting personal exploits in the performance of magic and exorcism, to which the auditors respond in terms of gratification and exclamations of approval. During these recitals the ushers, appointed for the purpose, leave the inclosure by the western door to return in a short time with kettles of food prepared for the midē´ feast. The ushers make four circuits of the interior, giving to each person present a quantity of the contents of the several vessels, so that all receive sufficient to gratify their desires. When the last of the food has been consumed, or removed, the midē´ drum is heard, and soon a song is started, in which all who desire join. After the first two or three verses of the song are recited, a short interval of 236 rest is taken, but when it is resumed dancing begins and is continued to the end. In this manner they indulge in singing and dancing, interspersed with short speeches, until the approach of sunset, when the members retire to their own wig´iwams, leaving the Midē´-wigân by the western egress.
Various members of the community engage in brief speeches, sharing personal experiences related to magic and exorcism, to which the audience responds with appreciation and cheers of approval. During these storytelling sessions, the ushers, assigned for this task, exit through the western door and soon return with pots of food prepared for the midē' feast. The ushers make four laps around the space, distributing portions from the various containers so that everyone gets enough to satisfy their hunger. Once the last of the food has been eaten or taken away, the midē' drum starts to play, and a song begins, inviting anyone who wants to join in. After the first two or three verses of the song, there's a short break, but when it resumes, dancing starts and continues until the end. They enjoy singing and dancing, mixed with brief speeches, until sunset, when the members go back to their own wigwams, exiting the Midē'-wigân through the western door.
The ushers, assisted by the chief Midē´, then remove the sacred post from the inclosure and arrange the interior for new initiations, either of a lower or higher class, if candidates have prepared and presented themselves. In case there is no further need of meeting again at once, the members of the society and visitors return upon the following day to their respective homes.
The ushers, helped by the chief Midē, then take out the sacred post from the enclosure and set up the interior for new initiations, whether for a lower or higher class, if candidates have gotten ready and shown up. If there’s no need to meet again immediately, the society members and visitors head back to their homes the next day.
DESCRIPTIVE NOTES.
The mī´gis shell employed in the second degree initiation is of the same species as those before mentioned. At White Earth, however, some of the priests claim an additional shell as characteristic of this advanced degree, and insist that this should be as nearly round as possible, having a perforation through it by which it may be secured with a strand or sinew. In the absence of a rounded white shell a bead may be used as a substitute. On Pl. XI, No. 4, is presented an illustration of the bead (the second-degree mī´gis) presented to me on the occasion of my initiation.
The mī´gis shell used in the second-degree initiation is the same type as those mentioned earlier. However, at White Earth, some priests claim that an additional shell is typical for this advanced degree and assert that it should be as round as possible, with a hole through it so it can be secured with a strand or sinew. If a rounded white shell isn’t available, a bead can be used as a substitute. On Pl. XI, No. 4, there’s an illustration of the bead (the second-degree mī´gis) that was presented to me during my initiation.
With reference to the style of facial decoration resorted to in this degree nearly all of the members now paint the face according to their own individual tastes, though a few old men still adhere to the traditional method previously described (pp. 180, 181). The candidate usually adopts the style practiced by his preceptor, to which he is officially entitled; but if the preceptor employed in the preparatory instruction for the second degree be not the same individual whose services were retained for the first time, then the candidate has the privilege of painting his face according to the style of the preceding degree. If he follow his last preceptor it is regarded as an exceptional token of respect, and the student is not expected to follow the method in his further advancement.
In terms of facial decoration style used at this level, most members now paint their faces according to their personal preferences, although a few older members still stick to the traditional method described earlier (pp. 180, 181). Typically, the candidate follows the style of their mentor, which they are officially allowed to do; however, if the mentor who provided the preparatory training for the second level isn't the same person who was used for the first level, then the candidate can choose to paint their face according to the style from the previous level. If they follow their most recent mentor, it’s seen as a special sign of respect, and they are not expected to continue this method as they advance further.
A Midē´ of the second degree is also governed by his tutelary daimon; e.g., if during the first fast and vision he saw a bear, he now prepares a necklace of bear-claws, which is worn about the neck and crosses the middle of the breast. He now has the power of changing his form into that of a bear; and during that term of his disguise he wreaks vengeance upon his detractors and upon victims for whose destruction he has been liberally rewarded. Immediately upon the accomplishment of such an act he resumes his human form and thus escapes identification and detection. Such persons are termed by many “bad medicine men,” and the practice of thus debasing the sacred teachings of the Midē´wiwin is discountenanced by members of the society generally. Such pretensions are firmly believed in 237 and acknowledged by the credulous and are practiced by that class of Shamans here designated as the Wâbĕnō´.
A Midē´ of the second degree is still guided by his guardian spirit; for example, if during his first fast and vision he saw a bear, he now makes a necklace of bear claws to wear around his neck, crossing the middle of his chest. He now has the ability to transform into a bear, and while in that form, he seeks revenge on those who have wronged him and on those he has been generously rewarded to destroy. As soon as he completes such an act, he returns to his human form, which helps him avoid being recognized or caught. Many refer to these individuals as "bad medicine men," and most members of the society generally disapprove of their practice of misusing the sacred teachings of the Midē´wiwin. These claims are strongly believed by the gullible and are practiced by a group of Shamans known as the Wâbĕnō´. 237
Since powwows always combine witchcraft with the use of their medicines, I will provide a brief overview of this interesting practice.
Witches and wizards are believed to have the ability to control familiar spirits that give them the power to cause illness to their enemies, disrupt a hunter's good fortune, and hinder a warrior's success. It's said they can fly invisibly wherever they want and can transform into bears, wolves, foxes, owls, bats, and snakes. They claim to achieve these transformations by wearing the skins of these animals while mimicking the sounds of the creature they want to become. Several people have told me they have seen and heard witches in the forms of these animals, especially bears and foxes. They say that when a witch appears as a bear and is being chased, she will suddenly run around a tree or hill to escape sight for a moment, and then those chasing her will see an old woman calmly walking or digging up roots, appearing as innocent as a lamb. Fox witches can be recognized by the flames that come from their mouths every time they bark.
Many people are called witches without actually practicing the craft, simply because they look unusual or unattractive. Those who are considered witches or wizards are usually odd individuals, quite malicious, with a shabby look and a scary demeanor. They are believed to gain their powers either through direct contact with a familiar spirit during their fasting periods or by being taught by those experienced in the craft.
A Midē´ of the second degree has the reputation of superior powers on account of having had the mī´gis placed upon all of his joints, and especially because his heart is filled with magic power, as is shown in Pl. III, No. 48. In this drawing the disk upon the breast denotes where the mī´gis has been “shot” into the figure, the enlarged size of the circle signifying “greater abundance,” in contradistinction to the common designation of a mī´gis shown only by a simple spot or small point. One of this class is enabled to hear and see what is transpiring at a remote distance, the lines from the hands indicating that he is enabled to grasp objects which are beyond the reach of a common person, and the lines extending from the feet signifying that he can traverse space and transport himself to the most distant points. Therefore he is sought after by hunters for aid in the discovery and capture of game, for success in war, and for the destruction of enemies, however remote may be their residence.
A Midē´ of the second degree is seen as having superior powers because he has the mī´gis placed on all his joints, particularly since his heart is filled with magical energy, as shown in Pl. III, No. 48. In this illustration, the disk on the chest indicates where the mī´gis has been “shot” into the figure, with the larger size of the circle representing “greater abundance,” unlike the usual mī´gis shown as just a dot or small point. Someone from this category can hear and see events happening far away, with the lines from the hands signifying that he can grasp things that are out of reach for an ordinary person, and the lines extending from the feet showing that he can travel through space and move to distant locations. That’s why hunters seek him out for help in finding and catching game, achieving success in battle, and defeating enemies, no matter how far away they might be.
When an enemy or a rival is to be dealt with a course is pursued similar to that followed when preparing hunting charts, though more powerful magic medicines are used. In the following description of a pictograph recording such an occurrence the Midē´, or rather the Wâbĕnō´, was of the fourth degree of the Midē´wiwin. The indication of the grade of the operator is not a necessary part of the record, but in this instance appears to have been prompted 238 from motives of vanity. The original sketch, of which Fig. 24 is a reproduction, was drawn upon birch-bark by a Midē´, in 1884, and the ceremony detailed actually occurred at White Earth, Minnesota. By a strange coincidence the person against whom vengeance was aimed died of pneumonia the following spring, the disease having resulted from cold contracted during the preceding winter. The victim resided at a camp more than a hundred miles east of the locality above named, and his death was attributed to the Midē´’s power, a reputation naturally procuring for him many new adherents and disciples. The following is the explanation as furnished by a Midē´ familiar with the circumstances:
When dealing with an enemy or rival, a method is followed that's similar to preparing hunting charts, but with stronger magical substances. In the description of a pictograph recording such an event, the Midē´—or rather the Wâbĕnō´—was of the fourth degree of the Midē´wiwin. Indicating the operator's grade isn’t a required part of the record, but in this case, it seems to have been done out of vanity. The original drawing, of which Fig. 24 is a reproduction, was made on birch bark by a Midē´ in 1884, and the ceremony described really happened at White Earth, Minnesota. Interestingly, the person targeted for vengeance died of pneumonia the following spring, which was caused by cold weather from the winter before. The victim lived in a camp over a hundred miles east of the mentioned location, and his death was attributed to the Midē´’s power. This reputation naturally brought the Midē´ many new followers and students. Here’s the explanation given by a Midē´ who was familiar with the situation:
Fig. 24.—Midē´ destroying an enemy.
Fig. 24.—Midḗ defeating an enemy.
No. 1 is the author of the chart, a Midē´ who was called upon to take the life of a man living at a distant camp. The line extending from the midē´ to the figure at No. 9, signifies that his influence will reach to that distance.
No. 1 is the creator of the chart, a Midē´ who was asked to take the life of a man living at a faraway camp. The line going from the midē´ to the figure at No. 9 indicates that his influence will extend to that distance.
No. 2, the applicant for assistance.
No. 2, the person requesting help.
Nos. 3, 4, 5, and 6, represent the four degrees of the Midē´wiwin (of which the operator, in this instance, was a member). The degrees are furthermore specifically designated by short vertical strokes.
Nos. 3, 4, 5, and 6 represent the four degrees of the Midē´wiwin (where the operator, in this case, was a member). The degrees are also specifically indicated by short vertical lines.
No. 7 is the midē´ drum used during the ceremony of preparing the charm.
No. 7 is the midē' drum used during the ceremony for preparing the charm.
No. 8 represents the body of the intended victim. The heart is indicated, and upon this spot was rubbed a small quantity of vermilion.
No. 8 represents the body of the intended victim. The heart is shown, and a small amount of vermilion was rubbed on this spot.
No. 9 is the outline of a lake, where the subject operated upon resided.
No. 9 is the outline of a lake where the subject lived.
War parties are not formed at this time, but mnemonic charts of songs used by priests to encourage war parties, are still extant, and a reproduction of one is given on Pl. XIII, D. This song was used by the Midē´ priest to insure success to the parties. The members who intended participating in the exhibition would meet on the evening preceding their departure, and while listening to the words, some would join in the singing while others would dance. The lines may be repeated ad libitum so as to lengthen the entire series of phrases according to the prevalent enthusiasm and the time at the disposal of the performers. The war drum was used, and there were always five or six drummers so as to produce sufficient noise to accord with the loud and animated singing of a large body of excited men. This drum is, in size, like that employed for dancing. It is made by covering with rawhide an old kettle, or wooden vessel, from 2 to 3 feet in diameter. The drum is then attached to four sticks, or short posts, so as to prevent its touching the ground, thus affording every advantage for producing full and resonant sounds, when struck. The drumsticks are strong withes, at the end of each of which is fastened a ball of buckskin thongs. The following lines are repeated ad libitum:
War parties aren't formed at this time, but mnemonic charts of songs used by priests to rally war parties are still around, and a reproduction of one is shown on Pl. XIII, D. This song was used by the Midē´ priest to ensure the success of the parties. Members intending to participate would gather on the evening before their departure, and while listening to the words, some would join in singing while others danced. The lines can be repeated as much as needed to extend the whole series of phrases based on the group's excitement and the time available to the performers. The war drum was used, and there were always five or six drummers to create enough noise to match the loud and lively singing of a large group of excited men. This drum is about the same size as those used for dancing. It’s made by covering an old kettle or wooden container, between 2 to 3 feet in diameter, with rawhide. The drum is then supported by four sticks or short posts to keep it off the ground, ensuring optimal conditions for producing full, resonant sounds when struck. The drumsticks are sturdy withes, each ending in a ball made from buckskin thongs. The following lines are repeated as needed:
Plate XIII.d. Mnemonic Song.
Plate XIII.d. Memory Song.
![]() |
Hu´-na-wa´-na ha´-wā, un-do´-dzhe-na´ ha-we´-nĕ. Hu´-na-wa´-na ha´-wā, un-do´-dzhe-na´ ha-we´-nĕ. I am looking [feeling] for my paint. I am searching for my paint. [The Midē’s hands are at his medicine sack searching for his war paint.] [The Midē is digging through his medicine bag for his war paint.] |
![]() |
Hĭa´-dzhi-mĭn-de´ non´-da-kō´, hō´, Hĭa´-dzhi-mĭn-de´ non´-da-kō´, hō´, They hear me speak of legs. They hear me talking about legs. Refers to speed in the expedition. To the left of the leg is the arm of a spirit, which is supposed to infuse magic influence so as to give speed and strength. Refers to speed in the journey. To the left of the leg is the arm of a spirit, which is thought to provide a magical influence to grant speed and strength. |
![]() |
Hu´-wa-ke´, na´, ha´, Hu´-wa-ke´, na´, ha´, He said, He said, The Turtle Man´idō will lend his aid in speed. The turtle was one of the swiftest man´idōs, until through some misconduct, Min´abō´zho deprived him of his speed. The Turtle Manido will help with speed. The turtle was one of the fastest manidos until, due to some wrongdoing, Minabozho took away his speed. |
![]() |
Wa´-tshe, ha´, hwē, wa´-ka-te´, hē´, wa´-tshe, ha´, hwē´. Wa´-tshe, ha´, hwē, wa´-ka-te´, hē´, wa´-tshe, ha´, hwē´. Powder, he said. Powder, he said. [The modern form of Wa´-ka-te´, he´, hwā´, is ma´-ka-dē´-hwa; other archaic words occur also in other portions of this song. The phrase signifies that the Midē´ Man´idō favors good results from the use of powder. His form projects from the top of the Midē´ structure.] [The modern version of Wa´-ka-te´, he´, hwā´, is ma´-ka-dē´-hwa; other old words also appear in different parts of this song. The phrase means that the Midē´ Man´idō supports positive outcomes from using powder. His form emerges from the top of the Midē´ structure.] |
![]() |
Rest. A smoke is indulged in after which the song is resumed, accompanied with dancing. Rest. A smoke is enjoyed, after which the song kicks back in, accompanied by dancing. |
![]() |
Sin-go´-na wa-kī´ na-ha´-ka Sin-go´-na wa-kī´ na-ha´-ka I made him cry. I made him tear up. The figure is that of a turkey buzzard which the speaker shot. The figure is that of a turkey vulture that the speaker shot. |
![]() |
Te-wa´-tshi-me-kwe´-na, ha´, na-ke´-nan. Te-wa´-tshi-me-kwe´-na, ha´, na-ke´-nan. They tell of my powers. They speak of my abilities. The people speak highly of the singer’s magic powers; a charmed arrow is shown which terminates above with feather-web ornament, enlarged to signify its greater power. The people rave about the singer’s magical abilities; a charmed arrow is displayed, which ends with a feather-web decoration, made larger to indicate its greater power. |
![]() |
He´-wĕ-ne-nis´-sa ma-he´-ka-nĕn´-na. He will come soon. What have I killed, it is a wolf. What have I killed? It's a wolf. By aid of his magic influence the speaker has destroyed a bad man´idō which had assumed the form of a wolf. By using his magical power, the speaker has destroyed a wicked spirit that had taken the shape of a wolf. |
![]() |
Sun´-gu-we´-wa, ha´, nīn-dēn´, tshi´-man-da´-kwa ha´na-nĭn-dēn´. Sun'gu-we'wa, ha, nīn-dēn, tshi'man-da'kwa ha'na-nĭn-dēn. I am as strong as the bear. I’m as strong as a bear. The Midē´ likens his powers to those of the Bear Man´idō, one of the most powerful spirits; his figure protrudes from the top of the Midē´wigân while his spirit form is indicated by the short lines upon the back. The Midē compares his powers to those of the Bear Manidō, one of the most powerful spirits; his figure sticks out from the top of the Midēwigân while his spirit form is represented by the short lines on the back. |
240
![]() |
Wa´-ka-na´-ni, hē´, wa´-ka-na´-ni. Wa'kanani, hey, wa'kanani. I wish to smoke. I want to smoke. The pipe used is that furnished by the promoter or originator of the war party, termed a “partisan.” The Midē´ is in full accord with the work undertaken and desires to join, signifying his wish by desiring to smoke with the braves. The pipe used is provided by the promoter or creator of the war party, called a “partisan.” The Midē´ fully supports the undertaking and wants to join in, showing his interest by wanting to smoke with the warriors. |
![]() |
He´-wa-hō´-a hai´-a-nē´ He was a great leader I even use a wooden image. I even use a wooden figure. Effigies made to represent one who is to be destroyed. The heart is punctured, vermilion or other magic powder is applied, and the death of the victim is encompassed. Effigies created to symbolize someone who is meant to be destroyed. The heart is pierced, red powder or other magical substances are applied, and the victim's death is involved. |
![]() |
Pa-kwa´ ma-ko-nē´ ā´, ō´, hē´, Pa-kwa´ ma-ko-nē´ ā´, ō´, hē´, The bear goes round angry. The bear circles around angry. [The Bear Man´idō is angry because the braves are dilatory in going to war. The sooner they decide upon this course, the better it will be for the Midē´ as to his fee, and the chances of success are greater while the braves are infused with enthusiasm, than if they should become sluggish and their ardor become subdued.] [The Bear Man'idō is angry because the warriors are slow to go to war. The sooner they choose this path, the better it will be for the Midē' regarding his fee, and the chances of success are higher while the warriors are filled with enthusiasm than if they become lazy and lose their passion.] |
THIRD DEGREE.
Fig. 25.—Diagram of Midē´wigân of the third degree.
Fig. 25.—Diagram of Midē´wigân of the third degree.
The structure in which the third degree of the Midē´wiwin is conferred resembles that of the two preceding, and an outline is presented in Fig. 25. In this degree three posts are erected, the first one resembling that of the first degree, being painted red with a band of green around the top. (Pl. XV, No. 1.) This is planted a short distance to the east of the middle of the floor. The second post is also painted red, but has scattered over its entire surface spots of white clay, each of about the size of a silver quarter of a dollar, symbolical of the mī´gis shell. Upon the top of this post is placed the stuffed body of an owl—Kŏ-kó-kŏ-ō´. (Pl. XV, No. 2.) This post is planted a short distance west of the first one and about midway between it and the third, which last is erected within about 6 or 8 feet from the western door, and is painted black. (Pl. XV, No. 3.) The sacred stone against which patients are placed, and which has the alleged virtue of removing or expelling the demons that cause disease, is placed upon the ground at the usual spot near the eastern entrance (Fig. 25, No. 1). The Makwá Man´idō—bear spirit—is the tutelary guardian of this degree. Cedar trees are planted at each of the outer angles of the structure (Fig. 25, Nos. 6, 7, 8, 9). The sudatory is erected about 100 yards due east of the main entrance of the Midē´wigân, and is of the same size and for the same purpose as that for the second degree.
The setup for the third degree of the Midē´wiwin is similar to the previous two, with an outline provided in Fig. 25. In this degree, three posts are set up. The first one looks like the one from the first degree, painted red with a green band at the top. (Pl. XV, No. 1.) It's placed a short distance east of the center of the floor. The second post is also red but has scattered white clay spots all over it, each about the size of a silver quarter, symbolizing the mī´gis shell. At the top of this post is the stuffed body of an owl—Kŏ-kó-kŏ-ō´. (Pl. XV, No. 2.) This post stands a little west of the first one, halfway between it and the third post, which is set up about 6 to 8 feet from the western door and painted black. (Pl. XV, No. 3.) The sacred stone that patients are placed against, believed to have the power to remove or drive away the demons causing illness, is positioned on the ground at the usual spot near the eastern entrance (Fig. 25, No. 1). The Makwá Man´idō—bear spirit—is the protective guardian of this degree. Cedar trees are planted at each outer corner of the structure (Fig. 25, Nos. 6, 7, 8, 9). The sudatory is built about 100 yards directly east of the main entrance of the Midē´wigân and is the same size and serves the same purpose as the one for the second degree.
Plate XV. Sacred Posts Of Midē´wigân.
Plate XV. Sacred Posts of Midē'wigān.
PREPARATION OF CANDIDATE.
It is customary for the period of one year to elapse before a second-degree Midē´ can be promoted, even if he be provided with enough presents for such advancement. As the exacted fee consists of goods and tobacco thrice the value of the fee for the first degree, few present themselves. This degree is not held in as high estimation, relatively, as the preceding one; but it is alleged that a Midē´’s powers are intensified by again subjecting himself to the ceremony of being “shot with the sacred mī´gis,” and he is also elevated to that rank by means of which he may be enabled the better to invoke the assistance of the tutelary guardian of this degree.
It's common for a year to pass before someone can be promoted to a second-degree Midē´, even if they have enough gifts for that advancement. The required fee is three times the value of the first-degree fee, so few people go for it. This degree isn’t viewed as highly as the one before it, but it's said that a Midē´'s abilities are strengthened by going through the ceremony of being “shot with the sacred mī´gis” again, and this process helps him better call upon the protective spirit of this degree.
A Midē´ who has in all respects complied with the preliminaries of announcing to the chief Midē´ his purpose, gaining satisfactory evidence of his resources and ability to present the necessary presents, and of his proficiency in the practice of medical magic, etc., selects a preceptor of at least the third degree and one who is held in high repute and influence in the Midē´wiwin. After procuring the services of such a person and making a satisfactory agreement with him, he may be enabled to purchase from him some special formulæ for which he is distinguished. The instruction embraces a résumé of the traditions previously given, the various uses and properties of magic plants and compounds with which the preceptor is familiar, and conversations relative to exploits performed in medication, incantation, and exorcism. Sometimes the candidate is enabled to acquire new “medicines” to add to his list, and the following is a translation of the tradition relating to the origin of ginseng (Aralia quinquefolia, Gr.), the so-called “man root,” held in high estimation as of divine origin. In Fig. 3 is presented a pictorial representation of the story, made by Ojibwa, a Midē´ priest of White Earth, Minnesota. The tradition purports to be an account of a visit of the spirit of a boy to the abode of Dzhibai´Man´idō, “the chief spirit of the place of souls,” called Ne´-ba-gi´-zis, “the land of the sleeping sun.”
A Midē´ who has fully completed the steps of informing the chief Midē´ about his intention, securing sufficient proof of his resources and ability to provide the required gifts, and demonstrating his skills in medical magic, selects a mentor of at least the third degree who is well-respected and influential in the Midē´wiwin. After arranging for the services of such an individual and reaching a satisfactory agreement, he may be able to purchase some special methods known to that mentor. The training includes a summary of traditions previously taught, the various uses and properties of magical plants and mixtures that the mentor knows, and discussions about experiences with healing, spells, and exorcisms. Sometimes the candidate can even gain new “medicines” to add to his collection, and the following is a translation of the tradition about the origin of ginseng (Aralia quinquefolia, Gr.), known as the “man root,” which is highly valued as having divine origins. In Fig. 3 is a visual representation of the story, created by Ojibwa, a Midē´ priest from White Earth, Minnesota. The tradition describes a spirit boy's visit to the home of Dzhibai´Man´idō, “the chief spirit of the place of souls,” known as Ne´-ba-gi´-zis, “the land of the sleeping sun.”
Fig. 3.—Origin of Ginseng.
Fig. 3.—Source of Ginseng.
There appears to be some similarity between this tradition and that given in connection with Pl. V, in which the Sun Spirit restored to life a boy, by which act he exemplified a portion of the ritual of the Midē´wiwin. It is probable therefore that the following tradition is a corruption of the former and made to account for the origin of “man root,” as ginseng is designated, this root, or certain portions of it, being so extensively employed in various painful complaints.
There seems to be a similarity between this tradition and the one associated with Pl. V, where the Sun Spirit brought a boy back to life, demonstrating part of the Midē´wiwin ritual. Therefore, it's likely that the following tradition is a variation of the former, created to explain the origin of “man root,” which is another name for ginseng. This root, or specific parts of it, is widely used to treat various painful issues.
Once, an old Midē´ was out on a hunting trip with his wife and son. As autumn turned into winter, the three of them built a solid wig´iwam. Snow started to fall and the temperature dropped, so they decided to stay and use their supplies since they had plenty of game to eat. 242 Sadly, the son died. His mother immediately left for the village to get help to bring him back to life, believing that her father, the chief priest of the Midē´-wiwin, could make this happen.
When the woman told her father about her son’s death, her brother, who was there, immediately went ahead to help. The chief priest then called for three assistant Midē´, and they went with his daughter to the spot where the body of his deceased grandson was lying on the floor of the wig´iwam, covered with robes.
The chief Midē´ took his position at the left shoulder of the dead boy, the next highest-ranking member stood at the right, and the two other assistants positioned themselves at the feet. Then, the youngest Midē´—who was at the right foot of the deceased—started to chant a midē´ song, repeating it for a second, third, and fourth time.
After he was done, the Midē´ on the left foot sang a midē´ song four times. Then, the Midē´ on the right shoulder of the body did the same. Following that, the chief Midē´ priest sang his song four times. Then, there was a noticeable movement under the blanket, and as the limbs started to move, the blanket was removed, and the boy sat up. Unable to speak, he gestured that he wanted water, which was given to him.
The four Midē´ priests chanted healing songs, each preparing enchanted remedies that were given to the boy to help him recover. The youngest Midē´, who was at the foot of the patient, gave him four pinches of powder that he had to swallow. The Midē´ at the left foot did the same, followed by the Midē´ at the right shoulder, and then the chief priest at the left shoulder of the boy. After this, the boy immediately regained his speech and said that while his body was in a trance, his spirit had been in the “spirit land,” where he learned about the “grand medicine.”
The boy then shared what his spirit had gone through during the trance, saying: “I saw __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ by the river where I felt great energy and light, with colors swirling around and a calming presence. I noticed how everything seemed connected, and I could feel the pulse of nature. I was guided by a voice that urged me to embrace this experience, showing me the beauty of kindness and understanding among all living things. I felt the essence of the universe, deeply intertwined with my spirit, revealing life’s mysteries to me.”
The following is a translation:
The following is a translation:
“He, the main spirit of the Midē´ Society, gave us the “grand medicine” and taught us how to use it. I have returned from the spirit world. There will be twelve, all of whom will marry; when the last of them has a wife, then I will die. That will be the time. The Midē´ spirit taught us to do what is right. He gave us life and showed us how to extend it. These are the lessons he taught us, and he provided us with roots for medicine. I give you this medicine; if you have a headache, apply this medicine to your head, you will apply it.”
The revelation received by the boy was in the above manner imparted to the Indians. The reference to twelve—three times the sacred number four—signifies that twelve chief priests shall succeed each other before death will come to the narrator. It is observed, also, that a number of the words are archaic, which fact appears to be an indication of some antiquity, at least, of the tradition.
The revelation given to the boy was shared with the Indians in the way described above. The mention of twelve—three times the sacred number four—means that twelve chief priests will take turns before death comes to the narrator. It's also noted that some of the words are outdated, which suggests that this tradition is at least somewhat ancient.
The following are the principal forms in which a Midē´ will utilize Aralia quinquefolia, Gr., ginseng—Shtĕ´-na-bi-o´-dzhi-bik:
The following are the main ways in which a Midē´ will use Aralia quinquefolia, Gr., ginseng—Shtĕ´-na-bi-o´-dzhi-bik:
1. Small quantities of powdered root are swallowed to relieve stomachic pains.
1. Small amounts of powdered root are taken to relieve stomach pain.
2. A person complaining with acute pains in any specific part of the body is given that part of the root corresponding to the part affected; e.g., for pleurisy, the side of the root is cut out, and an infusion given to relieve such pains; if one has pains in the lower extremities, the bifurcations of the root are employed; should the pains be in the thorax, the upper part of the root—corresponding to the chest—is used in a similar manner.
2. A person who has sharp pain in a specific area of the body is given the part of the root that corresponds to the affected area; for example, for pleurisy, a section of the root is removed, and an infusion is given to ease the pain. If someone has pain in the lower limbs, the split parts of the root are used; if the pain is in the chest area, the upper part of the root—corresponding to the chest—is used in a similar way.
INITIATION OF CANDIDATE.
As the candidate for promotion has acquired from his Midē´ friends such new information as they choose to impart, and from his instructor all that was practicable, he has only to await the day of ceremony to be publicly acknowledged as a third-degree Midē´. As this time approaches the invitation sticks are sent to the various members and to such non-resident Midē´ as the officiating priests may wish to honor. On or before the fifth day previous to the meeting the candidate moves to the vicinity of the Midē´wigân. On that day the first sweat bath is taken, and one also upon each succeeding day until four baths, as a ceremony of purification, have been indulged in. On the evening of the day before the meeting his preceptor visits him at his own wig´iwam when, with the assistance of friends, the presents are collected and carried to the Midē´-wigân and suspended from the transverse poles near the roof. The officiating priests may subsequently join him, when smoking and singing form the chief entertainment of the evening.
As the candidate for promotion has received new information from his Midē' friends and learned everything he could from his instructor, he just needs to wait for the ceremony to be publicly recognized as a third-degree Midē'. As the date gets closer, invitation sticks are sent to various members and any non-resident Midē' that the officiating priests want to honor. On or before the fifth day before the meeting, the candidate moves close to the Midē'wigân. On that day, he takes the first sweat bath, and continues with one bath each succeeding day until he has completed four baths as a purification ceremony. On the evening before the meeting, his mentor visits him at his wig'iwam, where friends help gather the gifts to be taken to the Midē'-wigân and hung from the overhead crossbeams. The officiating priests may then join him, and smoking and singing become the main entertainment for the evening.
By this time numerous visitors have gathered together and are encamped throughout the adjacent timber, and the sound of the drum, where dancing is going on, may be heard far into the night.
By this point, many visitors have gathered and set up camp throughout the nearby woods, and the sound of the drum from the ongoing dancing can be heard well into the night.
Early on the morning of the day of the ceremonies the candidate goes to the sudatory where he first awaits the coming of his preceptor and later the arrival of the Midē´ priests by whom he is escorted to the Midē´wigân. With the assistance of the preceptor he arranges his gift of tobacco which he takes with him to the sacred inclosure, after which a smoke offering is made, and later Midē´ songs are chanted. These may be of his own composition as he has been a professor of magic a sufficient lapse of time to have composed them, but to give evidence of superior powers the chief, or some other of the officiating priests, will perhaps be sufficiently inspired to sing. The following was prepared and chanted by one of the Midē´ priests at the third-degree meeting at White Earth, Minnesota, and the illustration in Pl. XIV, A, is a reproduction of the original. The words, with translation, are as follows:
Early in the morning of the ceremony day, the candidate goes to the sweat lodge, where he first waits for his teacher and later for the Midē´ priests, who will guide him to the Midē´wigân. With the help of his teacher, he arranges his gift of tobacco, which he takes with him to the sacred area. After that, he makes a smoke offering, and later Midē´ songs are sung. These songs may be his own creations since he has been a practitioner of magic long enough to write them. However, to demonstrate greater abilities, the chief or another officiating priest might be inspired to sing. The following was prepared and sung by one of the Midē´ priests at the third-degree meeting in White Earth, Minnesota, and the illustration in Pl. XIV, A, is a reproduction of the original. The words, along with their translation, are as follows:
Plate XIVa. Mnemonic Song.
Plate XIVa. Memory Song.
![]() |
[The two arms are grasping the mī´gis, which he the Midē´ is going to shoot into the body of the candidate. The last word means, literally, trying to hit the mark at random.] [The two arms are holding the mī´gis, which he the Midē´ is about to shoot into the candidate's body. The last word literally means trying to hit the target randomly.] |
||||||
244
![]() |
The Midē´ arm, signified by the magic zigzag lines at the lower end of the picture, reaches up into the sky to keep it clear; the rain is descending elsewhere as indicated by the lines descending from the sky at the right and left. The Midē' arm, marked by the magical zigzag lines at the bottom of the picture, stretches up into the sky to keep it clear; rain is falling in other places as shown by the lines coming down from the sky on the right and left. |
||||||
![]() |
Rest. Rest. |
||||||
![]() |
The figure represents the sacred mī´gis, as indicated by the short lines radiating from the periphery. The mī´gis is white and the clear sky is compared to it. The figure represents the sacred mī´gis, shown by the short lines radiating from the edge. The mī´gis is white, and the clear sky is compared to it. |
||||||
![]() |
Sōn´-gi-mi-dē´ wi-ka´-ne, hē´, Sōn´-gi-mi-dē´ wi-ka´-ne, hē´, Take the “grand medicine” strong, as they, together with the “Great Spirit,” tell me. Take the "grand medicine" seriously, just like they, along with the "Great Spirit," instruct me. [The candidate is enjoined to persevere in his purpose. The associate Midē´ are alluded to, as also Ki´tshi Man´idō, who urge his continuance and advancement in the sacred society. The arm reaches down to search for the sacred mī´gis of the fourth degree—designated by four vertical lines—which is, as yet, hidden from the person addressed.] [The candidate is encouraged to stay committed to his goal. The associate Midē’ are mentioned, along with Ki’tsi Man’idō, who motivate him to continue and progress in the sacred society. The arm reaches down to look for the sacred mī’gis of the fourth degree—marked by four vertical lines—which is still hidden from the person being addressed.] |
||||||
![]() |
Hwa´-ba-mi-dē´, hwa´-ba-mi-dē´, Hwa´-ba-mi-dē´, hwa´-ba-mi-dē´, He who sees me, he who sees me, stands on the middle of the earth. He who sees me, he who sees me, stands in the middle of the earth. [The human figure symbolizes Ki´tshi Man´idō; the magic lines cross his body, while his legs rest upon the outline of the Midē´wigân. His realm, the sky, reaches from the zenith to the earth, and he beholds the Midē´ while chanting and conducting the Midē´wiwin.] [The human figure represents Ki´tshi Man´idō; the magical lines intersect his body, while his legs rest on the outline of the Midē´wigân. His domain, the sky, stretches from the highest point to the earth, and he watches the Midē´ while singing and leading the Midē´wiwin.] |
||||||
![]() |
The speaker enjoins the candidate to be faithful to his charge, and thus a friend to Ki´tshi Man´idō, who in return will always assist him. The figure holds a mī´gis in its right hand, and the Midē´ drum in its left. The speaker urges the candidate to stay true to his duty, and in doing so, be a friend to Ki´tshi Man´idō, who will always provide support in return. The figure holds a mī´gis in its right hand and the Midē´ drum in its left. |
The greater number of words in the preceding text are of an archaic form, and are presented as they were chanted. The several lines may be repeated ad libitum to accord with the feeling of inspiration which the singer experiences, or the amount of interest manifested by his hearers.
The majority of the words in the previous text are outdated and are presented as they were sung. The various lines can be repeated as often as needed to match the inspiration the singer feels or the level of interest shown by the listeners.
All the members of the society not officially inducting the candidate have ere this entered the Midē´wigân and deposited their invitation sticks near the sacred stone, or, in the event of their inability 245 to attend, have sent them with an explanation. The candidate, at the suggestion of the Midē´ priest, then prepares to leave the sudatory, gathers up the tobacco, and as he slowly advances toward the Midē´ inclosure his attendants fall into the procession according to their office. The priests sing as they go forward, until they reach the entrance of the Midē´wigân, where the candidate and his preceptor halt, while the remainder enter and take their stations just within the door, facing the west.
All the members of the society who aren't officially inducting the candidate have already entered the Midē´wigân and placed their invitation sticks near the sacred stone, or, if they couldn't make it, have sent them with an explanation. The candidate, following the Midē´ priest's suggestion, then gets ready to leave the sudatory, collects the tobacco, and as he slowly moves toward the Midē´ enclosure, his attendants join the procession according to their roles. The priests sing as they proceed, until they reach the entrance of the Midē´wigân, where the candidate and his mentor pause, while the others enter and take their positions just inside the door, facing west.
The drummers, who are seated in the southwestern angle of the inclosure, begin to drum and sing, while the candidate is led slowly around the exterior, going by the south, thus following the course of the sun. Upon the completion of the fourth circuit he is halted directly opposite the main entrance, to which his attention is then directed. The drumming and singing cease; the candidate beholds two Midē´ near the outer entrance and either side of it. These Midē´ represent two malevolent man´idō and guard the door against the entrance of those not duly prepared. The one upon the northern side of the entrance then addresses his companion in the following words: I´-ku-tan ka´-wi-nad´-gĭ wa´-na-mâ´-sĭ ē´-zhĭ-gĭ´-nĭ-gĕd—“Do you not see how he is formed?” To which the other responds: O-da´-pĭ-nŏ´ ke´-no-wĭn-dŭng shkwan´-dĭm—“Take care of it, the door;” [i.e., guard the entrance.] The former then again speaks to his companion, and says: Ka-wīn´-nĭ-na-ga´ wâ´-ba-ma´-si-ba´-shĭ-gi´-ne-gēt´—“Do you not see how he carries the goods?” The Midē´ spoken to assents to this, when the preceptor takes several pieces of tobacco which he presents to the two guards, whereupon they permit the candidate to advance to the inner entrance, where he is again stopped by two other guardian man´idō, who turn upon him as if to inquire the reason of his intrusion. The candidate then holds out two parcels of tobacco and says to them: O-da´-pin a-sē´-ma—“Take it, the tobacco,” whereupon they receive the gift and stand aside, saying: Kun´-da-dan—“Go down;” [i.e., enter and follow the path.] As the candidate is taken a few steps forward and toward the sacred stone, four of the eight officiating priests receive him, one replacing the preceptor who goes to the extreme western end there to stand and face the east, where another joins him, while the remaining two place themselves side by side so as to face the west.
The drummers, seated in the southwest corner of the enclosure, start drumming and singing, while the candidate is led slowly around the outside, moving to the south, following the sun’s path. Once he finishes the fourth round, he stops directly across from the main entrance, which is pointed out to him. The drumming and singing stop; the candidate sees two Midē´ near the outer entrance, one on each side. These Midē´ represent two malevolent man´idō and guard the door against those who are not properly prepared. The one on the north side of the entrance then speaks to his companion, saying: “Do you not see how he is formed?” The other replies: “Take care of it, the door;” [i.e., guard the entrance]. The first Midē´ then speaks again to his companion, saying: “Do you not see how he carries the goods?” The Midē´ addressed agrees, and then the preceptor offers several pieces of tobacco to the two guards, who then allow the candidate to move to the inner entrance, where he is again stopped by two more guardian man´idō, who turn to him as if to question his presence. The candidate then presents two bundles of tobacco and says to them: “Take it, the tobacco,” which they accept and step aside, saying: “Go down;” [i.e., enter and follow the path]. As the candidate takes a few steps forward toward the sacred stone, four of the eight officiating priests greet him, with one replacing the preceptor who moves to the far western end to stand facing east, where another joins him, while the remaining two stand side by side to face west.
It is believed that there are five powerful man´idōs who abide within the third-degree Midē´wigân, one of whom is the Midē´ man´idō—Ki´tshi Man´idō—one being present at the sacred stone, the second at that part of the ground between the sacred stone and the first part where the gifts are deposited, the remaining three at the three degree posts.
It is believed that there are five powerful manidōs that reside within the third-degree Midēwigân, one of which is the Midē manidō—Kïtshi Manidō—one being located at the sacred stone, the second at the area between the sacred stone and the first spot where the gifts are placed, and the other three at the three degree posts.
As the candidate starts and continues upon his walk around the interior of the inclosure the musicians begin to sing and drum, while all those remaining are led toward the left, and when opposite the 246 sacred stone he faces it and is turned round so that his back is not toward it in passing; the same is done at the second place where one of the spirits is supposed to abide; again at first, second, and third posts. By this time the candidate is at the western extremity of the structure, and as the second Midē´ receives him in charge, the other taking his station beside the preceptor, he continues his course toward the north and east to the point of departure, going through similar evolutions as before, as he passes the three posts, the place of gifts and the sacred stone. This is done as an act of reverence to the man´idōs and to acknowledge his gratitude for their presence and encouragement. When he again arrives at the eastern extremity of the inclosure he is placed between the two officiating Midē´, who have been awaiting his return, while his companion goes farther back, even to the door, from which point he addresses the other officiating Midē´ as follows:
As the candidate begins and continues his walk around the inside of the enclosure, the musicians start to sing and drum. Everyone else is led to the left, and when they are in front of the sacred stone, he faces it and turns around so that his back isn’t toward it as he passes by; the same procedure is followed at the second location where one of the spirits is believed to reside, as well as at the first, second, and third posts. By this time, the candidate is at the western end of the structure, and as the second Midē´ takes charge of him, the other takes his place beside the preceptor. He continues his path toward the north and east back to the starting point, going through similar movements as before as he passes the three posts, the gift area, and the sacred stone. This is done as a sign of respect for the man´idōs and to express his gratitude for their presence and support. When he arrives again at the eastern end of the enclosure, he stands between the two officiating Midē´, who have been waiting for his return, while his companion moves further back to the door, from which point he addresses the other officiating Midē´, saying:
Mĭs-sa´-a-shi´-gwa | wi-kan´-da´-we-an´, | mĭs-sa´-a-shi´-gwa |
Now is the time | [I am] telling [—advising,] | now is the time |
wī´-di-wa´-mŏk | wi-un´-o-bē-ŏg. |
to be observed | [I am] ready to make him sit down. |
Then one of the Midē´ priests standing beside the candidate leads him to the spot between the sacred stone and the first-degree post where the blankets and other goods have been deposited, and here he is seated. This priest then walks slowly around him singing in a tremulous manner wa´, hĕ´, hĕ´, hĕ´, hĕ´, hĕ´, hĕ´, hĕ´, returning to a position so as to face him, when he addresses him as follows: Mĭs-sa´-a-shi´-gwa pŏ´-gŭ-sĕ-ni´mi-nan´ au´-u-sa´ za-a´-da-win´ man´-i-dō mī´-gis. Na´-pish-gatsh di-mâ´-gĭ-sĭ ĕ-nĕ´-nĭ-mi-an pi´-sha-gâ-an-da-i´ na´-pish-gatsh tshi-skwa´-di-na-wâd´ dzhi-ma´-dzhi-a-ka´-ma-da-mân bi-mâ´-dĭs-si´-an.
Then one of the Midē priests standing next to the candidate leads him to the space between the sacred stone and the first-degree post where the blankets and other goods have been laid out, and he is seated there. The priest then slowly walks around him, singing in a shaky voice, wa´, hĕ´, hĕ´, hĕ´, hĕ´, hĕ´, hĕ´, hĕ´, returning to face him, and he addresses him like this: Mĭs-sa´-a-shi´-gwa pŏ´-gŭ-sĕ-ni´mi-nan´ au´-u-sa´ za-a´-da-win´ man´-i-dō mī´-gis. Na´-pish-gatsh di-mâ´-gĭ-sĭ ĕ-nĕ´-nĭ-mi-an pi´-sha-gâ-an-da-i´ na´-pish-gatsh tshi-skwa´-di-na-wâd´ dzhi-ma´-dzhi-a-ka´-ma-da-mân bi-mâ´-dĭs-si´-an.
The following is a free translation:
The following is a free translation:
The time has come for you to ask the Great Spirit for this “reverence,” which means the importance of this degree. I’m working on your behalf, but you think my abilities are weak; I’m asking him to grant you the sacred powers. He may cause many to perish, but from now on, I will observe your journey to success in life and see if he will listen to your prayers and acknowledge your magical power.
At the conclusion of these remarks three others of the officiating Midē´ advance and seat themselves, with their chief, before the candidate. The Midē´ drum is handed to the chief priest, and after a short prelude of drumming he becomes more and more inspired, and sings the following Midē´ song, represented pictorially, also on Pl. XIV, B.
At the end of these remarks, three other officiating Midē´ come forward and sit down with their leader in front of the candidate. The Midē´ drum is given to the chief priest, and after a brief drum solo, he gets increasingly inspired and sings the following Midē´ song, which is also depicted in pictures on Pl. XIV, B.
Plate XIV.b. Mnemonic Song.
Plate XIV.b. Memory Song.
![]() |
Man´-i-dō´ we-da´, man´-i-dō´ gi-dō´ we-do´-nĭng. Manido we da, manido gido we doning. Let us be a spirit, let the spirit come from the mouth. Let us be one spirit; let that spirit come from our voices. The head is said to signify that of a Midē´, who is about to sing. The head is said to represent that of a Midē´, who is about to sing. |
247
![]() |
Nin´-de-wen´-don zha´-bon-dĕsh´-kân-mân´. Nin´-de-wen´-don zha´-bon-dĕsh´-kân-mân´. I own this lodge, through which I pass. I own this lodge that I walk through. The speaker claims that he has been received into the degree of the Midē´wiwin to which he refers. The objects on the outer side of the oblong square character represent spirits, those of the bear. The speaker states that he has been initiated into the level of the Midē´wiwin that he mentions. The items on the outer side of the rectangular shape symbolize spirits, specifically those of the bear. |
![]() |
Ân´-dzhe-ho ĭ´-a-ni´ o-gēn´, hwe´-ō-ke´, hwe´-ō-ke´. Ăn' - dze - ho I' - a - ni' o - gên', hwe' - ō - ke', hwe' - ō - ke'. Mother is having it over again. Mother is going through it again. The reference is to the earth, as having the ceremony of the “grand medicine” again. The reference is to the earth, as having the ceremony of the “grand medicine” again. |
![]() |
Ni´-ka-nan ni´-go-sân, ni´-go-sân´ Ni´-ka-nan ni´-go-sân, ni´-go-sân´ Friends I am afraid, I am afraid, friends, of the spirits sitting around me. Friends, I’m scared, I’m scared, friends, of the spirits around me. [The speaker reaches his hand toward the sky, i.e., places his faith in Ki´tshi Man´idō who abides above.] [The speaker extends his hand to the sky, meaning he puts his trust in Ki´tshi Man´idō who lives above.] |
![]() |
Ya´-ki-no´-sha-me´-wa, ya´-ki-no´-sha-me´-wa, Ya'ki-no'sha-me'wa, ya'ki-no'sha-me'wa, I am going, with medicine bag, to the lodge. I’m heading to the lodge with my medicine bag. [The object represents an otter skin Midē´ sack, the property of the speaker.] [The object is an otter skin Midē´ sack, owned by the speaker.] |
![]() |
Ya´-be-kai´-a-bi, ya´-be-kai´-a-bi, hē´-ā´, hē´-ā´, Ya'-be-kai'a-bi, ya'-be-kai'a-bi, hey, hey, We are still sitting in a circle. We’re still sitting in a circle. [A Midē´ sitting within the Midē´wigân; the circle is shown.] [A Midē´ sitting in the Midē´wigân; the circle is shown.] |
![]() |
A-ya´-a-bi-ta´ pa´-ke-zhĭk´, ū´, hū´, a´, A-ya´-a-bi-ta´ pa´-ke-zhĭk´, ū´, hū´, a´, Half the sky Half of the sky The hand is shown reaching toward the sky, imploring the assistance of Ki´tshi Man´idō that the candidate may receive advancement in power. He has only two degrees, one-half of the number desired. The hand is reaching toward the sky, asking for the help of Ki´tshi Man´idō so the candidate can gain more power. He only has two degrees, which is half of what he wants. |
![]() |
Ba´-be-ke´ o´-gi-mân nish´-a-we, hē´, Ba'be-ke' o'gi-mân nish'a-we, hē', The spirit has pity on me now, The spirit feels sorry for me now, [The “Great Spirit” is descending upon the Midē´wigân, to be present during the ceremony.] [The “Great Spirit” is coming down to the Midē´wigân to be there for the ceremony.] |
![]() |
Nin-dai´-a, nin-dai´-a, ha´, we´-ki-ma´, ha´, wâ-no-kwe´. Nin-dai´-a, nin-dai´-a, ha´, we´-ki-ma´, ha´, wâ-no-kwe´. In my heart, in my heart, I have the spirit. In my heart, in my heart, I have the spirit. [The hand is holding the mī´gis, to which reference is made.] [The hand is holding the mī´gis, to which reference is made.] |
![]() |
I-ke´-u-ha´-ma man-ta-na´-ki-na ni-ka´-ni I-ke´-u-ha´-ma man-ta-na´-ki-na ni-ka´-ni I take the earth, my Midē´ friends. I take the earth, my Midē' friends. The earth furnishes the resources necessary to the maintenance of life, both food and medicines. The earth provides the resources essential for sustaining life, including food and medicine. |
248
![]() |
Wi´-a-ya´-din shin-da´, hān´, Wi'a-yadin shinda, hān, Let us get him to take this water. Let’s get him to drink this water. [The figure sees medicine in the earth, as the lines from the eyes to the horizontal strokes indicate.] [The figure sees medicine in the earth, as the lines from the eyes to the horizontal strokes indicate.] |
![]() |
Hŭe´-shĭ-shi-kwa´-ni-an nin-ga´-ga-mūn´. Hŭe´-shĭ-shi-kwa´-ni-an nin-ga´-ga-mūn´. I take this rattle. I'm taking this rattle. The rattle is used when administering medicine. The rattle is used when giving medicine. |
![]() |
Wi-wa´-ba-mi´na hē´-na ko´-ni-a´-ni, ka´, Wi-wa´-ba-mi´na hē´-na ko´-ni-a´-ni, ka´, See how I shine in making medicine. See how I excel in creating medicine. [The speaker likens himself to the Makwa´ Man´idō, one of the most powerful Midē´ spirits. His body shines as if it were ablaze with light—due to magic power.] [The speaker compares himself to the Makwa´ Man´idō, one of the strongest Midē´ spirits. His body glows as if it were on fire—thanks to magical power.] |
This song is sung ad libitum according to the inspired condition of the person singing it. Many of the words are archaic, and differ from the modern forms.
This song is sung freely based on the inspiration of the person performing it. Many of the words are outdated and differ from their modern versions.
Then the officiating priests arise and the one lowest in rank grasps his Midē´ sack and goes through the gestures, described in connection with the previous degrees, of shooting into the joints and forehead of the candidate the sacred mī´gis. At the attempt made by the chief priest the candidate falls forward apparently unconscious. The priests then touch his joints and forehead with the upper end of their Midē´ sacks whereupon he recovers and rises to a standing posture. The chief then addresses him and enjoins him to conduct himself with propriety and in accordance with the dignity of his profession. The following is the text, viz: Gi-gan´-bis-sĭn dau´-gē-in´-ni-nân´ kish-bin´-bish-in dau´-o-ân-nĭn da´-ki-ka-wa´-bi-kwe ga´-kĭ-ne ke-ke´-wi-bi´-na-mōn ki-ma´-dzhĭ-zhi we´-bĭ-zi-wĭn´.
Then the officiating priests stand up, and the one with the lowest rank grabs his Midē sack and goes through the motions, described in the earlier degrees, of shooting the sacred mīgis into the candidate's joints and forehead. When the chief priest makes his attempt, the candidate falls forward, looking unconscious. The priests then touch his joints and forehead with the top of their Midē sacks, and he comes to and stands up. The chief then speaks to him, urging him to act properly and with the dignity that his profession demands. The following is the text: Gi-gan´-bis-sĭn dau´-gē-in´-ni-nân´ kish-bin´-bish-in dau´-o-ân-nĭn da´-ki-ka-wa´-bi-kwe ga´-kĭ-ne ke-ke´-wi-bi´-na-mōn ki-ma´-dzhĭ-zhi we´-bĭ-zi-wĭn´.
The translation is as follows: “You heed to what I say to you; if you are listening and will do what is right you will live to have white hair. That is all; you will do away with all bad actions.”
The translation is as follows: “Listen to what I’m saying; if you pay attention and do what’s right, you’ll live long enough to have white hair. That’s all; you’ll give up all bad actions.”
The Midē´ priest second in rank then says to the candidate: Ke´-go-wi´-ka-za´-gi-to-wa´-kin ki-da´-no-ka´tshĭ-gân kai-ē´-gi-gīt´ a-sē´-ma, kai´-e-mī´-dzĭm, which signifies: “Never begrudge your goods, neither your tobacco, nor your provisions.” To this the candidate responds ēn´—yes, by this signifying that he will never regret what he has given the Midē´ for their services. The candidate remains standing while the members of the society take seats, after which he goes to the pile of blankets, skins, and other presents, and upon selecting appropriate ones for the officiating priests he carries them to those persons, after which he makes presents of less value to all other Midē´ present. Tobacco is then distributed, and while all are preparing to make an offering to Ki´tshi Man´idō of tobacco, the 249 newly accepted member goes around to each, member present, passes his hands downward over the sides of the Midē’s head and says:
The second-ranking Midē priest then says to the candidate: "Never hold back your goods, neither your tobacco nor your provisions." To this, the candidate responds "yes," indicating that he will never regret what he has given the Midē for their services. The candidate remains standing while the society members take their seats. After that, he approaches the pile of blankets, skins, and other gifts, selects appropriate ones for the officiating priests, and brings them to those individuals. Then, he makes gifts of lesser value to all the other Midē present. Tobacco is distributed, and while everyone is getting ready to make an offering of tobacco to Ki´tshi Man´idō, the newly accepted member goes around to each present member, passes his hands down over the sides of the Midē’s head, and says:
Mi-gwĕtsh´ | ga´shi-tō´-win | bi-ma´-dĭ-si-wīn´, |
Thanks | for giving to me | life, |
then, stepping back, he clasps his hands and bows toward the Midē´, adding: Ni-ka´-ni, ni-ka´-ni, ni-ka´-ni, ka-na´,—“My Midē´ friend, my Midē´ friend, my Midē´ friend, friend.” To this the Midē´ responds in affirmation, hau´, ēn´—yes.
then, stepping back, he clasps his hands and bows toward the Midē´, adding: Ni-ka´-ni, ni-ka´-ni, ni-ka´-ni, ka-na´,—“My Midē´ friend, my Midē´ friend, my Midē´ friend, friend.” To this the Midē´ responds in affirmation, hau´, ēn´—yes.
The new member then finds a seat on the southern side of the inclosure, whereupon the ushers—Midē´ appointed to attend to outside duties—retire and bring in the vessels of food which are carried around to various persons present, four distinct times.
The new member then takes a seat on the southern side of the enclosure, after which the ushers—Midé' assigned to handle outside tasks—step back and bring in the food vessels that are passed around to different attendees, four separate times.
The feast continues for a considerable length of time, after which the kettles and dishes are again carried outside the Midē´wi-gân, when all who desire indulge in smoking. Midē´ songs are chanted by one of the priests, the accompanying, reproduced pictorially in Pl. XIV C, being an example. The lines, as usual, are repeated ad libitum, the music being limited to but few notes, and in a minor key. The following are the words with translation:
The feast goes on for quite a while, after which the kettles and dishes are taken outside the Midē'wi-gân, where anyone who wants to can indulge in smoking. One of the priests chants Midē' songs, which is visually represented in Pl. XIV C, as an example. The lines are usually repeated as desired, with the music having only a few notes and in a minor key. Here are the words along with their translation:
Plate XIV.c. Mnemonic Song.
Plate XIV.c. Memory Song.
![]() |
This refers to the sun, and moon, whose bodies are united in the drawing. This refers to the sun and moon, whose forms are combined in the drawing. |
||||||||||||||
![]() |
The figure is that of the crane, whose loud, far-reaching voice is indicated by the short lines radiating from the mouth. The eyes of the crane Man´idō are equally penetrating. The figure is that of the crane, whose loud, far-reaching voice is shown by the short lines radiating from its mouth. The eyes of the crane Man´idō are just as piercing. |
||||||||||||||
![]() |
Knowledge of superior powers gained through familiarity with the rites of the Midē´wiwin is here referred to. The figure points to the abode of Ki´tshi Man´idō; three short lines indicating three degrees in the Midē´wiwin, which the candidate has taken. Knowledge of higher powers obtained through experience with the Midē´wiwin rituals is mentioned here. The figure indicates the dwelling of Ki´tshi Man´idō; three short lines represent the three levels in the Midē´wiwin that the candidate has completed. |
||||||||||||||
![]() |
[The hand reaches up as in making the gesture for rising sun or day, the “sky lines” leaning to the left, or east; one making signs is always presumed to face the south, and signs referring to periods of day, sun, sunrise, etc., are made from the left side of the body.] [The hand reaches up as if signaling for the rising sun or day, the "sky lines" tilting to the left, or east; the person making the signs is always assumed to be facing south, and the signs related to times of day, sun, sunrise, etc., are made from the left side of the body.] |
||||||||||||||
250
![]() |
Rest. Relax. |
||||||||||||||
![]() |
Wa-dzhi-wan´, wa-dzhi-wan´-na, Wa-dzhi-wan, wa-dzhi-wan-na,
There is a mountain, there is a mountain, There’s a mountain, there’s a mountain, [The upright outline represents a mountain upon which a powerful Midē´ is seated, symbolical of the distinction attainable by a Midē´.] [The vertical shape represents a mountain where a strong Midē´ sits, symbolizing the level of distinction a Midē´ can achieve.] |
||||||||||||||
![]() |
[The Mī´gis is represented in the illustration by the small rings; the arrow indicating that it was “shot” with velocity.] [The Mī´gis is shown in the illustration by the small rings; the arrow suggests that it was “shot” with speed.] |
||||||||||||||
Hwe´-kwo-nin´-na-ta, ki-wī´-kash´-ka-man; Hwe´-kwo-nin´-na-ta, ki-wī´-kash´-ka-man;
What am I going around? What am I walking around? [The oblong structure represents the Midē´wigân. The otter-skin Midē´ sack is taken around it, as is shown by the outline of that animal and the line or course indicated. The Makwa´ Man´idō (bear spirit) is shown at the left, resting upon the horizontal line, the earth, below which are magic lines showing his power, as also the lines upon the back of the bear. The speaker compares himself to the bear spirit.] [The elongated structure represents the Midē´wigân. The otter-skin Midē´ sack is wrapped around it, as shown by the outline of that animal and the path indicated. The Makwa´ Man´idō (bear spirit) is shown on the left, resting on the horizontal line, which represents the earth, below which are magical lines demonstrating his power, as well as the lines on the bear's back. The speaker likens himself to the bear spirit.] |
|||||||||||||||
![]() |
Nen´-do-ne´-ha-mān-ni´ nī´-ŏ, Nen´-do-ne´-ha-mān-ni´ nī´-ŏ, What am I looking at. What am I looking at? The figure denotes a leg, signifying powers of transporting one’s self to remote places; the magic power is indicated by the three transverse lines and the small spots, the mī´gis, upon it. The figure represents a leg, symbolizing the ability to travel to far-off places; the magical power is shown by the three horizontal lines and the small dots, the mī´gis, on it. |
||||||||||||||
![]() |
Ba´bin-ke´-en non´-do-wa-wē´, hī´, Ba'binke'en nondo-wawee, hi, I soon heard him, the one who did not listen to them. I quickly heard him, the one who ignored them. [The Midē´, as a superior personage, is shown by having the horns attached to the head. The line of hearing has small rings, at intervals, indicating that something is heard.] [The Midē´, being an important figure, is depicted with horns on their head. The line of hearing features small rings at intervals, suggesting that something is being heard.] |
||||||||||||||
![]() |
Hin´-ta-na´-wi ni-ka´-na-gi´, ē´, hē´, Hin´-ta-na´-wi ni-ka´-na-gi´, ē´, hē´, The Nika´ni are finding fault with me, inside of my lodge. The Nika'ni are criticizing me inside my lodge. [The arm at the side of the Midē´wigân points to the interior, the place spoken of.] [The arm on the side of the Midē'wigân points to the inside, the place that is being referred to.] |
||||||||||||||
251
![]() |
Onsh´-konsh-na-nā´ pi-na´-wa nin-bosh´-i-na´-na. Onsh´-konsh-na-nā´ pi-na´-wa nin-bosh´-i-na´-na. With the bear’s claws I almost hit him. With the bear's claws, I nearly hit him. The Midē´ used the bear’s claw to work a charm, or exorcism, and would seem to indicate that he claimed the powers of a Wâbĕnō´. The one spoken of is an evil man´idō, referred to in the preceding line, in which he speaks of having heard him. The Midē used the bear’s claw to perform a charm or exorcism, which seems to show that he claimed the powers of a Wâbĕnō. The evil spirit referred to is an evil manidō, mentioned in the previous line, where he talks about having heard him. |
At the conclusion of this protracted ceremony a few speeches may be made by a Midē´, recounting the benefits to be enjoyed and the powers wielded by the knowledge thus acquired, after which the chief priest intimates to his colleagues the advisability of adjourning. They then leave the Midē´wigân by the western door, and before night all movable accessories are taken away from the structure.
At the end of this lengthy ceremony, a few speeches may be given by a Midē´, discussing the benefits and powers that come from the knowledge gained. After that, the chief priest suggests to his colleagues that it’s a good idea to wrap things up. They then exit the Midē´wigân through the western door, and before nightfall, all the movable items are removed from the building.
The remainder of the evening is spent in visiting friends, dancing, etc., and upon the following day they all return to their respective homes.
The rest of the evening is spent visiting friends, dancing, and so on, and the next day they all head back to their homes.
DESCRIPTIVE NOTES.
Although the mī´gis shell of the several degrees is generally of the same species, some of the older Midē´ priests claim that there were formerly specific shells, each being characteristic and pertaining specially to each individual grade. The objects claimed by Sika´s-sigĕ as referring to the third degree are, in addition to the Cypræa monata, L., a piece of purple wampum, and one shell of elongated form, both shown on Pl. XI, Nos. 3 and 5, respectively.
Although the mī´gis shell of the various degrees is generally the same species, some of the older Midē´ priests say that there used to be specific shells, each unique to and characteristic of each individual grade. The items identified by Sika´s-sigĕ as related to the third degree include, in addition to the Cypræa monata, L., a piece of purple wampum, and one elongated shell, both displayed on Pl. XI, Nos. 3 and 5, respectively.
The fact of a Midē´ having been subjected to “mī´gis shooting” for the third time is an all-sufficient reason to the Indian why his powers are in a corresponding manner augmented. His powers of exorcism and incantation are greater; his knowledge and use of magic medicines more extended and certain of effect; and his ability to do harm, as in the capacity of a Wâbĕnō´, is more and more lauded and feared. He becomes possessed of a greater power in prophecy and prevision, and in this state enters the class of personages known as the Jĕs´sakkīd´, or jugglers. His power over darkness and obscurity is indicated on Pl. III, A, No. 77, upon which the head, chest, and arms are represented as being covered with lines to designate obscurity, the extended arms with outstretched hands denoting ability to grasp and control that which is hidden to the eye.
The fact that a Midē´ has gone through “mī´gis shooting” for the third time is more than enough reason for the Indian to believe that his powers have increased accordingly. His abilities in exorcism and incantation are stronger; his knowledge and application of magical medicines are broader and more reliable; and his capacity to cause harm, as a Wâbĕnō´, is increasingly admired and feared. He gains a greater ability in prophecy and foresight, and in this state, he joins the group of individuals known as the Jĕs´sakkīd´, or jugglers. His power over darkness and obscurity is illustrated on Pl. III, A, No. 77, where the head, chest, and arms are depicted covered with lines to signify obscurity, and the outstretched arms with open hands showing the ability to grasp and control what is hidden from sight.
![]() |
Fig. 26.—Jĕs´sakkân´ or juggler’s lodge. |
The Jĕs´sakkīd´ and his manner of performing have already been mentioned. This class of sorcerers were met with by the Jesuit Fathers early in the seventeenth century, and referred to under various designations, such as jongleur, magicien, consulteur du manitou, etc. Their influence in the tribe was recognized, and formed one of the greatest obstacles encountered in the Christianization of the Indians. Although the Jĕs´sakkīd´ may be a seer and prophet as well as a practitioner of exorcism without becoming a 252 member of the Midē´wiwin, it is only when a Midē´ attains the rank of the third degree that he begins to give evidence of, or pretends to exhibit with any degree of confidence, the powers accredited to the former. The structure erected and occupied by the Jĕs´sakkīd´ for the performance of his powers as prophet or oracle has before been described as cylindrical, being made by planting four or more poles and wrapping about them sheets of birch bark, blankets, or similar material that will serve as a covering. This form of structure is generally represented in pictographic records, as shown in Fig. 26.
The Jĕs´sakkīd´ and his way of performing have already been mentioned. This group of sorcerers was encountered by the Jesuit Fathers in the early seventeenth century and referred to by various names, including jongleur, magicien, and consulteur du manitou, among others. Their influence in the tribe was acknowledged and became one of the biggest challenges faced in converting the Indians to Christianity. Although the Jĕs´sakkīd´ can be a seer and prophet as well as a practitioner of exorcism without being a member of the Midē´wiwin, it is only when a Midē´ reaches the third degree that he begins to show, or at least pretends to show with confidence, the powers attributed to the former. The structure built and used by the Jĕs´sakkīd´ for his role as prophet or oracle has been previously described as cylindrical, formed by planting four or more poles and wrapping sheets of birch bark, blankets, or similar materials around them for coverage. This type of structure is often depicted in pictographic records, as illustrated in Fig. 26.
![]() |
![]() |
Fig. 27.—Jĕs´sakkân´, or juggler’s lodge. |
Fig. 28.—Jĕs´sakkân´, or juggler’s lodge. |
![]() |
Fig. 29.—Jĕs´sakkân´, juggler’s lodge. |
The accompanying illustrations, Figs. 27, 28, and 29, reproduced from
birch-bark etchings, were the property of Jĕs´sakkīd´, who were also
Midē´ of the third and fourth degrees. It will be noticed that the
structure used by them is in the form of the ordinary wig´iwam, as their
profession of medical magic is apparently held in higher esteem than the
art of prophecy; their status and claims as Jĕs´sakkīd´ being indicated
by the great number of ma´nidōs which they have the power of invoking.
These man´idōs, or spirits, are indicated by the outline of their
material forms, the heart being indicated and connected with the
interior of the structure to show the power of the Jĕs´sakkīd´ over the
life of the respective spirits. The Thunder-bird usually occupies the
highest position in his estimation, and for this reason is drawn
directly over the wig´iwam. The Turtle is claimed to be the man´idō who
acts as intermediary between the Jĕs´sakkīd´ and the other man´idōs, and
is therefore not found among the characters on the outside of the
wig´iwam, but his presence is indicated within, either at the spot
marking the convergence of the “life lines,” or immediately below it.
Fig. 30.—
Jĕs´sakkân´ or
juggler’s lodge.
Fig. 30 is a reproducton of an
253
etching made by a Jĕs´sakkīd´ at White Earth, Minnesota. The two curved
lines above the Jĕs´sakkan´ represent the sky, from which magic power is
derived, as shown by the waving line extending downward. The small spots
within the structure are “magic spots,” i.e., the presence of man´idōs.
The juggler is shown upon the left side near the base. When a prophet is
so fortunate as to be able to claim one of these man´idōs as his own
tutelary daimon, his advantage in invoking the others is comparatively
greater. Before proceeding to the Jĕs´sakkân´—or the “Jugglery,”
as the Jĕs´sakkīd´ wig´iwam is commonly designated, a prophet will
prepare himself by smoking and making an offering to his man´idō, and by
singing a chant, of which an example is presented on Pl. XIV, D. It
is a reproduction of one made by a Jĕs´sakkīd´ who was also a Midē´ of
the third degree. Each line is chanted as often as may be desired, or
according to the effect which it may be desirable to produce or the
inspired state of the singer.
The illustrations included, Figs. 27, 28, and 29, are taken from birch-bark etchings and belonged to Jĕs´sakkīd´, who were also Midē´ of the third and fourth degrees. You'll notice that their structure resembles a typical wig´iwam, as their practice of medical magic seems to be valued more highly than their role in prophecy; their status as Jĕs´sakkīd´ is shown by the large number of ma´nidōs they can invoke. These man´idōs, or spirits, are represented by their outline forms, with the heart shown and connected to the inside of the structure to illustrate the Jĕs´sakkīd´'s control over the life of each spirit. The Thunder-bird is typically considered the most important and is drawn directly above the wig´iwam. The Turtle is believed to be the man´idō that serves as a mediator between the Jĕs´sakkīd´ and the other man´idōs, so it doesn't appear among the characters outside the wig´iwam but is indicated inside, either at the point where the "life lines" converge or just below it. juggler’s lodge Fig. 30 is a reproduction of an 253 etching made by a Jĕs´sakkīd´ at White Earth, Minnesota. The two curved lines above the Jĕs´sakkan´ represent the sky, where magical power comes from, as shown by the wavy line coming down. The small spots inside the structure are “magic spots,” meaning the presence of man´idōs. The juggler is depicted on the left side near the bottom. When a prophet is fortunate enough to claim one of these man´idōs as their own guardian spirit, it gives them a greater advantage in invoking the others. Before entering the Jĕs´sakkân´—or the “Jugglery,” which is the common name for the Jĕs´sakkīd´ wig´iwam—a prophet will prepare themselves by smoking, offering to their man´idō, and singing a chant, an example of which is found on Pl. XIV, D. It is a reproduction of one created by a Jĕs´sakkīd´ who was also a Midē´ of the third degree. Each line is chanted as many times as desired, or depending on the effect sought or the inspired state of the singer.
Plate XIV.d. Mnemonic Song.
Plate XIV.d. Memory Song.
![]() |
Me-we´-yan, ha´, ha´, ha´, Me-we-yan, ha, ha, ha, I go into the Jĕs´sakkan´ to see the medicine. I walk into the Jĕs´sakkan´ to check out the medicine. The circle represents the Jĕs´sakkīd´ as viewed from above; the short lines denote the magic character of the structure, and the central ring, or spot, the magic stone used by the prophet who appears entering from the side. The circle shows the Jĕs´sakkīd´ from a bird's-eye view; the short lines indicate the magical nature of the structure, and the central ring, or dot, symbolizes the magical stone used by the prophet who is seen entering from the side. |
![]() |
Tschi-nun´-dōn´, he´, he´, he´, he´, Tschi-nun´-dōn´, he, he, he, he, I was the one who dug up life. I was the one who uncovered life. The Otter Man´idō emerging from the Midē´wigân; he received it from Ki´tshi Mani´dō. The Otter Manidō coming out of the Midēwigân; he got it from Kitshi Mani'dō. |
![]() |
Ni´ka-nī´ we-do-kon´-a, ha´, ha´, Ni´ka-nī´ we-do-kon´-a, ha´, ha´, The spirit put down medicine on earth to grow. The spirit placed medicine on Earth to flourish. The sacred or magic lines descending to the earth denote supernatural origin of the mī´gis, which is shown by the four small rings. The short lines at the bottom represent the ascending sprouts of magic plants. The sacred or magical lines going down to the earth indicate a supernatural origin for the mī´gis, which is represented by the four small rings. The short lines at the bottom symbolize the growing shoots of magical plants. |
![]() |
Te-ti-ba´-tshi mŭt´-â-wit´, tē´, hē´, hē´, Te-ti-ba'tshi mŭt'â-wit', tē', hē', hē', I am the one that dug up the medicine. I’m the one who found the medicine. The otter shown emerging from the jugglery. The speaker represents himself “like unto the Otter Man´idō.” The otter is shown coming out of the juggling act. The speaker presents himself “like the Otter Man.” |
![]() |
Ki´wan-win´-da ma´-kwa-nan´, na´, ha´, Ki'wan-win-da ma'kwa-nan', na', ha', I answer my brother spirit. I respond to my brother's spirit. The Otter Man´idō responds to the invocation of the speaker. The diagonal line across the body signifies the “spirit character” of the animal. The Otter Manidō answers the speaker's call. The diagonal line across the body represents the animal's “spirit character.” |
254
![]() |
Rest or pause. Take a break. |
![]() |
Wa´-a-so´-at wĕn´-ti´-na-man, ha´, ha, Wa'-a-so'at wenti'na-man, ha, ha, The spirit has put life into my body. The spirit has energized my body. The speaker is represented as being in the Midē´-wigân, where Ki´tshi Man´idō placed magic power into his body; the arms denote this act of putting into his sides the mī´gis. The line crossing the body denotes the person to be possessed of supernatural power. The speaker is shown to be in the Midē´-wigân, where Ki´tshi Man´idō infused magic power into his body; the arms symbolize this act of placing the mī´gis into his sides. The line crossing the body signifies that the person possesses supernatural power. |
![]() |
Ki-to´-na-bi´-in, nē´, hē´, hē´, Ki-to´-na-bi´-in, nē´, hē´, hē´, This is what the medicine has given us. This is what the medicine has provided us. The Midē´wigân, showing on the upper line the guardian man´idōs. The Midē'wigān, illustrating the guardian manidōs on the top line. |
![]() |
Ni´-sha-we´-ni-bĭ-ku´, hū´, hū´, hē´, Ni'sha-we'ni-bĭ-ku', huh, huh, hey, I took with two hands what was thrown down to us. I grabbed with both hands what was thrown down to us. The speaker grasped life, i.e., the migīs´, to secure the mysterious power which he professes. The speaker understood life, that is, the migīs, to gain the mysterious power he claims to have. |
In addition to the practice of medical magic, the Jĕs´sakkīd´ sometimes resorts to a curious process to extract from the patient’s body the malevolent beings or man´idōs which cause disease. The method of procedure is as follows: The Jĕs´sakkīd´ is provided with four or more tubular bones, consisting of the leg bones of large birds, each of the thickness of a finger and 4 or 5 inches in length. After the priest has fasted and chanted prayers for success, he gets down upon all fours close to the patient and with his mouth near the affected part. After using the rattle and singing most vociferously to cause the evil man´idō to take shelter at some particular spot, so that it may be detected and located by him, he suddenly touches that place with the end of one of the bones and immediately thereafter putting the other end into his mouth, as if it were a cigar, strikes it with the flat hand and sends it apparently down his throat. Then the second bone is treated in the same manner, as also the third and fourth, the last one being permitted to protrude from the mouth, when the end is put against the affected part and sucking is indulged in amid the most violent writhings and contortions in his endeavors to extract the man´idō. As this object is supposed to have been reached and swallowed by the Jĕs´sakkīd´ he crawls away to a short distance from the patient and relieves himself of the demon with violent 255 retchings and apparent suffering. He recovers in a short time, spits out the bones, and, after directing his patient what further medicine to swallow, receives his fee and departs. Further description of this practice will be referred to below and illustrated on Pl. XVIII.
In addition to using medical magic, the Jĕs´sakkīd´ sometimes employs a strange method to remove the malevolent spirits or man´idōs that cause illness from the patient’s body. Here’s how it works: The Jĕs´sakkīd´ uses four or more tubular bones made from large bird leg bones, each about the thickness of a finger and 4 to 5 inches long. After fasting and chanting prayers for success, the priest gets down on all fours near the patient, with his mouth close to the affected area. He uses a rattle and sings loudly to entice the evil man´idō to settle at a specific spot so he can find it. He then suddenly touches that spot with one end of a bone, and immediately afterwards puts the other end in his mouth, as if it were a cigar, and strikes it with his hand to make it seem like he's swallowing it. He treats the second, third, and fourth bones in the same way, with the last one sticking out of his mouth. When that end touches the affected area, he sucks on it while contorting and writhing violently to try to pull out the man´idō. Once it’s believed he has swallowed it, he crawls a short distance from the patient and expels the demon with intense retching and visible distress. He recovers quickly, spits out the bones, and, after advising the patient on what medicine to take next, collects his fee and leaves. More detail on this practice will be provided below and illustrated on Pl. 18.
The above manner of disposing of the hollow bones is a clever trick and not readily detected, and it is only by such acts of jugglery and other delusions that he maintains his influence and importance among the credulous.
The way of getting rid of the hollow bones is a smart trick that's not easily spotted, and it's only through these acts of sleight of hand and other deceptions that he keeps his influence and status among those who believe easily.
![]() |
![]() |
Fig. 31.—Jĕs´sakkīd´ curing woman. |
Fig. 32.—Jĕs´sakkīd´ curing man. |
Fig. 31 represents a Jĕs´sakkīd´ curing a sick woman by sucking the demon through a bone tube. The pictograph was drawn upon a piece of birch bark which was carried in the owner’s Midē´ sack, and was intended to record an event of importance.
Fig. 31 shows a Jĕs´sakkīd´ healing a sick woman by sucking out the demon using a bone tube. The pictograph was created on a piece of birch bark that was kept in the owner's Midē´ sack, meant to document a significant event.
No. 1 represents the actor, holding a rattle in hand. Around his head is an additional circle, denoting quantity (literally, more than an ordinary amount of knowledge), the short line projecting to the right indicating the tube used.
No. 1 represents the actor, holding a rattle in his hand. There's an extra circle around his head, symbolizing quantity (essentially, more than the usual amount of knowledge), and the short line extending to the right indicates the tube used.
No. 2 is the woman operated upon.
No. 2 is the woman who had surgery.
Fig. 32 represents an exhibition by a Jĕs´sakkīd´, a resident of White Earth, Minnesota. The priest is shown in No. 1 holding his rattle, the line extending from his eye to the patient’s abdomen signifying that he has located the demon and is about to begin his exorcism. No. 2 is the patient lying before the operator.
Fig. 32 shows an exhibition by a Jĕs´sakkīd´, who lives in White Earth, Minnesota. In No. 1, the priest is holding his rattle, and the line from his eye to the patient’s abdomen indicates that he has found the demon and is about to start the exorcism. No. 2 depicts the patient lying in front of the operator.
FOURTH DEGREE.
Fig. 33.—Diagram of Midē´wigân of the fourth degree.
Fig. 33.—Diagram of Midē'wigān of the fourth degree.
The Midē´wigân, in which this degree is conferred, differs from the preceding structures by having open doorways in both the northern and southern walls, about midway between the eastern and western extremities and opposite to one another. Fig. 33 represents a ground plan, in which may also be observed the location of each of the four Midē´ posts. Fig. 34 shows general view of same structure. A short distance from the eastern entrance is deposited the sacred stone, beyond which is an area reserved for the presents to be deposited by an applicant for initiation. The remaining two-thirds of the space toward the western door is occupied at regular intervals by four posts, the first being painted red with a band of green around the top. (Pl. XV, No. 1.) The second post is red, and has scattered over its surface spots of white clay to symbolize 256 the sacred mī´gis shell. Upon it is perched the stuffed skin of an owl—kŏ-kó-kŏ-ō´. (Pl. XV, No. 2.) The third post is black; but instead of being round is cut square. (Pl. XV, No. 3.) The fourth post, that nearest the western extremity, is in the shape of a cross, painted white, with red spots, excepting the lower half of the trunk, which is squared, the colors upon the four sides being white on the east, green on the south, red on the west, and black on the north. (Pl. XV, No. 4.)
The Midē´wigân, where this degree is granted, differs from the previous structures by featuring open doorways in both the northern and southern walls, positioned roughly midway between the eastern and western ends and facing each other. Fig. 33 represents a ground plan that also shows the location of each of the four Midē´ posts. Fig. 34 provides a general view of the same structure. A short distance from the eastern entrance is the sacred stone, and beyond that is an area reserved for gifts left by someone seeking initiation. The remaining two-thirds of the space towards the western door is regularly occupied by four posts, the first of which is painted red with a green band around the top. (Pl. XV, No. 1.) The second post is red and has spots of white clay scattered over its surface to symbolize the sacred mī´gis shell. Resting on it is the stuffed skin of an owl—kŏ-kó-kŏ-ō´. (Pl. XV, No. 2.) The third post is black, but instead of being round, it is cut square. (Pl. 15, No. 3.) The fourth post, the one closest to the western end, is shaped like a cross, painted white with red spots, except for the lower half of the trunk, which is square. The colors on the four sides are white on the east, green on the south, red on the west, and black on the north. (Pl. XV, No. 4.)
Fig. 34.—General view of Midē´wigân.
Fig. 34.—Overview of Midē´wigân.
About 10 paces east of the main entrance, in a direct line between it and the sweat lodge, is planted a piece of thin board 3 feet high and 6 inches broad, the top of which is cut so as to present a three-lobed apex, as shown in Fig. 4. The eastern side of this board is painted green; that facing the Midē´wigân red. Near the top is a small opening, through which the Midē´ are enabled to peep into the interior of the sacred structure to observe the angry man´idōs occupying the structure and opposing the intrusion of anyone not of the fourth degree.
About 10 steps east of the main entrance, in a straight line between it and the sweat lodge, there's a thin board that stands 3 feet tall and 6 inches wide, with the top shaped into a three-lobed peak, as shown in Fig. 4. The eastern side of this board is painted green, while the side facing the Midē´wigân is red. Near the top, there's a small opening that allows the Midē´ to peek inside the sacred structure to see the angry man´idōs within and to prevent anyone not of the fourth degree from entering.
A cedar tree is planted at each of the outer corners of the Midē´wigân, and about 6 paces away from the northern, western, and southern entrances a small brush structure is erected, sufficiently large to admit the body. These structures are termed bears´ nests, supposed to be points where the Bear Man´idō rested during the struggle he passed through while fighting with the malevolent man´idōs within to gain entrance and receive the fourth-degree initiation. Immediately within and to either side of the east and west entrances is planted a short post, 5 feet high and 8 inches thick, painted red upon the side facing the interior and black upon the reverse, at the base of each being laid a stone about as large as a human head. These four posts represent the four limbs and feet of the Bear Man´idō, who made the four entrances and forcibly entered and expelled the evil beings who had opposed him. The fourth-degree Midē´ post— 257 the cross—furthermore symbolizes the four days´ struggle at the four openings or doors in the north, south, east, and west walls of the structure.
A cedar tree is planted at each of the outer corners of the Midē´wigân, and about 6 paces away from the northern, western, and southern entrances, a small brush structure is built, large enough to fit a body. These structures are called bear nests, believed to be places where the Bear Man´idō rested during his fight against the evil man´idōs as he sought to enter and receive the fourth-degree initiation. Right inside and on either side of the east and west entrances, a short post stands, 5 feet tall and 8 inches thick, painted red on the side facing the inside and black on the opposite side, with a stone about the size of a human head placed at the base of each. These four posts represent the four limbs and feet of the Bear Man´idō, who created the four entrances and forcefully confronted and drove away the evil beings that opposed him. The fourth-degree Midē´ post— 257 the cross—also symbolizes the four days of struggle at the four openings or doors in the north, south, east, and west walls of the structure.
PREPARATION OF CANDIDATE.
Under ordinary circumstances it requires at least one year before a Midē´ of the third grade is considered eligible for promotion, and it is seldom that a candidate can procure the necessary presents within that period, so that frequently a number of years elapse before any intimation by a candidate is made to the chief priest that the necessary requirements can be complied with. The chief reason of this delay is attributed to the fact that the fee to the officiating priests alone must equal in value and quantity four times the amount paid at the first initiation, and as the success in gathering the robes, skins, blankets, etc., depends upon the candidate’s own exertions it will readily appear why so few ever attain the distinction sought. Should one be so fortunate, however, as to possess the required articles, he has only to make known the fact to the chief and assistant Midē´ priests, when a meeting is held at the wig´iwam of one of the members and the merits of the candidate discussed. For this purpose tobacco is furnished by the candidate. The more valuable and more numerous the presents the more rapidly will his application be disposed of, and the more certainly will favorable consideration on it be had. It becomes necessary, as in former instances of preparation, for the candidate to procure the service of a renowned Midē´, in order to acquire new or specially celebrated remedies or charms. The candidate may also give evidence of his own proficiency in magic without revealing the secrets of his success or the course pursued to attain it. The greater the mystery the higher he is held in esteem even by his jealous confrères.
Under normal circumstances, it takes at least a year for a Midē´ of the third grade to be eligible for promotion, and it’s rare for a candidate to gather the required gifts in that time. As a result, it often takes several years before a candidate informs the chief priest that they can meet the necessary requirements. The main reason for this delay is that the fee for the officiating priests must be worth and quantity four times what was paid at the first initiation. Since the success in collecting the robes, skins, blankets, etc., depends on the candidate's own efforts, it's easy to see why so few achieve the desired status. However, if someone is fortunate enough to have the required items, they just need to inform the chief and assistant Midē´ priests, and a meeting will be held at the wig´iwam of one of the members to discuss the candidate's merits. For this purpose, the candidate provides tobacco. The more valuable and numerous the gifts, the quicker their application will be processed, and the more likely it is to receive a positive response. Just like in previous preparation instances, the candidate needs to hire a well-known Midē´ to acquire new or particularly celebrated remedies or charms. The candidate can also demonstrate their own skills in magic without disclosing the secrets of how they achieve success. The more mysterious they seem, the more respected they are, even by their envious peers.
There is not much to be gained by preparatory instruction for the fourth degree, the chief claims being a renewal of the ceremony of “shooting the mī´gis” into the body of the candidate, and enacting or dramatizing the traditional efforts of the Bear Man´idō in his endeavor to receive from the Otter the secrets of this grade. One who succeeds becomes correspondingly powerful in his profession and therefore more feared by the credulous. His sources of income are accordingly increased by the greater number of Indians who require his assistance. Hunters, warriors, and lovers have occasion to call upon him, and sometimes antidoting charms are sought, when the evil effects of an enemy’s work are to be counteracted.
There isn’t much benefit from preparing for the fourth degree. The main aspects involve repeating the ceremony of “shooting the mī´gis” into the candidate’s body and acting out the traditional efforts of the Bear Man´idō as he tries to learn the secrets of this level from the Otter. Those who succeed gain significant power in their profession, making them more feared by the gullible. As a result, their income increases since more people seek their help. Hunters, warriors, and lovers consult them, and sometimes they look for antidotes to counteract the harmful effects of an enemy's actions.
The instructor receives the visit of the candidate, and upon coming to a satisfactory agreement concerning the fee to be paid for the service he prepares his pupil by prompting him as to the part he is to enact during the initiation and the reasons therefor. The preparation and the merits of magic compounds are discussed, and 258 the pupil receives instruction in making effective charms, compounding love powder, etc. This love powder is held in high esteem, and its composition is held a profound secret, to be transmitted only when a great fee is paid. It consists of the following ingredients: Vermilion; powdered snakeroot (Polygala senega, L.); exiguam particulam sanguinis a puella effusi, quum in primis menstruis esset; and a piece of ginseng cut from the bifurcation of the root, and powdered. These are mixed and put into a small buckskin bag. The preparation is undertaken only after an offering to Ki´tshi Man´idō of tobacco and a Midē´ song with rattle accompaniment. The manner of using this powder will be described under the caption of “descriptive notes.” It differs entirely from the powder employed in painting the face by one who wishes to attract or fascinate the object of his or her devotion. The latter is referred to by the Rev. Peter Jones16 as follows:
The instructor meets with the candidate, and after they agree on a satisfactory fee for the service, he prepares his student by guiding him on the role he will play during the initiation and the reasons behind it. They discuss the preparation and benefits of magical compounds, and the student learns how to create effective charms, love powder, and more. This love powder is highly valued, and its recipe is a closely guarded secret, shared only when a hefty fee is paid. It includes the following ingredients: Vermilion; powdered snakeroot (Polygala senega, L.); a small amount of blood from the girl when she first menstruates; and a piece of ginseng cut from the fork of the root, then powdered. These are mixed and placed in a small buckskin bag. The preparation is only done after making an offering of tobacco to Ki´tshi Man´idō along with a Midē´ song accompanied by a rattle. The method for using this powder will be detailed under “descriptive notes.” It is completely different from the powder used for painting the face by someone who wants to attract or captivate the object of their affection. The latter is referred to by Rev. Peter Jones16 as follows:
There’s a special kind of charm they use when they want to win the love of someone. It’s made from roots and red ocher. They use it to paint their faces, believing it has a power so strong that it will make the person they desire love them back. However, the moment this charm is removed, the person who was once almost mad with love now feels a complete hatred.
It is necessary that the candidate take a sweat-bath once each day, for four successive days, at some time during the autumn months of the year preceding the year in which the initiation is to occur. This form of preparation is deemed agreeable to Ki´tshi Man´idō, whose favor is constantly invoked that the candidate may be favored with the powers supposed to be conferred in the last degree. As spring approaches the candidate makes occasional presents of tobacco to the chief priest and his assistants, and when the period of the annual ceremony approaches, they send out runners to members to solicit their presence, and, if of the fourth degree, their assistance.
The candidate must take a sweat bath once a day for four consecutive days during the autumn months before the year of the initiation. This preparation is seen as pleasing to Ki´tshi Man´idō, whose support is always requested so the candidate can receive the powers thought to be granted in the final degree. As spring comes, the candidate gives occasional gifts of tobacco to the chief priest and his helpers. When the time for the annual ceremony draws near, they send out messengers to invite members to attend and, if they are of the fourth degree, to help out.
INITIATION OF CANDIDATE.
The candidate removes to the vicinity of the Midē´wigân so as to be able to go through the ceremony of purgation four times before the day of initiation. The sudatory having been constructed on the usual site, east of the large structure, he enters it on the morning of the fifth day preceding the initiation and after taking a sweat-bath he is joined by the preceptor, when both proceed to the four entrances of the Midē´wigân and deposit at each a small offering of tobacco. This procedure is followed on the second and third days, also, but upon the fourth the presents are also carried along and deposited at the entrances, where they are received by assistants and suspended from the rafters of the interior. On the evening of the last day, the chief and officiating priests visit the candidate and his preceptor, 259 in the sweat-lodge, when ceremonial smoking is indulged in followed by the recitation of Midē´ chants. The following (Pl. XVI, A) is a reproduction of the chant taught to and recited by the candidate. The original was obtained from an old mnemonic chart in use at Mille Lacs, Minnesota, in the year 1825, which in turn had been copied from a record in the possession of a Midē´ priest at La Pointe, Wisconsin. Many of the words are of an older form than those in use at the present day. Each line may be repeated ad libitum.
The candidate moves to the area near the Midē'wigân to go through the purification ceremony four times before initiation day. Once the sweat lodge is set up in the usual spot, east of the main building, he enters it on the morning of the fifth day before the initiation. After taking a sweat bath, he is joined by the mentor, and together they go to each of the four entrances of the Midē'wigân, leaving a small offering of tobacco at each one. This routine continues on the second and third days, but on the fourth day, they also carry gifts to the entrances, where assistants receive them and hang them from the rafters inside. On the evening of the last day, the chief and officiating priests visit the candidate and his mentor in the sweat lodge, where they engage in ceremonial smoking followed by reciting Midē' chants. The following (Pl. XVI, A) is a version of the chant taught to and recited by the candidate. The original was taken from an old mnemonic chart used at Mille Lacs, Minnesota, in 1825, which had been copied from a record kept by a Midē' priest at La Pointe, Wisconsin. Many of the terms are in an older form than those used today. Each line can be repeated as desired.
Plate XVI.a. Mnemonic Song.
Plate XVI.a. Memory Song.
![]() |
[The speaker compares himself to the Bear Man´ido, and as such is represented at the entrance of the Midē´wigân.] [The speaker compares himself to the Bear Man'idō, and because of that, he is depicted at the entrance of the Midē'wigān.] |
||||||||
![]() |
[The lines from the ear denotes hearing; the words are addressed to his auditors.] [The lines from the ear indicate hearing; the words are directed to his listeners.] |
||||||||
![]() |
Signifies that Ki´tshi Man´idō, who is seen with the voice lines issuing from the mouth, and who promised the Ani´shinâ´bēg “life,” that they might always live. Signifies that Ki´tshi Man´idō, who is depicted with the voice lines coming from his mouth, and who promised the Ani´shinâ´bēg “life,” so that they might always live. |
||||||||
![]() |
Rest. A ceremonial smoke is now indulged in. Rest. A ceremonial smoke is now enjoyed. |
||||||||
![]() |
We´-shki-nun´-do-ni-ne´, We are happy, This is the first time you hear it. This is the first time you're hearing it. [The lines of hearing are again shown; the words refer to the first time this is chanted as it is an intimation that the singer is to be advanced to the higher grade of the Midē´wiwin.] [The lines of hearing are shown again; the words refer to the first time this is chanted as it signals that the singer is going to be promoted to the higher level of the Midē´wiwin.] |
||||||||
![]() |
Hwe´-na-ni-ka he-na´, he-nō´ Hwe´-na-ni-ka he-na´, he-nō´ You laugh, you laugh at the “grand medicine.” You laugh, you laugh at the “great cure.” [The arms are directed towards Ki´tshi Man´idō, the creator of the sacred rite; the words refer to those who are ignorant of the Midē´wiwin and its teachings.] [The arms are directed towards Ki´tshi Man´idō, the creator of the sacred rite; the words refer to those who are unaware of the Midē´wiwin and its teachings.] |
||||||||
![]() |
Nun-te´-ma-ne´, hē´, wi´-na-nun´-te-ma-ne´ Nun-te´-ma-ne´, hē´, wi´-na-nun´-te-ma-ne´ I hear, but they hear it not. I hear it, but they don’t. [The speaker intimates that he realizes the importance of the Midē´ rite, but the uninitiated do not.] [The speaker suggests that he understands the significance of the Midē´ rite, but those who are uninitiated do not.] |
||||||||
260
![]() |
Pe´-ne-sŭi´-a ke´-ke-kwi´-yan. Pe'ne-sŭi'a ke'ke-kwi'yan. I am sitting like a sparrow-hawk. I am sitting like a hawk. The singer is sitting upright, and is watchful, like a hawk watching for its prey. He is ready to observe, and to acquire, everything that may transpire in the Midē´ structure. The singer is sitting up straight and alert, like a hawk watching for its prey. He’s ready to take in and absorb everything that happens in the Midē´ structure. |
Upon the conclusion of the chant, the assembled Midē´ smoke and review the manner of procedure for the morrow’s ceremony, and when these details have been settled they disperse, to return to their wig´iwams, or to visit Midē´ who may have come from distant settlements.
After the chant ends, the gathered Midē´ smoke and go over the plan for tomorrow's ceremony. Once all the details are sorted out, they break up to head back to their wig´iwams or to visit Midē´ who might have traveled from faraway settlements.
Early on the day of his initiation the candidate returns to the sudatory to await the coming of his preceptor. The gifts of tobacco are divided into parcels which may thus be easily distributed at the proper time, and as soon as the officiating priests have arrived, and seated themselves, the candidate produces some tobacco of which all present take a pipeful, when a ceremonial smoke-offering is made to Ki´tshi Man´idō. The candidate then takes his midē´ drum and sings a song of his own composition, or one which he may have purchased from his preceptor, or some Midē´ priest. The following is a reproduction of an old mnemonic song which the owner, Sikas´sigĕ, had received from his father who in turn had obtained it at La Pointe, Wisconsin, about the year 1800. The words are archaic to a great extent, and they furthermore differ from the modern language on account of the manner in which they are pronounced in chanting, which peculiarity has been faithfully followed below. The pictographic characters are reproduced in Pl. XVI, B. As usual, the several lines are sung ad libitum, repetition depending entirely upon the feelings of the singer.
Early on the day of his initiation, the candidate goes back to the sweat lodge to wait for his teacher. The tobacco gifts are split into bundles for easy distribution later on. Once the officiating priests arrive and take their seats, the candidate brings out some tobacco, and everyone present shares a pipeful, offering a ceremonial smoke to Ki´tshi Man´idō. The candidate then grabs his midē´ drum and sings a song he's created or one he's bought from his teacher or another Midē´ priest. Below is a reproduction of an old mnemonic song that Sikas´sigĕ received from his father, who got it at La Pointe, Wisconsin, around 1800. The words are quite archaic, and they also differ from the modern language due to the way they're pronounced during chanting, which peculiarity is accurately reflected below. The pictographic characters are reproduced in Pl. 16, B. As usual, each line is sung freely, with repetition depending entirely on the singer's feelings.
Plate XVI.b. Mnemonic Song.
Plate XVI.b. Memory Song.
![]() |
Hin´-to-nâ-ga-ne´ o-sa-ga-tshī´-wēd o-do´-zhi-tōn´. Hin´-to-nâ-ga-ne´ o-sa-ga-tshī´-wēd o-do´-zhi-tōn´. The sun is coming up, that makes my dish. The sun is rising, which completes my meal. The dish signifies the feast to be made by the singer. The zigzag lines across the dish denote the sacred character of the feast. The upper lines are the arm holding the vessel. The dish represents the feast that the singer will prepare. The zigzag lines on the dish indicate the sacred nature of the feast. The upper lines symbolize the arm that is holding the vessel. |
![]() |
Man´-i-dō i´-ya-nē´, ish´-ko-te´-wi-wa´-we-yan´. Mani-dō iyane, ish-kote-wi-wa-we-yan. My spirit is on fire. I'm fired up. The horizontal lines across the leg signify magic power of traversing space. The short lines below the foot denote flames, i.e., magic influence obtained by swiftness of communication with the man´idōs. The horizontal lines across the leg represent the magical ability to move through space. The short lines below the foot indicate flames, meaning the magical influence gained through quick communication with the man'ídōs. |
![]() |
Ko´tshi-hâ-ya-nē´, nē´, Ko´tshi-hâ-ya-nē´, nē´, I want to try you, I am of fire. I want to challenge you; I am full of passion. [The zigzag lines diverging from the mouth signify voice, singing; the apex upon the head superior knowledge, by means of which the singer wishes to try his Midē´ sack upon his hearer, to give evidence of the power of his influence.] [The zigzag lines coming from the mouth represent voice and singing; the point on the head indicates higher knowledge, through which the singer aims to test his Midē´ sack on the listener, demonstrating the strength of his influence.] |
261
![]() |
A pause. Ceremonial smoking is indulged in, after which the chant is continued. A break. They take part in a ceremonial smoke, and then the chant continues. |
![]() |
Ni-mī´-ga-sim´-ma man´-i-dō, sa-ko´-tshi-na´. Ni-mī´-ga-sim´-ma man´-i-dō, sa-ko´-tshi-na´. My mī´gis spirit, that is why I am stronger than you. My mī´gis spirit is why I'm stronger than you. The three spots denote the three times the singer has received the mī´gis by being shot; it is because this spirit is within him that he is more powerful than those upon the outside of the wigiwam who hear him. The three spots represent the three times the singer has been shot and received the mī´gis; it’s because this spirit is inside him that he is more powerful than those outside the wigiwam who hear him. |
![]() |
Mī´-ga-ye´-nin en´-dy-ân, ya´, hō´, ya´, man´-i-dō´-ya. Mī´-ga-ye´-nin en´-dy-ân, ya´, hō´, ya´, man´-i-dō´-ya. That is the way I feel, spirit. That’s how I feel, soul. The speaker is filled with joy at his power, the mī´gis within him, shown by the spot upon the body, making him confident. The speaker is filled with joy at his power, the mī´gis within him, shown by the mark on his body, making him feel confident. |
![]() |
Ya-gō´-sha-hī´, nâ´, ha´, ha´, Ya-gō´-sha-hī´, nâ´, ha´, ha´, I am stronger than you, spirit that you are. I am stronger than you, spirit that you are. [He feels more powerful, from having received three times the mī´gis, than the evil spirit who antagonizes his progress in advancement.] [He feels more powerful, having received three times the mī´gis, than the evil spirit that obstructs his progress.] |
Upon the completion of this preliminary by the candidate, the priests emerge from the wig´iwam and fall in line according to their official status, when the candidate and preceptor gather up the parcels of tobacco and place themselves at the head of the column and start toward the eastern entrance of the Midē´wigân. As they approach the lone post, or board, the candidate halts, when the priests continue to chant and drum upon the Midē´ drum. The chief Midē´ then advances to the board and peeps through the orifice near the top to view malevolent man´idōs occupying the interior, who are antagonistic to the entrance of a stranger. This spot is assumed to represent the resting place or “nest,” from which the Bear Man´idō viewed the evil spirits during the time of his initiation by the Otter. The evil spirits within are crouching upon the floor, one behind the other and facing the east, the first being Mi-shi´-bi-shi´—the panther; the second, Me-shi´-kĕ—the turtle; the third, kwin´-go-â´-gĭ—the big wolverine; the fourth, wâ´-gŭsh—the fox; the fifth, ma-in´-gŭn—the wolf; and the sixth, ma-kwa´—the bear. They are the ones who endeavor to counteract or destroy the good wrought by the rites of the Midē´wiwin, and only by the aid of the good man´idōs can they be driven from the Midē´wigân so as to permit a candidate to enter and receive the benefits of the degree. The second Midē´ then views the group of malevolent beings, after which the third, and lastly the fourth priest looks through the orifice. They then advise 262 the presentation by the candidate of tobacco at that point to invoke the best efforts of the Midē´ Man´idōs in his behalf.
Once the candidate finishes this initial step, the priests come out of the wigwam and line up based on their official rank. The candidate and his mentor gather the tobacco bundles and take their place at the front of the line, heading toward the eastern entrance of the Midēwigân. As they reach the lone post or board, the candidate stops, while the priests continue to chant and beat the Midē drum. The chief Midē then moves to the board and looks through the hole near the top to see the malevolent manidōs inside, who are opposed to the entrance of a stranger. This spot is thought to be the “nest” where the Bear Manidō observed the evil spirits during his initiation by the Otter. The evil spirits crouch on the floor, lined up and facing east, starting with Mi-shi-bi-shi—the panther; followed by Me-shi-kĕ—the turtle; then kwin-go-â-gĭ—the big wolverine; next wâ-gŭsh—the fox; then ma-in-gŭn—the wolf; and finally, ma-kwa—the bear. These are the ones who try to undermine or destroy the good that comes from the Midēwiwin rites, and only with the help of the good manidōs can they be driven out of the Midēwigân so that a candidate can enter and benefit from the degree. The second Midē then looks at the group of malevolent beings, followed by the third, and lastly the fourth priest. They then suggest that the candidate present tobacco at that spot to invoke the support of the Midē Manidōs on his behalf.
It is asserted that all of the malevolent man´idōs who occupied and surrounded the preceding degree structures have now assembled about this fourth degree of the Midē´wigân to make a final effort against the admission and advancement of the candidate: therefore he impersonates the good Bear Man´idō, and is obliged to follow a similar course in approaching from his present position the entrance of the structure. Upon hands and knees he slowly crawls toward the main entrance, when a wailing voice is heard in the east which sounds like the word hān´, prolonged in a monotone. This is ge´-gi-si´-bi-ga´-ne-dât man´idō. His bones are heard rattling as he approaches; he wields his bow and arrow; his long hair streaming in the air, and his body, covered with mī´gis shells from the salt sea, from which he has emerged to aid in the expulsion of the opposing spirits. This being the information given to the candidate he assumes and personates the character of the man´idō referred to, and being given a bow and four arrows, and under the guidance of his preceptor, he proceeds toward the main entrance of the structure while the officiating priests enter and station themselves within the door facing the west. The preceptor carries the remaining parcels of tobacco, and when the candidate arrives near the door he makes four movements with his bow and arrow toward the interior, as if shooting, the last time sending an arrow within, upon which the grinning spirits are forced to retreat toward the other end of the inclosure. The candidate then rushes in at the main entrance, and upon emerging at the south suddenly turns and again employs his bow and arrow four times toward the crowd of evil man´idōs, who have rushed toward him during the interval that he was within. At the last gesture of shooting into the inclosure, he sends forward an arrow, deposits a parcel of tobacco and crouches to rest at the so-called “bear’s nest.” During this period of repose the Midē´ priests continue to drum and sing. Then the candidate approaches the southern door again, on all fours, and the moment he arrives there he rises and is hurried through the inclosure to emerge at the west, where he turns suddenly, and imitating the manner of shooting arrows into the group of angry man´idōs within, he at the fourth movement lets fly an arrow and gets down into the western “bear’s nest.” After a short interval he again approaches the door, crawling forward on his hands and knees until he reaches the entrance, where he leaves a present of tobacco and is hastened through the inclosure to emerge at the northern door, where he again turns suddenly upon the angry spirits, and after making threatening movements toward them, at the fourth menace he sends an arrow among them. The spirits are now greatly annoyed by the magic power possessed by the candidate and the assistance rendered by the Midē´ 263 Man´idōs, so that they are compelled to seek safety in flight. The candidate is resting in the northern “bear’s nest,” and as he again crawls toward the Midē´wigân, on hands and knees, he deposits another gift of a parcel of tobacco, then rises and is hurried through the interior to emerge at the entrance door, where he turns around, and seeing but a few angry man´idōs remaining, he takes his last arrow and aiming it at them makes four threatening gestures toward them, at the last sending the arrow into the structure, which puts to flight all opposition on the part of this host of man´idōs. The path is now clear, and after he deposits another gift of tobacco at the door he is led within, and the preceptor receives the bow and deposits it with the remaining tobacco upon the pile of blankets and robes that have by this time been removed from the rafters and laid upon the ground midway between the sacred Midē´ stone and the first Midē´ post.
It is said that all the evil man´idōs surrounding the previous degrees have now gathered around this fourth degree of the Midē´wigân to make a final push against the candidate's admission and progress. Therefore, he takes on the persona of the good Bear Man´idō and must follow a similar path to approach the entrance of the structure. On his hands and knees, he slowly crawls toward the main entrance when a wailing voice is heard from the east that sounds like the word hān´, held in a monotone. This is ge´-gi-si´-bi-ga´-ne-dât man´idō. His bones rattle as he gets closer; he carries his bow and arrow, with his long hair flowing in the air, and his body covered in mī´gis shells from the salt sea, from which he has come to help drive away the opposing spirits. Given this information, the candidate adopts and embodies the character of the man´idō mentioned. Equipped with a bow and four arrows, and guided by his mentor, he moves toward the main entrance of the structure while the officiating priests enter and position themselves at the door facing the west. The mentor holds the remaining tobacco, and when the candidate nears the door, he makes four motions with his bow and arrow toward the inside, as if he is shooting, with the last arrow sent inside, causing the grinning spirits to retreat to the other end of the enclosure. The candidate then rushes into the main entrance, and upon emerging at the south, he suddenly turns and shoots his bow and arrow four times at the crowd of evil man´idōs, who have hurried toward him while he was inside. On the last shooting gesture into the enclosure, he sends an arrow forward, leaves a package of tobacco, and crouches to rest at the so-called “bear’s nest.” While he rests, the Midē´ priests continue to drum and sing. He then approaches the southern door again on all fours, and as he arrives, he stands up and is quickly led through the enclosure to emerge at the west, where he suddenly turns and mimics shooting arrows into the group of angry man´idōs inside. On the fourth movement, he releases an arrow and drops down into the western “bear’s nest.” After a brief pause, he crawls forward toward the door again on his hands and knees until he reaches the entrance, where he leaves a tobacco offering and is rushed through the enclosure to emerge at the northern door. There, he again turns suddenly toward the angry spirits, makes threatening movements toward them, and on the fourth threat, he sends an arrow into their midst. The spirits are now quite unsettled by the candidate's magical power and the support from the Midē´ man´idōs, compelling them to flee. The candidate rests in the northern “bear’s nest,” and as he crawls toward the Midē´wigân again on hands and knees, he leaves another tobacco offering, stands, and is hurried through the interior to emerge at the entrance door. He turns around and, seeing only a few angry man´idōs left, takes his last arrow, aims it at them, and makes four threatening gestures, finally sending the arrow into the structure, which drives away all opposition from this group of man´idōs. The path is now open, and after leaving another tobacco offering at the door, he is led inside, where the mentor takes the bow and places it with the remaining tobacco onto the pile of blankets and robes that have by now been taken from the rafters and laid on the ground between the sacred Midē´ stone and the first Midē´ post.
The chief Midē´ priest then takes charge of the candidate, saying:
The chief Midē´ priest then takes over the candidate, saying:
Mi´-a-shi´-gwa | wi-ka´-we-a´-kwa-mŭs-sin´-nŭk. | Mī´-a-shi´-gwa |
Now is the time | [to take] the path that has no end | Now is the time |
wi-kan´-do-we-ân´ | mi´-ga-ī´-zhid wen´- | dzhi-bi-mâ´-dis. |
I shall inform you [of] | that which I was told | the reason I live. |
To this the second Midē´ priest remarks to the candidate, Wa´-shi-gân´-do-we-an´ mi-gai´-i-nŏk´ wa´-ka-no´-shi-dzin—which freely translated signifies: “The reason I now advise you is that you may heed him when he speaks to you.” The candidate is then led around the interior of the inclosure, the assistant Midē´ fall in line of march and are followed by all the others present, excepting the musicians. During the circuit, which is performed slowly, the chief Midē´ drums upon the Midē´ drum and chants. The following, reproduced from the original, on Pl. XVII, B, consists of a number of archaic words, some of which are furthermore different from the spoken language on account of their being chanted, and meaningless syllables introduced to prolong certain accentuated notes. Each line and stanza may be repeated ad libitum.
To this, the second Midē priest tells the candidate, "The reason I’m advising you now is so you can listen to him when he talks to you." The candidate is then guided around the inside of the enclosure, followed in line by the assistant Midē and then by everyone else present, except for the musicians. During the slow circuit, the chief Midē beats the Midē drum and sings. The following, taken from the original, on Pl. XVII, B, includes many old words, some of which differ from the spoken language because they are chanted, along with meaningless syllables added to extend certain emphasized notes. Each line and stanza can be repeated as desired.
Plate XVII.b. Mnemonic Song.
Plate XVII.b. Memory Song.
![]() |
Man´-i-dō, hē´, nē´-yē´, man´-i-dō, hē´, nē´, yē´, Manido, he, neye, manido, he, ne, ye, A spirit, a spirit, you who sit there, who sit there. A spirit, a spirit, you who are sitting there, who are sitting there. [The singer makes a spirit of the candidate by thus giving him new life, by again shooting into his body the sacred mīgis. The disk is the dish for feast of spirits in the dzhibai´ midē´wigân—“Ghost Lodge,” the arms reaching towards it denoting the spirits who take food therefrom. The signification is that the candidate will be enabled to invoke and commune with the spirits of departed Midē´, and to learn of hidden powers.] [The singer revives the candidate by giving him new life, injecting the sacred mīgis into his body again. The disk represents the dish for the feast of spirits in the dzhibai´ midē´wigân—“Ghost Lodge,” with the arms reaching toward it symbolizing the spirits who receive food from it. The meaning is that the candidate will be able to call upon and connect with the spirits of departed Midē´ and learn about hidden powers.] |
264
![]() |
He´-ha-wa´-ni, yē´, he´-ha-wa´-ni, yē´, Hé-ha-wá-ni, yé, hé-ha-wá-ni, yé, These words were chanted, while the following are those as spoken, apart from the music. These words were chanted, while the following are those spoken, separate from the music. Â-wan´-ō-de´-no-wĭn nī´-bi-dĕsh´-ka-wĭn un´-de-no´-wĭn. Â-wan´-ō-de´-no-wĭn nī´-bi-dĕsh´-ka-wĭn un´-de-no´-wĭn. The fog wind goes from place to place whence the wind blows. The fog moves from one place to another wherever the wind carries it. [The reason of the representation of a human form was not satisfactorily explained. The preceptor felt confident, however, that it signified a man´īdō who controls the fog, one different from one of the a-na´-mi-ki´, or Thunderers, who would be shown by the figure of an eagle, or a hawk, when it would also denote the thunder, and perhaps lightning, neither of which occurs in connection with the fog.] The reason for showing a human form wasn't clearly explained. The teacher was sure, though, that it represented a spirit that controls the fog, different from one of the Thunderers, who would be depicted as an eagle or a hawk to symbolize thunder and maybe lightning, neither of which is associated with the fog. |
![]() |
Rest. Chill. |
![]() |
Man´-i-dō´-we ni´-mi-nan´ ku-ni´-ne man-to´-ke ni´-mi-ne´. Man-i-dō-we ni-mi-nan ku-ni-ne man-to-ke ni-mi-ne. I who acknowledge you to be a spirit, and am dying. I recognize you as a spirit, and I'm dying. The figure is an outline of the Midē´wigân with the sacred Midē´ stone indicated within, as also another spot to signify the place occupied by a sick person. The waving lines above and beneath the oblong square are magic lines, and indicate magic or supernatural power. The singer compares the candidate to a sick man who is seeking life by having shot into his body the mī´gis. The figure is a sketch of the Midē´wigân with the sacred Midē´ stone marked inside, along with another area to represent where a sick person is located. The wavy lines above and below the rectangular shape are magic lines, indicating magical or supernatural power. The singer likens the candidate to a sick person seeking life after having the mī´gis shot into their body. |
![]() |
Ga-kwe´-in-nân´ tshi-ha´-gĕ-nâ´ ma-kwa´ ni-go´-tshi-ni´. Ga-kwe´-in-nân´ tshi-ha´-gĕ-nâ´ ma-kwa´ ni-go´-tshi-ni´. I am trying you who are the bear. I am trying you, who are the bear. The Midē´ who is chanting is shown in the figure; his eyes are looking into the candidate’s heart. The lines from the mouth are also shown as denoting speech, directed to his hearer. The horns are a representation of the manner of indicating superior powers. The Midē who is chanting is shown in the figure; his eyes are focused on the candidate’s heart. The lines from his mouth indicate speech, directed at his audience. The horns symbolize the way of showing higher powers. |
![]() |
Pĭ-nē´-si ka´-ka-gī´-wai-yan´ wen´-dzhi man´-i-dō´wid. Pĭ-nē´-si ka´-ka-gī´-wai-yan´ wen´-dzhi man´-i-dō´wid. The bird, the crow bird’s skin is the reason why I am a spirit. The crow's feathers are what make me a spirit. Although the crow is mentioned, the Thunder-bird (eagle) is delineated. The signification of the phrase is, that the speaker is equal in power to a man´idō, at the time of using the Midē´ sack—which is of such a skin. Although the crow is mentioned, the Thunder-bird (eagle) is described. The meaning of the phrase is that the speaker is equal in power to a manidō when using the Midē sack—which is made of that kind of skin. |
![]() |
Tshin-gwe´-wi-he´-na nē´, kan´, tshi-wâ´-ba-ku-nēt´. Tshin-gwe´-wi-he´-na nē´, kan´, tshi-wâ´-ba-ku-nēt´. The sound of the Thunder is the white bear of fire. The sound of thunder is the white bear of fire. The head is, in this instance, symbolical of the white bear man´idō; the short lines below it denoting flame radiating from the body, the eyes also looking with penetrating gaze, as indicated by the double waving lines from each eye. The white bear man´idō is one of the most powerful man´idōs, and is so recognized. The head represents the white bear spirit; the short lines beneath it symbolize flames radiating from the body, and the eyes are portrayed with a piercing gaze, as shown by the double wavy lines extending from each eye. The white bear spirit is one of the most powerful spirits and is well acknowledged as such. |
By the time this chant is completed the head of the procession reaches the point of departure, just within the eastern door, and all of the members return to their seats, only the four officiating Midē´ remaining with the candidate and his preceptor. To search further 265 that no malevolent man´idōs may remain lurking within the Midē´wigân, the chief priests lead the candidate in a zigzag manner to the western door, and back again to the east. In this way the path leads past the side of the Midē´ stone, then right oblique to the north of the heap of presents, thence left oblique to the south of the first-degree post, then passing the second on the north, and so on until the last post is reached, around which the course continues, and back in a similar serpentine manner to the eastern door. The candidate is then led to the blankets, upon which he seats himself, the four officiating priests placing themselves before him, the preceptor standing back near the first of the four degree posts.
By the time this chant is finished, the front of the procession reaches the starting point, just inside the eastern door, and all the members return to their seats, with only the four officiating Midē´ staying with the candidate and his mentor. To ensure that no malevolent man´idōs are left lurking inside the Midē´wigân, the chief priests guide the candidate in a zigzag pattern toward the western door and then back to the east. This path takes them alongside the Midē´ stone, then oblique to the north of the pile of gifts, then oblique to the south of the first-degree post, passing the second on the north, and continuing in this manner until they reach the last post, around which the path continues and back in a similar winding way to the eastern door. The candidate is then led to the blankets, where he sits down, while the four officiating priests position themselves in front of him, with the mentor standing back near the first of the four degree posts.
The Midē´ priest of the fourth rank or place in order of precedence approaches the kneeling candidate and in a manner similar to that which has already been described shoots into his breast the mī´gis; the third, second and first Midē´ follow in like manner, the last named alone shooting his mī´gis into the candidate’s forehead, upon which he falls forward, spits out a mī´gis shell which he had previously secreted in his mouth, and upon the priests rubbing upon his back and limbs their Midē´ sacks he recovers and resumes his sitting posture.
The fourth-ranked Midē´ priest approaches the kneeling candidate and, like before, shoots the mī´gis into his chest. The third, second, and first Midē´ priests follow suit, with the first one shooting his mī´gis into the candidate’s forehead. The candidate then falls forward, spits out a mī´gis shell he had hidden in his mouth, and after the priests rub their Midē´ sacks on his back and limbs, he recovers and sits up again.
The officiating priests retire to either side of the inclosure to find seats, when the newly received member arises and with the assistance of the preceptor distributes the remaining parcels of tobacco, and lastly the blankets, robes, and other gifts. He then begins at the southeastern angle of the inclosure to return thanks for admission, places both hands upon the first person, and as he moves them downward over his hair says: Mi-gwĕtsh´ ga-o´-shi-tō´-ĭn bi-mâ´-dĭ-sĭ-win—“Thanks, for giving to me life.” The Midē´ addressed bows his head and responds, hau´, ēn´,—yes when the newly admitted member steps back one pace, clasps his hands and inclines his head to the front. This movement is continued until all present have been thanked, after which he takes a seat in the southeastern corner of the inclosure.
The officiating priests move to either side of the enclosure to take their seats, while the newly admitted member stands up and, with help from the preceptor, hands out the remaining bundles of tobacco, followed by the blankets, robes, and other gifts. Then, starting from the southeastern corner of the enclosure, he expresses gratitude for being welcomed, places both hands on the first person's head, and as he moves his hands down over their hair, he says: Mi-gwĕtsh´ ga-o´-shi-tō´-ĭn bi-mâ´-dĭ-sĭ-win—“Thanks for giving me life.” The Midē´ who is addressed bows their head and replies, hau´, ēn´,—yes. After the newly admitted member steps back a pace, he clasps his hands and bows his head forward. This process continues until everyone present has been thanked, after which he takes a seat in the southeastern corner of the enclosure.
A curious ceremony then takes place in which all the Midē´ on one side of the inclosure arise and approach those upon the other, each grasping his Midē´ sack and selecting a victim pretends to shoot into his body the mī´gis, whereupon the Midē´ so shot falls over, and after a brief attack of gagging and retching pretends to gain relief by spitting out of his mouth a mī´gis shell. This is held upon the left palm, and as the opposing party retreat to their seats, the side which has just been subjected to the attack moves rapidly around among one another as if dancing, but simply giving rapid utterance to the word hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, and showing the mī´gis to everybody present, after which they place the flat hands quickly to the mouth and pretend again to swallow their respective shells. The members of this party then similarly attack their opponents, who 266 submit to similar treatment and go through like movements in exhibiting the mī´gis, which they again swallow. When quiet has been restored, and after a ceremonial smoke has been indulged in, the candidate sings, or chants, the production being either his own composition or that of some other person from whom it has been purchased. The chant presented herewith was obtained from Sikas´sigĕ, who had received it in turn from his father when the latter was chief priest of the Midē´wiwin at Mille Lacs, Minnesota. The pictographic characters are reproduced on Pl. XVII, A, and the musical notation, which is also presented, was obtained during the period of my preliminary instruction. The phraseology of the chant, of which each line and verse is repeated ad libitum as the singer may be inspired, is as follows:
A curious ceremony then takes place where all the Midē´ on one side of the enclosure stand up and approach those on the other side. Each one holds their Midē´ sack and, pretending to shoot the mī´gis into the body of a chosen victim, that person falls over. After a brief moment of gagging and retching, they pretend to feel relief by spitting out a mī´gis shell from their mouth. This shell is held in the left palm. As the opposing group retreats to their seats, the side that just attacked moves around among themselves as if dancing, repeatedly saying the word hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, hŏ´, while showing the mī´gis to everyone present. They then quickly place their flat hands to their mouths and pretend to swallow their respective shells. The members of this group then similarly attack their opponents, who submit to the same treatment and exhibit the mī´gis again, which they also pretend to swallow. Once calm is restored and after a ceremonial smoke, the candidate sings or chants. The performance is either his original composition or one bought from someone else. The chant presented here was obtained from Sikas´sigĕ, who received it from his father when he was the chief priest of the Midē´wiwin at Mille Lacs, Minnesota. The pictographic characters are reproduced on Pl. XVII, A, and the musical notation, which is also presented, was obtained during my preliminary training. The wording of the chant, with each line and verse repeated as much as the singer feels inspired, is as follows:
Plate XVII.a. Mnemonic Song.
Plate XVII.a. Memory Song.
![]() |
The singer refers to the feast which he gives to the Midē´ for admitting him into the Midē´wiwin. The singer talks about the feast he holds for the Midē´ to welcome him into the Midē´wiwin. |
Do-na-ga-ni, Do-na-ga-ni, Do-na-ga-ni, Do-na-ga-ni,
Do-na-ga-ni, Do-na-ga-ni, Do-na-ga-ni, Do-na-ga-ni,
Do-na-ga-ni, Do-na-ga-ni; Na-´kwa-wē´, In-do-shi-tōn Donagani,
Do-na-ga-ni, Do-na-ga-ni; Na-´kwa-wē´, In-do-shi-tōn Donagani
Donaga-ni, Do-na-ga-ni, Do-na-ga-ni, Do-na-ga-ni, Do-na-ga-ni.
Donaga-ni, Do-na-ga-ni, Do-na-ga-ni, Do-na-ga-ni, Do-na-ga-ni.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
![]() |
Man´-ī-dō´ i-yan-nī´, Esh-ko´-te nin´-do-we´-yo-wĭn´, Manidò iyanni, Eshkote nindowe'yowin, I am such a spirit, My body is made of fire. I am that kind of spirit; my body is made of fire. His power reaches to the sky, i.e., he has power to invoke the aid of Ki´tshi Man´idō. The four degrees which he has received are indicated by the four short lines at the tip of the hand. His power extends to the sky, meaning he has the ability to call on Ki´tshi Man´idō for help. The four levels he has attained are represented by the four short lines at the tip of his hand. |
Ma´ni-dō-i-ya-ni, Ma´ni-dō-i-ya-ni, Ma´ni-dō-i-ya-ni,
Ma'ni-dō-i-ya-ni, Ma'ni-dō-i-ya-ni, Ma'ni-dō-i-ya-ni,
Ma´ni-dō-i-ya-ni, Ma´ni-dō-i-ya-ni;
Ma'ni-dō-i-ya-ni, Ma'ni-dō-i-ya-ni;
Esh´ko-te nin-do we-yo-win, Manidōiya-ni, Ma´ni-dō-i-ya-ni,
Esh´ko-te nin-do we-yo-win, Manidōiya-ni, Ma´ni-dō-i-ya-ni,
Ma´ni-dō-i-ya-ni, Ma´ni-dō-i-ya-ni.
Máni-do-i-ya-ni, Máni-do-i-ya-ni.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
![]() |
Kŏ´-tshi-hai´-o-nī´, Kŏ´-tshi-hai´-o-nī´, I have tried it, My body is of fire. I’ve experienced it; my body feels like it’s on fire. He likens himself to the Bear Man´idō, and has like power by virtue of his mī´gis, which is shown below the lines running downward from the mouth. He is represented as standing in the Midē´wigân—where his feet rest. He compares himself to the Bear Manidō and has similar power due to his mīgis, which is depicted below the lines running down from the mouth. He is shown standing in the Midēwigân—where his feet are positioned. |
Ko´tshi-hai´o-ni, Ko´tshi-hai´o-ni, Ko´tshi-hai´o-ni,
Ko'tshi-hai'o-ni, Ko'tshi-hai'o-ni, Ko'tshi-hai'o-ni,
Ko´tshihai´oni, Ko´tshi-hai´o-ni, Ko´tshi-hai´o-ni,
Ko'tshihai'oni, Ko'tshi-hai'o-ni, Ko'tshi-hai'o-ni,
Ko´tshi-hai´o-ni, Ko´tshi-hai´o-ni, Esh´kote´wani´yo, Ko´tshihaioni.
Ko´tshi-hai´o-ni, Ko´tshi-hai´o-ni, Esh´kote´wani´yo, Ko´tshihaioni.
Ko´tshihai´oni, Kotshihaioni, hĕ´ō, hĕ´ō.
Ko´tshihai´oni, Kotshihaioni, hey, hey.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
![]() |
Pause. An offering of smoke is made to Ki´tshi Man´idō. Pause. An offering of smoke is made to Ki'tshi Man'idō. |
268
![]() |
Ni-mī´-gi-sĭm´ man´-i-dō´-we, hwē´, hē´, Ni-mī´-gi-sĭm´ man´-i-dō´-we, hwē´, hē´, My mī´gis spirit, I overpower death with. My spirit, I conquer death with. [His body is covered with mī´gis as shown by the short lines radiating from the sides, and by this power he is enabled to overcome death.] [His body is covered with mī´gis, indicated by the short lines radiating from the sides, and with this power, he can overcome death.] |
Nimegasi mani dō-wē, hwē, hē, Nimegasi mani dō-wē, hwē, hē,
Nimegasi mani dō-wē, hwē, hē, Nimegasi mani dō-wē, hwē, hē,
Shagodzhihinani-mega-si, Manido-wē, hwē, hē.
Shagodzhihinani mega si, Manido we, hwē, hē.
Ni-me-ga-si-ma-ni-dō-wē, hwē, hē.
Ni-me-ga-si-ma-ni-dō-wē, hwē, hē.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
![]() |
Ni´-ka-ni´ nin-man´-e-dō´-we-ya´. Ni´-ka-ni´ nin-man´-e-dō´-we-ya´. That is the way with me, spirit that I am. That’s just how I am, being the spirit that I am. [The hand shows how he casts the mī´gis forward into the person requiring life. He has fourfold power, i.e., he has received the mī´gis four times himself and is thus enabled to infuse into the person requiring it.] [The hand shows how he throws the mī´gis forward into the person in need of life. He has fourfold power, meaning he has received the mī´gis four times himself and is therefore able to infuse it into the person in need.] |
Ni´-ga-ne´ nin ma´ni-dō´we ya
Ni'ga-ne' nin ma'ni-dō'we ya
Ni´-ga-ne´ nin ma´ni-dō´we ya,
Ni-ga-ne nin ma-ni-dō-we ya,
Ya´ho-ya´ ma´nidō-we,
Ya'ho-ya' ma'nidō-we,
Nin´dohōha ni´gane, ma´ni-dō-we, ya, hē.
Nin'dohōha ni'gane, ma'ni-dō-we, ya, hē.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
269
![]() |
Ē-kotsh´-i-na´-ha, Ē-kotsh´-i-na´-ha, I hang it, I hang up the Spirit sack. I hang it up, I hang up the Spirit sack. [After using his Midē´ sack he hangs it against the wall of the Midē´wigân, as is usually done during the ceremonial of initiation.] [After using his Midē´ sack, he hangs it on the wall of the Midē´wigân, as is typically done during the initiation ceremony.] |
E-ko´tshi-na-ha, E-ko´tshi-na-ha, E-ko´tshi-na-ha,
E-ko´tshi-na-ha, E-ko´tshi-na-ha, E-ko´tshi-na-ha,
E-ko´-tshi-na-ha, E-ko´-tshi-na-ha,
E-ko´-tshi-na-ha, E-ko´-tshi-na-ha,
E-ki´-tshi-ma´-ni-dō´ hwe-do-wi, E-ko´tshi-na-ha,
E-ki´-tshi-ma´-ni-dō´ hwe-do-wi, E-ko´tshi-na-ha,
E-ko´tshi-na-ha, E-ko´tshi-na-ha, hĕ´a.
E-ko´tshi-na-ha, E-ko´tshi-na-ha, hĕ´a.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
![]() |
He´-a-wi-non´-dam-a´-ni, He’s a woman named, Let them hear, Midē´ spirit, those who are sitting around. Let them listen, Midē´ spirit, to those who are gathered around. [He invokes Ki´tshi Man´idō to make his auditors understand his power.] [He calls upon Ki´tshi Man´idō to help his listeners understand his power.] |
He-a-wi-non´-da-ma-ni hē, He-a-wi-nonda-ma-ni hē;
He-a-wi-non´-da-ma-ni hē, He-a-wi-nonda-ma-ni hē;
He´-a-wi-non-da-ma-ni hē, He´-a-wi-non-da-ma-ni hē;
He’s-a-wi-non-da-ma-ni he, He’s-a-wi-non-da-ma-ni he;
Manidomidēwi hē, Nemadawi dzhig, Heawinondamani hē, hē, hē.
Manidomidēwi here, Nemadawi dzhig, Heawinondamani here, here, here.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
![]() |
He´-a-we-na´ ni´-we-dō´, He’s a weaver,
He who is sleeping, He who is sleeping, [In the employment of his powers he resorts to the help of Ki´tshi Man´idō—his kinsman or Midē´ colleague.] [In using his powers, he relies on the help of Ki´tshi Man´idō—his relative or Midē´ colleague.] |
He-a-we-na-ne-we-dō, hō, He-a-we-na-ne-we-dō, hō,
Heawe na ne we do, hō, Heawe na ne we do, hō,
He-a-we-na-ne-we-dō, hō, He-a-we-na-ne-we-dō, hō;
He-a-we-na-ne-we-dō, hō, He-a-we-na-ne-we-dō, hō;
Ma´-ni-dō-we-a-ni ni-ka-na ni-ka-na, hō, hō.
Ma-ni-do-we-a-ni ni-ka-na ni-ka-na, hō, hō.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
![]() |
Man´-i-dō´ we-a-nī´ Man'ido wiini
I am a spirit, I am a spirit, [The hand reaches to the earth to grasp fire, showing his ability to do so without injury and illustrating in this manner his supernatural power.] [The hand reaches down to the ground to grab fire, demonstrating his ability to do so without getting hurt and showcasing his supernatural power in this way.] |
Ma´ni-dō´wi-a-ni hē, Ma´ni-dō´wi-a-ni hē, Ma´-ni-dō´-wi-a-ni hē,
Máni-dṓwi-a-ni hē, Máni-dṓwi-a-ni hē, Má-ni-dṓ-wi-a-ni hē,
Ma´-ni-dō´-wi-a-ni hē, Ma´-ni-dō´wi-a-ni hē;
Ma'ni-dō'wi-a-ni hey, Ma'ni-dō'wi-a-ni hey;
Esh´kato´weani hē, Ma´nidō´wiani hē, Ma´nidō´wia-ni hē.
Esh'kato'weani he, Ma'nido'wiani he, Ma'nido'wia-ni he.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
![]() |
Ai-ya´-swa-kĭt-te´, hē´, he´, Ai-ya'-swa-kĭt-te', hey, he,
It is leaning, It's leaning, [The phrase refers to the mī´gis within his heart. The short radiating lines indicate the magic power of the shell.] [The phrase refers to the mī´gis in his heart. The short radiating lines indicate the magical power of the shell.] |
He´-a-si-wi-kit-te hē, He´-a-si-wi-kit-te hē, He´a-si-wikit-te hē,
He´-a-si-wi-kit-te hē, He´-a-si-wi-kit-te hē, He´a-si-wikit-te hē,
He´a-si-wi-kit-te hē, Na´simagot nin´de hē, He´-a-si-wi-kit-te hē,
He´a-si-wi-kit-te hē, Na´simagot nin´de hē, He´-a-si-wi-kit-te hē,
He´-a-si-wi-kit-te hē, He´-a-si-wi-kit-te hē´, He´a-si-wi-kitte hē.
He´-a-si-wi-kit-te hē, He´-a-si-wi-kit-te hē´, He´a-si-wi-kitte hē.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
![]() |
Rest, or pause, after which dancing accompanies the remainder of the song. Rest, or take a break, after which dancing continues for the rest of the song. |
![]() |
Ni-ka´-nin-ko´-tshi´-ha ni´-ka-na Ni-ka´-nin-ko´-tshi´-ha ni´-ka-na Midē´ friends, I am trying, Midē´ friends, Midē´ friends, I am trying. Midé friends, I’m trying, Midé friends, Midé friends, I’m trying. [His hand and arm crossed by lines to denote magic power, in reaching to grasp more than four degrees have given him; he has in view a fifth, or its equivalent.] [His hand and arm marked with lines to represent magical power, as he reaches to grasp more than what he has been given; he aims for a fifth, or something equivalent.] |
Ni´-ka-ni ko´tshiha Ni´ka-ni ha,
Ni'ka-ni ko'tshiha Ni'ka-ni ha,
Ni´-ka-ni ko´tshini Ni´-ka-ni ha,
Ni´-ka-ni ko´tshini Ni´-ka-ni ha,
Ni´-ka-ni ko´-tshi-ha Ni´-ka-ni ha.
Ni'ka-ni ko'tshi-ha Ni'ka-ni ha.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
![]() |
Hi´-ne-na-wa´ ni-be´-i-dōn´ ni-di´-na. Hi'ne'na wa' ni-be'i-dōn ni-di'na. I hold that which I brought, and told him. I hold what I brought and told him. The singer is holding the mī´gis and refers to his having its power, which he desires Ki´tshi Man´idō to augment. The singer is holding the mī´gis and refers to having its power, which he wants Ki´tshi Man´idō to increase. |
He-ne-na-wa-ni-bei-dōn, He-ne-na-wa-ni-bei-dōn,
He-ne-na-wa-ni-bei-dōn, He-ne-na-wa-ni-bei-dōn,
He-ne-na-wa-ni-bei-dōn, He-ne-na-wa-ni-bei-dōn.
He-ne-na-wa-ni-bei-dōn, He-ne-na-wa-ni-bei-dōn.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
![]() |
Ye´-we-ni´-mi-dē´, hwa´, da´, Ke-wa´-shi-mi-dē´, hĭ-a, hwē´, Ye'-we-ni'mi-dē, huh, da, Ke-wa'shi-mi-dē, hi-a, whee,
Who is this grand Midē´? You have not much grand medicine. Who is this great Midē´? You don't have much great medicine. [The first line, when used with the music, is a´-we-nin-o´-au-midē´. The whole phrase refers to boasters, who have not received the proper initiations which they profess. The figure is covered with mī´gis shells, as shown by the short lines attached to the body.] [The first line, when used with the music, is a´-we-nin-o´-au-midē´. The whole phrase refers to boasters, who have not received the proper initiations which they profess. The figure is covered with mī´gis shells, as shown by the short lines attached to the body.] |
Ye-we-ni-mi-dē hwa, da. Ke-wa-shi-mi-dē hĭa, hwē,
Ye-we-ni-mi-dē hwa, da. Ke-wa-shi-mi-dē hĭa, hwē,
Ye-we-ni-mi-dē hwa, da. Ke-wa-shi-mi-dē hĭa, hwe.
Ye-we-ni-mi-dē hwa, da. Ke-wa-shi-mi-dē hĭa, hwe.
Ye-we-ni-mi-dē, Ye-we-ni-mi-dē hwa, da.
Ye-we-ni-mi-dē, Ye-we-ni-mi-dē hi, da.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
![]() |
Nai´-a-na-wi´ na-ma´, ha´, Wa-na´-he-ne-ni-wa´, ha´, Naí-ana-wí namá, há, Wa-ná-he-ne-ni-wá, há,
I can not reach it, I can't get to it, [The mī´gis attached to the arrow signifies its swift and certain power and effect. The first line of the phrase, when spoken, is nin-na´-na-wi-nan´.] [The mī´gis attached to the arrow symbolizes its quick and definite power and impact. The first line of the phrase, when spoken, is nin-na´-na-wi-nan´.] |
Nai-a-na-wi-na-ma ha, Nai-a-na-wi-na-ma ha,
Nai-a-na-wi-na-ma ha, Nai-a-na-wi-na-ma ha,
Nai-a-na-wi-na-ma ha, Nai-a-na-wi-na-ma ha,
Nai-a-na-wi-na-ma ha, Nai-a-na-wi-na-ma ha,
Wa-na-he-ne-ni-wa ha, O-ta-be-we-ni-me ha.
Wa-na-he-ne-ni-wa ha, O-ta-be-we-ni-me ha.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
![]() |
Ai-yā´ ha´-na-wi´-na-ma´. Ai-yā ha-na-wi-na-ma. I can not strike him. I can't hit him. The speaker is weeping because he can not see immediate prospects for further advancement in the acquisition of power. The broken ring upon his breast is the place upon which he was shot with the mī´gis. The speaker is crying because he can't see any immediate chances for gaining more power. The broken ring on his chest is where he was hit with the mī´gis. |
Ai-ya-ha-na-wi-na-ma, Ai-ya-ha-na-wi-na-ma,
Ai-ya-ha-na-wi-na-ma, Ai-ya-ha-na-wi-na-ma,
Ai-ya-ha-na-wi-na-ma, Ai-ya-ha-na-wi-na—ma, hĕō, hĕō, hĕō.
Ai-ya-ha-na-wi-na-ma, Ai-ya-ha-na-wi-na—ma, hey, hey, hey.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
The following musical notation presents accurately the range of notes employed by the preceptor. The peculiarity of Midē´ songs lies in the fact that each person has his own individual series of notes which correspond to the number of syllables in the phrase and add thereto meaningless words to prolong the effect. When a song is taught, the words are the chief and most important part, the musical rendering of a second person may be so different from that of the person from whom he learns it as to be unrecognizable without 274 the words. Another fact which often presents itself is the absence of time and measure, which prevents any reduction to notation by full bars; e.g., one or two bars may appear to consist of four quarter notes or a sufficient number of quarters and eighths to complete such bars, but the succeeding one may consist of an additional quarter, or perhaps two, thus destroying all semblance of rythmic continuity. This peculiarity is not so common in dancing music, in which the instruments of percussion are employed to assist regularity and to accord with the steps made by the dancers, or vice versa.
The following musical notation accurately shows the range of notes used by the instructor. The unique aspect of Midē´ songs is that every person has their own specific series of notes that match the number of syllables in the phrase and add in meaningless words to extend the effect. When a song is taught, the words are the most important part; the musical version of one person can be so different from the person they learned it from that it might not be recognizable without the words. Another common issue is the lack of time and measure, which makes it impossible to notate using full bars; for example, one or two bars might appear to have four quarter notes or a combination of quarters and eighths that fill those bars, but the next one might have an extra quarter note or two, breaking any semblance of rhythmic continuity. This unusual feature is less common in dance music, where percussion instruments are used to help maintain a regular rhythm and match the steps of the dancers, or the other way around.
In some of the songs presented in this paper the bars have been omitted for the reasons presented above. The peculiarity of the songs as rendered by the preceptor is thus more plainly indicated.
In some of the songs discussed in this paper, the bars have been omitted for the reasons mentioned earlier. This makes the unique qualities of the songs as presented by the instructor clearer.
When the chant is ended the ushers, who are appointed by the chief Midē´, leave the inclosure to bring in the vessels of food. This is furnished by the newly elected member and is prepared by his female relatives and friends. The kettles and dishes of food are borne around four times, so that each one present may have the opportunity of eating sufficiently. Smoking and conversation relating to the Midē´wiwin may then be continued until toward sunset, when, upon an intimation from the chief Midē´, the members quietly retire, leaving the structure by the western door. All personal property is removed, and upon the following day everybody departs.
When the chant ends, the ushers, chosen by the chief Midē´, leave the area to bring in the food. This is provided by the newly elected member and is prepared by his female relatives and friends. The pots and dishes of food are taken around four times so that everyone present has a chance to eat adequately. Smoking and conversations about the Midē´wiwin can then continue until sunset, when, at a signal from the chief Midē´, the members quietly leave through the western door. All personal belongings are taken out, and the next day everyone leaves.
DESCRIPTIVE NOTES.
The amount of influence wielded by Midē´ generally, and particularly such as have received four degrees, is beyond belief. The rite of the Midē´wiwin is deemed equivalent to a religion—as that term is commonly understood by intelligent people—and is believed to elevate such a Midē´ to the nearest possible approach to the reputed character of Mi´nabō´zho, and to place within his reach the supernatural power of invoking and communing with Ki´tshi Man´idō himself.
The amount of influence held by Midē´ in general, especially those who have received four degrees, is hard to believe. The rite of the Midē´wiwin is considered equivalent to a religion—as that term is commonly understood today—and it’s thought to elevate a Midē´ to the closest possible resemblance to the legendary Mi´nabō´zho, granting them the supernatural ability to invoke and communicate with Ki´tshi Man´idō himself.
By reference to Pl. III, A, No. 98, it will be observed that the human figure is specially marked with very pronounced indications of mī´gis spots upon the head, the extremities, and more particularly the breast. These are placed where the mīgis was “shot” into the Midē´, and the functions of the several parts are therefore believed to be greatly augmented. All the spots are united by a line to denote unity and harmony of action in the exercise of power.
By referring to Pl. III, A, No. 98, you'll notice that the human figure is specifically marked with very noticeable indications of mī´gis spots on the head, the limbs, and especially the chest. These spots are located where the mīgis was “shot” into the Midē´, and it's believed that the functions of these different areas are significantly enhanced. All the spots are connected by a line to signify unity and harmonious action in the use of power.
The mī´gis, typical of the fourth degree, consists of small pieces of deer horn, covered with red paint on one end and green upon the other. Sometimes but one color is employed for the entire object. The form is shown on Pl. XI, No. 6. No. 2, upon the same plate, represents a shell, used as a mī´gis, observed at White Earth.
The mī´gis, typical of the fourth degree, is made up of small pieces of deer horn, with one end painted red and the other green. Sometimes, just one color is used for the whole object. The shape is shown on Pl. XI, No. 6. No. 2, on the same plate, depicts a shell that was used as a mī´gis, which was seen at White Earth.
Figs. 5-11, on Pl. XV, present several forms of painting midē´ 275 posts, as practiced by the several societies in Minnesota. Each society claims to preserve the ancient method. The cross, shown in No. 7, bears the typical colors—red and green—upon the upper half, while the lower post is square and colored white on the east, green on the south, red on the west, and black on the north. The Midē´ explain the signification of the colors as follows: White represents the east, the source of light and the direction from which the sacred mī´gis came; green, sha´manō the southern one, refers to the source of the rains, the direction from which the Thunderers come in the spring, they who revivify the earth; red refers to the land of the setting sun, the abode of the shadows or the dead; and north being black, because that is the direction from which come cold, hunger, and disease.
Figs. 5-11, on Pl. XV, show different styles of painting midē´ posts, as practiced by various societies in Minnesota. Each society claims to keep the ancient technique alive. The cross in No. 7 displays the typical colors—red and green—on the top half, while the bottom post is square and painted white on the east, green on the south, red on the west, and black on the north. The Midē´ explain the meanings of the colors as follows: White symbolizes the east, the source of light and the direction from which the sacred mī´gis came; green, sha´manō from the south, refers to the source of rain, the direction from which the Thunderers arrive in spring to rejuvenate the earth; red represents the land of the setting sun, the home of shadows or the dead; and north is black, since that direction brings cold, hunger, and disease.
The words of the Midē´ priest alluding to “the path that has no end” refer to the future course and conduct of the candidate for the last degree, as well as to the possibility of attaining unlimited powers in magic, and is pictorially designated upon the chart on Pl. III, A, at No. 99. The path is devious and beset with temptations, but by strict adherence to the principles of the Midē´wiwin the Midē´ may reach the goal and become the superior of his confrères, designated Mi-ni´-si-nō´-shkwe, “he who lives on the island.”
The words of the Midē´ priest referring to “the path that has no end” indicate the future journey and behavior of the candidate for the last degree, as well as the potential for gaining unlimited powers in magic. This is visually represented on the chart at Pl. III, A, at No. 99. The path is winding and filled with temptations, but by strictly following the principles of the Midē´wiwin, the Midē´ can reach the goal and become superior to his peers, called Mi-ni´-si-nō´-shkwe, “he who lives on the island.”
A Midē´-Wâbĕnō´ of this degree is dreaded on account of his extraordinary power of inflicting injury, causing misfortune, etc., and most remarkable tales are extant concerning his astounding performances with fire.
A Midē´-Wâbĕnō´ of this level is feared because of his incredible ability to cause harm and bring bad luck, and there are many amazing stories about his incredible feats with fire.
The following performance is said to have occurred at White Earth, Minnesota, in the presence of a large gathering of Indians and mixed bloods. Two small wig´iwams were erected, about 50 paces from each other, and after the Wâbĕnō´ had crawled into one of them his disparagers built around each of them a continuous heap of brush and firewood, which were then kindled. When the blaze was at its height all became hushed for a moment, and presently the Wâbĕnō´ called to the crowd that he had transferred himself to the other wig´iwam and immediately, to their profound astonishment, crawled forth unharmed.
The following performance reportedly took place at White Earth, Minnesota, in front of a large crowd of Native Americans and people of mixed heritage. Two small wigwams were set up about 50 paces apart, and after the Wâbĕnō crawled into one of them, his critics surrounded both with a continuous pile of brush and firewood, which they then lit on fire. As the flames reached their peak, everyone fell silent for a moment, and then the Wâbĕnō called out to the crowd that he had moved to the other wigwam and, to their complete surprise, crawled out unharmed.
This is but an example of the numerous and marvelous abilities with which the Wâbĕnō´ of the higher grade is accredited.
This is just one example of the many amazing abilities that the Wâbĕnō´ of the higher grade is recognized for.
The special pretensions claimed by the Midē-Wâbĕnō´ have already been mentioned, but an account of the properties and manner of using the “love powder” may here be appropriate. This powder—the composition of which has been given—is generally used by the owner to accomplish results desired by the applicant. It is carried in a small bag made of buckskin or cloth, which the Wâbĕnō´ carefully deposits within his Midē´ sack, but which is transferred to another sack of like size and loaned to the applicant, for a valuable consideration.
The unique claims made by the Midē-Wâbĕnō´ have already been mentioned, but it’s worth discussing the properties and use of the “love powder.” This powder—the recipe for which has been provided—is typically used by its owner to achieve the desired results of the applicant. It’s kept in a small bag made of buckskin or cloth, which the Wâbĕnō´ carefully places inside his Midē´ sack, but then it’s transferred to another bag of similar size and lent to the applicant for something valuable in return.
276 During a recent visit to one of the reservations in Minnesota, I had occasion to confer with a Catholic missionary regarding some of the peculiar medical practices of the Indians, and the implements and other accessories employed in connection with their profession. He related the following incident as having but a short time previously come under his own personal observation:
276 During a recent visit to a Native American reservation in Minnesota, I had the opportunity to talk with a Catholic missionary about some of the unique medical practices of the Indigenous people, as well as the tools and other items they use in their work. He shared the following incident, which he had observed personally just a short time ago:
One of the members of his church, a Norwegian, sixty-two years of age, and a widower, had for the last preceding year been considered by most of the residents as demented. The missionary himself had observed his erratic and frequently irrational conduct, and was impressed with the probable truth of the prevailing rumor. One morning, however, as the missionary was seated in his study, he was surprised to receive a very early call, and upon invitation his visitor took a seat and explained the object of his visit. He said that for the last year he had been so disturbed in his peace of mind that he now came to seek advice. He was fully aware of the common report respecting his conduct, but was utterly unable to control himself, and attributed the cause of his unfortunate condition to an occurrence of the year before. Upon waking one morning his thoughts were unwillingly concentrated upon an Indian woman with whom he had no personal acquaintance whatever, and, notwithstanding the absurdity of the impression, he was unable to cast it aside. After breakfast he was, by some inexplicable influence, compelled to call upon her, and to introduce himself, and although he expected to be able to avoid repeating the visit, he never had sufficient control over himself to resist lurking in the vicinity of her habitation.
One of the members of his church, a Norwegian, sixty-two years old, and a widower, had been considered by most residents as mentally unstable for the past year. The missionary had noticed his unpredictable and often unreasonable behavior and was convinced there was some truth to the common rumor. One morning, while the missionary was in his study, he was surprised by an early visitor. After being invited in, the visitor sat down and explained why he was there. He said that for the past year, he had been so troubled that he came to seek advice. He knew about the rumors regarding his behavior but felt completely unable to control himself. He believed his unfortunate state was caused by an event from the year before. One morning, his thoughts unwillingly became fixated on an Indian woman he had never met, and despite how ridiculous it seemed, he couldn't shake it off. After breakfast, he felt an inexplicable urge to visit her and introduce himself. Although he thought he could avoid going back, he never managed to resist lingering around her place.
Upon his return home after the first visit he discovered lying upon the floor under his bed, a Midē´ sack which contained some small parcels with which he was unfamiliar, but was afterward told that one of them consisted of “love powder.” He stated that he had grown children, and the idea of marrying again was out of the question, not only on their account but because he was now too old. The missionary reasoned with him and suggested a course of procedure, the result of which had not been learned when the incident was related.
Upon returning home after his first visit, he found a Midē' sack lying on the floor under his bed. Inside were some small packages he didn't recognize, but later he was informed that one of them contained “love powder.” He mentioned that he had grown children and the idea of getting married again was off the table, both for their sake and because he felt too old now. The missionary talked to him about it and suggested a plan of action, but the outcome of that discussion wasn't known when the story was shared.
Jugglery of another kind, to which allusion has before been made, is also attributed to the highest class of Jĕs´sakkīd´. Several years ago the following account was related to Col. Garrick Mallery, U.S. Army, and myself, and as Col. Mallery subsequently read a paper before the Anthropological Society of Washington, District of Columbia, in which the account was mentioned, I quote his words:
Jugglery of a different sort, which has been referenced earlier, is also associated with the highest class of Jĕs´sakkīd´. A few years ago, Col. Garrick Mallery, U.S. Army, and I were told the following story, and since Col. Mallery later presented a paper to the Anthropological Society of Washington, D.C., in which he mentioned this account, I quote his words:
Paul Beaulieu, an Ojibwa of mixed heritage and the current interpreter at the White Earth Agency in Minnesota, shared his experience with a Jĕs´sakkīd´ at Leech Lake, Minnesota, around 1858. News of the juggler’s amazing acts had reached the agency, and since Beaulieu didn’t believe in jugglers, he decided to bet $100, a significant amount at the time, against goods of equal value. He challenged the juggler to successfully perform one of his tricks, which Beaulieu would select, in front of himself and a committee of his friends. A Jĕs´sakkân´—or Jĕs´sakkīd´ lodge—was then set up. The structure was made of vertical poles leaning towards the center, filled in with interwoven twigs and covered with blankets and birch bark from the ground to the top. It had a hole about a foot in diameter at the top for the entrance and exit of spirits and objects, but it was too small for a person to pass through. A flap was left on one side of the lower covering for the juggler's entrance.
A committee of twelve was formed to ensure that no communication occurred between the Jĕs´sakkīd´ and their allies. These were trustworthy individuals, including the Episcopal clergy member from the reservation. The audience consisted of several hundred people, but they were kept at a distance and not allowed to come closer.
The Jĕs´sakkīd´ then took off all his clothes, leaving only the breech-cloth. Beaulieu picked a rope specifically for this and started by tying one end securely around the juggler’s ankles; then he tied his knees together and next his wrists. After that, the arms were placed over the knees, and a piece of wood was put under the knees to keep the arms down and still. The rope was then wrapped around the neck multiple times, each time tied and knotted, pulling the face down onto the knees. A flat black river stone, which was the Jĕs´sakkīd´’s ma´nidō or amulet, was left on his thighs.
The Jĕs´sakkīd´ was then taken to the lodge and placed on a mat on the ground, and the covering flap was put back on to completely hide him from sight.
Suddenly, loud, thumping noises filled the air, and the structure began to sway violently from side to side. The clergyman commented that this was the work of the Evil One and that ‘this was no place for him,’ so he left and didn’t witness the outcome. After several minutes of chaotic movements and loud, unintelligible sounds from the lodge, the motions gradually stopped when the voice of the juggler was heard, instructing Beaulieu to go to a nearby friend's house to get the rope. Beaulieu, suspecting a prank, told the committee to make sure no one approached while he retrieved the rope. He found it as he had left it, still tied around the neck and limbs of the Jĕs´sakkīd´. He returned right away, placed it in front of the spectators, and asked the Jĕs´sakkīd´ for permission to examine him, which was granted with the condition that Beaulieu would not touch him.
When the cover was moved aside, the Jĕs´sakkīd´ sat inside the lodge, happily smoking his pipe, with nothing else in sight except the black stone mánidō. Beaulieu paid his bet of $100.
An exhibition of similar claimed abilities, also for a bet, was announced shortly after at Yellow Medicine, Minnesota. It was to take place in front of several Army personnel, but due to a warning from the Grand Medicine Man of the Leech Lake bands, who likely opposed any disruption to his profitable monopoly, the event was canceled and the bets were called off.
Col. Mallery obtained further information, of a similar kind from various persons on the Bad River Reservation, and at Bayfield, Wisconsin. All of these he considered to be mere variants of a class of performances which were reported by the colonists of New England and the first French missionaries in Canada as early as 1613, where the general designation of “The Sorcerers” was applied to the whole body of Indians on the Ottawa River. These reports, it must be 278 remembered, however, applied only to the numerous tribes of the Algonkian linguistic family among which the alleged practices existed; though neighboring tribes of other linguistic groups were no doubt familiar with them, just as the Winnebago, Omaha, and other allied tribes, profess to have “Medicine Societies,” the secrets of which they claim to have obtained from tribes located east of their own habitat, that practiced the peculiar ceremony of “shooting small shells” (i.e., the mī´gis of the Ojibwa) into the candidate.
Col. Mallery gathered more information of a similar nature from various individuals on the Bad River Reservation and in Bayfield, Wisconsin. He viewed all of this as simply different versions of performances that were reported by the New England colonists and the early French missionaries in Canada as far back as 1613, where the general term "The Sorcerers" was used for the entire group of Indians along the Ottawa River. It's important to note that these reports only applied to the many tribes of the Algonkian linguistic family where these alleged practices occurred; however, neighboring tribes from other linguistic groups were likely aware of them, just as the Winnebago, Omaha, and other related tribes claim to have "Medicine Societies," the secrets of which they say they learned from tribes further east who practiced the distinct ceremony of "shooting small shells" (i.e., the mī´gis of the Ojibwa) into the candidate. 278
In Pl. XVIII is shown a Jĕs´sakkīd´ extracting sickness by sucking through bone tubes.
In Pl. 18 is shown a Jĕs´sakkīd´ removing illness by sucking through bone tubes.
Plate XVIII. Jĕs´akkīd´ Removing Disease.
Plate XVIII. Jĕs´akkīd´ Curing Illness.
DZHIBAI´ MIDĒ´WIGÂN, OR “GHOST LODGE.”
A structure erected by Indians for any purpose whatever, is now generally designated a lodge, in which sense the term is applied in connection with the word dzhibai´—ghost, or more appropriately shadow—in the above caption. This lodge is constructed in a form similar to that of the Midē´wigân, but its greatest diameter extends north and south instead of east and west. Further reference will be made to this in describing another method of conferring the initiation of the first degree of the Midē´wiwin. This distinction is attained by first becoming a member of the so-called “Ghost Society,” in the manner and for the reason following:
A structure built by Indigenous people for any purpose is now commonly called a lodge, used in reference to the word dzhibai—meaning ghost or more accurately, shadow—in the context mentioned above. This lodge is designed similarly to the Midēwigân, but its widest part stretches north and south instead of east and west. More details will be provided when explaining another way to achieve the initiation of the first degree of the Midēwiwin. This distinction is reached by first becoming a member of the so-called "Ghost Society," in the following manner and for the reasons outlined:
After the birth of a male child it is customary to invite the friends of the family to a feast, designating at the same time a Midē´ to serve as godfather and to dedicate the child to some special pursuit in life. The Midē´ is governed in his decision by visions, and it thus sometimes happens that the child is dedicated to the “Grand Medicine,” i.e., he is to be prepared to enter the society of the Midē´. In such a case the parents prepare him by procuring a good preceptor, and gather together robes, blankets, and other gifts to be presented at initiation.
After a boy is born, it's traditional to invite the family’s friends to a celebration and also to select a Midē´ to act as the godfather and dedicate the child to a specific path in life. The Midē´ makes this decision based on visions, so sometimes the child is dedicated to the "Grand Medicine," meaning he will be trained to join the Midē´ society. In that case, the parents find a good mentor for him and collect robes, blankets, and other gifts to be given during the initiation.
Should this son die before the age of puberty, before which period it is not customary to admit any one into the society, the father paints his own face as before described, viz, red, with a green stripe diagonally across the face from left to right, as in Pl. VI, No. 4, or red with two short horizontal parallel bars in green upon the forehead as in Pl. VI, No. 5, and announces to the chief Midē´ priest his intention of becoming himself a member of the “Ghost Society” and his readiness to receive the first degree of the Midē´wiwin, as a substitute for his deceased son. Other members of the mourner’s family blacken the face, as shown on Pl. VII, No. 5.
Should this son die before reaching puberty, a time when it's not common to welcome anyone into the society, the father paints his face as described earlier—red, with a green diagonal stripe across his face from left to right, as seen in Pl. VI, No. 4, or red with two short horizontal green bars on his forehead, as in Pl. VI, No. 5. He then informs the chief Midē´ priest of his intention to join the “Ghost Society” and his willingness to receive the first degree of the Midē´wiwin in place of his deceased son. Other family members of the mourner paint their faces black, as illustrated in Pl. VII, No. 5.
In due time a council of Midē´ priests is called, who visit the wig´iwam of the mourner, where they partake of a feast, and the subject of initiation is discussed. This wig´iwam is situated south and east 279 of the Midē´wigân, as shown in Fig. 35, which illustration is a reproduction of a drawing made by Sikas´sigĕ.
In due time, a council of Midē priests is called, and they visit the mourner's wigwam, where they share a feast and discuss the topic of initiation. This wigwam is located to the south and east 279 of the Midēwigân, as shown in Fig. 35, which illustration is a reproduction of a drawing made by Sikasigĕ.
Fig. 35.—Indian diagram of ghost lodge.
Fig. 35.—Indian diagram of ghost lodge.
The following is an explanation of the several characters:
The following is an explanation of the various characters:
No. 1 represents the wig´iwam of the mourner, which has been erected in the vicinity of the Midē´wigân, until after the ceremony of initiation.
No. 1 represents the mourner's wigwam, which has been set up near the Midē'wigân, until after the initiation ceremony.
No. 2 is the path supposed to be taken by the shadow (spirit) of the deceased; it leads westward to the Dzhibai´ Midē´wigân; literally, shadow-spirit wig´iwam.
No. 2 is the path that the spirit of the deceased is supposed to take; it goes west to the Dzhibai´ Midē´wigân; literally, shadow-spirit house.
No. 3, 4, 5, and 6, designate the places where the spirit plucks the fruits referred to—respectively the strawberry, the blueberry, the June cherries, and the plum.
No. 3, 4, 5, and 6, indicate the locations where the spirit picks the fruits mentioned—specifically the strawberry, the blueberry, the June cherries, and the plum.
No. 7 designates the form and location of the Dzhihai´ Midē´wigân. The central spot is the place of the dish of food for Dzhibai´ Man´idō—the good spirit—and the smaller spots around the interior of the inclosure are places for the deposit of dishes for the other Midē´ spirits who have left this earth.
No. 7 indicates the layout and position of the Dzhihai´ Midē´wigân. The central area is where the dish of food for Dzhibai´ Man´idō—the good spirit—is placed, and the smaller spots around the inside of the enclosure are where dishes for the other Midē´ spirits, who have passed away, are set out.
No. 8 is the path which is taken by the candidate when going from his wig´iwam to the Midē´wigân.
No. 8 is the route that the candidate takes when going from his wigwam to the Midēwigān.
No. 9 indicates the place of the sweat-lodge, resorted to at other periods of initiation.
No. 9 shows the location of the sweat lodge, used during other initiation periods.
No. 10 is the Midē´wigân in which the ceremony is conducted at the proper time.
No. 10 is the Midē'wigân where the ceremony takes place at the right time.
It is stated that in former times the Ghost Lodge was erected west of the location of the mourner’s wig´iwam, but for a long time this practice has been discontinued. The tradition relating to the Spirit’s progress is communicated orally, while the dramatic representation is confined to placing the dishes of food in the Midē´wigân, which is selected as a fitting and appropriate substitute during the night preceding the initiation.
It’s said that in the past, the Ghost Lodge was built west of where the mourner’s wigwam stood, but this practice has stopped for a long time now. The tradition about the Spirit’s journey is passed down orally, while the dramatic representation is limited to placing food dishes in the Midēwigân, which is chosen as a suitable substitute during the night before the initiation.
This custom, as it was practiced, consisted of carrying from the mourner’s wig´iwam to the Ghost Lodge the dishes of food for the spirits of departed Midē´ to enjoy a feast, during the time that the Midē´ priests were partaking of one. A large dish was placed in the center of the structure by the mourner, from which the supreme Midē´ spirit was to eat. Dishes are now carried to the Midē´wigân, as stated above.
This practice involved taking food from the mourner’s wigwam to the Ghost Lodge for the spirits of deceased Midē to enjoy a feast while the Midē priests were having one. A large dish was set in the middle of the structure by the mourner for the supreme Midē spirit to eat. Dishes are now taken to the Midēwigân, as mentioned earlier.
The chief officiating Midē´ then instructs the father of the deceased boy the manner in which he is to dress and proceed, as symbolizing the course pursued by the spirit of the son on the way to the spirit 280 world. The instructions are carried out, as far as possible, with the exception of going to an imaginary Ghost Lodge, as he proceeds only to the Midē´wigân and deposits the articles enumerated below. He is told to take one pair of bear-skin moccasins, one pair of wolf-skin, and one pair of birds´ skins, in addition to those which he wears upon his feet; these are to be carried to the structure in which the Midē´ spirits are feasting, walking barefooted, picking a strawberry from a plant on the right of the path and a blueberry from a bush on the left, plucking June cherries from a tree on the right and plums on the left. He is then to hasten toward the Ghost Lodge, which is covered with mī´gis, and to deposit the fruit and the moccasins; these will be used by his son’s spirit in traveling the road of the dead after the spirits have completed their feast and reception of him. While the candidate is on his mission to the Ghost Lodge (for the time being represented by the Midē´wigân) the assemblage in the wig´iwam chant the following for the mourner: Yan´-i-ma-tsha´, yan´-i-ma-tsha´, ha´, yan´-i-ma-tsha´ yan´-i-ma-tsha´ ha´, yu´-te-no-win´ gē´, hē´ nin-de´-so-ne´—“I am going away, I am going away, I am going away, to the village I walk”—i.e., the village of the dead.
The lead officiating Midē´ instructs the deceased boy’s father on how to dress and proceed, symbolizing the journey the son’s spirit takes to the spirit world. The instructions are followed as closely as possible, except for going to an imaginary Ghost Lodge; he only goes to the Midē´wigân and places the items listed below. He is told to take one pair of bear-skin moccasins, one pair of wolf-skin, and one pair of bird skins, in addition to the ones he is already wearing. These will be carried to the place where the Midē´ spirits are feasting, while he walks barefoot, picking a strawberry from a plant on the right side of the path and a blueberry from a bush on the left, plucking June cherries from a tree on the right and plums on the left. He is then to quickly head toward the Ghost Lodge, which is covered with mī´gis, and deposit the fruit and moccasins; these will be used by his son’s spirit to travel the road of the dead after the spirits have finished their feast and welcomed him. While he is on his way to the Ghost Lodge (temporarily represented by the Midē´wigân), the group in the wig´iwam chant the following for the mourner: Yan´-i-ma-tsha´, yan´-i-ma-tsha´, ha´, yan´-i-ma-tsha´ yan´-i-ma-tsha´ ha´, yu´-te-no-win´ gē´, hē´ nin-de´-so-ne´—“I am going away, I am going away, I am going away, to the village I walk”—meaning the village of the dead.
The person who desires to receive initiation into the Midē´wigân, under such circumstances, impersonates Minabō´zho, as he is believed to have penetrated the country of the abode of shadows, or ne´-ba-gī´-zis—“land of the sleeping sun.” He, it is said, did this to destroy the “Ghost Gambler” and to liberate the many victims who had fallen into his power. To be enabled to traverse this dark and dismal path, he borrowed of Kŏ-ko´-kŏ-ō´—the owl—his eyes, and received also the services of wē´-we-tē´-si-wŭg—the firefly, both of which were sent back to the earth upon the completion of his journey. By referring to Pl. III, A, the reference to this myth will be observed as pictorially represented in Nos. 110 to 114. No. 110 is the Midē´wigân from which the traveler has to visit the Dzhibai´ Midē´wigân (No. 112) in the west. No. 113, represented as Kŏ-ko´-kŏ-ō´—the owl—whose eyes enabled Mī´nabō´zho to follow the path of the dead (No. 114); the owl skin Midē´ sack is also sometimes used by Midē´ priests who have received their first degree in this wise. The V-shaped characters within the circle at No. 111 denote the presence of spirits at the Ghost Lodge, to which reference has been made.
The person who wants to receive initiation into the Midē´wigân, in this situation, takes on the role of Minabō´zho, who is believed to have ventured into the land of shadows, or ne´-ba-gī´-zis—“land of the sleeping sun.” It is said that he did this to defeat the “Ghost Gambler” and free the many victims under his influence. To navigate this dark and gloomy path, he borrowed Kŏ-ko´-kŏ-ō´—the owl’s eyes, and also received the help of wē´-we-tē´-si-wŭg—the firefly, both of which were returned to the earth after his journey was complete. By looking at Pl. III, A, this myth is depicted in Nos. 110 to 114. No. 110 shows the Midē´wigân from which the traveler has to go to the Dzhibai´ Midē´wigân (No. 112) in the west. No. 113 features Kŏ-ko´-kŏ-ō´—the owl—whose eyes helped Mī´nabō´zho follow the path of the dead (No. 114); the owl skin Midē´ sack is also sometimes used by Midē´ priests who have received their first degree in this manner. The V-shaped characters within the circle at No. 111 indicate the presence of spirits at the Ghost Lodge, as mentioned.
The presents which had been gathered as a gift or fee for the deceased are now produced and placed in order for transportation to the Midē´wigân, early on the following morning.
The gifts that were collected as a tribute or payment for the deceased are now arranged and prepared for transport to the Midē´wigân early the next morning.
The Midē´ priests then depart, but on the next morning several of them make their appearance to assist in clearing the Midē´wigân of the dishes which had been left there over night, and to carry thither the robes, blankets, and other presents, and suspend them from the rafters. Upon their return to the candidate’s wig´iwam, the Midē´ priests gather, and after the candidate starts to lead the procession 281 toward the Midē´wigân, the priests fall in in single file, and all move forward, the Midē´ priests chanting the following words repeatedly, viz: Ki-e´-ne-kwo-tâ´ ki-e´-ne-kwo-tâ´, ha´, ha´, ha´, nōs e´wi-e´, hē´, ki´-na-ka´-ta-mŭn´ do-nâ´-gan—“I also, I also, my father, leave you my dish.”
The Midē´ priests then leave, but the next morning several of them come back to help clear the Midē´wigân of the dishes that were left there overnight and to bring the robes, blankets, and other gifts, hanging them from the rafters. When they return to the candidate’s wig´iwam, the Midē´ priests gather, and after the candidate starts to lead the procession 281 toward the Midē´wigân, the priests line up in single file and all move forward, the Midē´ priests chanting the following words repeatedly: Ki-e´-ne-kwo-tâ´ ki-e´-ne-kwo-tâ´, ha´, ha´, ha´, nōs e´wi-e´, hē´, ki´-na-ka´-ta-mŭn´ do-nâ´-gan—“I also, I also, my father, leave you my dish.”
This is sung for the deceased, who is supposed to bequeath to his father his dish, or other articles the names of which are sometimes added.
This is sung for the person who has passed away, who is meant to pass on his dish or other items, the names of which are sometimes included.
The procession continues toward and into the Midē´wigân, passing around the interior by the left side toward the west, north, and east to a point opposite the space usually reserved for the deposit of goods, where the candidate turns to the right and stands in the middle of the inclosure, where he now faces the Midē´ post in the west. The members who had not joined the procession, but who had been awaiting its arrival, now resume their seats, and those who accompanied the candidate also locate themselves as they desire, when the officiating priests begin the ceremony as described in connection with the initiation for the first degree after the candidate has been turned over to the chief by the preceptor.
The procession moves toward and into the Midē´wigân, circling around the inside to the west, north, and east until it reaches the area typically set aside for placing goods. There, the candidate turns to the right and stands in the center of the enclosure, facing the Midē´ post in the west. The members who hadn’t joined the procession but were waiting for it to arrive now take their seats again, and those who accompanied the candidate find their places as they wish. The officiating priests then begin the ceremony as outlined for the initiation into the first degree, after the candidate is handed over to the chief by the preceptor.
Sometimes the mother of one who had been so dedicated to the Midē´wiwin is taken into that society, particularly when the father is absent or dead.
Sometimes the mother of someone who had been so committed to the Midē´wiwin is brought into that society, especially when the father is missing or deceased.
INITIATION BY SUBSTITUTION.
It sometimes happens that a sick person can not be successfully treated by the Midē´, especially in the wig´iwam of the patient, when it becomes necessary for the latter to be carried to the Midē´wigân and the services of the society to be held. This course is particularly followed when the sick person or the family can furnish a fee equivalent to the gift required for initiation under ordinary circumstances.
It sometimes happens that a sick person can't be successfully treated by the Midē´, especially in the wig´iwam of the patient, when it's necessary for them to be taken to the Midē´wigân and receive the society's services. This approach is especially taken when the sick person or their family can provide a fee equivalent to the gift needed for initiation under normal circumstances.
It is believed, under such conditions, that the evil man´idōs can be expelled from the body only in the sacred structure, at which place alone the presence of Ki´tshi Man´idō may be felt, after invocation, and in return for his aid in prolonging the life of the patient the latter promises his future existence to be devoted to the practice and teachings of the Midē´wiwin. Before proceeding further, however, it is necessary to describe the method pursued by the Midē´ priest.
It is believed that, under these conditions, the evil manidō can only be expelled from the body in the sacred space, where the presence of Ki'tshi Manidō can be felt after invocation. In exchange for his help in prolonging the patient’s life, the patient promises to dedicate their future existence to the practices and teachings of the Midēwiwin. However, before going any further, it’s important to explain the method used by the Midē priest.
The first administrations may consist of mashki´kiwabūn´, or medicine broth, this being the prescription of the Midē´ in the capacity of mashki´kike´winĭ´nĭ, or herbalist, during which medication he resorts to incantation and exorcism, accompanying his song by liberal use of the rattle. As an illustration of the songs used at this period of the illness, the following is presented, the mnemonic characters being reproduced on Pl. XVI, C. The singing is monotonous and doleful, though at times it becomes animated and discordant.
The first treatments might include mashki´kiwabūn´, or medicine broth, which is the remedy given by the Midē´ acting as a mashki´kike´winĭ´nĭ, or herbalist. During this medication, they use incantations and exorcisms, accompanying their song with a generous use of the rattle. To illustrate the songs used during this stage of the illness, the following is provided, with the mnemonic characters appearing on Pl. XVI, C. The singing is monotonous and mournful, though it occasionally shifts to being lively and discordant.
Plate XVI.c. Mnemonic Song.
Plate XVI.c. Memory Song.
![]() |
In´-do-nâ-gât in-da´-kwo-nan In-do-nâ-gât in-da´-kwo-nan That which I live upon has been put on this dish by the spirit. The food I eat has been placed on this plate by a higher power. Ki´tshi Man´idō provides the speaker with the necessary food for the maintenance of life. The dish, or feast, is shown by the concentric rings, the spirit’s arm is just below it. Ki´tshi Man´idō gives the speaker the essential food needed to sustain life. The dish, or feast, is represented by the concentric rings, with the spirit’s arm just below it. |
![]() |
Mo´-ki-yan tshik´-ko-min´. Mo'ki-yan is tasty. I bring life to the people. I bring life to the people. The speaker, as the impersonator of the sacred Otter, brings life. The Otter is just emerging from the surface of the water, as he emerged from the great salt sea before the Âni´shi-nâ´beg, after having been instructed by Mi´nabō´zho to carry life to them. The speaker, acting as the impersonator of the sacred Otter, brings life. The Otter is just coming up from the surface of the water, just like it did when it emerged from the great salt sea before the Âni´shi-nâ´beg, after being instructed by Mi´nabō´zho to bring life to them. |
![]() |
Ni´-no-mūn´ mash-ki´-ki Ni'no-mun mash-ki-ki I can also take medicine from the lodge, or the earth I can also get medicine from the lodge or from the earth. The Midē´’s arm is reaching down to extract magic remedies from the earth. The four spots indicate the remedies, while the square figure denotes a hole in the ground. The Midē's arm is reaching down to pull magic remedies from the earth. The four spots show where the remedies are located, while the square shape indicates a hole in the ground. |
![]() |
Rest. During this interval the Midē´’s thoughts dwell upon the sacred character of the work in which he is engaged. Rest. During this time, the Midē's thoughts focus on the sacred nature of the work he is doing. |
![]() |
Ni´-nin-dē´ in´-dai-yo´. Ni’nin-dē in-dai-yo. It is all in my heart, the life. It’s all in my heart, life. The concentric circles indicates the mī´gis, life, within the heart, the former showing radiating lines to denote its magic power. The concentric circles represent the mī´gis, life, within the heart, while the former shows radiating lines to signify its magical power. |
![]() |
M´bi-mo´-se-an-kĭnk´. M'bi-mo'-se-an-kĭnk'. The spirit saw me and sent me medicine from above. The spirit saw me and sent me healing from above. The figure is that of Ki´tshi Man´idō, who granted power to the speaker. The figure is that of Ki´tshi Man´idō, who gave power to the speaker. |
![]() |
Dōn´-de-na mi-tĭz´-kŭnk. Dōn'-de-na mi-tĭz'-kŭnk. It is also on the trees, that from which I take life. It’s also in the trees that I draw my life from. The tree bears “medicine” which the speaker has at his command, and is enabled to use. The tree produces "medicine" that the speaker can control and use. |
283 When the ordinary course of treatment fails to relieve the patient the fact is made known to the Midē´ priests and he is consequently taken to the Midē´wigân and laid upon blankets so that part of his body may rest against the sacred midē´ stone. Associate Midē´ then attend, in consultation, with the Midē´-in-chief, the other members present occupying seats around the walls of the structure.
283 When standard treatment doesn’t help the patient, the Midē´ priests are informed, and the patient is taken to the Midē´wigân and laid on blankets so that part of their body touches the sacred midē´ stone. Associate Midē´ then meet with the Midē´-in-chief to discuss, while the other members sit around the walls of the place.
The accompanying lecture is then addressed to the sick person, viz:
The accompanying lecture is then directed to the ill person, namely:
My ancestors taught me that we must always be respectful and kind to one another. It’s essential to understand and embrace each other’s differences while supporting the community, fostering connections, and protecting our shared home. We should strive to maintain harmony and work together for the common good.
The following is a free translation of the above:
The following is a free translation of the above:
The moment I mentioned to you has finally come, and you might find it essential to first take the sacred mī´gis. Who are you to come here seeking help? Sit across from me, where I can see and talk to you, and focus your attention on me. As you receive life, try not to let your thoughts linger on your current situation; instead, stand firm against falling into despair.
Now we are ready to put him to the test; now we are ready to start him on this journey.
The reference to borrowing a mī´gis signifies that the patient may have this mysterious power “shot into his body” where he lies upon the ground and before he has arrived at the place where candidates are properly initiated; this, because of his inability to walk round the inclosure.
The mention of borrowing a mī´gis indicates that the patient might have this mysterious power “shot into his body” while he lies on the ground, before reaching the place where candidates are properly initiated; this is due to his inability to walk around the enclosure.
The last sentence is spoken to the assisting Midē´. The following song is sung, the mnemonic characters pertaining thereto being reproduced on Pl. XVI, D.
The last sentence is said to the assisting Midē´. The following song is sung, with the associated mnemonic characters displayed on Pl. XVI, D.
Plate XVI.d. Mnemonic Song.
Plate XVI.d. Memory Song.
![]() |
O-da´-pi-nŭng´-mung oâ´-ki-wen´-dzhi man´-i-dō Oda'pinun' mung oak-iwen'dzhi mani-do We are going to take the sacred medicine out of the ground. We are going to take the sacred medicine from the ground. [The speaker refers to himself and the assistants as resorting to remedies adopted after consultation, the efficiency thereof depending upon their combined prayers. The arm is represented as reaching for a remedy which is surrounded by lines denoting soil.] [The speaker talks about himself and the assistants using remedies they've discussed, with their effectiveness relying on their united prayers. The arm is shown reaching for a solution that is surrounded by lines indicating soil.] |
![]() |
We-a´-ki man´-i-dō we-an-gwĭs´. We are gonna win. The ground is why I am a spirit, my son. The ground is why I’m a spirit, my son. The lower horizontal line is the earth, while the magic power which he possesses is designated by short vertical wavy lines which reach his body. The lower horizontal line represents the ground, while the magical energy he has is indicated by short vertical wavy lines that extend to his body. |
![]() |
Rest. Take a break. |
![]() |
Nish´-u-we-ni-mi´-qu nish´-u-we-ni-mi´-qu we´-gi ma´-ŏ-dzhig´. Nish'u-we-ni-mi'qu nish'u-we-ni-mi'qu we'gi ma'ŏ-dzhig. The spirits have pity; the spirits have pity on me. The spirits feel sorry for me; the spirits feel sorry for me. The Midē´ is supplicating the Midē´ spirits for aid in his wishes to cure the sick. The Midē' is asking the Midē' spirits for help in his desire to heal the sick. |
284
![]() |
Kish´-u-we-ni-mi´-qu ki´-shi´-gŭng don´-dzhi-wa´-wa-mĭk. Kish'uweni miqu kishigŭng donzhiwa wamĭk. The spirits have pity on me; from on high I see you. The spirits feel sorry for me; from up above, I can see you. The sky is shown by the upper curved lines, beneath which the Midē´ is raising his arm in supplication. The sky is represented by the upper curved lines, below which the Midē' is raising his arm in prayer. |
![]() |
Man´-i-dō´-â ni´-o. Mani-Dōni-O. My body is a spirit. My body is a vibe. The Midē´ likens himself to the Bear Man´idō, the magic powers of which are shown by the lines across the body and short strokes upon the back. The Midē likens himself to the Bear Manidō, whose magical powers are indicated by the lines across the body and short strokes on the back. |
![]() |
Pi-ne´-si-wi-ân´ ke-ke´-u-wi-an´. Pi-ne´-si-wi-ân´ ke-ke´-u-wi-an´. A little bird I am: I am the hawk. A little bird I am: I am the hawk. Like the thunderer, he penetrates the sky in search of power and influence. Like the thunder, he breaks through the sky looking for power and influence. |
![]() |
Man´-i-dō´ nu´-tu wa´-kan. Manido nu to wakan. Let us hear the spirit. Let’s hear the spirit. The Ki´tshi Man´idō is believed to make known his presence, and all are enjoined to listen for such intimation. The Ki’tshi Manidō is thought to reveal his presence, and everyone is urged to pay attention for such signs. |
![]() |
Ka´-nun-ta´-wa man´-i-dō´ wi´-da-ku-ē´, hē´, ki´-a-ha-mī´. Ka' nun-ta' wa man' i-dō' wi' da-ku-ē', hey, ki' a-ha-mī'. You might hear that he is a spirit. You might hear that he's a spirit. The line on the top of the head signifies the person to be a superior being. The line on the top of the head indicates that the person is a superior being. |
![]() |
Ka´-ke-na gus-sâ´ o´-mi-si´-nī´ na´-ēn. Ka´-ke-na gus-sâ´ o´-mi-si´-nī´ na´-ēn. I am afraid of all, that is why I am in trouble. I’m afraid of everything, and that’s why I’m in trouble. The Midē´ fears that life can not be prolonged because the evil man´idōs do not appear to leave the body of the sick person. The arm is shown reaching for mī´gis, or life, the strength of the speaker’s, having himself received it four times, does not appear to be of any avail. The Midē’ fears that life cannot be extended because the evil manidōs seem to be unwilling to leave the body of the sick person. The arm is depicted reaching for mīgis, or life, but the speaker’s own strength, having received it four times, doesn’t seem to help at all. |
Should the patient continue to show decided symptoms of increased illness, the singing or the use of the rattle is continued until life is extinct, and no other ceremony is attempted; but if he is no worse after the preliminary course of treatment, or shows any improvement, the first attendant Midē´ changes his songs to those of a more boastful character. The first of these is as follows, chanted repeatedly and in a monotonous manner, viz:
Should the patient continue to show clear signs of worsening illness, the singing or use of the rattle continues until death occurs, and no other ceremony is performed; however, if there is no deterioration after the initial treatment or if there is any improvement, the main caregiver Midē changes his songs to ones that are more boastful. The first of these goes as follows, chanted repeatedly and in a monotonous way, namely:
A´-si-na´-bi-hu´-ya, | a-si´-na´-b-hu´-ya. |
I have changed my looks, | I have changed my looks. |
[This refers to the appearance of the Midē´ stone which it is believed absorbs some of the disease and assumes a change of color.]
[This refers to the look of the Midē´ stone, which is thought to absorb some of the illness and change color.]
Nish´-a-we´nī´, hū´, gū´, mi-dē´, wug, a-ne´-ma-bī´-tshig.
Nish’awe’nī, hū, gū, mi-dē, wug, a-ne-ma-bī-tshig.
The Midē´ have pity on me, those who are sitting around, and those who are sitting from us.
The Midē’ feel sorry for me, those who are nearby, and those who are sitting with us.
[The last line refers to those Midē´ who are sitting, though absent from the Midē´wigân.]
[The last line refers to those Midē' who are seated, although they are not present in the Midē'wigân.]
A-si-na-bi-hŭ-i-ya, A-si-na-bi-hŭ-i-ya, A-si-na-bi-hŭ-i-ya hĭa,
A-si-na-bi-hŭ-i-ya, A-si-na-bi-hŭ-i-ya, A-si-na-bi-hŭ-i-ya hĭa,
A-si-na-bi-hŭ-i-ya, A-si-na-bi-hŭ-i-ya hĭa.
A-si-na-bi-hŭ-i-ya, A-si-na-bi-hŭ-i-ya hĭa.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
Nish-a-wi-in-hu gū, O-ko-mi-dē-wog hē, A-ne-ma-bi-tshig hē,
Nish-a-wi-in-hu gū, O-ko-mi-dē-wog hē, A-ne-ma-bi-tshig hē,
Nishawiinhu gū, O-ko-mi-dē-wog hē,
Nishawiinhu gū, O-ko-mi-dē-wog hē,
Nish-a-wi-ni-hu gŭ O-ko-mi-dē-wog hē.
Nish-a-wi-ni-hu gŭ O-ko-mi-dē-wog hē.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
As the patient continues to improve the song of the Midē´ becomes more expressive of his confidence in his own abilities and importance.
As the patient keeps getting better, the song of the Midē' becomes more expressive of his confidence in his own skills and significance.
The following is an example in illustration, viz:
The following is an example for illustration, namely:
Ni-ne´-ta-we-hē´ wa-wâ´-bâ-ma´ man´-i-dō, wa-wâ´-bâ-ma´. |
[I am the only one who sees the spirit, who sees the spirit.] |
Nin´-da-nī-wĭ-a, | nin´-da-nī´-wĭ-a. |
I surpass him, | I surpass him. |
[The speaker overcomes the malevolent man´idō and causes him to take flight.]
[The speaker defeats the evil spirit and makes him run away.]
Na´-sa-ni-nēn´-di-yan a-we´-si-yŏk´ no-gwe´-no´-wŏk.
Na'saninen diyan awesiyok no-gwenowok.
See how I act, beasts I shoot on the wing.
See how I act; I shoot flying animals.
[The signification of this is, that he “shoots at them as they fly,” referring to the man´idōs as they escape from the body.]
[The meaning of this is that he “shoots at them as they fly,” referring to the manidōs as they flee from the body.]
The following is the musical notation of the above, viz:
The following is the musical notation of the above, namely:
Ni-ne-ta-we-hē wa-wâ´bâ-ma man-i-dō wa-wâ´-bâ-ma man-i-dō,
Ni-ne-ta-we-hē wa-wâ'bâ-ma man-i-dō wa-wâ'-bâ-ma man-i-dō,
Ni-ne-ta-we-hē wa-wâ´-bâ-ma man-i-dō, wa-wâ´-bâ-ma man-i-dō.
Ni-ne-ta-we-hē wa-wâ´-bâ-ma man-i-dō, wa-wâ´-bâ-ma man-i-dō.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
Hen-ta-ne-we-a, Hen-ta-ne-we-a, Hen-ta-ne-we-a, Hen-ta-ne-we-a,
Hen-ta-ne-we-a, Hen-ta-ne-we-a, Hen-ta-ne-we-a, Hen-ta-ne-we-a,
Hen-ta-ne-we-a, Hen-ta-ne-we-a, Hen-ta-ne-we-a, Hen-ta-ne-we-a,
Hen-ta-ne-we-a, Hen-ta-ne-we-a, Hen-ta-ne-we-a, Hen-ta-ne-we-a,
Hen-ta-ne-we-a, Hen-ta-ne-we-a, Hen-ta-ne-we-a, hō.
Hen-ta-ne-we-a, Hen-ta-ne-we-a, Hen-ta-ne-we-a, hō.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
Na-sa-ni-nen-di-ya, Na-sa-ni-nen-di-ya, Na-sa-ni-nen-di-ya,
Na-sa-ni-nen-di-ya, Na-sa-ni-nen-di-ya, Na-sa-ni-nen-di-ya,
Awasiyōk, Nogwenowōk.
Awasiyōk, Nogwenowōk.
MIDI files: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ (default)
If the patient becomes strong enough to walk round the inclosure he is led to the western end and seated upon a blanket, where he is initiated. If not, the mī´gis is “shot into his body” as he reclines against the sacred stone, after which a substitute is selected from among the Midē´ present, who takes his place and goes through the remainder of the initiation for him. Before proceeding upon either course, however, the chief attendant Midē´ announces his readiness in the following manner: Mi´-o-shi´-gwa, wi-kwod´-gi-o-wŏg´ ga-mâ´-dzhi-a-ka´-dŭng bi-mâ-di-si-wĭn´—“Now we are ready to escape from this and to begin to watch life.” This signifies his desire to escape from his present procedure and to advance to another course of action, to the exercise of the power of giving life by transferring the sacred mī´gis.
If the patient becomes strong enough to walk around the enclosure, he’s taken to the western end and seated on a blanket, where he goes through the initiation. If he isn’t strong enough, the mī´gis is “shot into his body” while he leans against the sacred stone, after which a substitute is chosen from among the Midē´ present, who then takes his place and completes the rest of the initiation for him. Before proceeding with either option, however, the chief attendant Midē´ announces his readiness in the following way: Mi´-o-shi´-gwa, wi-kwod´-gi-o-wŏg´ ga-mâ´-dzhi-a-ka´-dŭng bi-mâ-di-si-wĭn´—“Now we are ready to escape from this and to begin to watch life.” This indicates his wish to move away from the current process and advance to the next steps of exercising the power to give life by transferring the sacred mī´gis.
The remainder of the ceremony is then conducted as in the manner described as pertains to the first degree of the Midē´wiwin.
The rest of the ceremony is carried out just like it is done for the first degree of the Midē'wiwin.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES.
PICTOGRAPHY.
Before concluding, it may be of interest to refer in some detail to several subjects mentioned in the preceding pages. The mnemonic songs are in nearly every instance incised upon birch bark by means of a sharp-pointed piece of bone or a nail. The inner surface of the bark is generally selected because it is softer than the reverse. Bark for such purposes is peeled from the trunk during the spring months. On the right hand upper corner of Pl. XIX is reproduced a portion 287 of a mnemonic song showing characters as thus drawn. The specimen was obtained at White Earth, and the entire song is presented on Pl. XVI, C. A piece of bark obtained at Red Lake, and known to have been incised more than seventy years ago, is shown on the right lower corner of Pl. XIX. The drawings are upon the outer surface and are remarkably deep and distinct. The left hand specimen is from the last named locality, and of the same period, and presents pictographs drawn upon the inner surface.
Before wrapping up, it might be interesting to go into detail about several topics mentioned in the earlier pages. The mnemonic songs are usually carved into birch bark using a sharp bone or nail. The inner side of the bark is typically chosen because it's softer than the outer side. The bark for this purpose is peeled from the trunk during the spring months. In the upper right corner of Pl. XIX is a portion 287 of a mnemonic song showing the characters as they are drawn. This specimen was collected at White Earth, and the entire song is presented on Pl. XVI, C. A piece of bark from Red Lake, known to have been carved over seventy years ago, is displayed in the lower right corner of Pl. XIX. The drawings are on the outer surface and are remarkably deep and clear. The specimen on the left is from the same place and time period and features pictographs drawn on the inner surface.
Plate XIX. Sacred Birch Bark Records.
Plate XIX. Sacred Birch Bark Records.
In a majority of songs the characters are drawn so as to be read from left to right, in some from right to left, and occasionally one is found to combine both styles, being truly boustrophic. Specimens have been obtained upon which the characters were drawn around and near the margin of an oblong piece of bark, thus appearing in the form of an irregular circle.
In most songs, the characters are arranged to be read from left to right, in some from right to left, and sometimes you'll find one that blends both styles, being truly boustrophic. Examples have been found where the characters are drawn around and close to the edge of a rectangular piece of bark, creating an irregular circle.
The pictographic delineation of ideas is found to exist chiefly among the shamans, hunters, and travelers of the Ojibwa, and there does not appear to be a recognized system by which the work of any one person is fully intelligible to another. A record may be recognized as pertaining to the Midē´ ceremonies, as a song used when hunting plants, etc.; but it would be impossible for one totally unfamiliar with the record to state positively whether the initial character was at the left or the right hand. The figures are more than simply mnemonic; they are ideographic, and frequently possess additional interest from the fact that several ideas are expressed in combination. Col. Garrick Mallery, U.S. Army, in a paper entitled “Recently Discovered Algonkian Pictographs,” read before the American Association for the Advancement of Science, at Cleveland, 1888, expressed this fact in the following words:
The pictorial representation of ideas mainly exists among the shamans, hunters, and travelers of the Ojibwa. There doesn't seem to be a clear system that makes one person's work fully understandable to another. A record might be recognized as related to the Midē´ ceremonies or as a song used for gathering plants, but someone who is completely unfamiliar with the record wouldn't be able to confidently say whether the initial character was on the left or the right. The figures serve more than just as memory aids; they are ideographic and often convey multiple ideas at once. Col. Garrick Mallery, U.S. Army, highlighted this in a paper titled “Recently Discovered Algonkian Pictographs,” presented at the American Association for the Advancement of Science in Cleveland, 1888, where he stated:
It’s important to explain how to use the Midē´ and other bark records from the Ojibwa, as well as those from other Algonkian tribes mentioned in this paper. The comparison made by Dr. E. B. Tylor between these pictorial alphabets and teaching children phrases like “A was an archer” isn't quite right here. The symbols are not just memory aids; they are also ideographic and descriptive. They aren’t solely created to express or memorize the subject; they have evolved from it. For those familiar with secret societies, a good analogy for the charts or rolls is the tressel board of the Masonic order. This board is printed, published, and displayed publicly without revealing any of the order's secrets, yet it is both meaningful and helpful for members to remember the degrees and details of their ceremonies.
A more general way to explain what’s called symbolism is by suggesting that the charts of the order or the song of a myth should be compared to the popular illustrated poems and songs recently published in Harper’s Magazine, like “Sally in our Alley,” where each stanza has a fitting illustration. Now, imagine if the text were lost forever, and the ability to read gone, but the illustrations remained, along with the memories of the ballad for some people. The illustrations, kept in order, would always indicate the order of the stanzas and the general subject of each stanza, which would serve as a reminder of the words. This is similar to what the birch bark rolls do for the initiated Ojibwa, and what Schoolcraft tried to demonstrate in some instances, but true understanding requires that all the words of the actual songs and initiation charges be recorded and translated. This means not only extensive linguistic study but also uncovering all the mysteries. In other cases, it’s necessary to literate the aboriginal language of the non-esoteric songs and stories and translate them to understand the methods by which they are memorized instead of symbolized. Still, long-term use has led to some level of ideography and symbolism.
Plate XX. Sacred Bark Scroll And Contents.
Plate XX. Sacred Bark Scroll and Contents.
On Pl. XX are presented illustrations of several articles found in a Midē´ sack which had been delivered to the Catholic priest at Red Lake over seventy years ago, when the owner professed Christianity and forever renounced (at least verbally) his pagan profession. The information given below was obtained from Midē´ priests at the above locality. They are possessed of like articles, being members of the same society to which the late owners of the relics belonged. The first is a birch-bark roll, the ends of which were slit into short strips, so as to curl in toward the middle to prevent the escaping of the contents. The upper figure is that of the Thunder god, with waving lines extending forward from the eyes, denoting the power of peering into futurity. This character has suggested to several Midē´ priests that the owner might have been a Midē´-Jĕs´sakkīd´. This belief is supported by the actual practice pursued by this class of priests when marking their personal effects. The lower figure is that of a buffalo, as is apparent from the presence of the hump. Curiously enough both eyes are drawn upon one side of the head, a practice not often followed by Indian artists.
On Pl. XX are illustrations of several items found in a Midē´ sack that was given to the Catholic priest at Red Lake over seventy years ago, when the owner embraced Christianity and verbally renounced his pagan beliefs. The information provided below was obtained from Midē´ priests in that area. They have similar items, as they are part of the same society to which the former owner of the relics belonged. The first item is a birch-bark roll, with the ends cut into short strips that curl in toward the center to keep the contents from falling out. The upper figure represents the Thunder god, with wavy lines extending forward from the eyes, indicating the ability to see into the future. This has led several Midē´ priests to suggest that the owner might have been a Midē´-Jĕs´sakkīd´. This belief is reinforced by the practices of this group of priests when marking their personal belongings. The lower figure depicts a buffalo, as indicated by the hump. Interestingly, both eyes are drawn on one side of the head, which is not a common practice among Indian artists.
The upper of the four small figures is a small package, folded, consisting of the inner sheet of birch-bark and resembling paper both in consistence and color. Upon the upper fold is the outline of the Thunder bird. The next two objects represent small boxes made of pine wood, painted or stained red and black. They were empty when received, but were no doubt used to hold sacred objects. The lowest figure of the four consists of a bundle of three small bags of cotton wrapped with a strip of blue cloth. The bags contain, respectively, love powder, hunter’s medicine—in this instance red ocher and powdered arbor vitæ leaves—and another powder of a brownish color, with which is mixed a small quantity of ground medicinal plants.
The top of the four small figures is a little package, folded, made from birch bark and looking like paper in both texture and color. On the upper fold is the outline of the Thunderbird. The next two items are small boxes made of pine, painted or stained in red and black. They were empty when received, but they were probably used to hold sacred objects. The bottom figure of the four is a bundle of three small cotton bags wrapped in a strip of blue cloth. The bags contain, respectively, love powder, hunter’s medicine—in this case, red ocher and powdered arbor vitae leaves—and another powder that is brownish, mixed with a small amount of ground medicinal plants.
![]() |
Plate XXI. Midē´ Relics From Leech Lake. |
The roll of birch-bark containing these relics inclosed also the skin of a small rodent (Spermophilus sp.?) but in a torn and moth-eaten condition. This was used by the owner for purposes unknown to those who were consulted upon the subject. It is frequently, if not generally, impossible to ascertain the use of most of the fetiches and other sacred objects contained in Midē´ sacks of unknown ownership, as each priest adopts his own line of practice, based upon a variety of reasons, chiefly the nature of his fasting dreams.
The roll of birch bark holding these relics also included the skin of a small rodent (Spermophilus sp.?) but it was in a torn and moth-eaten state. The owner used it for unknown reasons, even to those who were asked about it. It's often, if not usually, impossible to figure out the purpose of most of the fetishes and other sacred items found in Midē´ sacks of unknown ownership, as each priest has his own practices based on various reasons, mainly the nature of his fasting dreams.
Fancy sometimes leads an individual to prepare medicine sticks that are of curious shape or bear designs of odd form copied after 289 something of European origin, as exemplified in the specimen illustrated on. Pl. XXI, Nos. 1 and 2, showing both the obverse and reverse. The specimen is made of ash wood and measures about ten inches in length. On the obverse side, besides the figures of man´-idōs, such as the Thunder bird, the serpent, and the tortoise, there is the outline of the sun, spots copied from playing cards, etc.; upon the reverse appear two spread hands, a bird, and a building, from the top of which floats the American flag. This specimen was found among the effects of a Midē´ who died at Leech Lake, Minnesota, a few years ago, together with effigies and other relics already mentioned in another part of this paper.
Sometimes, creativity leads someone to create medicine sticks that have unusual shapes or designs inspired by something European. This is shown in the example illustrated on Pl. XXI, Nos. 1 and 2, which display both the front and back. The stick is made of ash wood and is about ten inches long. On the front side, in addition to images of maní-dōs like the Thunderbird, the serpent, and the tortoise, there is an outline of the sun, spots taken from playing cards, etc.; on the back, there are two open hands, a bird, and a building with the American flag waving from the top. This stick was found among the belongings of a Midē who died at Leech Lake, Minnesota, a few years ago, along with effigies and other relics mentioned elsewhere in this paper.
MUSIC.
In addition to the examples of Indian music that have been given, especially the songs of shamans, it may be of interest to add a few remarks concerning the several varieties of songs or chants. Songs employed as an accompaniment to dances are known to almost all the members of the tribe, so that their rendition is nearly always the same. Such songs are not used in connection with mnemonic characters, as there are, in most instances, no words or phrases recited, but simply a continued repetition of meaningless words or syllables. The notes are thus rhythmically accentuated, often accompanied by beats upon the drum and the steps of the dancers.
In addition to the examples of Indian music that have been provided, particularly the songs of shamans, it might be worth mentioning a few points about the different types of songs or chants. Songs used during dances are known by almost everyone in the tribe, so their performance is usually consistent. These songs aren't linked to memory aids since, in most cases, there are no words or phrases sung; instead, they usually consist of a continuous repetition of nonsensical words or syllables. The notes are rhythmically emphasized, often supported by drumming and the dancers' movements.
An example of another variety of songs, or rather chants, is presented in connection with the reception of the candidate by the Midē´ priest upon his entrance into the Midē´wigân of the first degree. In this instance words are chanted, but the musical rendition differs with the individual, each Midē´ chanting notes of his own, according to his choice or musical ability. There is no set formula, and such songs, even if taught to others, are soon distorted by being sung according to the taste or ability of the singer. The musical rendering of the words and phrases relating to the signification of mnemonic characters depends upon the ability and inspired condition of the singer; and as each Midē´ priest usually invents and prepares his own songs, whether for ceremonial purposes, medicine hunting, exorcism, or any other use, he may frequently be unable to sing them twice in exactly the same manner. Love songs and war songs, being of general use, are always sung in the same style of notation.
An example of a different type of songs, or rather chants, is presented during the reception of a candidate by the Midē´ priest when they enter the Midē´wigân of the first degree. In this case, words are chanted, but the musical style varies with each individual, as each Midē´ sings their own notes based on their preferences or musical skill. There is no fixed formula, and even if these songs are taught to others, they often get changed as they are sung according to the singer's taste or ability. The musical expression of the words and phrases related to the meaning of mnemonic characters relies on the singer's skill and inspirational state; since each Midē´ priest typically creates and prepares their own songs for ceremonial purposes, medicine hunting, exorcism, or other uses, they may often find it hard to perform them exactly the same way twice. Love songs and war songs, being commonly used, are always sung in the same style of notation.
The emotions are fully expressed in the musical rendering of the several classes of songs, which are, with few exceptions, in a minor key. Dancing and war songs are always in quick time, the latter frequently becoming extraordinarily animated and boisterous as the participants become more and more excited.
The emotions are fully conveyed in the musical interpretation of the different types of songs, which, with a few exceptions, are mostly in a minor key. Dancing and war songs are always upbeat, with the war songs often becoming extremely lively and spirited as the participants get more and more pumped up.
Midē´ and other like songs are always more or less monotonous, though they are sometimes rather impressive, especially if delivered 290 by one sufficiently emotional and possessed of a good voice. Some of the Midē´ priests employ few notes, not exceeding a range of five, for all songs, while others frequently cover the octave, terminating with a final note lower still.
Midē´ and similar songs tend to be pretty monotonous, but they can be quite powerful, especially when sung by someone who is emotional and has a strong voice. Some Midē´ priests use a limited range of just five notes for all their songs, while others often span the entire octave, ending on a note even lower. 290
The statement has been made that one Midē´ is unable either to recite or sing the proper phrase pertaining to the mnemonic characters of a song belonging to another Midē´ unless specially instructed. The representation of an object may refer to a variety of ideas of a similar, though not identical, character. The picture of a bear may signify the Bear man´idō as one of the guardians of the society; it may pertain to the fact that the singer impersonates that man´idō; exorcism of the malevolent bear spirit may be thus claimed; or it may relate to the desired capture of the animal, as when drawn to insure success for the hunter. An Indian is slow to acquire the exact phraseology, which is always sung or chanted, of mnemonic songs recited to him by a Midē´ preceptor.
It's been said that one Midē´ cannot recite or sing the right phrase related to the mnemonic characters of a song from another Midē´ unless they are specifically taught. The representation of an object can refer to various ideas that are similar but not identical. For example, the image of a bear might symbolize the Bear man´idō, one of the guardians of the society; it could indicate that the singer embodies that man´idō; it might involve the exorcism of a malevolent bear spirit; or it could be related to the wish to capture the animal, as in drawing it to ensure success for the hunter. A person from the tribe takes time to fully learn the exact wording, which is always sung or chanted, of the mnemonic songs taught to them by a Midē´ teacher.
An exact reproduction is implicitly believed to be necessary, as otherwise the value of the formula would be impaired, or perhaps even totally destroyed. It frequently happens, therefore, that although an Indian candidate for admission into the Mīdē´wiwin may already have prepared songs in imitation of those from which he was instructed, he may either as yet be unable to sing perfectly the phrases relating thereto, or decline to do so because of a want of confidence. Under such circumstances the interpretation of a record is far from satisfactory, each character being explained simply objectively, the true import being intentionally or unavoidably omitted. An Ojibwa named “Little Frenchman,” living at Red Lake, had received almost continuous instruction for three or four years, and although he was a willing and valuable assistant in other matters pertaining to the subject under consideration, he was not sufficiently familiar with some of his preceptor’s songs to fully explain them. A few examples of such mnemonic songs are presented in illustration, and for comparison with such as have already been recorded. In each instance the Indian’s interpretation of the character is given first, the notes in brackets being supplied in further explanation. Pl. XXII, A, is reproduced from a birch-bark song; the incised lines are sharp and clear, while the drawing in general is of a superior character. The record is drawn so as to be read from right to left.
An exact copy is generally seen as essential; otherwise, the value of the formula might be diminished or even completely lost. It often happens that even if an Indian candidate for admission into the Mīdē´wiwin has prepared songs modeled after those he learned, he might not yet be able to sing the related phrases perfectly or might avoid doing so due to a lack of confidence. In such cases, the interpretation of a record is far from satisfactory, with each character being explained in a purely objective way, leaving out the true meaning either intentionally or inadvertently. An Ojibwa man named “Little Frenchman,” who lived at Red Lake, had received almost continuous training for three or four years, and while he was a willing and valuable helper in other areas related to the topic being discussed, he wasn't fully familiar enough with some of his teacher’s songs to explain them completely. A few examples of these mnemonic songs are presented for illustration and comparison with those that have already been documented. In each case, the Indian’s interpretation of the character is provided first, with notes in brackets added for further clarification. Pl. XXII, A, is reproduced from a birch-bark song; the incised lines are sharp and clear, and the overall drawing is of high quality. The record is designed to be read from right to left.
Plate XXII.a. Mnemonic Song.
Plate XXII.a. Memory Aid Song.
![]() |
From whence I sit. From where I sit. [The singer is seated, as the lines indicate contact with the surface beneath, though the latter is not shown. The short line extending from the mouth indicates voice, and probably signifies, in this instance, singing.] [The singer is sitting, as the lines show contact with the surface below, even though that surface isn't visible. The short line coming from the mouth represents the voice, and likely indicates, in this case, singing.] |
291
![]() |
The big tree in the center of the earth. The big tree in the middle of the earth. [It is not known whether or not this relates to the first destruction of the earth, when Mi´nabō´zho escaped by climbing a tree which continued to grow and to protrude above the surface of the flood. One Midē´ thought it related to a particular medicinal tree which was held in estimation beyond all others, and thus represented as the chief of the earth.] [It’s unclear if this connects to the first destruction of the earth when Mi’nabō’zho escaped by climbing a tree that kept growing above the floodwaters. One Midē thought it referred to a special medicinal tree that was highly valued above all others, making it a symbol of the earth.] |
![]() |
I will float down the fast running stream. I will drift down the fast-flowing river. [Strangely enough, progress by water is here designated by footprints instead of using the outline of a canoe. The etymology of the Ojibwa word used in this connection may suggest footprints, as in the Delaware language one word for river signifies “water road,” when in accordance therewith “footprints” would be in perfect harmony with the general idea.] [Strangely enough, progress by water is referred to by footprints instead of using the shape of a canoe. The origin of the Ojibwa word used in this context may imply footprints, since in the Delaware language, one word for river means “water road,” which aligns with the idea that “footprints” fit perfectly with the overall concept.] |
![]() |
The place that is feared I inhabit, the swift-running stream I inhabit. The place I live in that brings fear, the fast-flowing stream I call home. [The circular line above the Midē´ denotes obscurity, i.e., he is hidden from view and represents himself as powerful and terrible to his enemies as the water monster.] [The circular line above the Midē´ indicates obscurity, meaning he is hidden from sight and presents himself as powerful and fearsome to his enemies like a water monster.] |
![]() |
You who speak to me. You who talk to me. |
![]() |
I have long horns. I have large horns. [The Midē´ likens himself to the water monster, one of the malevolent serpent man´idōs who antagonize all good, as beliefs and practices of the Midē´wiwin.] [The Midē´ compares himself to the water monster, one of the evil serpent man´idōs who oppose all that is good, as reflected in the beliefs and practices of the Midē´wiwin.] |
![]() |
A rest or pause. A break. |
![]() |
I, seeing, follow your example. I'm following your example. |
![]() |
You see my body, you see my body, you see my nails are worn off in grasping the stone. You see my body, you see my body, you see my nails are worn down from gripping the stone. [The Bear man´idō is represented as the type now assumed by the Midē´. He has a stone within his grasp, from which magic remedies are extracted.] [The Bear manidō is shown as the type now taken on by the Midē. He holds a stone in his hand, from which magical remedies are drawn.] |
292
![]() |
You, to whom I am speaking. You, the person I'm talking to. [A powerful Man´idō´, the panther, is in an inclosure and to him the Midē´ addresses his request.] [A powerful Manídō, the panther, is in a cage, and the Midē addresses him with his request.] |
![]() |
I am swimming—floating—down smoothly. I am swimming—floating—down effortlessly. [The two pairs of serpentine lines indicate the river banks, while the character between them is the Otter, here personated by the Midē´.] [The two sets of wavy lines represent the riverbanks, and the figure in between is the Otter, which is personified here by the Midē´.] |
![]() |
Bars denoting a pause. Pause markers. |
![]() |
I have finished my drum. I’ve finished my drum. [The Midē´ is shown holding a Midē´ drum which he is making for use in a ceremony.] [The Midē' is depicted holding a Midē' drum that he is creating for a ceremony.] |
![]() |
My body is like unto you. My body is like yours. [The mī´gis shell, the symbol of purity and the Midē´wiwin.] [The mī´gis shell, representing purity and the Midē´wiwin.] |
![]() |
Hear me, you who are talking to me! Hear me, you who are speaking with me! [The speaker extends his arms to the right and left indicating persons who are talking to him from their respective places. The lines denoting speech—or hearing—pass through the speaker’s head to exclaim as above.] [The speaker spreads his arms to the right and left, signaling people who are talking to him from their spots. The lines showing speech—or listening—flow through the speaker’s head to express as mentioned above.] |
![]() |
See what I am taking. Check out what I'm taking. [The Midē´ has pulled up a medicinal root. This denotes his possessing a wonderful medicine and appears in the order of an advertisement.] [The Midē' has pulled up a medicinal root. This shows that he has an incredible medicine and acts like a form of advertisement.] |
![]() |
See me, whose head is out of water. See me, with my head above water. |
On Pl. XXII, B, is presented an illustration reproduced from a piece of birch bark owned by the preceptor of “Little Frenchman,” of the import of which the latter was ignorant. His idea of the signification of the characters is based upon general information which he has received, and not upon any pertaining directly to the record. From general appearances the song seems to be a private 293 record pertaining to the Ghost Society, the means through which the recorder attained his first degree of the Midē´wiwin, as well as to his abilities, which appear to be boastfully referred to:
On Pl. XXII, B, there's an illustration taken from a piece of birch bark owned by the teacher of “Little Frenchman,” who was unaware of its significance. His understanding of the characters is based on general knowledge he's gathered, not on anything specifically related to the record. From what it looks like, the song seems to be a personal 293 record related to the Ghost Society, the means through which the recorder achieved his first degree of the Midē´wiwin, as well as to his abilities, which seem to be boastfully referenced:
Plate XXII.b. Mnemonic Song.
Plate XXII.b. Memory Aid Song.
![]() |
I am sitting with my pipe. I’m sitting here with my pipe. [Midē´ sitting, holding his pipe. He has been called upon to visit a patient, and the filled pipe is handed to him to smoke preparatory to his commencing the ceremony of exorcism.] [Midē´ sitting, holding his pipe. He has been asked to visit a patient, and the filled pipe is handed to him to smoke before he starts the exorcism ceremony.] |
![]() |
I employ the spirit, the spirit of the owl. I call upon the spirit, the spirit of the owl. [This evidently indicates the Owl Man´idō, which has been referred to in connection with the Red Lake Mide´ chart, Pl. III, No. 113. The Owl man´idō is there represented as passing from the Midē´wigân to the Dzhibai´ Midē´wigân, and the drawings in that record and in this are sufficiently alike to convey the idea that the maker of this song had obtained his suggestion from the old Midē´ chart.] [This clearly points to the Owl Manidō, which has been mentioned alongside the Red Lake Mide chart, Pl. III, No. 113. The Owl Manidō is depicted moving from the Midēwigān to the Dzhibai Midēwigān, and the illustrations in that record and this one are similar enough to suggest that the creator of this song drew inspiration from the old Midē chart.] |
![]() |
It stands, that which I am going after. It stands, that which I'm pursuing. [The Midē´, impersonating the Bear Man´idō, is seeking a medicinal tree of which he has knowledge, and certain parts of which he employs in his profession. The two footprints indicate the direction the animal is taking.] [The Midē, pretending to be the Bear Manidō, is searching for a medicinal tree he knows about, using certain parts of it in his practice. The two footprints show the direction the animal is heading.] |
![]() |
I, who fly. I, who soar. [This is the outline of a Thunder bird, who appears to grasp in his talons some medical plants.] [This is the outline of a Thunderbird, who seems to be holding some medicinal plants in its talons.] |
![]() |
Ki´-bi-nan´ pi-zan´. Ki´binan´ is what I use, it flies like an arrow. Ki'-bi-nan' pi-zan'. Ki'binan' is what I use; it flies like an arrow. [The Midē´’s arm is seen grasping a magic arrow, to symbolize the velocity of action of the remedy.] [The Midē's arm is shown holding a magic arrow, representing the quickness of the remedy's action.] |
![]() |
I am coming to the earth. I'm coming to Earth. [A Man´idō is represented upon a circle, and in the act of descending toward the earth, which is indicated by the horizontal line, upon which is an Indian habitation. The character to denote the sky is usually drawn as a curved line with the convexity above, but in this instance the ends of the lines are continued below, so as to unite and to complete the ring; the intention being, as suggested by several Midē´ priests, to denote great altitude above the earth, i.e., higher than the visible azure sky, which is designated by curved lines only.] [A Manidō is shown within a circle, descending toward the earth, which is indicated by the horizontal line that represents an Indian dwelling. The symbol for the sky is typically drawn as a curved line with the curve on top, but in this case, the ends of the lines extend downward, forming a complete ring. This design, as explained by several Midé priests, aims to signify a great height above the earth, that is, higher than the visible blue sky, which is represented only by the curved lines.] |
![]() |
I am feeling for it. I'm into it. [The Midē´ is reaching into holes in the earth in search of hidden medicines.] [The Midē´ is digging into the ground looking for hidden medicines.] |
![]() |
I am talking to it. I'm talking to it. [The Midē´ is communing with the medicine Man´idō´ with the Midē´ sack, which he holds in his hand. The voice lines extend from his mouth to the sack, which appears to be made of the skin of an Owl, as before noted in connection with the second character in this song.] [The Midē is interacting with the medicine Manidō, holding the Midē sack in his hand. Voice lines stretch from his mouth to the sack, which looks like it's made from an owl's skin, as mentioned earlier regarding the second character in this song.] |
294
![]() |
They are sitting round the interior in a row. They are sitting around the inside in a row. [This evidently signifies the Ghost Lodge, as the structure is drawn at right angles to that usually made to represent the Midē´wigân, and also because it seems to be reproduced from the Red Lake chart already alluded to and figured in Pl. III, No. 112. The spirits or shadows, as the dead are termed, are also indicated by crosses in like manner.] [This clearly indicates the Ghost Lodge, as the building is placed at right angles to what is typically shown for the Midē´wigân, and also because it appears to be based on the Red Lake chart mentioned earlier and illustrated in Pl. III, No. 112. The spirits or shadows, as the deceased are referred to, are also represented by crosses in the same way.] |
![]() |
You who are newly hung; you have reached half, and you are now full. You who are newly hanged; you have reached halfway, and you are now complete. [The allusion is to three phases of the moon, probably having reference to certain periods at which some important ceremonies or events are to occur.] [The reference is to three phases of the moon, likely relating to specific times when important ceremonies or events are supposed to happen.] |
![]() |
I am going for my dish. I’m going to get my food. [The speaker intimates that he is going to make a feast, the dish being shown at the top in the form of a circle; the footprints are directed toward, it and signify, by their shape, that he likens himself to the Bear man´idō, one of the guardians of the Midēwiwin.] [The speaker suggests that he is going to prepare a feast, with the dish shown at the top in a circular shape; the footprints are pointed towards it and indicate, by their form, that he compares himself to the Bear man'idō, one of the guardians of the Midēwiwin.] |
![]() |
I go through the medicine lodge. I walk through the medicine lodge. [The footprints within the parallel lines denote his having passed through an unnamed number of degrees. Although the structure is indicated as being erected like the Ghost Lodge, i.e., north and south, it is stated that Midēwiwin is intended. This appears to be an instance of the non-systematic manner of objective ideagraphic delineation.] [The footprints in the parallel lines show that he went through an unspecified number of degrees. Even though the structure is described as built like the Ghost Lodge, meaning it faces north and south, it is said that Midēwiwin is the focus. This seems to be an example of the unstructured way of depicting objective ideas.] |
![]() |
Let us commune with one another. Let’s connect. [The speaker is desirous of communing with his favorite man´idōs, with whom he considers himself on an equality, as is indicated by the anthropomorphic form of one between whom and himself the voice lines extend.] [The speaker wants to connect with his favorite man´idōs, whom he sees as his equals, as shown by the human-like form of one with whom he shares the voice lines.] |
On Figs. 36-39, are reproduced several series of pictographs from birch-bark songs found among the effects of a deceased Midē´ priest, at Leech Lake. Reference to other relics belonging to the same collection has been made in connection with effigies and beads employed by Midē´ in the endeavor to prove the genuineness of their religion and profession. These mnemonic songs were exhibited to many Midē´ priests from various portions of the Ojibwa country, in the hope of obtaining some satisfactory explanation regarding the import of the several characters; but, although they were pronounced to be “Grand Medicine,” no suggestions were offered beyond the merest repetition of the name of the object or what it probably was meant to represent. The direction of their order was mentioned, because in most instances the initial character furnishes the guide. Apart from this, the illustrations are of interest as exhibiting the superior character and cleverness of their execution.
On Figs. 36-39, there are several series of pictographs from birch-bark songs found among the belongings of a deceased Midē’ priest at Leech Lake. Other artifacts from the same collection have been mentioned in connection with effigies and beads used by Midē’ to demonstrate the authenticity of their religion and profession. These mnemonic songs were shown to many Midē’ priests from different parts of Ojibwa country, hoping to get some clear explanation regarding the meaning of the various characters; however, although they were called “Grand Medicine,” no suggestions were given beyond simply repeating the name of the object or what it might represent. The order in which they appear was noted because, in most cases, the initial character provides guidance. Besides this, the illustrations are interesting as they showcase the skill and creativity involved in their execution.
Fig. 36.—Leech Lake Midē´ song.
Fig. 36.—Leech Lake Midē’ song.
The initial character on Fig. 36 appears to be at the right hand upper corner, and represents the Bear Man´idō. The third figure is that of the Midē´wiwin, with four man´idōs within it, probably the guardians of the four degrees. The owner of the song was a Midē´ of the second degree, as was stated in connection with his Midē´wi-gwas or “medicine chart,” illustrated on Plate III, C.
The first character on Fig. 36 seems to be in the top right corner and represents the Bear Manidō. The third figure is of the Midēwiwin, containing four manidōs within it, likely the guardians of the four degrees. The song's owner was a Midē of the second degree, as noted in reference to his Midēwi-gwas or "medicine chart," shown on Plate III, C.
Fig. 37.—Leech Lake Midē´ song.
Fig. 37.—Leech Lake Mide' Song.
Fig. 37 represents what appears to be a mishkiki or medicine song, as is suggested by the figures of plants and roots. It is impossible to state absolutely at which side the initial character is placed, though it would appear that the human figure at the upper left hand corner would be more in accordance with the common custom.
Fig. 37 represents what looks like a mishkiki or medicine song, as indicated by the images of plants and roots. It's hard to say for sure where the initial character is positioned, but it seems that the human figure in the upper left corner would align better with the usual practice.
Fig. 38.—Leech Lake Midē´ song.
Leech Lake Midē' song.
Fig. 38 seems to pertain to hunting, and may have been recognized as a hunter’s chart. According to the belief of several Midē´, it is lead from right to left, the human figure indicating the direction according to the way in which the heads of the crane, bear, etc., are turned. The lower left hand figure of a man has five marks upon the breast, which probably indicate mī´gis spots, to denote the power of magic influence possessed by the recorder.
Fig. 38 appears to relate to hunting and might have been seen as a hunter’s chart. According to the beliefs of several Midē´, it is read from right to left, with the human figure showing the direction based on how the heads of the crane, bear, and others are oriented. The lower left figure of a man has five marks on the chest, which likely signify mī´gis spots, representing the magical influence held by the recorder.
Fig. 39.—Leech Lake Midē´ song.
Fig. 39.—Leech Lake Midē' song.
The characters on Fig. 39 are found to be arranged so as to read from the right hand upper corner toward the left, the next line continuing to the right and lastly again to the left, terminating with the figure of a Midē´ with the mī´gis upon his breast. This is interesting on account of the boustrophic system of delineating the figures, and also because such instances are rarely found to occur.
The characters on Fig. 39 are arranged to read from the upper right corner to the left, with the next line continuing to the right and then back to the left, ending with the figure of a Midē´ with the mī´gis on his chest. This is interesting due to the boustrophic system of depicting the figures, and also because such instances are rarely found.
DRESS AND ORNAMENTS.
While it is customary among many tribes of Indians to use as little clothing as possible when engaged in dancing, either of a social or ceremonial nature, the Ojibwa, on the contrary, vie with one another in the attempt to appear in the most costly and gaudy dress attainable. The Ojibwa Midē´ priests, take particular pride in their appearance when attending ceremonies of the Midē´ Society, and seldom fail to impress this fact upon visitors, as some of the Dakotan tribes, who have adopted similar medicine ceremonies after the custom of their Algonkian neighbors, are frequently without any clothing other than the breechcloth and moccasins, and the armlets and other attractive ornaments. This disregard of dress appears, to the Ojibwa, as a sacrilegious digression from the ancient usages, and it frequently excites severe comment.
While it's common for many Native American tribes to wear minimal clothing during social or ceremonial dances, the Ojibwa, on the other hand, compete to look as extravagant and colorful as possible. The Ojibwa Midē´ priests take great pride in their appearance at Midē´ Society ceremonies and often make sure visitors notice this. In contrast, some Dakotan tribes, who have adopted similar medicine ceremonies from their Algonkian neighbors, typically wear only breechcloths and moccasins, along with armlets and other decorative ornaments. This lack of clothing seems sacrilegious to the Ojibwa, and it often leads to harsh criticism.
Apart from facial ornamentation, of such design as may take the actor’s fancy, or in accordance with the degree of which the subject may be a member, the Midē´ priests wear shirts, trousers, and moccasins, the first two of which may consist of flannel or cloth and be either plain or ornamented with beads, while the latter are always of buckskin, or, what is more highly prized, moose skin, beaded or worked with colored porcupine quills.
Besides facial decorations, based on the actor's preferences or the subject's status, the Midē' priests wear shirts, pants, and moccasins. The shirts and pants can be made of flannel or cloth and can be either plain or decorated with beads. The moccasins are always made from buckskin or, even more valued, moose hide, adorned with beads or embellished with colored porcupine quills.
|
![]() |
|
Plate XXIII. Midē´ Dancing Garters. |
Immediately below each knee is tied a necessary item of an Ojibwa’s dress, a garter, which consists of a band of beads varying in different specimens from 2 to 4 inches in width, and from 18 to 20 inches in length, to each end of which strands of colored wool yarn, 2 feet long, are attached so as to admit of being passed around the leg and tied in a bow-knot in front. These garters are made by the women in such patterns as they may be able to design or elaborate. On Pl. XXIII are reproductions of parts of two patterns which are of more than ordinary interest, because of the symbolic signification of the colors and the primitive art design in one, and the substitution of colors and the introduction of modern designs in the other. The upper one consists of green, red, and white beads, the first two colors being in accord with those of one of the degree posts, while the white is symbolical of the mī´gis shell. In the lower illustration is found a substitution of color for the preceding, accounted for by the Midē´ informants, who explained that neither of the varieties of beads of the particular color desired could be obtained when wanted. The yellow beads are substituted for white, the blue for green, and the orange and pink for red. The design retains the lozenge form, though in a different arrangement, and the introduction of the blue border is adapted after patterns observed among their white neighbors. In the former is presented also what the Ojibwa term the groundwork or type of their original style of ornamentation, i.e., wavy or gently zigzag lines. Later art work consists 299 chiefly of curved lines, and this has gradually become modified through instruction from the Catholic sisters at various early mission establishments until now, when there has been brought about a common system of working upon cloth or velvet, in patterns, consisting of vines, leaves, and flowers, often exceedingly attractive though not aboriginal in the true sense of the word.
Right below each knee, there's an important part of an Ojibwa’s outfit—a garter made of a band of beads that varies from 2 to 4 inches wide and 18 to 20 inches long. Attached to each end are strands of colored wool yarn, 2 feet long, which can be wrapped around the leg and tied in a bow at the front. The women create these garters in various patterns based on their creativity. On Pl. XXIII are images of two patterns that are particularly interesting due to the symbolic meaning of the colors and the primitive art style in one, and the use of different colors along with modern designs in the other. The upper pattern features green, red, and white beads, with the first two colors matching one of the degree posts, while the white symbolizes the mī´gis shell. In the lower illustration, colors have been swapped out as explained by the Midē´ informants, who noted that the specific colored beads needed were unavailable at the time. Yellow beads replaced white, blue substituted for green, and orange and pink stood in for red. While the design still retains a lozenge shape, it has been rearranged, and a blue border has been added based on patterns seen among their white neighbors. The upper design also showcases what the Ojibwa refer to as the foundational or original style of their decoration, which features wavy or gently zigzag lines. Later artworks mainly consist of curved lines, which have gradually evolved due to influence from the Catholic sisters in early mission setups. Now, there's a shared method of creating patterns on cloth or velvet that features attractive designs of vines, leaves, and flowers, although these are not truly aboriginal in nature.
Bands of flannel or buckskin, handsomely beaded, are sometimes attached to the sides of the pantaloons, in imitation of an officer’s stripes, and around the bottom. Collars are also used, in addition to necklaces of claws, shells, or other objects.
Bands of flannel or buckskin, beautifully beaded, are sometimes attached to the sides of the pants, mimicking an officer’s stripes, and around the hem. Collars are also worn, along with necklaces made of claws, shells, or other items.
Armlets and bracelets are sometimes made of bands of beadwork, though brass wire or pieces of metal are preferred.
Armlets and bracelets are sometimes made of beadwork bands, although brass wire or metal pieces are usually preferred.
Bags made of cloth, beautifully ornamented or entirely covered with beads, are worn, supported at the side by means of a broad band or baldric passing over the opposite shoulder. The head is decorated with disks of metal and tufts of colored horse hair or moose hair and with eagle feathers to designate the particular exploits performed by the wearer.
Bags made of fabric, beautifully decorated or completely covered with beads, are worn, supported at the side by a wide strap or belt crossing over the opposite shoulder. The head is adorned with metal disks and tufts of colorful horse hair or moose hair, along with eagle feathers to represent the specific achievements of the wearer.
Few emblems of personal valor or exploits are now worn, as many of the representatives of the present generation have never been actively engaged in war, so that there is generally found only among the older members the practice of wearing upon the head eagle feathers bearing indications of significant markings or cuttings. A feather which has been split from the tip toward the middle denotes that the wearer was wounded by an arrow. A red spot as large as a silver dime painted upon a feather shows the wearer to have been wounded by a bullet. The privilege of wearing a feather tipped with red flannel or horse hair dyed red is recognized only when the wearer has killed an enemy, and when a great number have been killed in war the so-called war bonnet is worn, and may consist of a number of feathers exceeding the number of persons killed, the idea to be expressed being “a great number,” rather than a specific enumeration.
Few symbols of personal bravery or achievements are worn these days, as many people of the current generation have never actively participated in war. As a result, you mostly see older individuals wearing eagle feathers on their heads, often marked or cut in specific ways. A feather that has been split from the tip to the middle indicates that the wearer was hit by an arrow. A red spot the size of a silver dime painted on a feather shows that the wearer was shot. The privilege of wearing a feather tipped with red flannel or dyed red horsehair is only granted when the wearer has killed an enemy. When someone has killed a significant number of enemies in battle, they wear a so-called war bonnet, which can have more feathers than the number of enemies killed, signifying “a great number” rather than a specific count.
Although the Ojibwa admit that in former times they had many other specific ways of indicating various kinds of personal exploits, they now have little opportunity of gaining such distinction, and consequently the practice has fallen into desuetude.
Although the Ojibwa acknowledge that in the past they had many specific ways to recognize different personal achievements, they now have few chances to earn such distinction, and as a result, this practice has faded away.
FUTURE OF THE SOCIETY.
According to a treaty now being made between the United States Government and the Ojibwa Indians, the latter are to relinquish the several areas of land at present occupied by them and to remove to portions of the Red Lake and White Earth Reservations and take lands in severalty. By this treaty about 4,000,000 acres of land will be ceded to the Government, and the members of the various bands will become citizens of the United States, and thus their tribal ties 300 will be broken and their primitive customs and rites be abandoned.
According to a treaty currently being negotiated between the United States government and the Ojibwa Indians, the latter will give up the land they currently occupy and relocate to parts of the Red Lake and White Earth Reservations, taking individual plots of land. Through this treaty, about 4,000,000 acres of land will be transferred to the government, and the members of the various bands will become citizens of the United States, thus breaking their tribal connections and giving up their traditional customs and rituals. 300
The chief Midē´ priests, being aware of the momentous consequences of such a change in their habits, and foreseeing the impracticability of much longer continuing the ceremonies of so-called “pagan rites,” became willing to impart them to me, in order that a complete description might be made and preserved for the future information of their descendants.
The main Midē´ priests, understanding the significant effects of such a change in their practices and realizing that continuing the so-called “pagan rites” was no longer feasible, were willing to share them with me so that a detailed account could be created and preserved for the future knowledge of their descendants.
There is scarcely any doubt that these ceremonies will still be secretly held at irregular intervals; but under the watchful care of the national authorities it is doubtful whether they will be performed with any degree of completeness, and it will be but a comparatively short time before the Midē´wiwin will be only a tradition.
There’s hardly any doubt that these ceremonies will continue to be held secretly at random times; however, with the close supervision of the national authorities, it’s uncertain if they will be carried out fully, and it won't be long before the Midē´wiwin becomes just a tradition.
Footnotes
2. Reproduced from the ninth volume of the New York Colonial Documents, pp. 1054, 1055.
2. Reproduced from the ninth volume of the New York Colonial Documents, pp. 1054, 1055.
3. New Voyages to North America, London, 1703, vol. 2, pp. 47, 48.
3. New Voyages to North America, London, 1703, vol. 2, pp. 47, 48.
5. Information respecting the history, condition, and prospects of the Indian tribes of the United States. Philadelphia, 1851, vol. 1, p. 319.
5. Information about the history, status, and future of the Indian tribes in the United States. Philadelphia, 1851, vol. 1, p. 319.
6. Ibid., p. 362.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ibid., p. 362.
8. Op. cit., pp. 65, 66.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source, pp. 65, 66.
10. Op. cit., p. 25.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Id., p. 25.
11. History of the Ojebway Indians, London [1843(?)], pp. 143,144.
11. History of the Ojebway Indians, London [1843(?)], pp. 143,144.
13. Op. cit., p. 81.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source, p. 81.
15. History of the Ojebway Indians, etc., London (1843?), pp. 145, 146.
15. History of the Ojebway Indians, etc., London (1843?), pp. 145, 146.
16. Hist. of the Ojebway Indians. London [1843?], p. 155.
16. History of the Ojebway Indians. London [1843?], p. 155.
Transcriber’s Footnotes:
Transcriber's Notes:
A.
The chief priest then says to him, “Ō´mishga‘n”—“get
up”—which he does
The backward apostrophe in Ō´mishga‘n occurs
nowhere else in the text; it may be phonetic (glottal stop?) or an
error.
A.
The chief priest then says to him, “Ō'mishga‘n”—“get up”—which he does.
The backward apostrophe in Ō'mishga‘n doesn't appear anywhere else in the text; it could be phonetic (like a glottal stop?) or it might be a mistake.
B.
Gi´-gi-min´-ĕ-go´-min mi-dē´-wi-wĭn mi-dē´ man´-i-dō´
’n-gi-gĭn´-o-a-mâk
The apostrophe in ’n-gi-gĭn´-o-a-mâk occurs
nowhere else in the text; it may be phonetic (elision?) or an
error.
B.
Gi´-gi-min´-ĕ-go´-min mi-dē´-wi-wĭn mi-dē´ man´-i-dō´
’n-gi-gĭn´-o-a-mâk
The apostrophe in ’n-gi-gĭn´-o-a-mâk doesn’t appear anywhere else in the text; it might be phonetic (elision?) or a mistake.
INDEX
B | |
Birch-bark records and songs of the Midē´wiwin Birch-bark records and songs of the Midē´wiwin |
286-289 |
C | |
Calumet, ceremonial use of, among Algonkian tribes Calumet, ceremonial use of, among Algonkian tribes |
153 |
Cross, use of, in Indian ceremonials Cross, use of, in Indian ceremonies |
155 |
Cuchan population Cuchan community |
188 |
D | |
Dress and ornaments used in Ojibwa dances Dress and accessories worn in Ojibwa dances |
298, 299 |
Dzhe Manido, the guardian spirit of the Midewiwin Dzhe Manido, the guardian spirit of the Midewiwin |
163, 166 |
Dzhibai midewigân or “Ghost Lodge” Dzhibai midewigân or "Ghost Lodge" |
278-281 |
G | |
Gatschet, A. S., acknowledgments to Gatschet, A. S., acknowledgments to |
143 |
Ghost Lodge ceremonies Ghost Lodge events |
278-281 |
Ginseng, Mide tradition relating to origin of Ginseng, a tradition in the Mide that relates to its origin |
241, 242 |
Grand Medicine Society. See Midewiwin. Grand Medicine Society. See Midewiwin. |
|
H | |
Hawk-leg fetish, description and figure Hawk-leg fetish, description and image |
220, 221 |
Hennepin, Louis, Hennepin, Louis |
|
cited on practices of Algonkian medicine men cited on the practices of Algonkian healers |
152, 154 |
cited on ceremonial use of Calumet by Algonkian tribes cited on the ceremonial use of Calumet by Algonquin tribes |
153 |
“Hunter’s medicine” of Midewiwin Midewiwin hunter's medicine |
221-223 |
Hunting, Mide “medicine” practiced in Hunting, Mide "medicine" practiced in |
221-223 |
J |
Jessakid class of Shamans, relative importance of Jessakid class of Shamans, relative importance of |
156 |
practices of ways of |
157-158, 251-255 |
Jones, Peter, cited on medicine men of the Ojibwa Jones, Peter, referenced on the healers of the Ojibwa |
162 |
cited on witchcraft beliefs of Ojibwa Indians cited on witchcraft beliefs of Ojibwe Indians |
237 |
cited on Ojibwa love charm or powder cited on Ojibwa love charm or powder |
258 |
Jugglery among Ojibwa Indians Juggling among Ojibwa Indians |
276-277 |
K | |
Kitshi Manido, the principal Ojibwa deity Kitshi Manido, the main Ojibwa god |
163 |
L | |
La Hontan, A. L. de D., cited on practices of Algonkian medicine men La Hontan, A. L. de D., referenced regarding the practices of Algonkian medicine men |
151-152 |
Leech Lake record, how obtained Leech Lake record, how to obtain |
171 |
Love powder of Ojibwa Indians Ojibwa love potion |
258 |
M | |
Magical practices of Midewiwin Midewiwin magical practices |
205-206 |
Mallery, Garrick, cited on Schoolcraft’s account of the Ojibwa hieroglyphs Mallery, Garrick, referenced in Schoolcraft’s account of the Ojibwa hieroglyphs. |
156 |
cited on Indian jugglery cited on Indian juggling |
276-277 |
cited on character and use of Algonkian pictographs cited on character and use of Algonkian pictographs |
287-288 |
Marquette, Jaques, cited on practices of Algonkian medicine men Marquette, Jaques, mentioned practices of Algonkian healers. |
152-153 |
cited on use of the cross in Indian ceremonials cited on the use of the cross in Indian ceremonies |
155 |
Medical prescriptions of the Midewiwin Midewiwin medical prescriptions |
197-201, 226, 241-242 |
Medicine men, practices of, among Algonkian tribes Medicine men and their practices among Algonkian tribes |
151, 152, 154, 159 |
Midē class of Shamans, relative importance of Midē class of Shamans, relative importance of |
156 |
how elected how to get elected |
160, 163-164 |
charts of, described charts of, described |
165, 174-183, 185-187 |
therapeutics of therapies for |
197-202 |
Midē Society. See Midewiwin. Midē Society. See Midewiwin. |
Midewigân, or Grand Medicine Lodge, described Midewigân, or Grand Medicine Lodge, described |
187-189, 224, 240, 255-257 |
Midewiwin or Grand Medicine Society of the Ojibwa Midewiwin, also known as the Grand Medicine Society of the Ojibwa |
|
purposes of purposes for |
151 |
origin of source of |
160 |
degrees in degrees in |
164 |
records of records of |
164-165 |
ceremonies of first degree first-degree ceremonies |
189-224 |
songs of | 193-196, 202-203, 207-214, 216, 218-219, 227-230, 232-233, 239-240, 243-244, 246-251, 253-254, 259-261, 263-264, 266-273, 282-286, 289-297 |
ceremony of initiation into initiation ceremony for |
187-196, 202-286 |
magical practices of magic practices of |
204-206 |
ceremonies of second degree second-degree ceremonies |
224-240 |
payments made to priests of payments made to priests of |
225 |
use of tobacco in ceremonials of use of tobacco in ceremonies of |
231, 248-249 |
drums used in ceremonies of ceremonial drums |
238 |
ceremonies of third degree third degree ceremonies |
240-255 |
ceremonies of fourth degree fourth degree ceremonies |
255-278 |
initiation into, by substitution initiation through substitution |
281-286 |
pictography of pictogram of |
286-289 |
dress and ornaments used in dances of dress and accessories used in dance performances of |
298-299 |
future of future of |
299-300 |
Migis (Indian charm or token), forms and uses of Migis (Indian charm or token), forms and uses of |
191, 192, 215, 217-218, 220, 236, 251, 265 |
Minabozho, an Ojibwa deity Minabozho, an Ojibwe god |
166 |
Music of Midewiwin described Midewiwin music described |
289-290 |
O | |
Ojibwa | |
area inhabited by | 149-150 |
belief of, respecting spirits belief in respecting spirits |
163 |
mythology of | 163 |
P | |
Pictography of Midewiwin Midewiwin Pictography |
286-289 |
Plants used for medical purposes by the Midewiwin Plants used for medical purposes by the Midewiwin |
197-201, 226, 241, 242 |
R | |
Red Lake Midē Chart described Red Lake Midē Chart explained |
165 |
S | |
Schoolcraft, H. R., cited on Wabeno Schoolcraft, H. R., cited on Wabeno |
156 |
initiation into Midēwiwin initiation into Midewiwin |
161 |
Shamans, classes of Shaman classes |
156-159 |
Sikassige (Ojibwa Indian) furnishes account of origin of the Indians Sikassige (Ojibwa Indian) provides an account of the origins of the Indians. |
172-173 |
Sikassige’s explanation of Mille Lacs chart Sikassige’s explanation of the Mille Lacs chart |
174-181 |
Songs used in ceremonies of the Midewiwin Songs used in Midewiwin rituals |
193-196, 203-203, 207-214, 216, 218-219, 227-230, 232-233, 239-240, 243-244, 246-251, 253-254, 259-261, 263-264, 266-273, 282-286, 289-297 |
mode of writing writing style |
286-289 |
mode of singing described singing style described |
289-290 |
Sorcerers, practice of, among Algonkian tribes Sorcerers, practice of, among Algonkian tribes |
151, 152, 154 |
Sweat lodge of Midewiwin, use of Sweat lodge of Midewiwin, use of |
204, 258 |
T | |
Therapeutics of the Midéwiwin Midéwiwin Therapies |
197-201, 226, 241-242 |
Tobacco, use of, in ceremonies of the Midéwiwin Tobacco use in the ceremonies of the Midéwiwin |
231, 260, 262 |
W | |
Wabeno class of Shamans, relative importance of Wabeno group of Shamans, their significance |
156 |
practices of practices of |
156-157 |
Warren, W. W., cited on Society of the Midē Warren, W. W., cited on Society of the Midē |
160-161, 162 |
cited on Indian traditions cited on Indian customs |
183-184 |
Weather imploration of Midewiwin Midewiwin weather appeal |
207-209 |
NOTE ON MIDI FILES
Depending on your browser, the MIDI files accompanying each piece of music may play when clicked, or may need to be downloaded and played in a separate application.
Depending on your browser, the MIDI files that come with each music piece might play when you click on them, or you might need to download them and play them in a different application.
The “files” directory containing the MIDI samples also includes the musical notation in lilypond (.ly) format. These are simplified versions of the music as printed, omitting lyrics and dynamic marks. The meter is as printed, except that most songs marked 6/8 in the printed text were changed to 3/4.
The “files” folder with the MIDI samples also has the musical notation in lilypond (.ly) format. These are simplified versions of the music as it appears, leaving out lyrics and dynamic markings. The meter is as shown, except that most songs labeled 6/8 in the printed version have been changed to 3/4.
Please note that these files are intended only to give a rough approximation of each melody. All musical selections were originally vocal, some with drum accompaniment. The three MIDI “instruments” were selected to offer the user a choice of sounds, and are not intended to be authentic.
Please note that these files are just meant to provide a rough idea of each melody. All musical selections were originally sung, some with drum accompaniment. The three MIDI "instruments" were chosen to give the user a variety of sounds and are not meant to be authentic.
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!